DEPARTMENT OF MEDIA TECHNOLOGY

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Department of Media Technology

AN-215

ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code MT101 MT102 MT103 MT104 MT105 MT106 MT107 MT108 MT201 MT202 MT203 MT204 MT205 MT206 MT207 MT208 MT209 MT210 MT211 MT212 MT213 MT214 MT215 MT216 MT217 Subject Name Introduction to Media Engineering Graphics Electronics – I Basics of Multimedia Media Practical – I Media Practical – II Applied Physics Basic Electrical Engineering Video Production Video Production Lab Script writing Introduction of Multi Media Radio Production Television Production I Post Production (Sound) Lab I Television Production II Post Production (Multimedia ) Lab I Post Production (Video Editing ) Lab I Media Laws and Ethics Media Management Video Codes and Standards Post Production (Video Editing ) Lab II Basics of Photography Advanced Photography Media Research Credit 3:0:0 2:0:2 3:0:0 2:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0

a K

Credits 3:0:0

Unit I: Nature and Characteristics of Communication Communication: definition, nature and scope - Human needs of communication - Functions of communications - Types of communication: intrapersonal - interpersonal, group and mass communication - Indian concept of communication Unit II: Process of Communication Elements and process of communication - Communication flows: one-step, two-step, and multi-steps - Barriers in communication - Verbal and non-verbal communication Unit III: Introduction to Media Characteristics of media - Print, electronic, new media and traditional media
Department of Media Technology AN-216

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

MT101 INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA Marks 40+60

Unit IV: Media Ethics Concept of ethics and importance of professional ethics - Ethics and law - Ethics and various pressure Unit V: Advertising and Public Relations Concept and definition of public relations - Public relations: tools and technique - Public relations organizations - Concept and definition of advertising - Classifications of advertising Text Books: 1. Keval J. Kumar - Mass Communication in India Jaico,Mumbai. 2. Denis McQuonil - Mass Communication Theory : An Introduction, Sage Delhi.

References: 1. Philip Lesley - Handbook of PR and Communication, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai. 2. Chunawala and Sethia, Advertising Principles and Practice, Himalaya, New Delhi.

MT102 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS Credits 2:0:2

Unit – I Graphics input-output devices: Direct input devices-cursor devices –direct screen interactionlogical input function-cathode ray tubes-Line drawing displays-raster scan displays-hard copy devices. Unit – II Two Dimensional graphics – 2D transformations – 2D algorithms-line drawing algorithmsline covering- line clipping and polygan clipping. Raster graphics – Scan conversion of polygons –region filling – algorithms. Unit – III Curves and surfaces: parametric representation of curves- curves-B-spline curves-parametric representation of surfaces-planes-curved surfaces-ruled surfaces – surfaces.

a K

Unit – IV Three dimensional graphics: 3D transformations-normal oblique central projections – 3D algorithms-hidden lines and hidden surfaces removal. Animation Graphics : Simple animation –usage of GETIMAGE() and PUTIMAGE ( ) functuions-usage of buffering techniques –manipulation of color lookup table-tweening. Unit –V Computer Graphics realism: tiling the plane-recursively defined curves-Koch curves-C curves& Dragons –space tiling curves-Fractals and grafatals –turtic graphics –ray tracing. Graphics standards: the GKS international standards – GXD –standard for Micro computers.

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Marks 50+50

Department of Media Technology

AN-217

Text Books: 1. John R. Rankin- Computer Graphics software construction Prentice Hall of Australia Pvt, Ltd., 1989. 2. William M. Newmann, Robert P. Sproull, “Principle of Interactive Computer Graphics”, McGraw Hill International Book Company, 1989. Reference Books : 1. F.S. Hill, JR., Computer Graphics Maxwell Macmillan International Editions, 1990 2. James Alan Farrel, “From PIXELS to ANIMATION: An Introduction to Graphics Programming, AP Professional, 1994 3. Rod Salmman, Mel Slater, “Computer Graphics: Systems and concepts Addision Wesley Publishing Company 1987 4. Roy. A Plastock, Gordon Kalley, “Theory and Problems of computer Graphics”, Schaum’s outline series, Mc graw hill International editions, 1986.

MT103 ELECTRONICS-I Credit: 3:0:0

UNIT I : Semiconductor Diodes and Applications: Semiconductor materials- Energy levels- P and N type materials- Diode equationequalent circuitdiode capacitanc4s and reverse time- Zener diodes-Light emitting diodes. Rectifier circuits- clipper -clampers- Voltage multipliers. UNIT II: Bipolar Junction Transistor (BJT): Transistor construction and operation-PNP and NPN- CE, CB CC configurations. DC biasing of BJT- Bias stabilization modelling BJT-Hybrid equivalent circuit. UNIT III : Junction Field Effect Transistor (JFET) and MOSFET: Construction and characteristics-Current equation-Enhancement MOSFET- P and N Channel MOSFET- Biasing JFET and MOSFET.

a K

UNIT IV : BJT and FET Small Signal Analysis: Transistor as amplifier-Common emitter-Common base and common collector amplifiers-Equivalent circuits and analysis- Source follower-Common Source- Common gate configurations- equivalent circuit and analysis-Low frequency and high frequency response-Miller effect-Multistage frequency effects. UNIT V : Compound Configurations: Cascade-cascode and Darlington ConnectionsSource and Current Mirror Circuits-Differential amplifier.

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v
and

y it

Marks : 40 + 40

depletion

feedback pair-CMOS Circuit-Current amplifier circuit-Mos differential

Text Book: 1. Boylestad and Nashelsty, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory’, Prentice-Hall of India, 2003.

Department of Media Technology

AN-218

Reference Books: 1. Malvino,’Electronic Principles’,Tata McGraw Hill,1999. 2. Sedra and Smith,’Microelectronic Circuits’,Oxford University Press, 2004. 3. Jager and Blalock,’Micrelectronic Circuit Design’,Tata Mc-Graw-Hill,2006.

MT104 BASICS OF MULTIMEDIA Credits 2:0:0

Marks 40+60

UNIT I: Evolution of Multimedia – Structure and components of Multimedia – multimedia platforms - Applications of Multimedia in Education, Communication, Medication, Business, Entertainment – Video Conferencing, Web Streaming, Video Streaming, Internet Telephony – Virtual Reality – Artificial intelligence UNIT II: Introduction to authoring – authoring approaches – (programming, screen based, information centered) – features of authoring systems – cross platform systems – cost – technical support – ease of interface design. UNIT III: Content planning – Prototyping – programming – testing – evaluation - delivery modes and techniques.

UNIT IV: Image processing – special effects – 2D & 3D animation – compositing – rendering and editing – cell & computer animation – model building – key frame animation – dynamic particles – character animation – modeling and animation techniques. UNIT V: Video basics - Working with video - Video Formats - Video hardware - encoding – decoding – video editing – non-linear editing – Audio basics – working with audio – audio formats – audio hardware & software. Adobe Premiere – tools & features – recording audio & video – types of audio & video – time line – project planning – trimming – motion effects – digital composting.

a K

Text Books: 1. The Ultimate Multimedia Handbook, Tata Mc Graw Hill 2. Multimedia at Work, Tata Mc Graw Hill 3. Adobe Photoshop Unleashed, Tata Mc Graw Hill References: 1. Teach yourself Corel Draw, Sams Publishing 2. Flash Mx for Dummies, Pustak Mahal

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Department of Media Technology

AN-219

MT105 MEDIA PRACTICAL-I Credits 0:0:2 Marks 50+50 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time

MT 106 MEDIA PRACTICAL-II Credits 0:0:2

Marks 50+50 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time

MT107 APPLIED PHYSICS Credit: 3:0:0

UNIT I : Optics Propagation of light – Doppler Effect- Linear Polarization- Circular and Elliptical Polarization – Reflection and Refraction- Fresnel’s equation- Total Internal Reflection – Evanescent wave in Total internal reflection – Phase changes in Total Internal Reflection – Coherence and Interference – Michelson Interferometer – Theory of Partial Coherence – Fabrey Perrot instrument – Multilayer film – Fresnel and Fraunhofer Diffraction – Diffraction pattern due to narrow slit, circular aperture and straight edge- Scattering of light UNIT II : Ray Optics Reflection and Refraction at a spherical surface – Thin lens formula – Lenses – Ray Equation – Lens aberrations - Resolving Power of Optical instruments – Rayleigh’s criterion of resolution – Resolving power of Telescope, Microscope, Prism ,Grating. UNIT III : Laser and Fibre-Optics Interaction of light with matter – Principle of Laser– Operation of Laser- population inversion – Nd-YAG laser – Dye Laser - He-Ne Laser – Semiconductor Laser – Fiber Optics – Propagation of light in a cladded fibre – Types of Fibre optic cables – principles of Coupling Fibre optic cables – Reconstruction of wavefront by diffraction -Holography UNIT IV : Acoustics: Introduction – Sound – Wave motion – Types of wave motion – Characteristics of wave motion – Relation between frequency and wavelength – Relation between wavelength and velocity – Group velocity – Phase velocity - Reflection of sound waves – Defects due to reflected sound – Absorption of sound – Sabine’s formula – Reverberation theory – Eyring’s equation – Acoustical materials.- Acoustic design of a Hall – Common acoustical defects – UNIT V: Ultrasonics Introduction - Generation of ultrasonic waves – Properties of ultrasonic waves – Detection of Ultrasonic waves – Absorption and dispersion of Ultrasonic waves - Determination of wavelength and velocity – Applications.Books for study :

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Marks : 40 + 40

Department of Media Technology

AN-220

Text books: 1. Introduction to Optics by Frank.L.Pedrotti, Leno Mathew Pedrotti Reference books: 1. Engineering Physics by R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta, Dhanpat Rai Publications (2001) 2. Physics I by V.Rajendran and A Marikani , Tata McGraw Hill ( 2004)

MT108 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Credit: 3:0:0

Unit I : Basic Quantities and D.C. Circuits : Electrical quantities-Electric current, Electric potential, Electric power, Electrical Energy, Resistance, Temperature Co-efficient of Resistance, Lumped circuits-Ohm’s Law, Kirchoff’s laws-Independent and dependent sources-Voltage division and current division-Simple resistive circuits-Source transformation.

Unit II : A.C. Circuits Generation of alternating E.M.F-Equation of alternating voltage-Alternating quantity (Current or voltage)-Cycle –Time period-Frequency-Maximum value- Average value-R.M.S. value-Form factor and peak factor-Phase and phase difference-VI relationships of R,L & CPhasor-Sinusoidal steacty state response-Concepts of impedance and admittance-Analysis of simple circuits-Power and power factor-Resonance in AC series and parallel circuits. Unit III : D.C Machines & Transformer, DC Generators: Principle of D.C Generator, Parts of DC generators-EMF equation-Types of generators-Characteristics of generator-Applications. DC Motors : Principle of DC motors, Parts of DC motor-Back EMF-Type of motorsCharacteristics of motor-Applications. Transformers : Principle-Constructional details-Parts-Types (Core & Shell)-E.M.F. equation-Applications. Unit IV : Generation, Transmission and Distribution Generation of Electrical Energy-Thermal power generating station-Hydro power generating station-Nuclear power generating station-Transmission of Electrical energy-Classification of Transmission lines-Conductors-Insulator-Underground cables-Classification of cablesLaying of underground cables-Distribution of electrical energy-AC distribution system-DC distribution system-Over head distribution system-Under ground distribution system. Unit V : Measuring Instruments and Wiring Circuits Basic principle of indicating instruments-Moving iron and moving coil instrumentVoltmeters and ammeters-Dynamo type watt meter-Induction type energy meter. Wiring Circuits : Wiring material & accessories-Rating of wiring materials,Type of wiringStair case wiring-Fluorescent lamp wiring-Simple domestic wiring layout-Basic principle of earthing.

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

Marks : 40 + 40

y it

Department of Media Technology

AN-221

high-speed video cameras . Thyagarajan. zoom extendersFocus control : auto. T. trolley & other accessories-Different types of camera angles and use-Camera movements – types & use . linearity etc. remote control camera. BernardWilkie “Creating special effects for TV & Video” References: 1.Types of audio & video connectors. sensitivity. Fourth Edition August 2006 nd 2. Zoom lens-Tripod. Perspective-Types and use-normal lens.Special cameras: underwater camera. wide-angle lens. genlock.. pedestal etc. remote. Colour temperature-White balance: Process and need. white balance.2001 Reference 1. Delhi.R. Unit II: Principle of Video Camera Primary & secondary colours- Photo conduction. Aerial photography camera. Rangaswamy. photo voltaic. Ltd. New Age International Publishers. back focus. macro focus. 2000 MT201 VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: Introduction to TV technology Picture formation-T. dolly. Its indicators and control. gain. blanking signals.-Zoom control: servo. colour burst. types of tripod heads. Roy Thomson “Grammar of the shot” 2. 2 Edition.-Camera view finders (B/W and colour). SECAM. Endoscopic camera.-Camera filters-Camera control unit (CCU)-Waveform monitor for output level of video-Vectorscope Unit V: Video camera lenses. Text Book: 1. K. manual .-Television standards: NTSC.P.EFP camera ..Studio cameras .V Scanning : Horizontal & Vertical- Frame & field rate -Resolution video bandwidth.Types of microphones used on video camera . Paranjothi S.. Unit IV: Balancing of Colours of a video camera. telephoto lens.Text Book: 1. PAL. Sendur Chelvi and T. T. Scitech Publications (Ind) Pvt. preheat. remote. manual. single CCD colour cameraV arious sizes of pickup devices  Unit III: Components and Controls of Video Camera. “Engineering Basics” 3rd Edition.R.Different Types of Television Cameras-NG camera . iris. Thyagarajan. Der Lyur & Graham “Basics of Video Production” Department of Media Technology AN-222 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks 40+60 y it . “Electric Circuit Analysis” New Age International Ltd. sync. Parts of a video camera-Different controls on video camera-Power switch. “Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering”. Peter ward “Studio and outside broadcast Camera” 2. photo emissive effectWorking principle of video camera- CCD cameras: Three CCD.

Antony Friedman “Writing for media” –Focal press n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks 40+60 y it MT204 INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA Marks 40+60 Credits 2:0:0 UNIT I: Evolution of Multimedia – Structure and components of Multimedia – multimedia platforms . Steve Katz “Film Directing Shot” Focal Press publishers a K References: 1. Unit III: The art of confrontation – confrontation dynamics – secondary function – the step outline – dialogue devices – the master scene script – format – adaptation and its problems – surviving story conferences Unit IV: The scriptwriter as business person . Business. Steven Katz “Film Directing: Cinematic Motion “ Focal Press publishers 2. Text Book: 1. Medication. Department of Media Technology AN-223 .What to know about – lessons from the pros – the other side –the story board – judging screen time – terminology used Unit V: story outline – proposal outline – script discussion – characterization – story treatment – master scene script – project presentation.subject factor – the film treatment – thinking through the treatment – the sequence outline – types of sequence – the shooting script Unit II: How shots are related – writing narration – the feature – preparing the presentation – the character – full length .Applications of Multimedia in Education.the story treatment. Communication. Dwight V Swain “Film Scriptwriting” Focal Press publishers 2.MT 202 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Marks 50+50 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time MT 203 SCRIPT WRITING Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: What you need to become a good script writer – the proposal outline – questions to ask before writing the script –Visual treatment.

Entertainment – Video Conferencing. screen based. Voice care-Production of Speech and Song. Web Streaming. Tata Mc Graw Hill 6. information centered) – features of authoring systems – cross platform systems – cost – technical support – ease of interface design.Mixture of voice. Internet Telephony – Virtual Reality – Artificial intelligence UNIT II: Introduction to authoring – authoring approaches – (programming. Adobe Premiere – tools & features – recording audio & video – types of audio & video – time line – project planning – trimming – motion effects – digital composting. UNIT IV: Image processing – special effects – 2D & 3D animation – compositing – rendering and editing – cell & computer animation – model building – key frame animation – dynamic particles – character animation – modeling and animation techniques. Tata Mc Graw Hill 5. Flash Mx for Dummies.Human voice. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it MT 205 RADIO PRODUCTION Marks 40+60 Department of Media Technology AN-224 . Classification & Quality. International Sounds.Video Formats . Multimedia at Work. simplicity-limitations of blind media. Low & High frequency etc-Voice -Voice Culture.Working with video . Pustak Mahal a K Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: What is Sound?-Sound is created by vibrating materials-Vibration generates waves in the air – sound waves-Number of waves (cycles) occurring in each second is frequency of that sound-Types. The Ultimate Multimedia Handbook. UNIT III: Content planning – Prototyping – programming – testing – evaluation .Video hardware .Practices. Sams Publishing 4. Video Streaming. sounds and music-Formats – Simple and complex-Characteristics of the MediumUnlimited imagination.encoding – decoding – video editing – non-linear editing – Audio basics – working with audio – audio formats – audio hardware & software. Text Books: 4. UNIT V: Video basics .Basic ingredients of a Radio Programme.Pitch. directness. Teach yourself Corel Draw. Tata Mc Graw Hill References: 3. Adobe Photoshop Unleashed.delivery modes and techniques. Music-Exploitation of Sound.

What makes a Good Producer?. placement of micro phones. Field Recording. Presentation techniques and listeners participation-Running commentary – types-selection of commentators. impartiality. location-Discussion : selection of participants.. persons. Dos and Donts-Documentary and Feature – types. variety.-Broadcast Ethics-Impartiality. control-Quiz . Iowa.Creative inspirationadapted inspiration-Visual thinking Department of Media Technology AN-225 . a land mark etc.Types . crisis resolution. selection of scripts – voluntary and commissioned.Importance of home work. Focal Prress. legality. crisis management -Music – types. clarity of scope.Use of voice and natural sounds (included without effort)-Complex Formats. Dubuque.Radio Journalism – Hard News. Features. excercises a K Text Book: 1. defamation etc.Unit II: Simple formats. checklist. construction. news room operation. collection of materials and recordings-Magazine programme: . production techniques. The Technical Radio Production by Robert McLeish. London References: 1. planning and structure. pronunciation. Unit III: Writing for Radio Unit IV: Production of Programmes-Talk –Types and techniques-Interview – types. selection of voices thro audition and casting. intelligibility. stressing. Credibility etc-Digital Recording-Use of software-Presentation techniques-Art of RJing. treatment. USA. exercises-Broadcast and Law-Legal concepts like Copy right. compere. thematic music and sound effects.choice of subject. inflection-Radio News Reel – selection. objectivity. public service announcements. Fairness. exercises-Radio Cartoon – cartoon in sound Jingles.Eg: Drama (mixture of all the ingredients)-Selection formats. -News casting and presentation – reading. duration and presentation-Discussion and interview ( Devils Advocate)-Live Reporting – an event. Docudrama and Skit – complexity. media for relay. a personality. Professionalism. planning and preparation. Preparationquestioning techniques. Kendall / Hunt. Guide to Radio Journalism. conceptulisation and creativity. Dos and Donts of Live broadcast –Sports – recorded and live – giving ring side view-Outside Broadcast – Checklist. importance of style.Subject determines format. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it MT206 TELEVISION PRODUCTION – I Marks 40+60 Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: Idea-The seed of the Programme-How do we get ideas-Inspiration. Unit V: News and Current Affairs-Selection. . Live Broadcast. recording arrangement. accuracy. mixing and coloring aided by software-Drama. PSAs and Trailers – Promos.

U. Unit II: Lighting -visual thinking-basic movements of the camera-various lenses of the cameradifference between zoom and trolley Unit III: Script writing for television-dialogue and commentary-various formats to television productions-television documentaries-short videos-commercial spots-TV feature Unit IV: News reporting-soft stories-introduction to studio production-introduction to OB coverage role of director.Mary Jyosita “First steps to TV-video production” 2. Reference: 1. Blending of content and form.K.Unit II: Writing for television production-Single Camera production-Multi camera production in studio and outdoor Unit III: Different genre of television productions-Digital Videography-Introductions to shots-Camera angles-Combination of camera movements and subject movements Unit IV: Compositions-Basic lighting-Improving the composition and colour rendition in the computer Unit V: Glossary of TV production-Budgeting-Blending of content and form-Vizualisation in single camera operation Text Book: 1. Margarette Mehring. MT 207 POST PRODUCTION (Sound) LAB I Credits 0:0:2 Marks 50+50 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time Credits 4:0:0 a K Unit I: Basic shots-head room-looking room-walking room-rule of thirds-angles of the camera. Sr. editor. cameraman-incorporating multi media techniques Department of Media Technology AN-226 n u r MT 208 TELEVISION PRODUCTION – II Marks 40+60 a y i n U s r e v y it . Books on television production published by focal press.Mary Peter Claver & Sr.

Department of Media Technology AN-227 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks 50+50 Marks 50+50 .Mary Peter Claver & Sr. Press Council Act.K. The News Paper (prices and Pages)Act 1956. Books on television production published by focal press. MT 209 POST PRODUCTION (MULTIMEDIA) LAB I Credits 0:0:2 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time MT 210 POST PRODUCTION (VIDEO EDITING) LAB I Credits 0:0:2 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time MT 211 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits 4:0:0 Marks 40+60 Unit I: Indian Constitution Overview of the Indian constitution. Drugs and magic remedies Act Unit III: Civil and Criminal Laws Laws of Libel and defamation. Provisions for declaring Emergency. Mac Bridge report. Sr. Trade Mark Act and patents Act. Blending of content and form. Provision for amending the constitution. Broadcasting Bill. Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. Self regulation and code of ethics. Functions of Executive. Reference: 1. Duties of citizens.Unit V: Sound mixing-role of music-sound effects. The Cinematographic Act 1952. censorship and control of the press. U. Centre-state relations Unit II: Media laws in India PRB Act 1867. Legislative. Text Book: 1. Defence of India Act. Unit IV: Code and Ethics Recommendations of press commission I and II. Right to Information and Official Secrets Act. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Fundamental Rights. Powers and Privileges of Parliament. Directive principles of state policy. Copy right Act and IPR. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. Delivery of Books and News paper (public libraries)Act. freedom of the press and restrictions these upon. the press(objectionable matters)Act 1957. Cable TV Networks (regulations)Act.Mary Jyosita “First steps to TV-video production” 2. Judiciary . Margarette Mehring.

Issues capes MC Graw Hill MT212 MEDIA MANAGEMENT Credits 4:0:0 Marks 40+60 Unit I: Media economics Structure. Broadcasting policies. Media council and media ombudsman in the world. Unit V: Cable Industry Evolution. Citizen’s India 2. Hamelink cess-J.- S ervice conditions and general administration- Channel management and training and redeployment of personnel. Radha Krishna Murthi . Sage 3. New IT Law IT 2000. convergences bill. Practice hall of india(2003) 3. The right to publish and right to privacy. Na. Sun etc- Process of distribution of signals - Pay channels vs. Law of the Press in India. Indian Publishers. RPG. Distributors (1997) 4. Basu. product and audience profile- Television rating point (TRP)-Agencies of rating. India’ s major media houses and their holdings- Inflow of capital in media- Major heads of income in media- Advertising and media industry Unit II: Electronic media as business Programme management-(Planning. Indian Press Laws References: 1. production and broadcasting)- Cos ting and budgeting of programme- Commissioned and sponsored programme Unit III: Media marketing Market survey : media. function and economic of an electronic media .K Ravindran. Introduction to Indian Constitution. Text Books: 1. Media ethics . Digital signature . Act regarding to working journalists. Practice Hall of India(2003) 2. Vijayshankar.Ehics of cyber Space.R. Unit V: Cyber Laws in India Nature and scope of cyber laws. Piracy. free channel- Channel war and cable industry - N ew technologies and cable industry Department of Media Technology AN-228 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . Various committees of broadcasting. In Cable. R. Cyber laws in India. Basu. Domain name registration issues. Press in the Indian Constitution. growth and development of cable industry- Indian scenario of cable industryMajor players: Siti Cable.press ownership and monopolies. Philip Patterson. process and method of rating- S elling of a programme Unit IV: Media management Structure of radio and television organization- Recruitment and contractual engagement of H. Lee Wilking. scheduling.

and ya-qin zhang prentice-hall. MPEG3. Digital Video Unit II: Fourier analysis of Video Signal Frequency. Video Bit stream Syntax Unit V: Scalable Coding: Basic Methods of Scalability. Analog color Television Systems. Domain Characterization o f Video signals. Management and Practice of Public Relations by Norman Stone. Raster. Susantylen 2. Promotion & Marketing for Broadcasting Cable ofthe web by Eastman . pixel based motion estimation.Error Control and Concealment: Video Communication network-Transport level Error Control-Error resilient Encoding-Error Concealment Text Books: 1 . Feature based.object based Sacalabilty. Unit IV: Video Compression standards and its Algorithms: Consumer Video communication with MPEG1.Mpeg4 and JVT doc for H264 NK Publichers a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks 40+60 Department of Media Technology AN-229 . joern ostermann. Mac Millan Pub. block matching Algorithm. References: 1.Text Books: 1. 2. sampling of video signals Unit III: 2D/3D Motion Estimation Motion Methodologies. isbn 0-13-017547-1.video processing and communications yao wang. Mac Graw Hills Pub. Global Regional Motion Estimation. direct motion estimation. Multi resolution motion estimation. Representation Color Perception and Specification. Prentice Hall India References: 1. Essentials of Management by Harold Koonz and Heinz weihrich. Consumer Behavior by Leon G. H264. Analog Video. Schiffman and Leslie Lazar Kanuk. Perception. digitial TV with MPEG2. Multidimensional Continuous and Discrete –space signals and systems. jvt document jvt50r ITU Documents for Mpeg2. MT213 VIDEO CODES AND STANDARDS Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: Video Formation.

Perspective.push processing – pull processing – masters of B/W photography – Ansel Adams – identifying the various zones Reference: 1.Texture." (more) a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks 40+60 y it Department of Media Technology AN-230 .. Unit III:Film: Selecting and using film –tungsten film & daylight films – black and white films – monochrome films – infrared films and other special effects films-different formats-35m-120 mm – 220mm – 4 x 5 film -Film speed – How film responds to light-film grain – sensitivity – structure of film – light vs film .aperture – shutter speed – factors that affect D..-making a mask – photograms.Framing.O.F.and DesignUnit V: Black and White photography: Black and white film – Black and white filters – Developing –developing tank – structure of B/W film.Focal length – Wide angle.Built in meter – External light meter – Metering techniques –incident light metering – reflective light metering -0 spot metering – gray scale. Normal. Unit IV: Exposure and image making Techniques: How an exposure meter works –ambient light meters –flash meter readings . The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) (Paperback) -by Tom Grimm (Author). Michele Grimm (Author) 2.– History of Photography.MT 214 POST PRODUCTION (VIDEO EDITING) LAB II Credits 0:0:2 12 Experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time Marks 50+50 MT215 BASICS OF PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 4:0:0 Unit I: Camera: Over view on Photography – Shutter – Aperture – Depth of field – Major type of camera – making a career in photography – categories of photography – photojournalism – advertisingportrait-nature photography-purpose and control over aperture.Printing. and how the lens and shutter work together to control exposure.PatternComposition.-Daguerotype – Fox Talbot-Modern B/W chemistry – Eastman Kodak.. Mastering the Basics of Photography (Paperback) -by Susan McCartney (Author) "If you understand how cameras operate. and Long focal length lenses – Focus and depth of field-hyperfocal distance – determining the hyperfocal distance of a lens. Unit II:Lens: Pinhole Photography – construction of a pinhole camera . it will make learning the basic photographic skill.

Lighting Secrets for the Professional Photographer by Alan Brown.slave lightsinternational portrait photographers Unit IV: Techniques on Image making Advanced techniques of Framing – Perspective –forced perspective-perspective correctionTexture – Pattern – Composition – Graphic Design in photography – Emphasis – Balancethe symmetrical world – asymmetry Unit V: Digital imaging Digital imaging – Latest trends in digital imaging-Overview on Digital imaging – Equipment needed for digital imaging. ed a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it MT217 MEDIA RESEARCH Marks 40+60 Credits 4:0:0 Unit I Introduction to research – nature of scope and distinction between research in natural and social sciences – nature and scope of communication research – review of research related to effects research – limitations of effects research – basic parameters of media related studies Department of Media Technology AN-231 . Advanced Photography by Langford .MT 216 ADVANCED PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 4:0:0 Marks 40+60 Unit I: Colour Additive colours – Subtractive colours – Colour balance – colour corrections – hue and saturation. 1980. 4th. Peter Wilson (Contributor) Revised edition (September 1993) 4.a career in digital imaging-digital photographers Reference: 1.using one light sourceusing two lights-using multiple lights – synchronization – flash sync speed. Tim Grondin (October 1990) 3. Michael. Beyond Basic Photography : A Technical Manual by Henry Horenstein.Editing digital images-resizing digital images –print usage-online usage. Henry Isaacs (Illustrator) Revised edition (August 1993) 2. New York: Focal Press. Night & Low-Light Photography : A Complete Guide by Bob Gibbons.contrasting colours –psychological significance of colours-Types of colour film – Characteristic of colour films –sensitivity to colour-colour temperature Unit II:Lights Direction of lights – Diffused light-bounced diffused light – diffused bounce diffused light – point light – difference between point light and diffused light-Degree of diffusion – Available Light – Artificial Lights – Portable flash light –using a portable flash extensively using portable flash for portraiture Unit III: Lightings Key Light or Main light – Fill light – Simple portraiture lightings . Henry Asaacs. Joe Braun.

1984. method and use – techniques basic – data analysis techniques Unit V Writing a research project – organization – chapterization – citation . 2. 1991. Unit III Types of research design – Exploratory studies – descriptive studies – diagnostic studies – experimental studies – their relevance and use in communication research Unit IV Methods of data collection – field studies – Holistic approach – observation – Interviews – Questionnaires – structured and unstructured schedules – sampling – content analysis – approach. ‘Research Methods in Mass Communication by Stempell and Westley Prentice Hall. hastings House Publishers. ‘Studies in Mass Communication and Technology’ Ed. 1981. Methods and Uses’ by Severin and Tankard.Unit II Designing a research study – the problems and the method – preparing a research proposal – sources of research – primary and secondary etc. 1979. 1981. ‘Mass Media Research – an introduction’ by Roger Wimmer and Joseph Dominick. Reference: 1.footnotes Text Book 1.. ‘Communication Theories: Origins. 2. By Sari Thomaas. Van Nostrand Reinhold Company. ‘Handbook of Radio and TV Broadcasting’ Ed. Wadsworth Pub. 3. By James Fletcher. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Department of Media Technology AN-232 . London. Ablex Publishing Company. (III EDITION).

ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code MT109 MT110 MT222 MT223 MT224 MT225 MT226 MT227 MT228 MT229 MT230 MT231 MT232 MT233 MT234 MT235 MT236 MT237 MT238 MT239 MT240 MT241 MT242 MT243 MT244 MT245 MT246 MT247 MT248 MT249 MT250 MT251 MT252 MT253 MT254 MT255 MT256 MT257 MT258 MT259 Subject Name Introduction to Mass Communication Drawing and Computer Aided Graphics Scripting and Soft Presentation Media. Culture and Communication Electronic Devices and Basic Circuits Electronics Devices and Circuits Lab Analog and Digital Integrated Circuits Digital Electronics Audio Video Studios Principles of Advertising Digital Electronics Lab Photography Lab Digital Compositing Fundamentals of Electronic Communication Audio Video Production Techniques Memories and Analog Signal Conditioning Communication Circuits Lab Programme Production Lab Signal Transmission and Radiation Post Production Techniques Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Digital Signal Processing Media Economics Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab Post Production Lab Television and Video Engineering Application of DSP for Audio and Image Processing Digital Music Media Aesthetics Media Management and Entrepreneurship Satellite Communication DSP and Data Compression Lab Special Production Lab (Audio or Video or Animation) Media Laws and Ethics Media Research Audio Presentation Audio Programme Production Lighting Techniques Television Programme Production Game Programming With C++ Credits 2:0:0 1:0:2 3:0:0 2:0:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:1:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 1 Department of Electronics & Media Technology .

Advertising. on-Verbal behavior as communication. seven C’s of Communication. Gate Keeping Model: Tools of Mass Communication: Newspapers. Small Group). Educate. Elements of speech communication. Crowd. Effective communication & its Barriers. Communication . Gerbner’s Model. Social Responsibility Theory. Dance Model. Play Theory Uses & Gratification Theory. Magazines. Mass Communication Unit III Theories of Communication: Hypodermic Needle Theory. Inform. Encoding. Osgood Model. New Comb Model. Four major theories of Press. Schramm Model. Receiver. Factors responsible for Growing importance of Communication.MT260 MT261 MT262 MT263 MT264 MT265 Artificial Intelligence For Games Audio Production and Presentation Advertising and Public Relation Video Production and Editing Mass Communication Graphics and Animation 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 MT109 INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION Credit: 2:0:0 Unit I Fundamentals of Communication: Origin of communication.Form of Communication: Intra Personal Communication. Interpersonal Communication Group Communication (Public. Facts & feelings from one person to another-elements of Communication Process (message. Meaning of theories based on scientific study &analysis. TV. Selective Perception & Selective Retention Theory. SMRc Model. Decoding. Commercial Theory. Paralanguage & Temporal communication Department of Electronics & Media Technology 2 . Traditional & Folk Media Unit V Verbal &Non-Verbal Communication Universals of Verbal Communication. Other functions. Films Records Internet. Sub-Language & Culture. Other Theories: Development Media & Democratic Participant Theory Unit IV Models of Communication: SMR Model. Sender. Body communication-Body movement. Shannon & Weaver Model. Laswell Model. Functions of Mass Communication: To-Persuade. Impact & Influence of Mass Media Unit II Process of Communication: Transmission of ideas. Public Relations & Public Affairs. Acting & Feedback). Scope & Functions. according to Fred Siebert. Communication as a social. Entertain. Meaning & Elements/components of human communications. Libertarian Theory. Space Communication-Physical environment. Silence. Theodore Peterson & Wilbur Schramm Authoritarian Theory. Selective Exposure. Concept of Communication. Individual Difference Theory. Two-step & Multi-step Theory. Channel. Radio. human & universal process.Objectives. Facial Communication. Meaning & Barriers in Verbal Communication Language.

Department of Electronics & Media Technology 3 . 2000 2. ‘AUTOCAD 2000’. References 1. 2000 2. creating a dark value pattern. creating a centre of interest. K. Watson-Guptill Publications. an Introduction. Mcquail. seeing landscapes as values. Communication. 2001 3. Theories of Information Society. smudging the pencil. drawing spherical objects.Creating textures with lines and storks. 2000. Unit V Exercises using Layers and blocks Simple Exercises using Layers and Blocks – Introduction to Isometric Drawings – Basic Plotting practice. Mass Communication Theories. 1995. Essentials of Mass Communication. George Omura. Asa. New Delhi. 2000 2. burnishing Unit III Computer Aided Graphics Introduction to Computers and Computer Aided Graphics – Workstations – Display Technology – Input and Output Devices – Graphics standards. adding reflection in water. ‘AUTOCAD 2000 BIBLE’. Sage Publication. tonal technique. Routledge. Text Book 1. drawing conical objects Unit II Drawing Landscapes and Portraits Drawing Landscapes. Webster. initial sketches to redefine drawing. Berger. Frank. 2000 Reference Books 1. BPP Publications. New Delhi. Unit IV Simple Exercises Simple Exercises using various Drawing and Editing commands of AUTOCAD 2000 Simple Exercises using various formatting commands – Basic Dimensioning practice using AUTOCAD 2000. drawing cylindrical objects. Shyam Tickoo. 15th Ed. MT110 DRAWING AND COMPUTER AIDED GRAPHICS Credit: 1:0:2 Unit I Fundamentals of Drawing Foundation of Perspective. Pencil Drawing techniques. Karl Erik. Rosenberg. Handling colour pencils. Dennis. Drawing Portraits. 1984.Text Books 1. Sage Publication. Mixing color. Sage Publication. “Engineering Drawing and Graphics”. Natarajan. interpreting a cluttered scene.V. David Lewis. Introduction to Computer Aided Design and Drafting – Applications – Various CAD Packages – Study of AUTOCAD 2000 software – Hardware requirements. Drawing cubic objects. BPP Publications.

character stories. Important Vocabulary Terms Unit II Formats of Script Features. Dialogues for different genres like comedy. Women programmes. Educational programmes.MT222 SCRIPTING AND SOFT PRESENTATION Credit : 3:0:0 Unit I Basics of Scriptwriting Structure of script Units of Time. subsidiary characters. Script problem. Unit V Presentation Techniques Who are you talking to? Pace problems. Children programmes. and Ads. Antony Friedman. 2002 MT223 MEDIA. Writing Scripts for Television News. CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION Credit: 2:0:0 Unit I Media Studies An introduction to the media. Farmers and youth. Daily soap. B and C Plots. Time Chunks. Soap. Breath Support and resonance. twist in plots. How to create interesting characters. Plot. and target Audience consideration. polarization of characters in story. Series story-the comedy. Dialogue: Importance of dialogues. de Department of Electronics & Media Technology 4 . Learning to love microphone. Focal Press. Reaching Audiences: A Guide to Media Writing. Script Form.Writing Documentaries. Character. getting your breath. media industries and audiences: Media is a cultural force and changing paradigm. PSAs. the opening scene. Non-Fictions. Documentaries. A. the end scene. breaking Individual tracks into scenes. Language and Perform Text Book 1. Media messages. McAdams. Promos. Create obstacles. Story board writing. idea for television. Treatment. Story elements: Characters. Scripting Commercials. the filler scene. thrillers and TV films. being conversational. preparation of shooting script. what are the elements necessary for character for your story. Fiction. Copyright Issues. Basic concepts: Language of persuasion. Are you sitting comfortably. Writing for Visual Media. and Dramatic points in the story. Commercial Formats. Unit IV Scenes and Dialogues Scene: What is a scene? How to create scene for play? Types of scenes. Script Form. Jan Johnson Yopp and Katherine C. elements of Teleplay. Steps in Creating a Commercial. April 2001 References 1. Unit III Concept and Story Idea Idea: What makes a good concept. writing for special audience. making sense of intonation. The thriller story. relief characters. Minutes and Seconds. Short films. Plot: Its importance. Screenplay Nomenclature.

theories of the media. discourse. the special authority of electronic media public images and private practices. popular reception. popular emotions. the audience and the technological change. genre. mediation and representation . messages and meanings. Dynamics of global culture. uses and gratification. global capitalist hegemony and Communist hegemony. Sage Publications. media and rules. emotional branding. emotions and culture. story. circular migration. meanings and audiences. mediated feelings. race and culture. Unit II Media and Globalization Large corporations and control of the communications industries Negotiation of control in media organization and occupation. 2. Sage Publications.texts. technology gaps. culture uses of material world. Text Books 1. social class and culture. References 1.the role of media and popular culture. International Communication & Globalization. amplifiers. Diasporas. Thomson Wordsworth. Culture and Society Series). habits and popular culture. Mass Communication Theories. Digital logic inverters Department of Electronics & Media Technology 5 . polarization. the global gaps. globalization. language and culture. analog and digital signals. Vincent Mosco. Hegemony . rules and culture. the Political Economy of Communication (Media. 2004 MT224 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND BASIC CIRCUITS Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Introduction to Electronics Signals. Media Now. theories of society. Frequency spectrum of signals. 1997. communication and connectivity. rethinking the mass audience. defining dominant ideology. Unit IV Media and Culture Defining Ideology and culture. Media and cultural imperialism. 2000. Cultural dependency and mass media. cultural melding and mediation. the mass society. social class. the mass audience. circuit models of amplifiers. Unit III Media and Society Language and social construction of reality. TV as dominant culture. Rules in society. Thomson Series. 2004 2. segmentation. Larose. Theoretical approaches.constructing media Dynamics of modern communication: the shaping and impact of new communication technologies. Dennis McQuail. limited effects. London. Straubhar. hegemony. structure and agency. and migration. The economies of media industry. Mohammad Ali. Unit V Media and Audiences Media and audience direct effects.

Zener diodes. Design of BJT amplifier 9. Depletion type MOSFET Unit V Bipolar junction Transistors Device structure and Physical operation. Integrator and differentiators Unit III Diodes The Ideal diode.. Oxford University Press. Clipper circuit 7. Full-wave rectifier with and without filter 6. physical operation of diodes. Zener diode and Photo diode 2. Electronic Devices and Circuits. Op-amp . rectifier circuits. CMOS digital logic inverter. MOSFET as an amplifier and a switch. Thomas Floyd. David A. Biasing in MOS amplifier circuits. BJT circuits at DC. current-Voltage characteristics. Electronic Devices. Op-amp – integrator 12. Characteristics of JFET 3. Basic BJT digital logic inverter Text Book: 1. signal current in drain terminal. 2003. limiting and clamping circuits.Inverter. current-voltage characteristics. Characteristics of PN diode. Clamper circuit 8. Sedra & Kenneth C. MOSFET circuits at DC. Voltage regulator 10. effect of finite open-loop gain and bandwidth on circuit performance. References: 1. Half-wave rectifier with and without filters 5. Microelectronics Circuits. Op-amp.Bell. Frequency response of the CE amplifier. BJT as an amplifier and as a switch.Differentiator Department of Electronics & Media Technology 6 . large-signal operation of op amps. difference amplifiers. Adel S. Prentice Hall of India. Smith. Non-Inverter 11. Prentice Hall of India. Inverting configuration.Unit II Operational Amplifiers Ideal op amp. 1998 MT225 ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: 1. Non-inverting configuration. single stage BJT amplifiers. Characteristics of BJT in common emitter configuration 4. DC imperfections. DC bias point. biasing in BJT amplifier circuits. 2003 2. Terminal characteristics of junction diodes. special diode types Unit IV MOS Field-Effect Transistors Device structure and Physical operation.

2003 2. D/A converter circuits. Prentice Hall of India. four basic feedback topologies. Adel S. References: 1. frequency response of differential amplifier. small-signal analysis of 741. Prentice Hall of India. properties of negative feedback.Sedra & Kenneth C. CMOS Logic gate circuits. Electronic Devices and Circuits. Oxford University Press. Data converters. High-Frequency Response.MT226 ANALOG AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Single-Stage Integrated-Circuit Amplifiers IC design philosophy. 1998 MT227 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I: Number Systems and Boolean algebra Review of binary. Effect of feedback on amplifier poles. David A. stability studying using Bode plots Unit IV Operational-Amplifiers and Data-Converters Circuits Two-stage CMOS Opamp. shunt-shunt and shuntseries feedback amplifiers. 2003. Microelectronics Circuits. Design and Performance analysis of CMOS Inverter. A/D converter circuits Unit V Digital CMOS Logic Circuits Digital Circuit Design: An overview. Dynamic Logic circuits Text Book: 1. differential amplifier with active load. series-series feedback amplifier. Smith. stability problem. High-Frequency response of CS and CE amplifiers. CS and CE amplifiers with active loads. Comparison of MOSFET and BJT. IC biasing. determining loop gain. BJT Differential pair. small-signal operation. multistage amplifiers Unit III Feedback Amplifiers General feedback structure. DC analysis of 741. Cascode amplifier. other nonideal characteristics of differential amplifier. pseudo-NMOS Logic Circuits. Pass – Transistor logic circuits. gain. & hexadecimal number systems-representation of signed numbersfloating point number representation-BCD-ASCII-EBCDIC-Excess 3 codes-gray code-error detecting and correcting codes. frequency response and slew rate of 741. CG and CB amplifiers with active loads. 741 Op-amp circuit.. Electronic Devices.Bell. folded –cascode CMOS op amp. Thomas Floyd. Source and Emitter followers Unit II Differential and Multistage Amplifiers MOS Differential pair. Department of Electronics & Media Technology 7 . octal.. shunt-series feedback amplifier.

Digital Systems – Principles & Applications. 3. 6.J.. Millman & Halkias. 5. Unit V: Programmable Logic Devices Semicustom design – Introduction to PLD’s – ROM – PAL – PLA – FPGA – Architecture of PLD’s : PAL 22V10.half adder. 1995. D&T flip flops – level triggering and edge triggering – excitation tables –asynchronous & synchronous counters – modulus counters–shift register –Johnson counter. “Digital Fundamentals”. CMOS inverters. Integrated Electronics.I. “Digital Logic and Computer Design”. 1998..M. MT228 AUDIO VIDEO STUDIOS Credits: 3:0:0 Unit I Sound Isolation and Room Acoustics Department of Electronics & Media Technology 8 . Text Books 1. Floyd. 1997. TMH. 1995. Digital Design. TMH. DTL. Unit II: Combinational Logic Design Logic gates –implementation of combinational logic functions – encoders & decoders – multiplexers & demultiplexers –code converters – comparator . LOGIC FAMILIES: RTL. Emitter Coupled (ECL).Boolean Algebra: Postulates and theorems of Boolean Algebra –canonical forms – simplification of logic functions using Karnaugh map Quine McClausky method. 1994. Prentice Hall of India. PLS 100/101 – Implementation of digital functions. An Engineering Approach To Digital Design.R. Unit IV: Sequential Logic Design Basic models of sequential machines – concept of state table – state diagram – state reduction through partitioning & implementation of synchronous sequential circuits – Introduction to asynchronous sequential logic design. comparison of performance of various logic families. 4. Prentice Hall of India. Tocci. Reference Books 1. Puri V. Fletcher. MOS inverters. Digital Electronics”. Mano M.ring counter – timing waveforms-counter applications. 1997. full adder – parallel adder – binary adder – parity generator/checker – implementation of logical functions using multiplexers. TTL families. Prentice Hall of India. Schottky – clamped TTL. JK Master–slave. Integrated Injection Logic (IIL). 1997. 2. PHI. PHI.W. Unit III: Counters and Registers RS. Morris Mano. JK.K.

2006 2. Text Book 1. Gomez. Jaime S. Gary Davis. Field Lighting. Principles. Sound System Engineering. the behavior of multiple loudspeakers in rooms Unit III Consoles and Studio Furniture Response disturbances due to mixing consoles and studio furniture. Variable acoustics. Focal Press. 1989 MT229 PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Introduction Understanding advertising today-The foundations of advertising -The advertiser Agency Partnership-The advertising Environment.Targeting and Positioning. Room acoustics and means of control. Surround loud speakers Unit V Lighting Basic Lighting Concepts. and Planning – Audience analysis and buyer behavior – Segmentation . Pressure amplitude response. Room combinations and operational considerations Unit II Studio Environment Ventilation and Air conditioning. Master Hand Book of Acoustics. loud speaker driver units. Rooms with characteristic acoustics. Pearson. Philip Newell. Hal Leonard Corporation. the Sound Reinforcement Hand Book. Alton Everest. 2007 3. 2001 4. Instruments. Limitations to design Predictions. Ear thing. Designing neutral rooms. Common Lighting. Psychoacoustics of surround sound. Light Modification and Control. Studio Lighting Principles. flattening the room response. 2007 References 1. Power cabling. Planning.Advertising Research. Lighting Equipment: Types of Lamps. Control rooms. Objective measurement and subjective evaluations. Loudspeakers in rooms. McGraw Hill.Intercultural and International Advertising Unit III Creative Process Department of Electronics & Media Technology 9 .Sound. and Beyond. decibels and hearing. Strategy and Plans. Noise Unit IV Studio Monitoring Systems and Surround Sound Cables and connectors. Unit II Audience and Advertising Audience Definition. Focal Press. Sound isolation. Research. Lighting Safety. Recording Studio Design. Don Davis. Ronald J. Introduction to Video Production: Studio. Cross over networks. Harmonic distortion. Compesi. Light Mounts.Objectives. Field.

Sean Brierley.The Creative Process – Creativity. Flip-flops 7. Courtland L. Multiplexer and Demultiplexer 4. Delhi. McGraw Hill.(2001). Digital to analog converter MT231 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: Department of Electronics & Media Technology 10 . 2. New York. PR and corporate Communications. 2000. 2000. Text Book 1. John McDonough. Principles of Advertising and IMC.Media Objectives. Encyclopedia of Advertising”. Gray to Binary. Bovee.Sales promotion and supplementary media – public relations and special communications. MT230 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: 1.local advertising –from plan to results: The complete campaign Unit V Public Relations Evolution and growth. writing for PR. Parity generation and checking 11. Encoder and Decoder 6. The Advertising and Hand book. Creative Strategy and Copywriting – Art Production – Print Production – Electronic Production Unit IV Media Media Choice. Analog to digital converter 12. Logic gates 2. Vol 1. IC timer 10. 3. 2000. Shift registers 9. strategy and planning –print media – electronic mediadirect marketing and out of home advertising. Half adder and Full adder 3. Counters 8.Putting the campaign together. Code converter – BCD to 7-Segment. PR in Government. Advertising Excellence: McGraw Hill Publications. Binary to Gray 5. definition and relevance of PR role – Mass media & PR. BCD to excess-3 . public and private sectors. References: 1. McGraw Hill. PR ethics and regulations.

HSV Color Representation Image Input Devices Digital Image File Formats. 2004 2. Multi source Operators. Wiley. Pictures with different lenses 4. Framing and composition 2.Bartholomew. Dan Simson. Components.Basic Image Manipulation Terminology Color Manipulations . and Channels Spatial Resolution Bit Depth Normalized Values Additional Channels. Compression Choosing a File Format Nonlinear Color Spaces . Nature Photography 14. Image Viewing and Analysis Tools Image Viewers Flipbooks Image Statistics Pixel or Regional Information Tools Histograms Department of Electronics & Media Technology 11 . Digital Photography Bible. Wolfganng Freihen. Pictures each on 7. Portrait photography 9. Travel photography 13. 1996 MT232 DIGITAL COMPOSITING Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Digital Representation of Visual Information Image Generation Pixels. File Format Features Vendor Implementations of File Formats. Developing B/W film 16. Pictures at varying shutter speeds 3. Pictures under different light conditions 5.6 Time and Temporal Manipulations Apparent Motion Temporal Resolution Temporal Artifacts Changing the Length or Timing of a Sequence Key framing Unit III Image Tracking and Stabilization Tracking an Element Into a Plate Choosing the Feature to Track Limiting the Search Area Human Intervention Using Tracking Curves Manually Stabilizing a Plate Tracking Multiple Points. Over Mix Subtract In Out Atop Masks Compositing With Pre multiplied Images . Product photography 11. Modern Photography Techniques. Fashion photography 12.1.3D Transforms Warping Expression Language Filtering Algorithms Unit II Basic Image Compositing Matte Image The Integrated Matte Channel. Different patterns 8. Black and White pictures on a selected theme 6.Color Difference Method Specialized Keying Software Matting Techniques Garbage Mattes Edge Mattes Combining Mattes Manipulating Mattes . Pictures with digital camera on a selected theme References 1. J. Printing B/W film 17. Interface Interactions Workflow Online Versus Batch Methods of Representing the Compositing Process Compressed Trees Timelines Curve Editors Working With Proxy Images. Indoor / Outdoor Photography 15. Architecture photography 10.

Equivalent noise resistance. Transmitter and amplifier matching Unit-II Oscillators and Receivers Passive feedback oscillators. Noise temperature. AM transmitters.HDTV . Dough Kelly. Frequency Synthesizers. The Art and Science of Digital Compositing. AM receivers. double –conversion receivers. Frequency Conversion and mixers. Aspect Ratio Non square Pixels Deciding on a Resolution for an Aspect Ratio.35mm Formats . MT233 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION Credit: 3:1:0 Unit-I Noise and Amplifiers Signal. Waveform spectra.Integration Techniques . Tuned LC oscillators. Adjacent channel selectivity. Image rejection. Film Grain . HF communication receivers Unit-III Modulation – AM and FM Amplitude modulation. Noise. Lighting Matched Cameras.Lines of Resolution Fields Color Resolution Gamma NTSC PAL . and Aspect Ratio. Focal Press. SNR. Steve Wright. Broadband video amplifiers. tracking. Text Book: Ron Brinmann.16mm Formats Specialized Film Formats Video Formats . Coriolis. stability. AGC. Crystal Oscillators. 1999 References: 1. Spurious response. 2000. balanced modulator. SSB generation. Digital Composting in-Depth. Modified SSB systems. Reference Stand-in Clean Plates Film Stock Filters Choosing a Format Lighting and Shooting with Blue screens Blue screen versus Green screen Shooting Order . SSB reception. Noise factor. Negative resistance Oscillators. Film Formats . choice of IF. Morgann Kaufmann. Format Conversion Pipeline .Scene Continuity Lighting Shadows Lens Flares Atmosphere Camera Mismatches Camera Movements Focus Motion Blur. Super heterodyne receiver. IF amplifiers. Format Conversion Example. Digital Compositing for Film and Video. Tuned RF amplifiers.Blue screen Integration . Class C and Linear amplifiers.Other Formats Unit V Creating Elements Lighting Interactive. Comparison of SNR. 2006 2. Frequency modulation Department of Electronics & Media Technology 12 .Unit IV Formats Media.SECAM . Single-sideband principles. Neutralization.Digital Integration . Resolution.

Mute and Solo. 1995. Audio Processors and Processing-Amplification and Level Control. Pulse code modulation. 2003. Signal Routing Signal Sends.Mixer Automation Digital Consoles.Kennedy. Time division multiplexing. codes. Channelized Mixers . Broadcast Consoles. Faders and Potentiometers Level Indicators. Transporting Sounds Department of Electronics & Media Technology 13 . Dynamic Transducers. Delta modulation. Pulse time modulation Unit-V Digital Communication Bit transmission.Unit-IV Phase and Pulse modulation Phase modulation. PHI. Digital Conversion. G. Noise Reduction Processors. Automatic Consoles. McGraw Hill. MT234 AUDIO VIDEO PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Sound Transmission and Digital Audio Capturing Sound Electronically-Magnetic and Electronic Principles. Microphone Placement. Digital Simulation of Analog Effects: Microphones-Technical Features. Pickup Patterns. Piezoelectric Transducers Reversed Transducers. 2003. Unit II Mixers and Recorders Pre-amplification. Frequency Processors Temporal Processing. Data Management. Digital audio-Digital Coding. Carbon Particle Transducers. Dynamic Processors. Headroom. Virtual Mixers. Peak Indicators. coding. Dennis John Roddy and Coolen. Microphone Usage. Pulse transmission. Specialized Microphones. Proximity Effect . Equivalence between FM and PM. Monitors and Loudspeakers. error probability. Principles of Communication Systems. Noise in FM. Angle modulation Detectors. 2. Ribbon Transducers. Signaling rate. Forensic Sound . McGraw Hill. error detection and correction codes Text Book: 1. Off-axis Coloration. Taub and Schilling. Pan Potentiometers. References: 1. Split and Inline Mixers. Foundations of Editing: Analog Tape. Adjusting Levels. Digital Audio Workstations and Computers Unit III Editing and Processing Purposes of Editing.Acoustic Phase Relationships Distant Miking. Angle modulator. Digital Signal Processing. Control Room Monitoring. “Electronic Communication Systems”. Control Surfaces in Editing. Pulse amplitude modulation. Editing with Digital Audio Workstations. Electronic Communications.

BiCMOS digital circuits Unit II Filters and Tuned Amplifiers Filter transmission. Class AB output stage. Bistable Multivibarators. editing rough-Final drafts. Video switcher’s Mobile truck production unit. Drew O. Pearson. class AB circuit. generation of standardized pulse-monostable mutivibrator. Characteristics. Generation of square and triangular waveforms using astable multivibartors. op amp-PC oscillator circuits. precision rectifier circuits Unit IV Output Stages Classification of output stages. Temperature effects. 2. Operation of special effects. The Video Maker Guide to Video Production. and tuned amplifiers Unit III Signal Generators and Waveform-Shaping Circuits Basic Principles of sinusoidal oscillators. second-order LCR resonator. Rick C. Collins. 2. MOS Power transistors: structure of power MOSFET. ROM. Power BJTs. Class B output stage. Tomlinson Holman. Field production. Adobe. References 1. Biasing. RAM cells. Visual effects. LC and crystal oscillators. Adobe After Effects 4. 2008. IC timers. McDaniel. 1999. Sound for Digital Video. and Variation on Class AB configuration Unit V Power Amplifiers IC power amplifiers. Kenneth R. Audio control facilities. Camera structure and lens design Unit V Video Editing Editing equipment and control systems. Class AB output stage utilizing MOSFETs Department of Electronics & Media Technology 14 . comparison with BJT. first-order and second –order filter functions. Digital tools-Non linear editing. filter transfer function. Camera function and operation. types and specification. Sense amplifiers and address decoders. ECL. James C. Shriver. multivibrator circuits.Unit IV Video production Techniques Cast and crew. Planning edits and transition Text Books: 1. Function and operation of the video recorder. Fundamentals of Audio Production. Focal Press. Semiconductor memories: Types and architectures. Focal Press. Video Maker. McGraw Hill. MT235 MEMORIES AND ANALOG SIGNAL CONDITIONING Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Memories and Advanced Digital Circuits Latches and Flip-flops. 3. Burrows Video Production: Disciplines and Techniques. Lynne Schafer Gross. 2005. Butterworth and Chebyshev filters.0 Class Room in a Book. Foust. 2007. Class A output stage. Adobe creativity team.

McGraw Hill. IF amplifier.Text Book: 1. Mixers Audio editing software’s: Pro tools/Sound forge/Neundo Plug in effects and virtual instruments MIDI Video Programme Production Study of video cameras and studio equipments Lighting techniques. Design of Class A power amplifier 3. PLL applications 10. Design of filter 2. Time division Multiplexing 12. Adel. Hartley Oscillator 5. Smith. FM modulation and demodulation 7. Pulse amplitude modulation 11. Mixer 9. S. the production process Lighting preparation –Three point lighting Rehearsing and preparing the talent Department of Electronics & Media Technology 15 .Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis 8. AM modulation and demodulation 6. Reference: 1. 2003. Oxford University Press. Design of single tuned amplifier 4. Sedra & Kenneth C. MT236 COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: 1. Microelectronics Circuits. Radiation pattern of antennas MT237 PROGRAMME PRODUCTION LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: Digital Compositing Composing computer generated images Blue screen composing and creating masks Rot scoping Audio Programme Production Study of microphones Loud speakers. Millman & Taub . 1965.

driven arrays. time-domain reflectometry. PHI. Radio-Frequency lines. Focal Press. power gain of an antenna. Ronald J. 2. coordinate system. light sources for fiber optics. MT238 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RADIATION Credit: 3:1:0 Unit-I Transmission Lines and Cables Primary line constants. Video Field Production and Editing. 2005. Cliff Truesdell. VSWR. McGraw Hill. summary of radio-wave propagation Unit-IV Antennas Antenna Equivalent circuits. Unit-II RF lines and Waveguides Telephone Lines and cables. fiber optic communication systems Text Book: 1. Pearson. Hertzian dipole. microwave antennas Unit-V Fiber Optic Communication Principles of light transmission in a fiber. Electronic Communications. 1995. 4. lasses in fibers. microstrip lines. VHF-UHF antennas. Extremely low-frequency propagation. loop and ferrite. slotted-line measurements at radio frequencies. phase velocity and line wavelength. Robert B. References: 1. radiation fields. 2003 2. phase and group velocities.Kennedy. rectangular waveguides. McGraw Hill. 2007. characteristic impedance. G. Taub and Schilling – Principles of Communication Systems. Electronic Communication Systems.Compesi. Dennis John Roddy and Coolen. lossless lines at radio frequencies. Composing Visual Effects. propagation coefficient. LF propagation and VLF propagation. polarization. 2006. Steve Wright. Mastering Digital Audio Production: The Professional Music Work Flow with Mac OSX. connectors and splices. Isotropic radiator.Framing principles and movements References 1.rod receiving antennas. standing waves. other modes Unit-III Radio-Wave Propagation Propagation in free space. Single Camera Video Production. smith chart. 2003 Department of Electronics & Media Technology 16 . parasitic arrays. effective area & effective length of an antenna. vertical antennas. folded elements. transmission lines as circuit elements. 3. ionospheric propagation.Manuals. Tropospheric propagation. wave guide introduction. John Wiley. nonresonant antennas. photo detectors. dispersion. surface wave. 2008. Focal Press.

Voice over perspectives. Audio post production for video Unit IV High Definition Post Production Frame recording method. Focal Press. Pre production for post production. Synchronizing and controllers. Video Editing and post production. MT240 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS Credit: 3:1:0 Department of Electronics & Media Technology 17 . and techniques of video editing. CMP Books. Editing software’s. Audio Post Production for Digital Video. Des Lyver. shoot. A Professional Guide. online editing Digital video effects. off.1999. Basics of the Video Production Diary. Steven E Browne. compression. mixing consoles and audio processing equipments. stereo. Focal Press. 2003.line/online edit system compatibility. monitoring and the environment Unit II Audio Editing Recording Digital Audio. preparing for post production. Common colour errors and techniques. Perceptions. Audio Post production in Video and Film.MT239 POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Editing Systems Audio post production equipments. Steven Hullfish-Jaime Fowler. plasma screens. Recording audio for post production. edit and deliver at one frame. mikes and microphones. conversion problems. Gary H Anderson. Colour Correction for Digital Video: Using Desk Top Tools to Perfect Your Image. CMP Books 2002. 2001. LCD monitors. Jay Rose. video tape editing. 2001. Unit III Video Post Production Technology. Transmission and reproduction of audio post production materials. Track planning and Post Production sequences. References 1. Digital Audio Transfers and Recording. Digital video and video tape formats. computer file size for high definition video. Focal Press. TV Signals. Focal Press 2007. Tim Amyes. Audio workstations. offline editing process. 4. Introduction to Advance colour correction Text Books 1. bit depth. time code. studio recording. DLP monitors Unit V Colour Correction Colour theory. music.High Definition Post Production: Editing and Delivering HD Video. 2. chromo sampling. 2. 3. mixing SD and HD. Colour monitors and tools. sound effects.

D. 2003.V Hall. 2003. Write – Bus cycles – states – Wait state – HALT and HOLD state. Unit IV: Interfacing Memory and I/O Devices and Microprocessor Applications Memory interface – Input / Output Interface – Keyboard/display interfacing – A/D and D/A interface – applications – DC motor controller. 2nd Edition. Penram International. MT241 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Linear System and Convolution Department of Electronics & Media Technology 18 . S. Avatar Singh and Walter A. Architecture.Intel and Motorola. Tata McGraw Hill. 3.. Ajit Pal. YuCheng Liu & Glenn A Gibson. The 8088 and 8086 Microprocessor. PHI. Ramesh. 3. 2002. Text Books: 1. Programming & Applications with 8085/8080a.Gaonkar. Penram International. Kenneth J. 2. 1990. Microprocessor and Interfacing Programming and Hardware. 8086/8088 Family. PHI. Ayala. 1985. Microprocessor Theory and Application . Microprocessor Principles and Applications. Microprocessor Architecture. Unit III: Microprocessor Interfacing Techniques Data transfer – Programmable parallel ports – 8255 PPI – Serial Communication – Asynchronous . The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Applications. Rafiquzzaman M. 2. Software and Interface Techniques.Tribel. 1999. References: 1. PHI. Unit V: 8051 Microcontroller Organization of 8051 Microcontroller – I/O Ports – External memory – Counters and timers – serial data input and output – interrupts – instruction set – addressing modes – assembly language programming – simple applications. 2004. 4.Unit I: 8085 Microprocessor Organization of 8085 microprocessor – Instruction set – Addressing modes – Assembly language programming – machine cycles – Read.Synchronous – 8251A Programmable communication interface – 8237 – Programmable DMA controller – 8259A Programmable interrupt controller. McGraw Hill Publishing Company. Unit II: 8086 Microprocessor Organization of 8086 microprocessor – memory segmentation – Addressing bytes and words – Address formation – Address modes in 8086 – Assembly language programming – minimum mode and maximum mode. Fifth Edition. Microcomputer System.

Sum of Weighted Inputs. The Discrete Time Fourier Transform. References: 1. Duality. John G. 2000. Key economics characteristics of the media. Proakis and Dimitris G. Spectral Analysis of Signals Frequency Response of Systems. Analysis. Correlation Unit II Discrete Fourier Transform Family of Fourier Transforms. Relatives of the Moving Average Filter. 1997. Harmonics. MT242 MEDIA ECONOMICS Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Introduction to Media Economics Macroeconomics and microeconomics. Algorithms and Applications. 2. Parseval's Relation. Delta Function and Impulse Response. Ifeacher and Barrie W. 2002. Frequency Domain Parameters. Chirp Signals Unit IV Fast Fourier Transform & Introduction to Digital Filters Real DFT Using the Complex DFT. Frequency Domain's . How the FFT Works. Smith. 3.Signals and Systems. Market structure. The Scientist and Engineer's Guide to Digital Signal Processing. Special Properties of Linearity. Multirate methods. Narrow-band Filters. Economics of Advertising. High-Pass. Recursive Method. Static Linearity and Sinusoidal Fidelity. Convolution: Input Side Algorithm. Elsevier. Time Domain Parameters.Manolakis. Characteristics of the Phase. Convolution via the Frequency Domain Unit III Fourier Transform Properties & Transform Pairs Linearity.. FFT Programs. Compression and Expansion. Digital Signal Processing. Polar Notation. Multiplying Signals (Amplitude Modulation). Calculating the DFT. Calculating the Inverse DFT.. economics of scope. Media Department of Electronics & Media Technology 19 . Jervis. Single Pole Recursive Filters. Prentice Hall of India. DFT Basis Functions. economics of scale. Noise Reduction vs. Chebyshev and Butterworth Responses. UK. Periodic Nature of the DFT. Band-Pass and Band-Reject Filters Unit V Digital Filters Moving Average Filters: Implementation by Convolution. Synthesis. Requirements for Linearity. Designing the Filter Text Book: Steven W. Polar Nuisances. Digital Time Signal Processing. Sinc Function. Delta Function Pairs. Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach. Recursive Implementation. Frequency Response. Openheim and Schafer. Emmanuel C. Common Decompositions. Strategy of the Windowed-Sinc. Addison Wesley Longman Ltd. Common Impulse Responses. PHI of India Ltd. Designing the Filter. Filter Basics. Output Side Algorithm. Examples of Linear and Nonlinear Systems. Superposition: the Foundation of DSP. Gibbs Effect. Independent Variable. Notation and Format of the real DFT. Phase Response. Mathematical Properties. Information is represented in Signals. Step Response. Speed and Precision Comparisons.

4. International trade in audio visual contents Unit IV New Media Internet and E-commerce. support measures for media contents. Arithmetic Operations 2. Sage Publication. 2003. Sage. MT243 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: 8085 Assembly Language Programming 1. . Gillian Doyle. Publicly funded broadcasting. 2. 3. Decision making. Philip Kotler. Prentice Hall. concentrated media ownerships. The relationship between marketing and Advertising and PR/ The relationship between sales and PR/ how sales benefits from PR Unit III Print and Television Media Economic characters of news paper and broadcasting. internet and mobile communication and possibilities. Ownership Structure. Searching of Numbers 3. leveraging new media.R.ColinHoskins. structuring sponsorship deals. Bruce I. References 1. Understanding Media Economics. Gillean Doyle. Marketing Management. Code conversion Department of Electronics & Media Technology 20 . Text Books 1. 2007. 1999. Role of PR in the success of a product /service. using SMS Unit V Media Economics and Public Policy Free market Vs interventions. certain sponsorship proposals. . 2003. vertical supply chain for television. 2004. Understanding value added services. overview of how events are marketed. demand and supply Unit II Media and PR Introduction to media: Overview of media/ the media industry in India/ Types of Media/ role of each medium/ advantages and disadvantages of each medium. C. understanding streaming video net and mobile. economic methodologies. Media Economics-Applying Economics New and Traditional Media. Impact of new distribution technologies. . Understanding of common terminology and jargon in media. increasing economics of scale and scope interactivity. Sage Publication. The Mass Marketing of Politics. Digitalized media contents. Sage Publications. Monopolies and technological change: Events and sponsorships. Understanding Media Economics.Economics and Public Policy. Television programme production-Economics of programme supply. Newman.

MT245 TELEVISION AND VIDEO ENGINEERING Credit: 4:0:0 Department of Electronics & Media Technology 21 . Adding Sound effects. Arthmetic operations 6. Audio Guidelines and Methods for adjusting Audio. MIDI and sampler tools Video production 6.Baker. Analog to digital conversion MT244 POST PRODUCTION LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: Audio production 1.6 for Digital Video Editors. Sound Forge. 5. Digital to Analog Conversion 8. Timeline editing. Audio for video. Instant Sound Forge.Fisher. 2004. 11. 9. restoration. Track labels. 7. Lonzell Watson. Display interface 11. DC motor Interface 10. 2008 4. Trimming tools. Serial Communication using RS-232 interface 12. Moving clips. Adobe Premiere Pro: Complete Course. Effects. creating dynamic text and effects. 2. Burning a CD. Donna L. John Wiley. Basic procedures: Navigation. 12. CMP Books. Neundo and Cubase 3. 4. Manuals of Pro Tools.4. Editing-Basic Edits. Jeffry P. Meters. Final Cut Pro. 2004. 3. Mastering music for CD. Markers and regions: 2. Dramatic effects. 10. Transcoding and outputting References: 1. 8. Wiley. Recording. Block Transfer using 8085 and 8086 Program using 8051 9. Working with video. mp3. Square wave generation using 8255 8086 Assembly Language Programming 5. Sorting 7.

Monochrome picture tube. Herndon. 1995. Camera tubes – Vidicon and Silicon diode array vidicon.M. Television and Video Engineering. Luminance channel. Video amplifiers. New Age International Pvt. Color burst separation and burst phase discriminator.. TV antenna.R. MT246 APPLICATION OF DSP FOR AUDIO AND IMAGE PROCESSING Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Introduction Roots of DSP. Color signal generation and encoding. Unit V: Special Topics in Television Digital tuning techniques. Receiver: VHF Tuners.. Imaging Processing Unit II Audio Processing Sound Quality vs.. Videodisc system. McGraw-Hill. Sub carrier Oscillator AGC circuits. Unit III: Colour Television Systems Color Characteristics – Color cameras. Principle of Technology and Servicing. Ltd. Companding Speech Synthesis and Recognition.E. CCTV. 2002. Echo Location. Theory of Scanning. Ident and color killer circuits. References: 1. Tata McGraw-Hill. NTSC. B matrix and drivers. Composite video signal. Color picture tubes. LCD Projectors. PAL and SECAM Systems.C. Gulati. Remote control. Inter carrier sound system.R. Telecommunications. Grob. R. Camera and eye. Unit II: Monochrome Television Receiver Transmission and Propagation of TV signal.. High Fidelity Audio. U and V demodulators. Data Rate. Chrominance amplifier. G.Unit I: Fundamentals of Television Characteristics of eye and television pictures – Resolution and brightness gradation. 2. Dhake. Synchronous separation AFC and deflection Oscillators frame and line deflection circuits. Fundamental of digital TV and high definition Television. Nonlinear Audio Processing Unit III Image Formation & Display Linear Image Processing Digital Image Structure.A. cable television. Basic Television and Video Systems. Modern Television Practice. 1999.B. Text Book: 1. Audio Processing. Video tape readers and recorders. Television Video Signals Department of Electronics & Media Technology 22 . Vision IF subsystem. Unit IV: Colour Television Receivers Block diagram of PAL-D receivers.

Eitz’s notation Unit IV Digital Music Digital signals. 2002. 3. Closer Look at Image Convolution.Other Image Acquisition and Display. Simple integer ratios. FFT convolution. MT247 DIGITAL MUSIC Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I Introduction. Addison Wesley Longman Ltd. Initial conditions. 2004. Run-Length Encoding. Fourier’s theory of harmonic analysis. Warping. Major and minor. Digital Time Signal Processing. Brightness and Contrast Adjustments. Digital filters. horn. Resonance. Digital Signal Processing. Wind instruments. History of consonance and dissonance. Acoustics Unit III Consonance and dissonance and Scales and temperament Harmonics. Emmanuel C. Complex tones. MPEG Text Book: 1. Damped harmonic motion. Prentice Hall of India. Proakis and Dimitris G. Delta functions and sampling. PHI of India Ltd. THE BELL. The Z-transform. Cents. Critical bandwidth. Fourier Image Analysis. Smith. Unit II Mathematician’s Guide to the Orchestra Wave equation for strings. The human ear. beats. The drum Eigenvalues of the Laplace operator. Waves and Harmonics Sound. New Delhi. Jervis. Elsevier.Manolakis. Nyquist’s theorem.. Morphological Image Processing Computed Tomography Unit V Data Compression Data Compression Strategies. Pythagorean scale The cycle of fifths. John G. bowed string. Steven W. JPEG (Transform Compression). Just intonation. artificial spectra. Superposition. Dithering.. Openheim and Schafer. Delta Encoding LZW Compression. Grayscale Transforms. the dominant seventh Commas and schismas. 3×3 Edge Modification. discrete Fourier transform Department of Electronics & Media Technology 23 . Convolution. Harmonic motion. 2000. Combination tones. 2. sine waves. References 1. Signal-to-Noise Ratio. UK. Convolution by Separability Unit IV Special Imaging Techniques Example of a Large PSF. Ifeacher and Barrie W. WAV AND MP3 FILES. 1997. frequency spectrum. Vibrating strings. Algorithms and Applications. Spatial Resolution Sample Spacing and Sampling Aperture. Huffman Encoding. MIDI. The Scientist and Engineer's Guide to Digital Signal Processing. Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach.

running time. The Karplus–Strong algorithm. Inner orientation functions: predictive lighting.. Lighting: Standard lighting techniques. Amplitude and frequency modulation. Physiological factor. Structuring Colour --Function and CompositionInformational function of Colour. Principal motions and their functions. functions. Attached and Cast shadows. surrounding colours.Complexity Editing: Metric Montage. Unit IV Continuity editing Graphic vector continuity.clock time. subtractive mixing. MT248 MEDIA AESTHETICS Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Light Light-. Simple FM instruments Text Book: Dave Benson. Single and Multiple camera lighting. The Theory and Technique of Electronic Music. and types. Additive Synthesis. Compositional function of colour. IdeaAssociative Montage. Motion vector continuity. Filter analysis for the Karplus–Strong algorithm. 2007. Desaturation Theory. Special continuity factors: action continuity. colour continuity. light and lighting instruments. Rhythm. Colour Mixing: additive mixing. Outer orientation functions: special orientation. Expressive function of colour : Expressing Essential quality of an event. Collision Montage Department of Electronics & Media Technology 24 . tactile orientation. colour juxtaposition. Chiaroscuro lighting: analysis. Structuring the Four. Music: A Mathematical Offering. Analytical Montage sequential. or self-modulation. colour temperature. continuity of environment. surface reflectance.2006. Colour symbolism. Types of Subjective time: Pace.Nature of light. Feedback. Unit II Colour Colour perception. subject continuity. Physical modeling. sequence time. Media -Enhanced and Media. colour constancy. flat lighting: functions.Generated lighting. Motion vector line. Colours and Feelings. Index vector line. Reference: Miller Puckette. mixed mixing. Colourising films Unit III Timing and principal motions Types of Objective Time: Timing . The Yamaha DX7 and FM synthesis. Silhouette lighting. time orientation. and Psychological factor.Unit V Synthesis Envelopes and LFOs. Cambridge University Press. Colour Energy. Index vector continuity. scene time. Lighting purposes and functions. sectional. CSound FM synthesis using CSound. Relativity of Colour: light environment. shot time. World Scientific Publishing Co.Dimensional Field. Comparison Montage. story time. The nature of shadows.

Text Books Department of Electronics & Media Technology 25 . 1996. Structuring the Five-dimensional Field Sound Structures and Sound/Picture Combinations Text Book Herbert Zettl.language-Visual and the copy – timing and Duration – post testing . Modern Photographic Techniques. MT249 MEDIA MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Entrepreneurial Competence Entrepreneurship concept – Entrepreneurship as a Career – Entrepreneur – Personality Characteristics of Successful.Capital .magazine. February 1983.Preproduction. creativity and technical – Intellectual Property Rights. production.online journal – FM Radio.Criteria for Selection of Product Ownership . Books Sales. Wolfganng Freihen.. Motion-Applied Media Aesthetics. energy. structure.Screen writing. Literal sound. publicity and distribution Unit V Advertising and Animation Advertising agency.Feasibility Report Preparation and Evaluation Criteria. Unit IV Media Industry Print. Entrepreneur – Knowledge and Skills Required for an Entrepreneur. Functions of sound.Animation and Graphics.Community Radio – Television channels – Production house – setting the studios – Professional photographer Cinematographer – Cinema . internal condition. 1999.the budget pretesting-target audience. Unit II Entrepreneurial Environment Business Environment .Budgeting Project Profile Preparation .Entrepreneurship Development Training and Other Support Organizational Services . Outer orientation functions of sound: space .Central and State Government Industrial Policies and Regulations .International Business. J. Unit III Business Plan Preparation Sources of Product for Business – Pre-feasibility Study .time.Unit V Sound Sound and Noise. Wadsworth Publications. situation. Non-literal sound.Matching Entrepreneur with the Project .effects on sales – INS accreditation. References Michael Freeman. Sight.idea-concept –media planning.Starting news paper. external condition.identifying the problem.story board proposal for getting bank loan and identifying various sources to generate money. Information function of sound. Inner orientation of sound : mood. Sound.media selection. Aesthetic factors. The Complete Guide to Photographic Techniques & Materials.Role of Family and Society . Bartholomew.

2001.Orbit and Description Kepler’s laws.Hisrich. EDII.Chand and Company Limited. S. Prentice Hall Inc.C.Pritchard & Joseph A. T. References Prasama Chandra. Entrepreneurial Development.Orbital period and velocity – Azimuth and elevation . . Unit V: Applications and Services Very small aperture terminal (VSAT) networks – Technologies & configurations – Mobile satellite (MSAT) networks – Low orbital satellites – Domestic satellite systems-the INSAT System-International systems-INTELSAT / INMARSAT. Entrepreneurial Development. S. Receivers-antenna types – Gain and radiated power – Poynting loss – Noise temperature – G/T ratio – High power amplifiers – Redundancy configurations – Carrier & power combining – Low noise amplifiers – Redundancy configuration and nonlinearity – Up converter & down converter – Conversion process – Monitoring& control Unit III: Satellite Link Analysis and Design Basic link analysis – Interference analysis – Carrier to noise plus interference ratio – Terrestrial interference – Cross polarization interference – Adjacent channel and inter symbol interference – Rain Induced attenuation – Path diversity – Up link power control – Rain induced cross polarization interference – Satellite link design – Link without frequency reuse – Link design with frequency reuse. McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. P.Jain (ed. Saravanavel. Digital Satellite Communications. Text Books 1.orbital patterns– Placement of satellite in a geo-stationary orbit – satellite description – transponder subsystem – Telemetry. Selection. DTH.S. 2001. 2.Sciulli. Tata. Engineering. Unit IV: Multiple Access Techniques Frequency Division multiple access (FDMA) – Time division multiple access (TDMA) and code division multiple access (CDMA) – SPADE – Performance comparison of various multiple access schemes. Analysis. 2003. 1997.). Satellite Communication Systems . MT250 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I: Communication Satellite .McGraw Hill. 1999.Planning. Ha. Command and ranging subsystem – Attitude control and electrical power Unit II : Earth Station Earth Station Transmitters. P. Ess Pee Kay Publishing House. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Oxford University Press. Wilbur L. Entrepreneurship. 1996. Projects . References Department of Electronics & Media Technology 26 . 1990. Implementation and Reviews.. Tri. Handbook for New Entrepreneurs.Khanka.

Shannon Fano Technique.B.D.1. McGraw Hill. 3. DFT computation. John Wiley And Sons. 14.. “Satellite Communication”. Quantization noise. 13. Response of difference equations to initial conditions.. Agarwal. minimum redundancy Technique. or Animation MT253 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Department of Electronics & Media Technology 27 . DSP processor implementation 6. 10. Video. stability. Design of Geosynchronous Spacecraft. Fast Fourier Transform. Shannon Binary. MT251 DSP AND DATA COMPRESSION LAB Credit: 0:0:2 List of Experiments: Programs using MATLAB 1. 2. computation of convolution. 5. Satellite Communication. Digital modulation schemes. Bostian. 9. FIR & IIR filters implementation.. Timothy Pratt and Charles W.N. Prentice Hall 3. Representation of time series. MT252 SPECIAL PRODUCTION LAB (Audio or Video or Animation) Credit: 0:0:2 Experiments: Pre Production Production Post Production Students have to produce individual production in any one of the area: Audio. Rody. Sampling & waveform generation 7. 1991. Computational experiments with digital filters. 8. 1994 2. Adaptive filters. 4. 11. Huffmann coding. 12. Scrambler and unscrambler.

4. Media Ethics. Powers and Privileges of parliament. 1997. Right to information and Official Secrets Act. 4. Definition of Ethics. The News paper (Prices and Pages) Act 1956. Philip Patterson. BRAI. Juveniles as News Sources. Unit V Journalistic Ethics Gathering the news. Lee Wilking. Fundamentals of Indian Constitution. Luthra – Indian Broadcasting. Mac Bridge Report. Duties of citizens. Fundamental rights. Cases and Moral Reasoning. McGraw Hill. Pearson. The Press (Objectionable matters) Act 1957. Directive principles of state policy. 2003. MT254 MEDIA RESEARCH Department of Electronics & Media Technology 28 . Media Ethics. Clifford G. TRAI. Basu. Indian Press Laws. Drugs and magic remedies Act. Invasion of privacy. Leslie. 3. various committees of broadcasting. Copy right Act and IPR. Libel. Practice Hall of India. Defamation. Cinematographic Act 1952. Ltd. Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Introduction to Indian constitution. 2. Centre-State relations Unit II Media Laws in India PRB Act 1867. Distributors.Christians. Right o information Act. Broadcasting policies.. Provisions for declaring Emergency. 2006. Defense of India Act. Delivery of Books and News paper (Public Libraries) Act. Broadcasting Bill. Ministry of Information and Broadcasting. 3. Trade Mark Act and patents Act. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Press Council Act. Use of the word alleged Apparent authority. Legislative. Digital signature. 1986. Freedom of the Press and restrictions these upon. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. Indian Publishers. Unit III Civil and Criminal Laws Laws of Libel and defamation. censorship and control of the press. Provision for amending the Constitution. Self regulation and code of ethics. Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. Mass Communication Ethics. Issues Capes.R. Case Studies in Ethical Dilemmas Text Books 1.. Act regarding to working journalists. Judiciary. Technology. Radha Krishna Murthi. Telephone recordings. H. Cyber Laws. 2004. Basu. Domain name registration issues Unit IV Code and Ethics Recommendations of Press Commission I and II. Effects of Competition Situational Ethics . 1993 2. Thomson Learning. 2004. Functions of Executive. Access Laws. Practice Hall of India. press ownership and monopolies. Subpoenas and Shield Laws.Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Overview of Indian Constitution Overview of the Indian Constitution. References 1. 2003. piracy. Law of the Press in India. Cable TV Networks (Regulations) Act. Major Passdey & Askar Kedia.

uses. Group Discussion. Factorial studies. Literature review.Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Introduction Research Procedures -Elements of research -Research ethics –Sampling . Roger D Wimmer. Field experiments. Documentary. Characteristics of Drama.Goodness of fit: Parametric statistics-the t-testAnalysis of variance-Two-way ANOVA-Correlation-Partial Correlation-Simple linear regression-multiple regression.Reliability.limitations-steps in content analysis-Universe –sample-unit of analysisconstructing content categories-establishing a quantification system-coding the contentanalyzing the data-interpreting the results . Reference 1.Dominick. Microphones: Characteristics and types. Radio signs and codes. MT255 AUDIO PRESENTATION Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Characteristics of the Medium Transient nature of radio. Types of Audio – Video Programmes.Population and sample-Probability and Non probability samples. Quasi experimental designs. Directional Features Unit II Presentation Techniques Department of Electronics & Media Technology 29 .-Research in media effects. Solomon four group designs. Ajai S. Bibliography Unit II Qualitative and Quantitative research methods Field observations-Focus groups-Intensive Interviews: Quantitative methods. Sanjaya S. End notes. Nature and scope of communication research.2000. Unit V Basic Statistical Procedures Using SPSS Nonparametric statistics . Unit IV Experimental Research Basic experimental designs-Pretest-posttest control group. Foot notes. 2006. Gathering survey data-mail surveys –advantages –disadvantages -Telephone survey-Personal interviews-mail interviewsInternet surveys-Group administration. Talk. Sage Publications.Gaur Statistical Methods for Practice and Research. Layout. design. Mass Media Research . Validity. Interview. Content analysis in Print and electronic media Unit III Survey Research Descriptive and analytical survey-advantages and disadvantages of survey-constructing questions-Questionnaire design-Question order.Gaur.Chi-Square . Text Book: 1.Content analysis . Music.Joesph R. Factor analysis.Wardsworth Publishing Company. Posttest-Only control group.

Phone in’s: Choosing the topics. Voice. moderator. 2006. . comparer. Basics of Radio programming: conception to execution of ideas. interviews. 2001. Thomson Publications. Music. Travel news Qualities of presenters: Performance. Text Books 1. Andrew Boyd. Research collection of background materials. studio and live mixing speech. Elsevier. sound editing. voice over and narrations. Announcing. Getting through the audience. scripting sound. William Moylam . Carl Hausmanm Philip Benoit . setting up the topics. 2001. Studio etiquette. Echo. weather. 2003. Script problem. Business programme. projection techniques. music. Need for complete neutrality. Characteristics of radio. Language and Performance Unit III Sound and Picture Sound Aesthetics. dubbing. Sound design. Ad breaks. Talk back units. getting your breath. lights. creative usage of special effects and its functions. Sound production. training in pronunciation of names. telling the time. SFX. Learning to love microphone. Breathing. How to Present and Produce a Radio Show. Presenting on TV and radio an insiders guide. competition log. scheduling the callers. relaxation. Broadcasting. sport. Breath Support and resonance. Communicating Today. References 1. phones. Children’s programme. Stewart Peter. sign languages.on-air check list Unit V On Air Performance Speed. 2003. screening the callers. 2. The broadcast voice. Moderating talk shows and discussions. elements of sound structure. Focal Press. Essential Radio Skills. Focal Press.Who are you talking to? Pace problems. Inside the studio: Sources. MT256 AUDIO PROGRAMME PRODUCTION Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Basics of Radio Programming Brief history of broadcasting in India. recording the callers. Trewin Janet. Corpsing. Are you sitting comfortably. Assessment and analysis of Target audience. screens. live shows. Good Vocabulary. Code of on-air talents. The Art of Recoding. Life style and features. presence. strategies In designing sound Unit IV Types of Presentation News and current affairs. backgrounds. 3. A&C Black Publications. Presenting programme items: Travel news. 2004. commentator. making sense of intonation. Studio fault log. chorus. studio bible and style book Unit II Different types of Programmes Department of Electronics & Media Technology 30 . using prompter. station identity. being conversational. functions off sound in relation to picture. 4. Formats and styles in radio production. 2. Jenni Mills. Broadcast Journalism Techniques of Radio and Television News. Elsevier.

Use of effects. Focal Press. A&C Black Publications. Music programmes. Contribution studio and remote studio. News – Concept and definition. Radio Drama – Fiction and drama. Light Character Color Temperature.cues and links Unit III Radio Programme Production Basics of programme production. Fill Lights Spots. Discussion programme selection of subjects for discussion. Basic rules for radio writing. 2-Point Lighting. Basic Lighting Triangle: 3-point Lighting. Mounts and Connectors for Lighting Equipment. Robert Mc Leish. Radio Station Organization and Management. backward ray tracing. 2. commercials. Programme Production a Manual for Training. Real time raytracing. MT257 LIGHTING TECHNIQUES Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Lighting Techniques Lighting Variables: Measuring Light. Radio Feature and Documentary – Difference between features and documentary. Fill Light Accessories. Metals Department of Electronics & Media Technology 31 . How to Present and Produce a Radio Show. Aspinall Richard. drama audition. Stewart Peter. Artistic or Mood Lighting Unit III Ray Tracing Techniques Ray tracing algorithm. Principles of recording. portable sound recorders. programme for special audiences Unit IV Script Writing Broadcast styles. Creating audio special effects Unit V Radio Station Organization and Management On air studio. talk studio. Reflectors and PAR Banks as Fills. Educational programmes. Programme evaluation and training Autonomy. 1971. and telephone reports. news gathering and writing. Materials-Plastic. out side broadcasting vehicle.Radio Production. Interview – Art of Interview. UNESCO.Microphone talent. Audio script – types of audio scripts. 2006. phone-in programme. News and current affairs programmes. Light entertainment programmes. talk programmes. Use of background music. Radio car. visualizing the words. Intensity Controlling Light Intensity. advanced radio production techniques using digital technologies. Commercial broadcasting. extending ray tracing algorithm. elements of news values. types of interviews. Media Fusion. References 1. Day parting. wood. Conversational writing. Planning and scripting for educational radio programme. Other Lighting Objectives Unit II Lighting Instruments and Accessories Spotlights. Ratios in the Lighting Triangle. Prasar Barathi. Radio Jingle production.2005. Portable telephones. Paris. Essential Radio Skills. Documentaries and magazine programmes. Safety and Efficiency. Text Books 1. Accessories for Spot Lights. Seven P’s . Light Control Consoles.

Side. Bidirectional reflectance distributions and functions. Introduction to spherical harmonic lighting Text Book 1. Advanced Lighting and Materials with Shaders. Basic set up and diffuse materials.Specular and metallic reflections models. Kelly Dempski and Emmanuel Viale. Per-vertex warn Lights.Camera mountings-Tripods-Pedestals-Cranes-DolliesDifferent types of shots-Framing.Column script-Dual column script-Location scouting-controlling the colour temperature-Editing. Kicker. composition and Pictorial Balance. Department of Electronics & Media Technology 32 .Specular materials. MT258 TELEVISION PROGRAMME PRODUCTION Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Camera Basics Camera’s controls-Lens controls-Focal Length-Narrow-angle lens-wide-angle lens-Depth of field-Exposure-Neutral density filters. Diffuse materials.fill.back-3/4 back light.choosing microphones-Budget Unit IV Production Single camera production –scripting -Continuous single camera shooting -Discontinuous single camera shooting . Hard and Soft light. Riley Maynard and Thomas Spann.Art direction. Three point lighting-Five point lighting-Lighting Problems-Lighting and sound-Sound boom cast shadows-Subject position-Over bright surfaces-Precision LightingChromo key lighting-Lighting for a feature. In production unrehearsed formats -Pre-studio rehearsal -Studio rehearsal-the Floor manager-Guiding performers-Cuing-Prompting. per pixel warn lights. Unit III PreProduction Proposal-Treatment-Scene script-Shooting/Camera script-Location Script-Single.Segmented shooting. Different types of camera-video recording formats. Reference 1. Top.Unit IV Lighting Reflectors Models Rendering equation. Specular materials. Fundamentals of Television Production.Irradiantions and luminance. Diffuse reflection models. 2008. 2005. Unit V Lighting Implementation Basic lighting math’s. Unit II Lighting Light Intensity-Colour quality of Light-Light dispersion-Lighting a flat surface-Lighting an object-Lighting people-Key. Multi -camera treatment-Visual variety-the illusion of relationships-planning the shot-program opening-subjective and objective approaches-focusing audience attention-creating tension-pace-timing-visual clarity-visual padding. Pearson. Ralph Donald. Rim or edge light. Lamberts Law. Worldware Publishing.

Scenes.Front projection-Reflex Projection-Camera lens filters. Television Production. Billboards. Millerson Gerald. GraphicsSound and Music. Lights. Input. Graphics Rendering Unit II ClanLib-Core Classes & ClanLib-Scene Management. Documentation Unit IV Exploring OGRE 3D. 2/E Allyn & Bacon. Input Unit V Other Gaming Libraries-Install and Sound. Focal Press. Creating an OGRE Application Manually.Camera mattes-Electronic effects-Multi-split screen-Chromo-key insertion techniques-virtual settings-Digital video effects. Cameras. Games and the Message Loop. Resources. and Wipe. Sound and Music.Superimpositions-order of shotsMontage-duration of shots. FMOD. ClanLib. 2D Games and Images. OGRE Log. 2002 Reference 1. Riley Maynard. Scene Implementation. Running the OGRE 3D Samples. Surfaces. Particle Systems Frame Listeners.Unit V Postproduction Video editing-editing basics-Cut. Creating an OGRE Application Using a Wizard. Millerson Gerald. Text Book 1. OGRE. Fundamentals of Television Production. BASS. Sprites. Scene Node Properties and Methods. NSISWindows Installer. 1999 2. Materials and Scripts. Installing OGRE 3D. Open Media Formats Text Book Department of Electronics & Media Technology 33 .cutting rate-cutting Rhythm. Overview -Using Scene Manager Unit III 3D Games and OGRE 3D 3D Games. Thomas Spann. Effective TV production Focal Press. Scripting. Layers. Transformation. Drawing Surfaces. Open-Source Software. XML. First ClanLib Application. Downloading ClanLibBuilding ClanLib. Creating 3D Scenes. Painting a Layer. Scenes and Design.Visual effects-Mirror effects. Fade-Mix.Rear projection. OGRE 3D. More Middleware. Ralph Donald. 3D Scenes. 2008 MT259 GAME PROGRAMMING WITH C++ Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Game Programming & 2D Games and ClanLibGame Development. Software Abstraction. Compiling the OGRE 3D Samples. Downloading OGRE 3D.

motor control.Inverse Square Law Effect of Boundaries . Peter Norvig. 2007. steering behaviors.Alan Thorn. 2006. Stuart Russell. Fuzzy logic decision making. the kind of AI in games. Unit IV Path finding Path finding graph. Creating Games In C++. AI engine Unit II Movement Basics of movement algorithms. Wordware Publishing Inc.Diffraction . Unit III Prediction Predicting physics. coordinated movement. Pearson Education.Refraction .The velocity of sound waves .Absorption .Loudness .Decibels . jumping.Frequency ranges in music . A*.Amplitude .The response of the ear . David Conger and Ron Little . pseudo-code.Sound waves and obstacles .Fletcher and Munson Curves Musical pitch .Basic Acoustics .2003. problem. . Algorithms. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers.Wavelength . Model of game AI. data structures and interfaces Unit V Fuzzy Logic Introduction to fuzzy logic. References Noel Llopis.STC RT-60 . Reference: 1. dijkstra. MT261 AUDIO PRODUCTION AND PRESENTATION Credit: 4:0:0 Unit 1: Sound Theory Sound waves-Frequency . Unit II: Analog Audio Department of Electronics & Media Technology 34 . fuzzy state machines Text Book: Ian Millington . speed and memory.Algorithm.Diffraction -Units used in sound . movement in third dimension.TL .C++ for Game Programmers.Timbre . kinetic movement algorithms.A Modern Approach. Artificial Intelligence for Games.Reflection . 2004.Acoustic materials . Introduction to Game Programming with C++.The brain’s perception of sound . Charles River Media . First Impression 2006 MT260 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOR GAMES Credit: 3:0:0 Unit I Introduction Artificial Intelligence.CD. Artificial Intelligence . data structures and representation.

Focal Press. Paul White. 3.Sensitivities of microphones . Analog Recording.Routing . Frederick N Martin. 2002. Reference Books 1.Effect processors .Editing .Gate Multiband compressor . 2. 4. Backbeat Books.Phaser .Technical monitoring .Phantom power .Chorus . Text Book Michael Talbot-Smith. McGraw Hill Publishing.Indoor systems .Maximiser .Audio lines and Patchbays.Production of the different polar responses .Mechanical safety .Technology .Reverb . David Simons.Multi track systems .Equalizers .Shelving EQ .Talkback-Manual control of levels .Tape speeds Transport controls .Safety .Flanger . Sound Engineering Explained.Microphone techniques for stereo .The basic channel . 2003.Stereo listening-Stereo loudspeaker matching .Parametric EQGraphic EQ .Input Transducers .Electrical safety .Tape standards . F. 2006.Fire safety.TTL . John Greer N Clark.Phase .Cassette quality .Choice of Equipment .Dynamic processors .Filters .Loudspeaker cables .Head alignment .Outdoor Systems . Master Handbook of Acoustics. Sanctuary Publications. Introduction to Audiology.Noise reduction .Electronic level control Signal processors .Output Transducers-Loudspeaker . Pai and Sons.Head and tape cleanliness .Delay .2001.Semi parametric Eq .Compressor .Headphones for stereo monitoring.Basic Analog Mixing.Two track systems . Unit IV: Analog Recording Objectives and problems in recording .Polar responses -Types of Microphones .Basic PA systems .Paragraphic EQ .Recording Punching .Balanced wiring .Aural monitoring .Limiter .Inputs and connections .Reference voltages in audio signals-Metering .Specific applications of microphones .Methods of producing inter .The fundamentals of magnetic recording . Unit V: Basics of Live Sound Engineering Need for Sound Reinforcement .Important features of a mixer .Microphones .Stereo .Applications .channel differences .Auto punch .Signal flow .Full Range sound Reinforcement systems . Unit III: Audio Engineering Fundamentals Sound mixers .General Maintenance .Output stage .Analog Recording devices and systems . MT262 ADVERTISING AND PUBLIC RELATION Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I Understanding advertising today-The foundations of advertising -The advertiser Agency Partnership-The advertising Environment Department of Electronics & Media Technology 35 .FOH .ATR .Alton Everest.Expander . 2003.Sidechain .MOH .Loudspeaker resonators .Ear safety .Professional and domestic standards . Basic Live Sound.

sensitivity. linearity. Creative Strategy and Copywriting – Art Production – Print Production – Electronic Production Unit IV Media Choice. manual . zoom extendersFocus control : auto. Blanking signals. Strategy and Plans.Putting the campaign together. genlock. and Planning – Audience analysis and buyer behavior – Segmentation. Bovee . Colour temperature-White balance: Process and need. white balance. Encyclopedia of Advertising. remote. preheat.V Scanning: Horizontal & FrameVertical.local advertising –from plan to results: The complete campaign Unit V Public relations – evolution and growth. Its indicators and control. strategy and planning –print media – electronic mediadirect marketing and out of home advertising. Text Book 1.Objectives.Unit II Audience Definition.conduction. 2001 References: Sean Brierley. photo emissive effectWorking principle of video various sizes of CCD cameras: Three CCD.Media Objectives. definition and relevance of PR role – Mass media & PR. PR and corporate Communications writing for PR. Principles of Advertising and IMC.Advertising Research. Publications. Courtland L. PR in Government. PR ethics and regulations. macro focus. manual. photo voltaic. 2000. Targeting and Positioning. The advertising and hand book.& field rate-Resolution video bandwidth. colour burst. Television standards Unit II: Principle of Video Camera Primary & Photosecondary colours.-Zoom control: servo.Sales promotion and supplementary media – public relations and special communications. Parts of a video camera-Different controls on video camera-Power switch. Advertising Excellence : McGraw –Hill Inc. Vol 1. McGraw hill. public and private sectors. sync. back focus. 2000 John McDonough. single CCD colour camera-camera. 2000 MT263 VIDEO PRODUCTION AND EDITING Credit 4:0:0 Unit I: Introduction to TV technology Picture formation-T.pickup devices Unit III: Components and Controls of Video Camera.-Camera view finders (B/W and colour). gain. remote.Intercultural and International Advertising Unit III The Creative Process – Creativity. Research. iris. pedestal etc.-Camera filters-Camera control unit (CCU)-Waveform monitor for output level of video-Vectorscope Department of Electronics & Media Technology 36 .

Aerial photography camera. Factors responsible for Growing importance of Communication.Studio cameras . types of tripod heads. seven C’s of Communication. Receiver. remote control camera. Play Theory Uses & Gratification Theory. Decoding. Other Theories: Development Media & Democratic Participant Theory Department of Electronics & Media Technology 37 . Der Lyur & Graham “Basics of Video Production” MT264 MASS COMMUNICATION Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I Fundamentals of Communication: Origin of communication. Visual effects. Perspective-Types and use-normal lens. Two-step & Multi-step Theory. Four major theories of Press. trolley & other accessories-Different types of camera angles and use-Camera movements – types & use . Unit V Video Editing Editing equipment and control systems. Concept of Communication. Impact & Influence of Mass Media Unit II Process of Communication: Transmission of ideas. Mass Communication Unit III Theories of Communication: Hypodermic Needle Theory. Commercial Theory. Endoscopic camera. Peter ward “Studio and outside broadcast Camera” 2. Individual Difference Theory. editing rough-Final drafts. Selective Perception & Selective Retention Theory. Field production. Planning edits and transition Text Book: 1.Types of audio & video connectors. Digital tools-Non linear editing.Special cameras: underwater camera. human & universal process. BernardWilkie “Creating special effects for TV & Video” References: 1. Facts & feelings from one person to another-elements of Communication Process (message. Meaning & Elements/components of human communications. dolly. Other functions. Meaning of theories based on scientific study &analysis.Different Types of Television Cameras-NG camera EFP camera . Entertain. according to Fred Siebert. Libertarian Theory.Unit IV: Video camera lenses. Functions of Mass Communication: To-Persuade. Communication . Theodore Peterson & Wilbur Schramm Authoritarian Theory. telephoto lens. Channel. high-speed video cameras . Zoom lens-Tripod. Sender. Soviet Communist/Workers Theory. wide-angle lens. Crowd. Scope & Functions. Social Responsibility Theory. Small Group). Acting & Feedback). Inform.Form of Communication: Intra Personal Communication.Types of microphones used on video camera .Objectives. Encoding. Roy Thomson “Grammar of the shot” 2. Communication as a social. Educate. Selective Exposure. Effective communication & its Barriers. Interpersonal Communication Group Communication (Public.

MT265 GRAHICS AND ANIMATION Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I Principle of 2D Graphics Basic geometric objects. Structural algorithms. Traditional & Folk Media Unit V Verbal &Non-Verbal Communication Universals of Verbal Communication. Silence. Radio.Lines and pixel graphics.Unit IV Models of Communication: SMR Model. Collision detention in Java 3D. Interpolators for continuous changes. Interpolation of rotations Text Books Frank Klawonn. Facial Communication. Surface modeling. Public Relations & Public Affairs. textures. 2000 Asa. on-Verbal behavior as communication. Space Communication-Physical environment. Sound effects in Java 3D. Sub-Language & Culture. modelling 3D objects. Dennis. Berger. implementations in Java 2D. Osgood Model. Animational moving objects. Interaction in Java 3D. Meaning & Barriers in Verbal Communication Language. 2008 Department of Electronics & Media Technology 38 . TV. Dance Model. Laswell Model.Areas. steroscopic viewing Unit V Introduction to Animation Homogeneous coordinates and transformation. texts and colours Unit II Principles of 3D Graphics Geometric transformations. Description of transformation in the display pipeline. Films Records Internet. Collision detection. 2000. Paralanguage & Temporal communication Text Books Mcquail. Mass Communication Theories. Gerbner’s Model. Advertising. Applications of transformations. Illumination and shading: Light sources. Animation and movements based on transformations. Magazines. Shannon & Weaver Model. Image precision techniques. Antialiasing with Java 2D. textures in Java 3D Unit IV Special Effects and Virtual Reality Fog and particle systems. Sound effects. Drawing arbitrary curve. Springer. shadings. Geometric transformations. Reflections. Elements of speech communication. SMRc Model. Algorithms for visible surface determination. Normal vectors for Java 3D Unit III Visible Surface Determination Clipping volumes. Gate Keeping Model: Tools of Mass Communication: Newspapers. Interpolation-Controlling the motion along a curve. Convergent Model. Dynamic surfaces Interaction. Sage Publication. New Comb Model. Priority algorithms. Body communication-Body movement. Fog in Java 3D. Introduction to Computer Graphics Using Java 2D and 3D. Sage Publication. Projections in Java 3D. Essentials of Mass Communication. Schramm Model.

Peter Shirley. John Wiley. et al. Morgan Kaufmann publishers. AK Peters Ltd. Fundaments of Computer Graphics. The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects. Addison Wesley. 2004 Department of Electronics & Media Technology 39 . Rick Parent. et al Computer Graphics Principles and Practices. Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques.Foley. 1996 3.References 1. Issac Victor Kerlow. 2005 4. 2002 2. James D.

School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code MT218 MT220 MT221 Communication Systems II Web Designing & Production Multimedia Lab Subject Name Credit 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 09MT101 09MT201 09MT202 Visual Art Lab Fundamentals of Mass Communication Graphics and Animation Lab Web Designing Lab Audio Engineering And Production Video Production Non Linear Editing Digital Photography Studio Management Dynamics of Visual Communication Computers In Communication Design – I Writing for Electronic Media Fundamentals of Mass Communication Computers In Communication Design – II Visualisation of Commercial Arts Basic Electronics and Computer Hardware Digital Photography Audio Engineering 2D Graphics And Animation Pre Production Techniques Elements of Video Production Media Laws And Ethics In India Non Linear Editing Visual Art Lab Creative Suit .Lab I – Corel Draw Applied Art Lab Creative Suit – Lab II –Photoshop Applied Photography Lab 2D Animation Lab Audio Production Lab Preproduction Technique Lab Video Production Lab Multimedia Lab Video Post Production Lab Web Designing Lab Principles of Web Designing Media Research Methods Dynamics of Visual Communication Elements of Video Production Instructional Design 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:2 09MT203 09MT204 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:4 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 09MT205 09MT206 09MT207 09MT208 09VC201 09VC202 09VC203 09VC204 09VC205 09VC206 09VC207 09VC208 09VC209 09VC210 09VC211 09VC212 09VC213 09VC214 09VC215 09VC216 09VC217 09VC218 09VC219 09VC220 09VC221 09VC222 09VC223 09VC224 09VC225 09VC226 09VC227 09VC301 09VC302 09VC303 09VC304 Karunya University  Page 377  .

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

MT218 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS II
Credit 4:0:0 Course objective: This course is used to understand the theories of transmission lines, electromagnetic energy radiation, antenna coupling, satellite communication and satellite TV, calculate the characteristic impedance, physical and electrical length of antenna system and analyse the importance of impedance matching. Course Outcome: Through the lectures and problems solved in this course the students are able to understand transmission lines, antenna coupling, they will be familiar with smith chart and its application, satellite system and its application on TV and radio and identify environmental effects on wave propagation. Unit I Transmission Lines Fundamentals of transmission lines – Characteristics impedance – losses in transmission lines – standing waves – quarter and half wavelength lines – reactance properties of transmission lines – fundamentals of the smith chart – application – the double stub – directional couplers – baluns – slotted line Unit II Radiation and Propogationof waves Fundamentals of Electromagnetic waves – Effects of the environment - Ground waves – Atmospheric absorption – troposheric scatter – ionospheric layers – sky waves – skip distance – fading – echo scattering – space waves. Unit III Antennas Hertian dipole – current and voltage distributions – resonant antennas – radiation patterns – length calculations – Antenna gain – effective radiated power – radiation measurement – field intensity – bandwidth – beam width – polaroization – effects of ground on antennas – UHF and Microwave antennas – wideband and special purpose antennas. Unit IV Satellite Communication Introduction – Satellite communication system – satellite orbits – Basic components of satellite communication – Constructional features – commonly used frequencies – communication package – satellite communication in India Unit V Direct Broadcast Satellite Television and Radio C-Band and Ku – Band home satellite TV – Digital DBS TV – DBS-TV system design – DBS – TV link budget – Error control in Digital DBS TV – Master control station and uplink – Installation of DBS- TV antennas – Satellite Radio Broadcasting Text BooK: 1. Electronic Communication Systems, Kennedy, Davis, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2008) 2. Principles of Communication Engineering, Anokh Singh, A.K. Chhabra S.Chand (2004)

Karunya University 

Page 378 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

Reference Books: 1. Satellite Communications, Timothy Pratt, Bostian, Allnutt, Wiley (2002) 2. Dennis John Roddy and Coolen, Electronic Communications, PHI, (1995). 3. Taub and Schilling – Principles of Communication Systems, McGraw Hill, (2003). 4. Communication Electronics, Deshpande, Deshpande, Rangole (2001) MT220 WEB DESIGNING & PRODUCTION Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To study the designing style of Web Designing and Production using HTML,XML, and CSS. It gives the basic knowledge about the designing way. Course Outcome: Basics of HTML,XML and CSS gives the basic knowledge for the students of construction of Web pages. So it gives an opportunity for the students to be a part of any web team or web designing company.

Unit I Variables in the web Designing Environment-HTML,XML, and the future of markup languages. XML. an open standard for structuring data- XHTML. The future of HTML. How web browsers affect workuse an HTML Editor-Coding for multiple screen resolutions-Bandwidth Concern. Web Site Design Principles -Design for the medium-Design the whole site-Design for the user-Design for the screen Unit II Planning the site-Create a site specification-identify the content goal-analyze your audience-build a web site development team-filenames and URLs – Directory structure- Diagram the site-Planning Site navigation Unit III Creating Usable Navigation-Using Text based Navigation –using Graphics-based navigation-Creating page templates-Understanding table basics- Table Pointers-Creating a page template- template examples Unit IV Web Typography – type design principles- controlling typography with the font element-controlling typography with Cascading style sheets-Styling with CSS-Graphics and Color- File formats basicsComputer color basics-choosing a graphics tools-Using the IMG elements-working with Hexadecimal colors Unit V

Karunya University 

Page 379 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

HTML Frames-understanding Frames-Frame Syntax-Targeting in Framesets-Planning frame ContentPublishing and maintaining your web site-Publishing web site-testing web site-refining &updating content-attracting notice to web site Text book 1. Joel Sklar, Sklar, Principles of Web Design, Course Technology; 1 edition (March 13, 2000) Reference : 1. Jakob Jielsen, Designing web usuability, The practice of simplicity, New Riders, 1st edition (December 1999). 2. Deitel and Deitel, Internet and World Wide Web how to programme, Prentice Hall, (2000).

MT221 MULTIMEDIA LAB
Credit 0:0:2 Course objective: To train the students in the area of 2D Animation and its software application. To make the students understand the process of 2d animation production in studios. The students will be trained the area of character desinging and concept designing in 2D animation. List of Experiments: 1. The Pre-production Phase a. b. c. d. e. f. The lines Basic formation of shapes Basic formation of characters Head formation Expressions Character actions

2. Basic animation & principles a. b. c. d. Squash and Stretch Follow through and overlapping actions Timing Exaggeration

3. Character designing a. Concept drawing b. Character creation c. Model sheet 4. Story board 5. Software interface

Karunya University 

Page 380 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

a. b. c. d. e. f. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Screen layout Basic drawing tools Animating rough blue and planning red Setup and Marking menus Working with Layers Light setup

Frame by frame animation Key frame, Inbetweens & Secondary actions Tweening Background & Compositing for animation & Camera movement Motion guide & Embedding video

09MT101 VISUAL ART LAB
Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To educate the students in drawing. This subject will enable the students to visualize of their own and will help them to create an appropriate visual through the application of perspective composition and light and shadow. 1. Elements of art a. Line b. Form c. Shape d. Colour e. Space f. Value g. Texture 2. Perspective Drawing a. Foundation b. Basic shapes in perspective c. Linear perspective d. Aerial perspective e. Point perspective 3. Composition a. Light and shadow b. Colour composition c. Proportion 4. 5. 6. 7. Drawing landscapes Drawing still life Drawing animals Drawing birds

Karunya University 

Page 381 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

8. Drawing objects 9. Drawing architectures 10. Introduction to human figures

09MT201 FUNDAMENTALS OF MASS COMMUNICATION
Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: The fundamental of communication which is essential for an administrator or an entrepreneur to excel in his endeavour is outlined in this module. This will make the learner understand the concepts of communication and how effectiveness in oral, written, non-verbal & Mass communication work together to improves the productivity and efficiency of an organization. Course Outcome: The knowledge on various modes & use of channels of communication will help the learner to be an efficient manager in his business or job by effectively communicating amoung his subordinates, Peers, & Supervisors. The barrier & noise distort communication affecting many enterprises, which need to be identified & corrected. This module will help in this direction. Unit I: Introduction to Communication The Definition and Nature of communication - Process, Elements & Objectives of communication - Essentials of good communication - 7 Cs of communication - 6Ws & 1H of Communication - Functions and Classification of communication – Communication Noise, Source & Type of noise, Filtering & Distortion of Message, Communication Load. Barrier of Communication – Organizational, Semantic, Personal & Psychological - Overcoming barriers. Unit II: Oral Communication Human Language: Para & Sub Language – Principle of effective oral communication - Preparation of speech, Techniques & Guidelines – Interpersonal Communication - Media of oral communication, Style - Advantages & disadvantages of Oral Communication - Importance of listening – Who is a good listener & the reason for poor listening – Barriers to listening, ways for effective listening.

Unit III: Written & Formal Communication Essentials of written communication – Media of Written communication – Merits & demerits of written communication - Classification and characteristics of formal communication - Downward, upward, diagonal & Horizontal communication channel - Organizational Patterns & Hierarchy of communication - Meaning, Nature, Characteristics and Kind of Feedback – Feedback in oral & written feedback - Effective feedback skills. Unit IV: Non Verbal & Informal Communication Meaning, Importance, functions & Forms of NV communication – Body Language - Proximix, Kinesics, Artifacts, Haptics, & Chromics – Meaning & Nature of Informal Communication – Reasons for informal

Karunya University 

Page 382 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

communication - Distinctions between formal & informal communication - Rumours & Grapevine - Spread of rumours and control – Merits & demerits of informal communication. Unit V: Mass Communication Definition of Mass Communication - Classification of Mass Media – Top 10 Media Outlets - Factors for selecting right media – Advertising & Public Relation – Publicity & Propaganda – Theories & Models of Communication - Magic Bullet Theory, Two Step Theory – Berlo’s SMRC Model, Lasswell Model, Gerbners’s Model, Gate Keeping Model, Shannon & Weaver Model. Test Book: 1. Communication by C.S.Rayudu published by Himalaya Publishing House – Edition July 2008. 2. Principles & Practices of Mass Communication by Ved Prakash Gandhi Kanishka Publishers, Distributors, New Delhi – Edition 2007 Reference: 1. Mass Communication in India by Keval J. Kumar published by Jaico Publishing House – Edition 2007

09MT202 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION LAB
Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To understand pixel graphics and learn projections, textures, points and polygons, lighting and texture. This will help the students to do real time 3D character animation. List of Experiments: 1. Implementations in Java 2D.Lines and pixel graphics, 2. Drawing arbitrary curve 3. Projections in Java 3D 4. Textures in Java 3D 5. Drawing points and polygons with open GL 6. Open GL lighting and texture 7. Importing geometry and animation from light wave 3D 8. Importing geometry and animation from 3DS Max References 1. Lever Nik, Real time 3D Character Animation with Visual C++, Focal Press, 2002. 2. Kelly L.Murdock, 3ds Max 9 Bible, Wiley, 2007 3. Timothy Albee, Essential Light Wave 3D 8, Wordware Publishing, 2005.

09MT203 WEB DESIGNING LAB Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To learn creation of web pages, scripting objects, application and special objects. To undarstand the usage of data bases. The students will be trained to programme ASP and XML. Karunya University  Page 383 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT)

List of Experiments:
ASP

1. Creation of Simple Web pages. 2. Usage of scripting objects 3. Usage of Application and session objects 4. Adding data entry features 5. Usage of databases in ASP 6. Usage of components in ASP 7. Usage of Cookies in ASP.

XML 8. Creating simple web pages using XML 9. Applying animations and multimedia effects through XML 10. Usage of databases in XML 11. Simple web page using XML 12. Web pages using XSL. References 1. Richard Anderson, Dan Denault, Brian Francis, ASP 3.0 Programmer’s Reference, IDG books India (P) Ltd., 2000. 2. Elliot Rusty Harold, XML Bible”, IDG Books India (P) Ltd, 2000. 3. Vivek Sharma, Rajiv Sharma, Developing E-Commerce Sites – An Integrated Approach, Addison Wesley, First Edition, 2000. 09MT204 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION
Credit :3:0:0

Karunya University 

Page 384 

Stereo .Audio lines and Patch bays .Safety . 2002.CD.Ear safety .Loudspeaker resonators .Microphones .Wavelength . Unit II: Analog Audio Input Transducers .Methods of producing inter .Full Range sound Reinforcement systems .Punching .Filters .Analog Recording devices and systems .Equalizers .Indoor systems .Phantom power .Technology .The fundamentals of magnetic recording .Diffraction . Course Outcome: This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically aware of the Technologies and Production systems in the Audio Industry.Routing .Decibels .channel differences .Effect processors .Frequency ranges in music .Output stage . Unit V: Basics of Live Sound Engineering Need for Sound Reinforcement .Important features of a mixer .Timbre .Microphone techniques for stereo .Balanced wiring .Output Transducers-Loudspeaker .Absorption .Inputs and connections .Multi track systems .Mechanical safety .Acoustic materials .Diffraction -Units used in sound .Fletcher and Munson Curves .TL .Editing .Mastering – Audio Post production for Video.Reflection .Specific applications of microphones .Effect of Boundaries .Talkback-Manual control of levels .Transport controls .STC .RT-60 .Basic PA systems . Unit IV: Digital Audio Basic Principles – Analog vs Digital – Analog to Digital Converter – Digital to Analog Converter – Application of Digital Audio – Digital audio hardware .Sensitivities of microphones .MOH .Phase .Auto punch .ATR .Loudness . Michael Talbot-Smith.Basic Analog Mixing.Amplitude .Polar responses -Types of Microphones .Headphones for stereo monitoring. Text Book 1.Tape speeds . Unit III: Audio Engineering Fundamentals Sound mixers . 2nd Edition. Unit 1: Sound Theory Sound waves-Frequency .Inverse Square Law .The basic channel .Technical monitoring .Noise reduction . “Sound Engineering Explained”.Musical pitch .Production of the different polar responses .Basic Acoustics .Outdoor Systems Applications .The velocity of sound waves .Fire safety.Electronic level control .Loudspeaker cables . Focal Press.Professional and domestic standards .FOH .Refraction .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Course Objective: The students will be taught about Sound and Audio Engineering fundamentals and the techniques involved in Audio production.Aural monitoring .The response of the ear .Recording .Electrical safety .Sound waves and obstacles . Karunya University  Page 385  .Stereo listening-Stereo loudspeaker matching .Head alignment .Signal processors Dynamic processors .Choice of Equipment .formats .Storage medium – Digital mixers – Digital audio workstation –Editing – Mixing .Head and tape cleanliness .Tape standards .Cassette quality .The brain’s perception of sound .Reference voltages in audio signals-Metering .Signal flow .

the skill required to use the video camera and accessories to produce professional results are also discussed in this curriculum.3 CCD. Pai and Sons.2001 Frederick N Martin. Paul White.Colour Burst .Saturation & Luminance – Grassman's Law – Tristimulus values -Visibility Curve of the eye – Characteristic of Sound – Intensity.Construction of Colour Picture Tube . Unit II: Introduction to Video Cameras Monochrome & Colour Video Camera Tubes . 4th Edition. Kell Factor . Unit III: Video Camera & Controls Karunya University  Page 386  .Modern Visual Display Units– LCD. “Master Handbook of Acoustics”. Besides. John Greer N Clark.Video Compression Standards.Active lines. Synchronization. Frequency Range – Video Storage devices & formats – Recording of Video Signals on Video Tape.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Reference Books 1. McGraw Hill Publishing. 4. 2. modern video camera and World Television Standards. “Basic Live Sound”. “Analog Recording”. 1995 David Simons.Basic of TV transmitting System & Satellite TV communication . 3.Horizontal & Vertical Blanking Pulse . Blanking . 3rd Edition.Alton Everest. 3rd edition.Frame. Backbeat Books.Analogue TV transmission standards .Composite Video Signal: Monochrome & Colour . 9th Edition. Bandwidth. Projection & DLP. Unit I: Introduction to TV Technology Scanning process of a Picture Tube . 2003 09MT205 VIDEO PRODUCTION Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: To provide basic technical knowhow on the working of television receiver. LED. Sanctuary Publications. 2006.Resolution. .Primary & Secondary Colours – Additive & Subtractive Mixing of colours – Hue. Course Outcome: This module will enable the student to appreciate the functioning of various visual display units in the TV industry and the transmission of analogue & digital television signals over terrestrial & satellite communication systems. “Principles of Digital Audio”.Progressive & Interlaced scanning . CMOS Cameras . Field & Line Frequency .Image Pickup Devices – Photo Emissive & Conduction principles . The student will also learn choosing & use of video cameras & its accessories for production of TV programme. 5. F. Ken Pohlmann. McGraw-Hill. “Introduction to Audiology”. 2003.

2 Channel Audio.Filters to alter Image .Caring for Camera & Lens. Redheads. Over the Shoulder – Eye Line – Multi Camera Shooting – On line & Off line Editing – Editing Transition & Effects – Vision Mixing. Blondie . Pan Heads. Underwater. Tracks. Image & Audio Quality Colour Temperature – White & Black Balance – Process & Need – Camera Control Unit – Using Wave Form Monitor & Vector scope for ensuring image quality – Lighting: Available & Artificial . Edition 2007. Endoscopic. Spreaders – Studio Lights: Soft Light Box. 4. 2. Unit IV: Video Camera Accessories Lenses – Normal.Direction of light . Crane & Zooming . Producing Videos . Time Lapse & High Speed Cameras – Types of Audio & Video cables & connectors. Wide & Macro – Camera Mounts: Monopod.Camera movement: Tilt. Tripod.Action Axis Line – Camera Angles . Prescribed Text Books: 1. Crane. HMI. TOTA.Point of View .Single & Two Shot.Rule of Thirds . Lipstick. PAR Cans. Different Types of cameras – Camcorders. Jimmy Jib.Diopter Aperture – Shutter Speed – Gain Up – Lens – Auto & Manual focus – Manual & powered Zoom – White Balance – Tally Light – Camcorder Controls to Operate Recorder & Playback – Preview – CCU Cable – Audio & Video input/output connectors of a camera. Umbrella. 2. New Delhi. Pedestal. To understand the terminologies and concepts of Avid video editing software. 3. Zoom. Unit V: Creative use of Camera Composition – Framing . Course Outcome: Karunya University  Page 387  .Balance – Perspective .Built in & External Microphones – Monitoring Tonal Quality – Distortion – External Noise .Head Phones . 09MT206 NON LINEAR EDITING Credit: 3:0:0 Course Objectives: 1. Dolley. To know the different types of editing.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Power Supply & Batteries – Electronic View Finder – Readouts given off by a View Finder .Hard & Soft Lighting – 3 Point Lighting – Contrast Ratio . Telephoto. Trolley. Ariel. To learn adding special effects and mixing audio with the visuals in Avid. published by Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Pan. Television Engineering & Video System by R G Gupta.Depth of Field . To acquire the editing and titling skills.A Complete Guide by Martha Mollison published by Allen Unwin – South Asian Edition 2007.

Principles. Source monitor – Tool palette – Bin Views –Importing. Sixth Edition. Effect palette. MPEG. Extracting and Copying Segments – Slip Trim & Slide Trim – Finding Frames and Clips Titling: Editing. Clips. Composer monitor. Projects – Timeline. This theory knowledge will create background knowledge for editing. QuickTime.2. Replacing Fill Tracks UNIT IV Special Effects Types of Transition Effects – Single and Multiple Effects (Transition & Segment)– Rendering – Key frameable and Non-Key frameable Effects – Defining Motion Paths using Key frames – Layered Effects – Nested Effects – Key Effects (Chroma. OMF) Text book 1. Copying. Replacing. UNIT I Introduction to Video Editing and Avid Editing: Definition. Effect editor. Sequences. Bins. Stages – EDL – Role of Editor – Continuity & Dynamic Editing – Linear & Non-Linear Editing – Physical & Electronic Editing –Control Track & SMPTE Editing – A/B Roll Editing. Compessi. Luma. Fading Titles. Avid Xpress DV User’s Guide Karunya University  Page 388  . San Francisco State University 2. Moving and Deleting Clips in Bins IEEE 1394 – Selecting Deck/Tape. DV Stream. Ronald J.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) This 5 units give theory knowledge about Editing software AVID and workings of it. Sub clips. in the Video post production lab. Video Field Production and Editing. Matte) Freeze Frame – Variable Speed – Strobe Motion – Reverse Motion UNIT V Working with Audio and Exporting Soloing Audio Tracks – Audio Scrubbing – Audio Effect Tool – Audio Mix Tool –Automation Gain Tool – Adjusting Volume in Timeline – Audio EQ Tool – Audio Suite Plug-Ins Mixing Video Tracks – Recording to Tape – Exporting Formats (MPEG-1. Target Drives.Introduction to Avid Xpress DV – Hardware and Software Requirements UNIT II Terminologies and Recording Media files. So with the basic knowledge about AVID. Removing. Audio and Video Channels – Controlling Decks UNIT III Editing and Titling Customizing Monitor Displays – Playing Video in Client Monitor – Loading and Clearing Footage on Monitor – Controlling Playback – Marking and Sub-Cataloging Footage – Setting up a Sequence – Setting up Tracks – Undoing /Redoing Edits – Splice-in Edit & Overwrite Edit – Lifting.

UNIT II PHOTO COMPOSITION Basic Techniques for Better Image. Camera –Types.Speed and Size.Usage.Digital Still Camera. Focal Length.Speed. UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Define -Digital. Picture Format. Desktop Computer Components. a number of activities/ photography assignments may be assigned periodically. LensTypes. Basic Lighting. Mode. methods.Usage. Aperture-Usage. Light Meter. Camera Operation. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY Define Photography. Advantages. Flash.Key Light-Fill Light. Angle of View.Data Storage and Transfer Options. To understand the Techniques Photo Composition To learn the Digital Photography To learn the Applications and Areas of Photography To understand Digital Studio and Commercial projects OUTCOMES: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes. Film.Usage. Digital SLR Camera – Types.Usage. Working with Digital Camera – Major Components and Functions.Usage. Rule of Third. Setup for Digital ImagingWindows and Macintosh. elements of photography and make them to demonstrate/take photograph and recoded it the same may be presented and analyzed. Tripod –Types.Electronic Flash – Selection of Right Flash Mode.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) References: Avid Xpress DV Effects Guide 09MT207 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credit: 3:0:0 OBJECTIVES: • • • • • To understand elements of Photography. Depth of Field. Working with Karunya University  Page 389  . Lights-Types.Types-Usage.Usage. Filters –Types. The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts. Low Key and High Key Picture.File Formats –Converters. finally all the works done by the student to be exhibited/performed and each student to be ranked by the instructor. Brief History and Development of Photography.Usage. Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities. Other Useful Accessories. Software for Digital Processes( Digital Dark Room) -Image Editor. Shutter. Film – Types.

USA. The Manual of Photography (2000) by Ralph E Jacobson/Geoffrey G Attridge/Sidney F Ray. 5. Manpower and budget to run the studio are also explained. 1.Fashion-Travel-Environmental Sports-Indoor/Outdoor. Photo Printers. Photo Power Point Presentation.Photo Quality. Course Outcome: Knowledge gained in this module will help the candidate to design. Storage & Broadcast equipments. Popular Photography Websites. Interior Shots . Corporate Studio. Iippolito.Knopf Publisher. Equipments and Budget. Thomson Delmar Learning. 2. 2. UNIT V DIGITAL STUDIO Photography Project. by Catherine Jamieson/ Sean McCormick -Publisher: Wiley Jamieson and McCormick. Equipments and Budget. build & operate a broadcast or nonbroadcast studio. requirement of Audio. Ninth Edition.Focal Press. infrastructure such as lighting. Digital Portrait Photography and Lighting: Take Memorable Shots Every Time 2005. To describe the designing & construction of studios. by Roger Hicks and Frames Schultz. London . Reference Book: The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) by Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm Mastering the Basics of Photography by Susan McCartney The Photographer’s Handbook. 4.Product. Video. 3. Understanding Digital Photography by Joseph A . Alfred A. 6. The learner will be able to Karunya University  Page 390  . Photo Essay. 1999 by John H edgecoe.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Scanner -Types .2002. Assignments.Scanning Techniques. –Action –Aerial-Macro-Panoramic- 09MT208 STUDIO MANAGEMENT Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: To brief learners on the concept of various broadcast & non-broadcast studios for Radio & Television. Small Budget Studio-Design. power & airconditioning. Graphic. 2003. Rotovision. Photo Documentary.. Printing Paper-Types UNIT IV AREAS OF PHOTOGRAPHY Portrait-Architecture.Film Scanning. Creating Photography Website. They will be able to manage the men. Switzerland. Text Book: 1. material & time efficiently to bring out a video programme and budget it economically. taking care of intricate details.How Printer works. Connecting Images for Internet Use.Design. First edition. Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging( 2001) – Peter K Burian – Publisher Sybex.USA.

Unit V: Fire. Safety.Fire Hazard & Risk Assessment – Prevention of Fire . Security & Legal Issues Work Place Conditions . Material. Unit II: Budgeting & Staffing Scope for generating Income for a broadcast & non-broadcast studio – cost of operating & maintaining a studio – Budgeting for and marketing a TV program / Music Recording – Staff pattern & hierarchy in a mid & large size BS / NBS studio – Roles and responsibilities of creative & non creative staff : Administrative. Lens. Video. CCU. Mounts. Unit I: Essentials of a studio Perception of a studio – Audio. compressors.Tape & E-Library . Cables. Crew & Talents. Lighting Controls. House Lighting. Text Books: 1.Chemical Fire Extinguishers & Fire Fighting Methods . Reference Book: Karunya University  Page 391  . Blue/Green Screen. mixers.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) choosing the right technical equipments for each department and maintain them for skillful functioning of the studio. Video equipments: Cameras. Filters.Sound Proofing Techniques – Crafting a Shooting floor: Stage.Liner & Non Liner Recorders – CAR Room Studio Lighting Equipments: Studio Lights. amplifiers. Unit IV: Recording & Post Production Pre-shoots Technical Checks in Hot studio – Rehearsal & Blocking Technique – Set Etiquettes & Studio Procedure – Establishing Communication & Talkback system – Studio Calls . stand. Modeling studios – Broadcast & Non Broadcast studio – Designing & constructing a studio – Layout – Infrastructural requirements of an ideal studio – Norms for planning Power.Mandatory Government Licenses for filming & broadcasting – Intellectual Property Right – Film Trade Unions – Crew Protocol .A Complete Guide by Martha Mollison published by Allen Unwin – South Asian Edition 2007. Router switch – Patch Bay Monitors .Contracts. Vector scope.Recording Medium & Formats .Shooting Floor & Control Room Dialogue – Non Verbal Cues during shoot .AVG Chain from Studio to Storage .Audience Management – Stagecraft & Show Control Graphic Station . expanders. Unit III: Technical Gear requirement & Usage Equipment for Audio: Different types of microphones. liner & non liner recorders. & Virtual studio – OB Van – Insight into Indian & Inter nation studios. Technical. Vision Mixer. Air-conditioning & Data communication .Electrical Shock – Means to prevent electricity related accidents – Medical Emergency & First Aid – Screening Audience for Security – Preventing Theft & Pilferage – Insurance Cover for Men. Bonds & Agreements of Cast & Talents. monitors. Camera mounts. WFM. Producing Videos . Cast.Basic Transmission Equipments. Building and Vehicles . Grid. cable. Accessories. Supervisory. Connectors. connectors. Set.Hardware & Software for Audio & Video NLE .

Jawahar(E&MT-KU) 09VC201 DYNAMICS OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • • To understand visual and visual communication fundamentals. sociology and ethics Temple grandins views on autism and visual thought -Abstract thought Visual thinking and mental imagery -Implication in visual syntax. Finally all the works done by the student (like design.Visulaisation process Visualisation environment. 2. programme to present and analyze the design. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VISUAL COMMUNICATION Historical Development . Edition 2007.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 1. Studio management – Manual.Informational Graphics . elements of visuals and make design. Film Production Management by Bastian Cleve. methods.Conceptual development . models. published by Focal Press. any activity related to syllabus) to be exhibited and each student to be ranked by the instructor. a number of activities may be assigned periodically. Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities.Tools for visualization. UNIT V SIX IMPORTANT PERSPECTIVES Image Analysis –Typography -Graphics design . The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts .Cartoon –Photography Motion pictures Television and video -Computer graphics -World Wide Web Karunya University  Page 392  . To understand the principles of Principles of visual media communication To learn the Visual Application and visual design To understand Visual language and culture To understand important perspectives Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes.Sensual and perceptual theories UNIT II VISUAL MEDIA Principles of visual media communication -Video medium Non Projected audio visuals -Scientific visual media Creative visualization UNIT III VISUAL APPLICATION Rendering and rasterisation -Visual perception -Information design Communication design -Graphic design –Cartoons UNIT IV VISUAL LANGUAGE AND CULTURE Study of Visuality -World culture -Visual rehetoric. prepared by Tony M.

Principles of design. Role of computers in designing. DTP (Desk Top Publishing). Language of design: white space. pictures.text & visuals. working with colors. Differences in features of Quark Xpress and Page Maker. typography and drawing programs.features & advantages. hardware & software requirements. fonts. UNIT III MS Office and its applications MS Word – tools.office and corel draw UNIT I Introduction to computers History and generation of computers . UNIT IV Corel DRAW basics Karunya University  Page 393  . Paul martin. rhythm.PowerPoint. PageMaker.visual media communication (2001) – Authors press – New Delhi 09VC202 COMPUTERS IN COMMUNICATION DESIGN – I Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: This course is useful for students • To understand history software and hardware of computers • To gain knowledge in communication design • To understand the basic concepts of Ms office its applications and basics and features of corel draw Course Outcome: The students will have a sound knowledge on computers and its application such as MS. page layout and design.Basics of computers -Hardware & Software . UNIT II Communication Design Definition. word processing techniques. Fundamentals of layout. Application of computers in the media industry.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Text Book: 1. applications and advantages. Principles of design: Unity.Operating systems. Quark Xpress – features. Design process. Elements of design. Multimedia – evolution. balance. Visual communication (2008) Global vision publishing house – New Delhi. proportion. movement . Pradeep mandav.working with text. nature & scope. 2. working with graphics & formatting. MS Excel – features & utility. tools & applications. Visual communication images with messages by paul Mrtin lester(2008) wordsworth – United states REFERENCE: 1.

saving drawings .Features and documentaries. News report.acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras . redoing. talk programmes.features Corel Draw. and scrolling . serials. storyboard.adding and accessing drawing information . script format. Course Outcome: Here the students learn the technique and aesthetic in writing for TV. Unit – I Idea Vs Media.backing up and recovering files . Interview/Discussions.Ground rules for writing for different time chunks. narration.U.zooming. IDG Books. prime time programme. 2000 2. afternoon programme. writing for radio commentary Unit – III Writing for both radio and TV . developing ideas and conceptualization. Tele Writing scripts for TV Commercials – format for TV Commercials – preparing the story board and art direction.Standard toolbar . and using music.instruction. Unit – IV Writing for TV . special effects and other supporting components of CorelDraw . to use celebrities – voice – over. and repeating actions . This helps in the other course that is related to productions stages. late night programme. other genres.Workspace tools .Exploring the toolbox . Edward Willet.choosing viewing modes working with views .Corel DRAW workspace . Presentation . mood and experience.finding content . terms used for camera movement and editing.features & tools.S. Writng jingles and radio commercial – Idea – Strategy – Brand Positioning – Preparing Creative blue print. First edition 09VC203 WRITING FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA Credit4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the students to the technique and aesthetics of writing for different forms of electronic media programmes. Deke Mc Celland. Women. Unit – V Karunya University  Page 394  . UNIT V Corel Draw. MS Office – Bible. Scripting. writing headlines. corporate programmes.by Jorge Frascara (Editor) Publisher: Allworth Press. IDG Books. Text Book: 1.exploring basic tasks. News writing. Writing to inform. Writing the script for electronic media . farmers and Youth .Application window .script design.A. Corel Draw for Dummies.starting and opening drawings . treatments. TV spot techniques Idea presentation.commercials.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Vector graphics and bitmaps . 1997 REFERENCES : Designing Effective Communications (2001): Creating Contexts for Clarity And Meaning .for special audiences: programme for children. variety and comedy .undoing. panning. soap operas. working with vector/raster images. big idea. Radio. Unit –II Spoken language writing -Writing for radio and TV commercials and announcements. voiceover and narration.previewing a drawing . and Internet.

Unit II: Oral Communication Human Language: Para & Sub Language – Principle of effective oral communication .Downward.1993. which need to be identified & corrected. Production problems.Barry Humps .Dwight Swan . Filtering & Distortion of Message.7 Cs of communication . This will make the learner understand the concepts of communication and how effectiveness in oral.Hastings House . written.. Unit III: Written & Formal Communication Essentials of written communication – Media of Written communication – Merits & demerits of written communication . The barrier & noise distort communication affecting many enterprises. non-verbal & Mass communication work together to improves the productivity and efficiency of an organization. Writing. ways for effective listening. Film Script Writing .Hastings House .Syd Field .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Play writing . 2.Preparation of speech.Functions and Classification of communication – Communication Noise. scenes and sequences.Media of oral communication. script and its formats and storyboard. treatment. Barrier of Communication – Organizational.Classification and characteristics of formal communication . Nature.Effective feedback skills.6Ws & 1H of Communication .New York -1976. Elements & Objectives of communication Essentials of good communication . 09VC204 FUNDAMENTALS OF MASS COMMUNICATION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: The fundamental of communication which is essential for an administrator or an entrepreneur to excel in his endeavour is outlined in this module. Peers.A Inc . Screen Writing for narrative Film and Television . upward.Overcoming barriers. Course Outcome: The knowledge on various modes & use of channels of communication will help the learner to be an efficient manager in his business or job by effectively communicating amoung his subordinates.S. This module will help in this direction. Text Book: 1.Narrative structure. & Supervisors. Reference: 1.William Miller .New York -1976. Script Writing for Video and Audio media . Characterization. diagonal & Horizontal communication channel .Columbus books – London 1989.Dell Publishing Co. Personal & Psychological . Screenplay -The Foundations of Screen Writing . Communication Load. Techniques & Guidelines – Interpersonal Communication . 2.Process.Dwight Swan . Structure variation.Penguin U. Semantic. Source & Type of noise. Unit I: Introduction to Communication The Definition and Nature of communication . Characteristics and Kind of Feedback – Feedback in oral & written feedback . shot breakdown and film genre. Video Script Writing .Importance of listening – Who is a good listener & the reason for poor listening – Barriers to listening. 3.Organizational Patterns & Hierarchy of communication Meaning. Style Advantages & disadvantages of Oral Communication . conflict and resolution. Karunya University  Page 395  .

Colour in design: colour theory. Air Brush Tool. New Delhi – Edition 2007 Reference: 1.Rayudu published by Himalaya Publishing House – Edition July 2008. Smudge Tool. Photoshop Workspace. illustration techniques. Artifacts. Gerbners’s Model. Morgue Tool. design and composition. 2. Zoom Tool. Paint Brush Tool.Magic Bullet Theory. Choosing Color.Proximix. The important component of this programme is to enrich the knowledge of photoshop in image editing.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit IV: Non Verbal & Informal Communication Meaning. Lasso Tool. Focus Tool.Classification of Mass Media – Top 10 Media Outlets . colours and meanings. Communication by C. Mass Communication in India by Keval J. Paint Bucket Tool. colour combinations. Logo design.S. Magi Wand. Importance. Distributors. • To learn the application of design. Operations and Usage of Tools. Lasswell Model.Pencil Tool. psychology of colours. Toning. Text Tool. Principles & Practices of Mass Communication by Ved Prakash Gandhi Kanishka Publishers. Unit II INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL IMAGING Define Photoshop. functions & Forms of NV communication – Body Language . and light & shadow in image editing.Distinctions between formal & informal communication . Shannon & Weaver Model. application and techniques in design. Buttons. UNIT I DESIGN PROCESS Conceptualization. creativity in design. traditional and modern designs – technology in designing. Two Step Theory – Berlo’s SMRC Model.Rumours & Grapevine Spread of rumours and control – Merits & demerits of informal communication. Eye Dropper. Test Book: 1. Karunya University  Page 396  . & Chromics – Meaning & Nature of Informal Communication – Reasons for informal communication . Gradient Tool. Haptics. types of design.Factors for selecting right media – Advertising & Public Relation – Publicity & Propaganda – Theories & Models of Communication . Unit V: Mass Communication Definition of Mass Communication . Palettes. • To identify the application of Photoshop software. Gate Keeping Model. Text and Images: typography. Kinesics. Kumar published by Jaico Publishing House – Edition 2007 09VC205 COMPUTERS IN COMMUNICATION DESIGN – II Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the workings of image editing. • To learn the techniques of photoshop in image editing Outcome: Students should be equipped with photoshop application so that they may be able to edit the image appropriately.styles and features. colour. Brush Shape. stages involved.

To learn the Layout Design 5. a number of activities may be assigned periodically.July 2007 2. Leading. Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities. UNIT IV DIGITAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES Working with layers – masking – filters – text editing – background – fore ground – colour palette selection – histogram in photographs – hue – saturation – value – modes & adjustments – saving files Digital Image.July 2007 09VC206 VISUALISATION OF COMMERCIAL ARTS Credit 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVES: 1. 2.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit III DIGITAL IMAGE MANIPULATION Features of Photoshop – Image editing – image selection – image resizing – image manipulation . Clone Align. Create Layer. the students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts . Trashcan. Photoshop CS3 Photographer's Handbook By Brad Hinkel. models. Digital Inputs. Art Layers. Digital color Process UNIT V ADOBE PHOTOSHOP ADVANTAGES Photoshop Short cut keys and menus. Plug ins. To understand the Process of Visualisation 3. Dynamic Learning: Photoshop CS3 By Jennifer Smith. Types. Layer Mark. Rule of Thumb. To learn the Applications Commercial arts 4. methods. Fill Tool. Art Filter. Cloning. Aquent Graphics Institute (AGI) . Kerning. Stephen Laskevitch . To understand elements of visualization.Art Marks. TEXT BOOKS: 1. programme to present and analyze the design. Finally all the works done by the student (like design . any activity related to syllabus) to be exhibited and each student to be ranked by the instructor. To understand Computers in Commercial Production COURSE OUTCOMES: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes. UNIT – I VISUALISATION Mass media and creative – Creativity in Production – Need for Visualization – definition and elements of visualization-visual persuasion in advertising Karunya University  Page 397  . elements of visuals and make design. File Formats. Digital Workflow -Digital Press. Digital Image on Various Media.

Choosing a basic design. Analysis. UNIT – V COMPUTERS IN COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION Managing cost and quality in commercial production – material inputs – Black and white and color – Pantone color matching system – Artist’s tool kit – Computer applications in creative industries. Synthesis. 1998. Layout . Color. UNIT-I: Semiconductors Semiconductor Theory: Introduction to semiconductor-energy band description of semiconductor-types of semiconductor (intrinsic and extrinsic)-p-n junction and its properties. 2. wadsworth.2000. Sequence. Evaluation – creative inputs – issues of plagiarism in creative production. Shape. Prentice Hall. Frank Ramano et al. Richard Schlemmer. Prentice Hall. Texture. Size. To discuss in detail the operation of the control unit and arithmetic operations. UNIT .p-n junction diode – photo diode and Zener diode. Preparation.III: Digital Systems Karunya University  Page 398  .II: Transistors Transistor: Basic operation and characteristics of Junction FET. Paul martin lester. Text Book: 1. NY. Working with copy and visuals – Camera ready pages – Designing software. Emphasis. Handbook of Advertising Art Production.application of creativity in designing. 2. Tension and surprise.II PROCESS OF VISUALISATION Creative process: Orientation.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) UNIT. UNIT – III COMMERCIAL ARTS Commercial art Vs Fine art – Fundamental elements of design – Line. UNIT – IV LAYOUT DESIGN Structuring of message. New York REFERENCE: 1. ‘visual communication. Unity. 09VC207 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND COMPUTER HARDWARE Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: 1. To provide a thorough discussion of the fundamentals of computer architecture and basic electronics.characteristics of MOSFET– Enhancement MOSFET. Space – Design principles – Balance. Proportion.Steps in designing. Semiconductor Devices: Semiconductor diode . Ideation. Incubation. Australia. Unit . Encyclopedia of Graphic Communication. Depletion MOSFET – Comparison of JFET and MOSFET.

1997. Film – Types. multiplication. TMH. Sixth Edition. PHI. a number of activities/ photography assignments may be assigned periodically. simplification of logic functions using karnaugh map. division – floating point arithmetic operation. Text books 1.Usage. Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities.Types-Usage. Unit – IV Arithmetic And Logic Unit Fixed point arithmetic operation – addition. 2. William Stallings. Floyd. substraction. Filters –Types. Brief History and Development of Photography. The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts. elements of photography and make them to demonstrate/take photograph and recoded it the same may be presented and analyzed. Lights-Types.Speed and Size. Light Meter.. Reference Books 1. Puri V. “Digital Fundamentals”. Sixth Edition. John P. Camera –Types.Usage. Unit – IV Computer Hardware Basic structure of computer hardware – Von Neumann Architecture – functional units – Instruction Formats and Instruction Types – Addressing Modes. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY Define Photography. 2001. McGraw Hill. 3. Flash. Robert Boylestad. • To understand the Techniques Photo Composition • To learn the Digital Photography • To learn the Applications and Areas of Photography • To understand Digital Studio and Commercial projects OUTCOMES: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes. 9th edition 2006. LensTypes. Karunya University  Page 399  . 09VC208 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credit 4:0:0 OBJECTIVES: • To understand elements of Photography.K. “Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory”. PHI. Third Edition.Usage.Usage. “Computer Organization & Architecture”. finally all the works done by the student to be exhibited/performed and each student to be ranked by the instructor. Tripod –Types.Hayes. Film. Other Useful Accessories.Usage.Usage. Computer Organization and Architecture. 2. methods. “Digital Electronics”.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Number system – Boolean algebra – logic gates – semiconductor memory – Microprocessor.Electronic Flash – Selection of Right Flash Mode. Pearson education.

7. UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Define -Digital. Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging (2001) – Peter K Burian – Publisher Sybex. Focal Length. Desktop Computer Components. 2003. Connecting Images for Internet Use. Aperture-Usage.Digital Still Camera. Depth of Field. Rotovision.Photo Quality. Camera Operation.File Formats –Converters. Mode. First edition. 6.Scanning Techniques. 1999 by John H edgecoe. Photo Power Point Presentation.USA. Angle of View.Fashion-Travel-Environmental Sports-Indoor/Outdoor. –Action –Aerial-Macro-Panoramic- 09VC209 AUDIO ENGINEERING Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: Karunya University  Page 400  . Iippolito. Picture Format. Photo Printers.Design. Digital SLR Camera – Types. Advantages. REFERENCE: 1.2002. London .How Printer works.Data Storage and Transfer Options. The Manual of Photography (2000) by Ralph E Jacobson/Geoffrey G Attridge/Sidney F Ray.Usage.Knopf Publisher. Mastering the Basics of Photography by Susan McCartney 4.USA. Equipments and Budget.. Working with Digital Camera – Major Components and Functions.Speed. Corporate Studio. Shutter. Interior Shots .Key Light-Fill Light. by Roger Hicks and Frames Schultz.Focal Press. Software for Digital Processes( Digital Dark Room) -Image Editor.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) UNIT II PHOTO COMPOSITION Basic Techniques for Better Image. Working with Scanner -Types . Basic Lighting. The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) by Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm 3. Equipments and Budget. Small Budget Studio-Design.Product. UNIT V DIGITAL STUDIO Photography Project. Text Book: 1. Digital Portrait Photography and Lighting: Take Memorable Shots Every Time 2005. Ninth Edition. Alfred A. Thomson Delmar Learning. Rule of Third. Photo Essay. Creating Photography Website. Popular Photography Websites.Film Scanning. The Photographer’s Handbook. Setup for Digital ImagingWindows and Macintosh. 2. Printing Paper-Types UNIT IV AREAS OF PHOTOGRAPHY Portrait-Architecture. by Catherine Jamieson/ Sean McCormick -Publisher: Wiley Jamieson and McCormick. Photo Documentary. Low Key and High Key Picture. Understanding Digital Photography by Joseph A . Switzerland. 5. Assignments.

Basic Analog Mixing.Microphone techniques for stereo .Headphones for stereo monitoring.Technical monitoring .Tape standards .Cassette quality .Ear safety .Technology .The basic channel .Gate .Recording Punching .Effect processors .Parametric EQ-Graphic EQ .Aural monitoring Output Transducers . Unit IV: Basics of Live Sound Engineering Need for Sound Reinforcement .Analog Recording devices and systems .Inputs and connections . Unit III: Analog Recording Objectives and problems in recording .Sidechain .Reference voltages in audio signals .channel differences -Stereo loudspeaker matching .Types of Microphones .Two track systems .MOH .Equalizers .Electrical safety .Manual control of levels .Fire safety.Head and tape cleanliness .Head alignment .Delay .Polar responses .Electronic level control .Indoor systems Outdoor Systems .Signal processors .Limiter .Specific applications of microphones .Tape speeds Transport controls .Signal flow .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) The students will be taught about Audio related Engineering fundamentals and the techniques involved in Audio production.Filters .Basic PA systems . Unit V: Digital Audio Basic Principles – Analog vs Digital – Analog to Digital Converter – Digital to Analog Converter – Application of Digital Audio – Digital audio hardware .Safety .The fundamentals of magnetic recording .FOH .Flanger .Multi track systems .Dynamic processors .Editing .Full Range sound Reinforcement systems .Balanced wiring .Audio lines and Patchbays.Storage medium – Karunya University  Page 401  .Output stage .Choice of Equipment .Shelving EQ .Applications .Chorus .Important features of a mixer .Microphones .Expander .Mechanical safety .Phase .Professional and domestic standards .Semi parametric Eq .ATR .Phaser .Paragraphic EQ – Talkback .Reverb .Phantom power .General Maintenance .Loudspeaker .Compressor .TTL .Auto punch .Noise reduction .Production of the different polar responses . Unit I: Analog Audio Input Transducers .formats . Unit II: Audio Engineering Fundamentals Sound mixers .Methods of producing inter . Course Outcome This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically aware of the Technologies and Production systems in the Audio Industry.Routing .Multiband compressor .

Paul White. Ken Pohlmann. To learn the types of animation compositing techniques and post production in 2D animation Unit I : Types of Animation.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Digital mixers – Digital audio workstation –Editing – Mixing production for Video. 3rd edition. Sanctuary Publications. 2006. Types of animation: Traditional Animation – Cell Animation.Mastering – Audio Post 1. Clay Animation . Karunya University  Page 402  . Stop motion Animation .writing scripts – creating an application – working with layers – layout tools – drawing – creating symbols – adding animation and navigation – adding text – creating timeline action. Disney animation – Japanese animation – Russian animation – Comparative study of different animation styles – basic anatomy – proportions – staging – posing – timing – actions Unit III : Preproduction Scripting – storyboard screen play – timing – duration – Character design – Turn around – colour schemes – attitudes – props. “Basic Live Sound”.Styles of animation – Principles of animation. Focal Press. 3. David Simons. 2003. “Principles of Digital Audio”. Unit II : Different Animation Styles. 2002. To make the students understand about the 2D animation production. Reference Books 1. Cutout Animation . Unit IV : Software interface Creating a document – creating accessible flash content . Backbeat Books. Tools for 2D animation : Colour keys – background – layout – source of light – styles – paper sources – paper quality. “Sound Engineering Explained”. 3rd Edition. 2nd Edition.Michael Talbot-Smith. 09VC210 2D GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the animation techniques. “Analog Recording”. Text Book . Computer Generated Animation – 2D Animation Vs 3D Animation . 1995 2. McGraw-Hill.

Second edition 2007. To learn the art of script preparation.daily soaps.concept making Idea-seed of the programme-creative inspiration-visual thinking-discussion with team-format of the programme-types of formats like-news. Unit-I Basic . Reference Book: 1.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit V : Compositing Special Effects – Foley – sound design – software packages – US animation – Flash animation – animation pass -= compositing animation actions – compositing backgrounds – scanning images – compositing cels – compositing objects.angles& camera movements-introduction -lighting and colors-single camera –multicamera production-indoor studio-outdoor -properties. Character Animation: 2D Skills for Better 3D.plot-story-characterdialogue script formats –proposal-treatment-develop steps in script writing. Unit II Basic elements in script Script-visual writing-budget-target audience-steps of developing concept. Timing for Animation (Paperback) by Harold Whitaker . 09VC211 PRE PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn pre production techniques in film production.documentaries-interview-TV programme-adscommercial-special programmes. Steve Roberts. To create the concept for a production.III Basic production technique Basic shot . Focal press. John Halas 3. Unit. Unit IV Steps in pre production Shooting script-story board-scene-sequence break up-character –main character-relief charactersubsidiary character-character introduction important of dialogues-dialogue writing . Cartoon Animation (The Collector's Series) (Paperback) by Preston Blair 4. Karunya University  Page 403  . Knowing the process of video production techniques and the various script formats.dramatic points in the story-twist in plot. The Animator's Workbook: Step-By-Step Techniques of Drawn Animation [ILLUSTRATED] (Paperback) by Tony White 2.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO EQUIPMENTS DIGITAL VIDEO CAMERA – TYPES OF VIDEO CAMERAS – FORMAT – MAJOR ACCESSORIES – CAMERA FORMATS – CAMERA OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS – APERTURE – SHUTTER – WHITE BALANCE – FOCUSING METHODS .FOCAL LENGTH – DEPTH OF FIELD – VIDEO SIGNAL – VIDEO FORMAT. The important component of this programme is to impart the aesthetics of film direction so that the student become capable of producing a show effectively. Antony Friedman” writing for visual media”-focal press 2. UNIT II THE SHOT ELEMENTS OF THE SHOT: THE SHOT – DEFINITION.daily soaps—documentaries-interview-film. Text books 1. Dwight V Swain “film script writing”-focal press 2. MISE-EN-SCENE: ASPECTS OF MISE-ENSCENE – LIGHTING IN A SHOT – SETTING ASPECT IN A SHOT – CHARACTER EXPRESSION AND MOVEMENT – COSTUME AND MAKEUP OF THE CHARACTER .THE REALISM OF MISE-EN-SCENE – THE POWER OF MISE-EN-SCENE – TIME AND SPACE IN MISE-EN-SCENE Karunya University  Page 404  .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit-V Various script formats Script writingvarious formats –news-TV programme-ads-proms-commercial-special programme. Martha Mollison ” producing videos”-focal press 09VC212 ELEMENTS OF VIDEO PRODUCTION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the aesthetics of video production • To identify the elements of shot. • To learn the camera options and production techniques. John Hart “the art of the story board”-focal press Reference books 1. • To understand the continuity of shots • To learn the editing principles Outcome: Students should be equipped with the video production skills so that they may be able to direct the production.

LIGHTING FOR A SCENE – COLOUR TEMPERATURE – DOLLY – TROLLEY – GRIPS AND CAMERA ACCESSORIES – TRIPOD – MONTAGE – LIGHTING EQUIPMENTS. LIGHTING DIRECTOR.CAMERA MOVEMENT – CAMERA FRAMING – CAMERA ANGLE – DURATION OF THE SHOT – LONG TAKE. LOCATION SCOUTING . SCENE. FILM ART – DAVID BOARDWELL – THIRTEENTH EDITION REFERENCE BOOK 1. SEQUENCE. FOCAL PRESS – 2001 2. STORY BOARD TYPES OF SCRIPT. VIDEO PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES – ZETTL .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) UNIT III THE PRODUCTION CINEMATOGRAPHY PROPERTIES – BASIC TYPES OF SHOT .THE CREW – DIRECTOR. UNIT IV TYPES OF PRODUCTION SINGLE CAMERA PRODUCTION: THE SHOT.. MULTI CAMERA PRODUCTION – REHEARSAL – FLOOR MANAGER . To understand the Media Laws In India To learn the Civil And Criminal Laws related to Media To understand the Broadcasting Code And Ethics To understand the cyber laws in India COURSE OUTCOMES: Karunya University  Page 405  . TEXT BOOKS: 1. MUSIC DIRECTOR. PRODUCTION ASSISTANT. ART DIRECTOR. DIMENSIONS OF FILM SOUND – VOICE OVER – DUBBING – RE-RECORDING – TITLING – ADDING SPECIAL EFFECTS. DIGITAL CINEMATOGRAPHY – PAUL WHEELER.THE PRODUCTION PHASE.2002 09VC213 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS IN INDIA Credit 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVES: • • • • • To understand Overview of the Indian constitution. CAMERAMAN. SCRIPT WRITER.DOCUMENTARY PRODUCTION – SHORT FILM PRODUCTION – ELECTRONIC FIELD PRODUCTION – TALK SHOWSINTERVIEWS. GAFFER. UNIT IV UNDERSTANDING THE POST PRODUCTION ONLINE PRODUCTION – OFFLINE PRODUCTION – THE EDL – DIMENSIONS OF EDITING – SPATIAL – RHYTHMIC – GRAPHIC – TEMPORAL EDITING .CONTINUITY EDITING.. ETC.

press ownership and monopolies. Broadcasting Bill. Piracy. UNIT I: INDIAN CONSTITUTION Overview of the Indian constitution. The News Paper (prices and Pages)Act 1956. Fundamental Rights. UNIT IV: CODE AND ETHICS Recommendations of press commission I and II. Functions of Executive. Duties of citizens . Mac Bridge report. finally all the works done by the student to be exhibited/performed and each student to be ranked by the instructor. Defence of India Act. Delivery of Books and News paper (public libraries)Act. Broadcasting policies.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. UNIT V: CYBER LAWS IN INDIA Nature and scope of cyber laws. Self regulation and code of ethics. Digital signature . Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. Indian Press Laws Karunya University  Page 406  . convergences bill. Copy right Act and IPR. Judiciary. censorship and control of the press. Provision for amending the constitution. Introduction to Indian Constitution. Law of the Press in India. methods. Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities. Practice hall of india(2003) REFERENCES 1. Cable TV Networks (regulations)Act. the press(objectionable matters)Act 1957. a number of activities/assignments/face-to-face with advocates may be assigned periodically. The Cinematographic Act 1952. Press Council Act. Drugs and magic remedies Act UNIT III: CIVIL AND CRIMINAL LAWS Laws of Libel and defamation. Practice Hall of India(2003) 2. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Centre-state relations UNIT II: MEDIA LAWS IN INDIA PRB Act 1867. Basu. The right to Publish and right to privacy. Provisions for declaring Emergency. Domain name registration issues. freedom of the press and restrictions these upon. Basu. Radha Krishna Murthi . and make them to discuses and recoded it the same programme may be presented and analyzed. Legislative. New IT Law IT 2000. Right to Information and Official Secrets Act. Trade Mark Act and patents Act. Act regarding to working journalists. Media council and media ombudsman in the world.Directive principles of state policy. Powers and Privileges of Parliament. Various committees of broadcasting. Text Book: 3. The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts.

Fading Titles. So with the basic knowledge about AVID. Projects – Timeline. Stages – EDL – Role of Editor – Continuity & Dynamic Editing – Linear & Non-Linear Editing – Physical & Electronic Editing –Control Track & SMPTE Editing – A/B Roll Editing. 4. Principles. Matte) Freeze Frame – Variable Speed – Strobe Motion – Reverse Motion Karunya University  Page 407  . Replacing. Sequences. UNIT I – Introduction to Video Editing and Avid Editing: Definition. in the Video post production lab. Sub clips. Audio and Video Channels –Controlling Decks UNIT III – Editing and Titling Customizing Monitor Displays – Playing Video in Client Monitor – Loading and Clearing Footage on Monitor – Controlling Playback – Marking and Sub-Cataloging Footage – Setting up a Sequence – Setting up Tracks – Undoing /Redoing Edits – Splice-in Edit & Overwrite Edit – Lifting. Distributors 09VC214 NON LINEAR EDITING Credit 0:0:4 Course Objectives: 1. Replacing Fill Tracks UNIT IV – Special Effects Types of Transition Effects – Single and Multiple Effects (Transition & Segment)– Rendering – Key frameable and Non-Key frameable Effects – Defining Motion Paths using Key frames – Layered Effects – Nested Effects – Key Effects (Chroma. Effect editor. R. Clips. To acquire the editing and titling skills. Removing. Course Outcome: This 5 units give theory knowledge about Editing software AVID and workings of it. Copying. Effect palette. Composer monitor.Introduction to Avid Xpress DV – Hardware and Software Requirements UNIT II – Terminologies and Recording Media files. 3. Extracting and Copying Segments – Slip Trim & Slide Trim – Finding Frames and Clips Titling: Editing. This theory knowledge will create background knowledge for editing. Press in the Indian Constitution.K Ravindran. Target Drives. Bins.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 3. To understand the terminologies and concepts of Avid video editing software. Moving and Deleting Clips in Bins IEEE 1394 – Selecting Deck/Tape. Luma. Indian Publishers. To know the different types of editing. To learn adding special effects and mixing audio with the visuals in Avid. Source monitor – Tool palette – Bin Views –Importing. 2.

Avid Xpress DV Effects Guide 09VC215 VISUAL ART LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To educate the students in drawing. San Francisco State University 2. OMF) Text book 1. Foundation b. Light and shadow b.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) UNIT V – Working with Audio and Exporting Soloing Audio Tracks – Audio Scrubbing – Audio Effect Tool – Audio Mix Tool –Automation Gain Tool – Adjusting Volume in Timeline – Audio EQ Tool – Audio Suite Plug-Ins Mixing Video Tracks – Recording to Tape – Exporting Formats (MPEG-1. Elements of art a. This subject will enable the students to visualize of their own and will help them to create an appropriate visual through the application of perspective composition and light and shadow 1. QuickTime. Shape d. Colour composition Karunya University  Page 408  . Video Field Production and Editing. DV Stream. Linear perspective d.2. Aerial perspective e. Avid Xpress DV User’s Guide References: 1. Sixth Edition. Space f. Form c. Compessi. MPEG. Texture 2. Ronald J. Line b. Basic shapes in perspective c. Composition a. Point perspective 3. Colour e. Perspective Drawing a. Value g.

Drawing landscapes 5. School Zone c. d. 7. 4. Drawing still life 6. Design a POP using Corel Draw 9. Drawing objects 9. Drawing birds 8. b. Proportion 4. It will enable the students to learn various designing process and print production. Design a single fold Menu card. Design a ‘visiting card’ & ‘letter head’ for any five famous Banks Executives. Blind curve Karunya University  Page 409  . e. 2D Graphic – CorelDraw12 (Latest Version) 2.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) c. 3. Tech-Electronics & Media Technology 2. Design a ‘calendar’ to be published by Department of Electronics and Media Technology 5. Speed breaker b. Hospital Zone d.LAB I – COREL DRAW Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: The course imparts the techniques and the application of the software coral draw so that the leaner will come across to produce an appropriate design. Matriculation School Hospital Non Government organization Visually impaired School B. Design New Sign board for the following a. Design the ‘label’ & package cover of any consumer product. Drawing animals 7. The practical will include 1. Design the ‘CD cover’ to be brought out by our college Music Band. Design a dangler using Corel Draw 8. Design a ‘2-fold greeting card’ for an occasion of your choice. Introduction to human figure 09VC216 CREATIVE SUIT . Adobe illustrator Exercises 1. Design a ‘logo’ for an a. 6. c. Hotels e. Drawing architectures 10. 10.

c. Anatomy Drawing a. Here in the creating the twenty types of Visualization will be developing their skill in Photoshop and their creative in using Photoshop. Course Outcome With the basic knowledge of Photoshop. Modelling human forms. Text : Drawing and Anatomy – Victor Perard 09VC218 CREATIVE SUIT – LAB II –PHOTOSHOP Credit 0:0:2 Course Objectives: To provide opportunities to the students to prepare certain exercises for possible demonstration of skills acquired by them to the specific level of acceptable performance. d. g. h. i. 1. Terracotta b.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 09VC217 APPLIED ART LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To learn the anatomy of the human parts through the drawing principles and perspective. f. Modelling shapes c. b. 2. e. Proportion of the human body The skeleton The head and neck The torso The arm The hand The leg The foot The Ecorche and face Study of expressions. Clay modelling a. j. Need to Design 20 advertisements using any one the Types of Layout • Karunya University  Page 410  .

TYPES OF LAYOUTS Big picture Big copy Omni bus Mortise Free form Scatter Continuity strip 09VC219 APPLIED PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To learn the types of photography. 7. Visual of the product alone. 4. Special effects. To learn the lighting techniques. 4. Dramatization of the headline. To learn the techniques of photographying various subjects. 5. Dramatizing a detail (in the product) 9. 2. 3. 2. Contrast between before and after using the product. 8.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) TYPES OF VISUALIZATION 1. LIST OF LAB WORKS: 1. Visual of the product in the package. Symbolism. 5. 10. 6. Visual in use. (logo) Continuity strip Mood setting visual. Indoor photography Outdoor photography Portrait photography Architecture photography Product photography Fashion photography Page 411  Karunya University  . Abstract illustration. Dramatization of the evidence. 12. Visuals using Trade Characters. Visual of the product ingredients or raw materials. Visual of a benefit from using the product.(freezing movements) Montage Visual with models. 11. Comparison between two brands. 6. Visual of the product in a setting where it is used. 3. Visual showing the loss or disadvantage resulting from not using the advertised product.

Action photography 10. d. b. Software interface a. d. Aerial photography 11. To make the students understand the process of 2d animation production in studios. Sports and Panoramic photography 09VC220 2D ANIMATION LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course objective: To train the students in the area of 2D Animation and its software application. Environmental photography 9. Model sheet 14. Basic animation & principles a. The Pre-production Phase a. f. The students will be trained the area of character designing and concept designing in 2D animation List of Practical 11. The lines Basic formation of shapes Basic formation of characters Head formation Expressions Character actions 12. Character designing a. b. Travel photography 8. Character creation c. Concept drawing b. Screen layout Karunya University  Page 412  .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 7. e. Squash and Stretch Follow through and overlapping actions Timing Exaggeration 13. Macro photography 12. c. Story board 15. c.

Radio Edit 5. Live multi-tracking of one instrument and vocals using Zoom H4 6. Interview Production (Outdoor) 4. Tweening 19. Camera movement 21. Inbetweens & Secondary actions 18. e. Key frame. Recording and editing narration with BGM 2. Motion guide 22. Music Production and Audio Post Production for Video using Digital Audio Workstations. Basic drawing tools Animating rough blue and planning red Setup and Marking menus Working with Layers Light setup 16. Overdubbing of one instrument in stereo with vocals 7. Recording SFX using Zoom H4 8. c. Frame by frame animation 17. Embedding video 09VC221 AUDIO PRODUCTION LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: The students will be practically taught to apply Audio production techniques involved in Radio Production. d. Interview Production (Indoor) 3. Music and Effects 09VC222 PREPRODUCTION TECHNIQUE LAB Credit 0:0:2 Karunya University  Page 413  . Automated Dialogue Replacement 10. f.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) b. Course Outcome: This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically operational in the Audio Industry List of Exercises: 1. Background & Compositing for animation 20. Ambient Sound Sampling using Zoom H4 9.

Course Outcome: Making of this seven Television programs in Two or single camera set-up is real hand on experience for the student in the TV Program process. Plot Treatment Proposal Basic shot. 4. Concept &idea 4. 3. 2. 4. angles& camera movements. They learn all the technical’s that is related to making of a program in production stage and post production stages PRODUCTION FOR TV Types of TV Programme – 1. Knowing the process of video production techniques and the various script formats. 1. 7. Basic components of story board 5. Formats of script 3.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Course Objective: To learn practically pre production techniques in film production. Shooting script Story board Scripting and story board 1. 5. 6. To create the concept for a production. 8. Design & composition of color &light 09VC223 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To introduce students to the profession of producing programme for TV.Two Camera Set -up Drama Page 414  Karunya University  . 3. To learn the art of script preparation. Basics of Script 2. Indoor – Single Camera set-up Interview Outdoor – Single Camera set-up Interview Educational Shows. 9. 2.sequence breakup Script writing. Dialogue writing Scene .

Writing the screenplay. flowchart. 09VC224 MULTIMEDIA LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To create e-page. Include summary. LIST OF LAB WORKS : 1.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 5. PSA 6. prepare the storyboard and cue sheet etc. Editing the visual. editing the sound track. Video Production: Prepare storyboard and shoot a short video production Karunya University  Page 415  . Submit a PDF copy. Equipments and location – the shooting.scheduling. Making the choice of the crew. 6. 8. Game Shows 7. Typefaces and Graphics: Create 1 vector and 1 bitmap graphic 4. Facing Production Problems . User Interface Design & Graphics II: Create a user interface . Preproduction & Presentation Graphics: Create a 5 slide presentation in your favorite presentation graphics application. Aim for a cohesive look. power point presentations and desktop publishing. Multimedia Sound: Create 2 soundtracks and 2 EFX sounds 9. element and resource lists. E-PAGE with visual aid 2. Anchor. Editing – Grammar of editing. Grammar of Out-door Production. Three phases of production should be included • • • • • • Formulating the concept and doing the research. Desktop Publishing: Create a 2-page desktop-published "newsletter. (Powerpoint) 3. Include 2 backgrounds and 1 button set. developing the Plot. breakdown of scripts. Production Planning and Design: Create a proposal for your final project." Submit a PDF copy 5. some legal issues in production. 7. budgeting. Teamwork and work ethics. News Reader. contracts. Desktop Publishing: Create a 2-page desktop-published "newsletter." Submit a PDF copy. Transitions.

School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 10. ONLINE EDIT . Its helps those to learn basic.Drama 5.Educational Shows. Create three basic Web pages using Dreamweaver 09VC225 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objective: To introduce students to the profession of editing in NLE and give the professional exercise of basic editing. EDIT. ONLINE EDIT _ Game Shows 7. Course Outcome: Here its hand on experience in EDIT Suit for the students to edit the visuals according to the category.Indoor – Single Camera set-up Interview(CUT TO CUT) 2. Digital Video: Use video capture to digitize your video shoot ro another video source to create short production (20-30 seconds) 11.Two Camera Set -up 4.Outdoor – Single Camera set-up Interview(CUT TO CUT) 3. AVID is been used here to edit the visuals. List of experiments : 1. EDIT-Music Album NOTE: Edit note should be prepared and the visuals should be done accordingly. EDIT. EDIT . Course Outcome: Basics of HTML helps and guides the student how to create a web page on own with sources code without the help of the other automatic software’s. so that it Karunya University  Page 416  . Its really a job oriented skill that can shape their future. EDIT -PSA 6. 09VC226 WEB DESIGNING LAB Credit 0:0:2 Course Objectives: To apply the skills learned to develop web pages using HTML tags.

Developing and integrating at least 4 instructional web pages using FRAMES and suitable hyperlinks.JAVA. Head and Body Sections. Basic layout of HTML scripts. Creating web pages with transition and visual effects. Unit – I Introduction to web page design fundamentals. 2. LINK HREF. DHTML: Cascading style sheet (CSS). Constructing a webpage using FORM tag to enter student bio-data. Unit – II Head section: Title. 5. Data. Data types and variables expressions and operation. Video. Unit – III Advance Elements: tables. Karunya University  Page 417  . Developing a webpage using basic HTML tags and hyperlinks. Links Images. Boolean. Unit – IV Core Java Script Elements: Array. Developing a webpage using TABLE tag to display class timetable. Function. Looping and Branching Events and Event handling. so that it can be really helpful in their other course related to web. Architecture of Java Script applications.. sounds. Meta tags. 09VC227 PRINCIPLES OF WEB DESIGNING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: Students will be allowed to design their own web page using basics of HTML . Creating a webpage which contains a set of images (minimum 10) in same size inserted in table. Object String. Tags in Java Script. 4. DHTML: Java Scripts: Introduction. colours. Body Section: Text formatting and alignment. Fonts. and Exp. HTML: Introduction: what is HTML.etc. Math Number. Authoring Web Pages using editing. Its helps them to learn basic. Exercises 1.. . Forms. Reg. Frames. Base HREF. ordered and unordered lists.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) can be really helpful in their other course related to web in the advance stages like VB. Background. Course Outcome:Basics of HTML helps and guides the student how to create a web page on own with sources code without the help of the other automatic softwares. 3. 6.

Unit 1 The Research Process Meaning of Research . Jesse Liberty 1999 3.Qualitative and quantities approaches – Variables – Measurement – Scales .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit – V Multimedia in the Web – Flash.California 1997. Mouse over and other affects using JS. XML and Java Developing Web Application (With CD). 09VC301 MEDIA RESEARCH METHODS Credit : 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVES: • To understand research methods and statistical tools in education. Streaming audio and Video.Review of literature .Population .Probability and no probability samples . Hiroshi Maruyama Web Design and Publishing Unleashed (with CD).Sampling error and weight Karunya University  Page 418  . Web Classes from Scratch (with CD).Media research methods . Create Web Animations in a Weekend (with CD).. • To prepare model research proposals for research studies and report writing. The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts.Reliability and validity . • To understand the principles of evaluation. Real Media MP 3 etc.Hypothesis/research question .Lopuck & Hampton .Sampling and sample size . and same may be presented and analyzed.Selection of research topic . Steve Callahan 1990 2. Text Books 1. 3.Adobe Press . Dave Brown 1997 Web enable your small Business. COURSE OUTCOME: To assess the Learning Outcomes. a number of miner project may be assigned. methods. research and statistics and computer application. Jesse Liberty 2000 Reference: 1. Using Java Applets: HTTP Servers and CGI concepts. 4. 2. Each student’s work to be assessed and ranked by the team of instructor. XML Web documents from scratch.Importance and need of Media research Characteristics of scientific research -Development of media research in India . Richard Harrison 2000 Adobe Seminars Web Page Design . elements of Media Research and make them to do.

Survey research .Research in media effect . Kerlinger.t test .Research report style and MLA style sheet .Interview technique.Hypothesis testing Application of appropriate statistical tools . Goode & Hatt. 4.Longitudinal research .-simple correlation .Descriptive research Unit 3 Research Procedures Steps in developing a research project .analysis of variance . To understand the principles of Principles of visual media communication To learn the Visual Application and visual design Page 419  Karunya University  . 5. Fundamentals of Social Research.Sample distribution .Research design and sampling procedure . Media Research methodology.parametric tatistics .Sampling design Descriptive statistics . Methods in Social Research.Data collection techniques . H.chi square .-cluster analysis Unit 5 Research Applications and Report Research in electronic media .Characteristics of the research report .Selection of a research problem .Structure of the research report . John Best.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit 2 Research Approaches Content analysis . Roger D Wimmer & Joseph R Dominick 3. Scientific Social Survey and Research.J P Aluwaliya 2.Content analysis procedure . Paulin Young 09VC302 DYNAMICS OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • To understand visual and visual communication fundamentals. Mass media research – An introduction.Nonparametric statistics . REFERENCES: 1.Definition of terms variables .Formulation of hypothesis .Experimental research .criteria for selection Defining objectives .Documentation in a research report Text Book: 1.Data transformation .two way ANOVA .Research in new media .Research budget Unit 4 Data Collection and Analysis Questioner design . Fred. Foundations of Behavioral Research.

Unit V Six important perspectives Image Analysis – Typography . Finally all the works done by the student (like design. models. The students may be asked to apply the knowledge of all the concepts .visual media communication (2001) – Authors press – New Delhi 3.Abstract thought . Make the student to apply all the components of this syllabus in various activities.Cartoon Photography .Temple grandins views on autism and visual thought .Communication design Graphic design – Cartoons Unit IV Visual language and culture Study of Visuality .Visual rehetoric. Pradeep mandav. any activity related to syllabus) to be exhibited and each student to be ranked by the instructor.World Wide Web Reference books. Visual communication (2008) Global vision publishing house – New Delhi.Visual perception .Non Projected audio visuals Scientific visual media .Television and video .Visualisation environment . programme to present and analyze the design. methods.Conceptual development . elements of visuals and make design.Tools for visualization Sensual and perceptual theories Unit II Visual Media Principles of visual media communication .Informational Graphics . sociology and ethics .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) • • To understand Visual language and culture To understand important perspectives Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the Learning Outcomes. Visual communication images with messages by paul Mrtin lester(2008) wordsworth – United states. Paul martin.Information design . a number of activities may be assigned periodically.Video medium . 09VC303 ELEMENTS OF VIDEO PRODUCTION Credit : 4:0:0 Karunya University  Page 420  . 2.Computer graphics . Unit I Introduction to visual communication Historical Development .Visulaisation process .Motion pictures . 1.Graphics design .Visual thinking and mental imagery Implication in visual syntax.World culture .Creative visualization Unit III Visual Application Rendering and rasterisation .

• To learn the camera options and production techniques. The important component of this programme is to impart the aesthetics of film direction so that the student become capable of producing a show effectively. Page 421  Karunya University  . Unit I Preproduction Planning Stage Concept development – Research – The basic script The role of writer for television – – – – – – location survey logistics crew budget Talents Script Story board Roles of the production crew – – – – Production assistant Cameraman. studio crew outdoor crew Set design backdrop and properties – – – – the role of the art director Set designer Wardrobe Makeup.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Elements of Video production Course Objective: • To understand the aesthetics of video production • To identify the elements of shot. • To understand the continuity of shots • To learn the editing principles Outcome: Students should be equipped with the video production skills so that they may be able to direct the production.

Short film Documentary. -Documentaries and other electronic field productions. Film editor. Art Director.Camera Movements .Color Temperature . Cinematographer.Mise-en-scene. . Capturing and rendering techniques – Editing Techniques – continuity – Sequence Karunya University  Page 422  . .Montage.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) Unit II Media and Men – – – – – – – – – – – – Talk show. Unit IV Post Production Technique Digital video editing : linear and Non-Linear editing. Floor manager. – Production manager.Compering.Multi camera setup . . Video game Computer game Location identification Role of Director.Lighting .Basic and special Lighting setup .Atmospheric lighting. Unit III Production Process Digital video Production : .Angles.ENG-Anchoring . Feature film. .Composition .

models. Focal Press. London 2. Focal press. Focal Press. The Technique of Television Production (2001) by Gerald Millerson. Peter Jarvis. An introduction to Digital Video (1994).) 1996. Digital Cinematography (2001). . .compression: .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) – – – – – – – Dynamic . London. Focal press.Architecture of 3D Animation . Karunya University  Page 423  . .Computer based animation. Ohanian. London. Unit V Animation . To understand the meaning and significance of Instructional Design 2. London Reference Book: 1. 5. John Watkinson. The essential of TV Director’s Handbook (3rd edn.Essentials of 3D Animation . Method of transitions. EDL Preparations Titling Graphics Animation Storage Devices. 4. London 09VC304 INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objectives: 1. Paul Wheeler. Lighting Techniques for video Production (1996) Tom Letourneau. McGrawHill. materials and assessment of learning.Introduction to graphic and animation . Focal Press.Graphical user interface . Digital Non-Linear Editing (1998) Thomas A.Animation control . To learn the importance of instructional theories .3D through Maya Text Books : 1. 2.Video signal. London. Television Production (1999) by Gerald Millerson. Focal Press. 3.Video and animation .

ADDIE Model UNIT III – INSTRUCTIONAL THEORIES Gropper’s Behavioral Approach to Instructional Prescription Landa’s Algo-Heuristic Theory Collins-Stevens’ Cognitive Theory of Inquiry Teaching Merrill’s Component Display Theory Reigeluth-Stein’s Elaboration Theory of Instruction Keller’s Motivation Design of Instruction Karunya University  Page 424  . UNIT I – INTRODUCTION Definition – Instructional Technology – Concept of Systems Approach System Analysis – Curriculum Development and Process Guideline for Instructional Design Taxonomies of Educational Objectives .Instructional Development Institute Model .Mager Method .Inter-service Procedures for Instructional Systems Development Model .Simpson’s Psychomotor Domain Writing Objectives .ABCD Method UNIT II – INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN 3-D objects and models -Types of 3-D objects and models -Materials of construction -Teaching with Models Instructional Development Models .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 3.Dave’s Psychomotor Domain .Bloom’s Cognitive Domain . To apply instructional methods to information communication technology based learning materials.CRI Model .Kemp Model .

Howard K. Instructional Technology: A Systematic Approach to Education. Frederick G. Reigeluth.Overview . Jonassen. Morrison.Overview . Gustafson. Kalman. Holt. Rinehart and Winston. et al. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Patricia L. Methods of Teaching: A Skills Approach. 1999 (Unit II) 3. ISBN 0898592755 (Unit III.Evaluation Process . Knirk. New Age International Publishers. Charles M. Task Analysis Methods for Instructional Design. Charles E. 2006 (Unit I – V) Karunya University  Page 425  . Jerrold E. Paul Eggen. Instructional-Design Theories and Models: An overview of their current status.II) 2. 2. Book by Wallace H. 2005 (Unit IV) Reference Book: 1. Ragan. Steven M. Martin Tessmer.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) UNIT IV – INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA & STRATEGIES Preparation for programmed instruction Instructional Methods and Media – Instructional Strategies for Declarative Knowledge – Concepts – Procedures – Principles – Problem-Solving – Cognitive Strategy – Attitude – Psychomotor Skill UNIT V – EVALUATION AND ASSESSMENT Evaluation of Instructional Materials .Evaluation Models Assessment of Learning . Inc.Hannum. Kent L. David Jacobsen. Merrill Publishing Company. Gary R. 1986 (Unit I. Designing Effective Instruction .Purposes . Instructional Design. Smith. New Delhi. David H. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Educational technology: K L Kumar. Tillman J. Kemp.1983. V) 4. Wiley Publication. Wiley/Jossey-Bass Education.Types of Assessment Models of Assessment of Learners’ Achievement Characteristics of Good Assessment Elements and Formats of Assessment Text Book: 1. 1985 (Unit II) 3. Ross.

1979 (Unit V) 5.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Media Technology (EMT) 4. Hashway. Evaluation of Instructional Materials. Book by Robert M. Praeger Publishers. Assn for Educational. Assessment and Evaluation of Developmental Learning: Qualitative Individual Assessment and Evaluation Models. 1998 (Unit V) Karunya University  Page 426  .

ELECTRONICS AND MEDIA TECHNOLOGY Karunya University 0 .

Scope and purpose. Commercial Theory. Shannon and weaver . Meaning of theories based on scientific study &analysis.ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS S. Lasswall.Forms of Communication . a number of activity may be assigned. Unit II COMMUNICATION PROCESS Introduction: Process of Communication . Unit 1 INTRODUCTION COMMUNICATION Introduction: Communication .Verbal and Non Verbal Communication . message.Intrapersonal Communication. Four major Karunya University 1 . Play Theory Uses & Gratification Theory. channel. feedbackNoise. Individual Difference Theory. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Code 10MT201 10MT202 10MT203 10MT204 10MT205 10MT206 10MT207 10MT208 10MT209 10MT210 10MT211 10MT212 10MT213 10MT214 10MT215 Subject Introduction to Mass Communication Web Designing & Production Digital Signal Processing Equipment Maintenance and Servicing Community Radio Computer Based Music Production Signal Processing Application Television and Video Engineering Introduction to 3D Animation Visual Arts Lab Programme Production Lab Post Production Lab Script Writing for Media C++ and Data Structure Introduction to Film Studies Credit 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 10MT201 INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objectives: To understand the types and models of communication To understand the process communication To understand the applications of communication in advertising To understand the functions of mass media To understand the relationship between culture and communication Course Outcome: To assess the learning out comes . Selective Exposure. No. Two-step & Multi-step Theory.Mass Communication-Organizational Communication .Definitions. Selective Perception & Selective Retention Theory. Berlo. Inter-personal Communication. Unit III THEORIES AND MODELS OF COMMUNICATION Hypodermic Needle Theory. receiver . each student’s work to be assessed by the team of subject experts. Types of noise-Encoding and Decoding Process -Formal and Informal channel-Models of Communication.Barriers of communication -Socio economic changes and the emerging trend in Communication.Source. and the same may be presented and analyzed.

ARPANET . Kumar “Mass communication in India” Jeyco Pubslisher 2007.Policies and implications Text Book : 1.computer color basics – working with Hexa-decimal colors – Web typography. Rosengren “Communication an introduction” Sage Pulblication 2006 2. according to Fred Siebert. Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the learning outcomes. a number of assignments may be assigned periodically. Keval J.theories of Press. To understand the technologies behind any website.File format basics. Unit V COMMUNICATION AND CULTURE Introduction : Communication and culture -Global media – multi cultural content Mass media and developing countries -Cross cultural Communication. Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF WEB DESIGNING Basics of networking – protocols – TCP/IP-HTTP – History of Internet. Reference Books: 1. Mc Quil “Mass communication theory” Sage Publicaiton 5th edition-2005 10MT202 WEB DESIGNING AND PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: 1. XML. Problems and challenges. The students will be able to design basic web sites and gain basic knowledge about the latest technologies. Theodore Peterson & Wilbur Schramm Authoritarian Theory. 2. To understand elements of web design. Karunya University 2 . Social Responsibility Theory. Persuade-Dysfunction of mass communication-Communication and public opinion. Educate. Unit II PLANNING THE SITE File naming & URL’s – Directory structure .History of HTML. 3. XHTML – W3C – future of Markup languages . Karl E.diagram the site – planning the site navigation – colors and graphics. To understand and gain knowledge in different programming languages.Website design principles . Other Theories: Development Media & Democratic Participant Theory Unit IV MASS MEDIA Introduction -Characteristics of mass media-Functions of mass media .Inform –Entertain. Libertarian Theory.

2005 10MT203 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: This course will introduce the basic concepts and techniques for processing signals on a computer. The Mc Graw.Unit III BASICS OF MARKUP LANGUAGES & CSS Basics of HTML – XML – XHTML – basics of MYSQL – Cascading style sheets – controlling typography with <FONT> element – controlling typography with cascading style sheets – styling with CSS. Course Technologies. including digital filter design. Unit V FUTURE OF WEB Server side technologies – client side technologies – Data base types – emerging technologies – Applications on web – web editors – WYSIWYG editors Text Books: 1. 2000. . Chris Bates “Web programming: Building Internet applications” by. Luke welling and Laura Thomson “PHP and MYSQL web development”. Wiley dream tech India (p) Ltd. The course emphasizes intuitive understanding and practical implementations of the theoretical concepts. • Understand the meaning and implications of the properties of systems and signals. • Understand the Transform domain and its significance and problems related to computational complexity. Course Outcome: By the end of the course the student will be able to: • Represent discrete-time signals analytically and visualize them in the time domain. Thomas A Powell “The complete reference of web design. By the end of the course. 3rd Edition. 2. you be familiar with the most important methods in DSP. Karunya University 3 . transform-domain processing and importance of Signal Processors. ” 2nd Edition 2002. 2. Unit IV FRAMES HTML Frames – Frame syntax – Understanding frames – targeting in Frames – planning Frame content – basics of Java script – basics of PHP. Joel Sklar “Principles of Web Design”.Hill company. 2nd Edition 2002 Reference Books: 1..

2. PHI.Discretization of CT Signals-Sampling Theorem-Reconstruction of a signal-Effects of Under Sampling: Aliasing. Karunya University 4 . Algorithms and Application”. 3rd Edition (2000). John Wiley and Sons. Salivahana. Unit III DIGITAL FILTER-IIR DESIGN Review of analog filters-Design of IIR from analog filters. 2. “Signals & Systems”. “Digital Signal Processing Principles”. 2nd Edition (2000). Text Books 1. McGraw-Hill.• Be able to specify and design any digital filters using MATLAB. S. 3. 3rd Edition (2004). Alan V Oppenheim. Unit II HARMONICS ANALYSIS OF SIGNALS Fourier Series-Representation of Periodic signals and a periodic signals-Discrete Time Fourier transform –Properties of DTFT-DFT-Relation between DTFT and DFT-Properties of DFT-Radix2 FFT algorithms-Decimation in Time-Decimation in Frequency. Alan S. Unit I DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEM CT Signals-DT Signals-Representation of DT Signals in pulses-CT and DT Systems-Properties of Systems-Discrete time LTI Systems-Convolution Sum. 2nd Edition (2002). Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen. Willsky with Hamid Nawab.Vallavaraj. Gnanapriya. John Proakis. “Signals & Systems”. Mitra.K. Tata McGraw-Hill. A. S. Dimitris G Manolakis. Reference Books 1. 2nd Edition (2000).limit cycle oscillation – signal scaling – analytical model of sample and hold operations. “Digital Signal Processing”. Pearson Education.impulse invariant transformation-frequency transformation-Realization of IIR Unit IV DIGITAL FILTER-FIR DESIGN Amplitude and Phase responses of FIR filters – Linear phase filters-Transversal filters – Windowing techniques –Rectangular-Hamming-Frequency sampling techniques-Realization of FIR Unit V FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS Quantization noise – derivation for quantization noise power – Fixed point and binary floating point number representation – comparison – over flow error – truncation error – co-efficient quantization error . “Digital signal processing-A Computer based approach”.Bilinear transformation – PrewarpingMatched Z-transformation.

Trevor Linsley.Processors and Outboard Gear ServiceText book: 1.Soldering. and Resistance Basic Electronics: AC Voltage.Digital. Course Outcome: • After the course the students will be able to have an in-depth knowledge in maintaining equipments in the studio. Unit I EXPLANATIONS AND CALCULATIONS Electricity .Metering-VU. Current. McGraw-Hill/TAB Electronics – 2004. Cable Repair.Rotary Head Tape Recorders -.Speakers and Microphones.Tools-Test Equipment.DC Voltage. Pot and Fader Cleaning-Lighting Equipment Cleaning Unit V SERVICE AND REPAIRS Speaker Damage and Repairs. Mc Graw Hill – 1960.Mixing Console. John Markus. and RF Interference Cures. Karunya University 5 . • Basic repair and services of equipments will be learned.A 48-Volt Phantom Power Supply Project Unit IV MAINTENANCE Cleaning Chemicals and Applications. PPm and Correlation-RF Transmissions -. Newnes .AM and FM. Maintenance.Analog. Tom McCartney.Basic Electronics.Compressors and Limiters.Analog Tape Recorder Calibration.Wire Sizes and Maximum Current for Each Wire.10MT204 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To provide a thorough understanding of the working of studio equipments.Computer and Processor Cleaning. “Recording Studio Technology.Amplifier Diagnostics. “Electronic Servicing and Repairs”.Patch Bay Wiring-Cable Routing.Wireless Microphones Unit III AUDIO LINES Cables and Connectors-Equipment and Rack Grounding. “Television and Radio Repairing”. Current.Amplifier Cleaning. RMS. and Reactance.Fixed Head Tape Recorders -. • To introduce various techniques in maintaining and repairing of audio-visual equipments. Reference Books: 1.Basic Formulas for Calculations-DecibelsAdvanced Formulas for Calculations.Multitrack Recorders.Technical Power and Current RequirementsUnit II SIGNALS AND EQUIPMENT Balanced and Unbalanced Signals.2000 2. and Repairs”.

sports.Government rules and laws in setting CR station – World association of CR broadcasters – CRC – Community radio movement Text Book: Angela Wadia. equipments. COURSE OUTCOME: Students learn the functions. invited audience music programmes. equipments. commentaries. Unit I BASICS OF COMMUNITY RADIO Introduction to CR – Characteristics – Principle of operation – Significance – Distinct features Stimulating community participation – Layout of a CR station – Equipments used in a CR – Activities in setting up a CR – Legitimizing CR – Sustainability of CR Unit II MANAGING CR STATION Securing broadcast license – Levels of Managerial Responsibility – Managing finances – Managing Technical Resources – HR Management in CR station . layout. debates. reviews. women.Concept of Phone-out programmes Unit V CR IN INDIA Development of CR in India . discussions.family welfare.generation of program ideas and process of production. chat-shows.Steps to be followed in conducting Broadcast – Ethics and Code of Conduct – Conduct within the CR station . jingles etc. quickies.. interviews. “Broadcast Management in India”. operation and management of community radio station .environment. Unit IV INTERACTIVE PROGRAMME FORMATS Concept and significance of phone-in-programmes. Field generated and participatory programmes. operas. rules and laws of community radio station . farmers.Conduct outside the CR station – Economics of CR– Maintenance studio premises and acoustics Unit III CR PROGRAMMING Concept of content and form in CR. classification of CR programme formats and concept of creativity. writing of radio scripts. music appreciation. planning and production of radio documentaries. children. radio reports. listeners request. development etc).)Conducting various types of interviews. magazines etc. special audience programs-youth. presentation techniques of spoken word programs(talks. senior citizens etc. management. presentation techniques of radio dramas. Also to give them the knowledge of the rules and laws governing it. Kanishka publication.10MT205 COMMUNITY RADIO Credits: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE: Train the students in gaining knowledge on the functions. skits. family serials. layout. etc. operation. Special drives and campaigns including special topic programs (science. 2007 Edition Reference Books: Karunya University 6 . Production of infotainment programmes including science and health based folk music programmes.

Additional instruments volume .MAC and PC driver/software setup .Basic MIDI editing. Sreedher.Audio interface features . Unit I I Audio/MIDI hardware and software setup PCI cards .Mix and individual track MIDI to digital audio conversion .MIDI channels .Audio and MIDI Interfaces . Unit III Music production .Creating comp takes.MIDI interface types and features .Laying down MIDI tracks .Cables .Dynamic Processors Effect Processors . COURSE OUTCOME: This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically aware of the technologies and production tools in the music production industry. Laptop and Tabletop computers and specific users . Routledge.Burning and packaging the audio CD .Unlisted MIDI devices .1.Wet Vs Dry recording . 4.FireWire/ iLink . 7th edition.Archiving the project.MIDI modes .Digital audio Recording fundamentals .Punch-in recording .Basic track recording . Karunya University 7 .Desktop.Common MIDI Recording Problems and their Solutions Quantization options . Unit IV Music Production .USB .Analog and Digital audio recording .Template setup .PCMCIA Cards .Trimming digital audio tracks .Software .A short mixing primer: Drums.frequency. bass.Sample rates and resolutions Recording in the computer room .Preparing tracks for audio editing .Miscellaneous equipment .Step recording . Unit V Mixing.Overdubing . 2002 10MT206 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION Credits: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE: The students who are musically inclined will be taught the fundamentals involved in choosing the right components to make a digital audio workstation and to use MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.Setting the index and gap . 2002 Dr.MIDI connections . 3.Microphones . Carole Fleming “the radio handbook” 2nd Edition.Virtual MIDI instruments . R.normalizing audio tracks .monitoring the mix .” The Radio Station” Elsevier Publication. 2002 Louie Tabing “ How to do Community Radio”.Driver installation basics . 2. Unit I The DAW and it’s peripherals The Computer . guitars and vocals .Computer options.Patch setup .The need for speed .MIDI What is MIDI .Audio file preparation .Audio interface considerations .The Final mixdown .Setting up song parameters .Headphones and Monitors .Mixer .side sequencing .Mac Vs PC debate .MIDI implementation charts . UNESCO Publication.Surface controller .Mastering . Keith. Mastering and Archiving The Stereo field .Creating a new song file . Michael C.Status bytes and Data bytes .Surface controller setup .Test run. volume and overtones .EQ types . “Radio Vision – Multimedia through Digital Radio” UNESCO Publication.

The students should then be familiar with audio signals processing image signals processing and plugin development for audio and still image softwares. Focal Press. Bobby Owsinski. Reference Books: 1. Andrea Pejrolo. It will strengthen the student's understanding of the application of DSP principles. 10MT207 SIGNAL PROCESSING APPLICATIONS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: This course will treat a broad range of Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Applications. 4. Course Outcome: After the successful completion of the course. 1999. image processing. Zack Price. Simulation Using Matlab Programming. Tim McCormick. Unit III Fundamentals of Digital Image Elements of Visual Perception-Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum-Image Sensing and Acquisition-Image Sampling and Quantization-Relationship between Pixels-Image Enhancement in Spatial Domain and Frequency Domain. “The Mixing Engineer’s Handbook”. Third Edition. 2006 2. 5rd edition. 2005. “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”. Karunya University 8 . Unit II Digital Audio Effects Audio processing Systems-Signal Processors.Text Book: 1. Francis Rumsey. Martin Russ. the student should have an appreciation of the fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing as well as knowledge of some of its important applications. 2009. “Beginner’s guide to computer based music production”. Unit I Audio Signal Processing Audio Signal-Spectrogram-Applications-Digital Transmission Systems-Storage media-Audio Components-Sampling-Quantization-Dither-Noise Shaping-AD/DA Conversion-Nyquist SamplingOversampling-Specification-Types of Converters-High Fidelity audio. Focal Press. and provide extensive hands-on design experience. Focal Press. Mix Books. “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”. “Sound and Recording: An Introduction”. 2004. plug-in developments for audio and video softwares. introduce the students to three major application areas: audio signal processing. Cherry lane music company. 3.-fixed point-floating point-Digital audio interfacesFilters-Basic Filters-Equalizers-Shelving filter-peak filters-Time Varying filters-Delay-Basic delay structures-Delay based audio Effects-Sample Rate Conversion-Basics.

Wiley &Sons Ltd Publications.K. 3. John Wiley and Sons. 2. “Digital Image Processing”.Pseudo-color Image Processing-Color Transformations-Smoothing and Sharpening-Color Segmentation-Noise in Color Image Processing-Color image Compression.Unit IV Color Image Processing Color Fundamentals-Color Models. Mitra. 2nd Edition (2008). S. “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”. To study the various Color Television systems with a greater emphasis on television standards. Course Outcome: The learners will be able to understand the transmission of video signals and importance of television standards to effectively work with broadcasting applications. “Digital Audio Signal Processing”. Text Books 1. 2nd Edition (2000). 4. To study the analysis and synthesis of TV Pictures. Receiver Picture tubes and Television Camera Tubes. “Digital signal processing-A Computer based approach”. 2.Light and colour-The sensation of colourPrimary colours-The colour triangle-Saturation and hue-Colour temperature. “DAFX Digital Audio Effects”. 3rd Edition (2004). Unit V Compression & Plug-in Need for Compression-Types of redundancy-Lossless and Lossy Compression-Run length EncodingHuffman Encoding-Delta Encoding-LZW Compression-JPEG-MPEG-Virtual Studio Technique-SDK for Photoshop. Udo Zolzer. Prentice hall. Unit I Television Fundamentals Scanning-Interlaced-Progressive-Synchronizing Pulses-Composite video waveform-Common image format-Active line-Aspect ratio-Pixels & Bandwidth-Video Bandwidth-Television BroadcastingModulation-Frequency Spectrum-Channel allocation. Wiley &Sons Ltd Publications. Anil K Jain. To study the advanced topics in digital television and High definition television. 1st Edition (2002). Richard E Woods. 3. 2. Reference Books 1. Udo Zolzer. Tata McGraw-Hill. Rafael C Gonzalez. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen. Also he acquires sound knowledge of latest topics in digital video transmission. Prentice Hall. 1st Edition (1989). 10MT208 TELEVISION AND VIDEO ENGINEERING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: 1. Karunya University 9 . Composite Video Signal. 2nd Edition (2002). “Signals & Systems”.

Lars Ingemar Lundstrom. Newnes Publications (2007). Elsevier Publications 1st Edition (2006). “Digital TV for Satellite Broadcasting”. 4th Edition. Color picture display devices-Trinitron. Dhake.Unit II Color Television Signal and Systems Color Characteristics-Chromaticity diagram-Color Cameras. “Understanding Digital Television”. Gulati.R. New Age International Publishers. 4th Edition (2005).Flat panel television receivers-Video formatting-Scan-rate conversion-Image scaling-Degamma correction and error and diffusion -Digital video interface-High definition multimedia interface Unit V Digital and High Definition Television Principles of digital video broadcasting-Digitizing the TV picture-SDTV sampling rate-Video sampling-Sampling structure-The bit rate-HDTV common interface format-Intra-frame (spatial) prediction-Intra-blocks and modes-Size and mode selection-Intra-prediction operation-AVC motion compensation-Motion compensation block sizes-Motion vector prediction.Polarization-Principles of operation of LC cell-Reflective and Transmissive-The TN Transmissive LCD. Elsevier Publication. Course Outcome: In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the learning outcomes. “Modern Television Practice”.R.-Plasma displays. Tata-McGraw Hill publications (2003). Unit III Display Device Technologies. “Television and Video Technology”. 2nd Edition.-TFT cell drive-Response time-Polarity inversion-Grayscale and colour generation Unit IV Television Receivers The analogue TV receiver-The front end-RF oscillator-Mixer-oscillator-Complete tuner-The phaselocked loop-Synthesized tuning-The IF stage-The IF response curve-The vision detector-Synchronous demodulator. Reference Books: 1. K. Herve Benoit. a number of assignments may be assigned periodically. 2. 3. Karunya University 10 . 2.Introduction to Flat panel displayResolution: flat panel versus CRT-Plasma operation-Scanning: Sequential and Interlaced LCD displays. M.Color Signal Generation and Encoding.F Ibrahim. 2nd Edition(2006) 10MT209 INTRODUCTION TO 3D ANIMATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation. Color Television Standards-NTSC-Encoder-Decoder-SECAM-Encoder-Decoder-PAL SystemsEncoder-Decoder.”Television and Video Engineering”. Text Books: 1. The students will be able to do basic 3D animation and gain basic knowledge about advanced modeling and rendering techniques.

2000.compositing –Editing.sound design –technical tests –Production scheduling. 10MT210 VISUAL ARTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 COURSE OBJECTIVE: To educate the students in drawing as well as to enable the students to visualize of their own. Unit IV Animation basics Introduction –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing –dope sheet editing –forward kinematics –inverse kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –camera animation –animating lights and surface properties –pose based animation. “Essential Computer Animation”. Inc. 3rd edition. Karunya University 11 . 2005. Unit II Modeling basics Introduction –polygonal modeling –splines and patches –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies –booleans and trims. Michael O’Rourke. “Guide To Computer Animation”. Marcia Kuperberg. Text books: 1. 2.Unit I Preproduction Introduction – Storyboarding – character and model design . “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”. John Edgar Park. Unit V Re -touching and Postproduction techniques Virtual sculpting –hair and fur –texturing polygons –more rendering algorithms –cloth dynamics – facial animation. Focal press . Martin W. Reference books: 1. 2.W. “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”.2002. springer UK . 2003. Unit III Rendering basics The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms –rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping –final rendering. John Vince. Springer Science & business Media. W. It will help them to create an appropriate visual through the application of perspective composition and light and shadow. Norton & company. Bowman.

Pearson. 2005. processes and visual resources. Drawing Architecture 8. John Wiley. Robert B. 2008. 10MT212 POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Karunya University 12 .COURSE OUTCOME: The students will be able to draw and compose all the drawings in a right way. 2007.Manuals. 3. Drawing Birds 9. Introduction to Human Figures 10MT211 PROGRAMME PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To describe the functions of production personnel and equipment To define the organization of a production facility To operate audiovisual equipment Course Outcome: Students will be able to produce Audio and Video Programmes using these equipments and techniques. Steve Wright. Drawing Landscapes 7. 2006. Drawing Animals 10. Cliff Truesdell.” Video Field Production and Editing”. the production process-Lighting preparation –Three point lighting-Rehearsing and preparing the talent-Framing principles and movements References 1. Composition 4. It increases the prestige of the student by making them a trained artist. List of Experiments: 1. Focal Press. “Single Camera Video Production”.”Composing Visual Effects”.Compesi. Mixers-Audio editing software’s: Pro tools/Sound forge/Neundo-Plug in effects and virtual instruments-MIDI Video Programme Production Study of video cameras and studio equipments-Lighting techniques. Focal Press. 2. Drawing Objectives 5.” Mastering Digital Audio Production: The Professional Music Work Flow with Mac OSX”. Elements of Arts 2. Drawing Still Life 6. List of Experiments: Audio Programme Production Study of microphones-Loud speakers. The elements of art and principles of design is used in a variety of media. Ronald J. Perspective Drawing 3. 4.

Time Chunks. Mastering music for CD. Short films.Course Objective: To study about compositing To editing in audio as well as video. 2004 10MT213 SCRIPT WRITING FOR MEDIA Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective : To introduce the students to the technique and aesthetics of writing for different forms of electronic media progrmmes. Jeffry P. Burning a CD.-Editing-Basic Edits. Scripting Commercials. Minutes and Seconds. creating dynamic text and effects. Karunya University 13 . List of Experiments: Digital Compositing Composing computer generated images-Blue screen composing and creating masks-Rot scoping Audio production Basic procedures: Navigation. Educational programmes. A. 2. Working with video. Audio Guidelines and Methods for adjusting Audio-Adding Sound effects. Non-Fictions. Course Outcome: Here the students learn the technique and aesthetic in writing for TV. Final Cut Pro. mp3. Commercial Formats. Documentaries.Fisher. Screenplay Nomenclature. Wiley. Meters.6 for Digital Video Editors. writing for special audience. Character. Steps in Creating a Commercial. Important Vocabulary Terms Unit 2 Formats of Script Features. 2008 3. and Ads. Children programmes. Plot. Instant Sound Forge. Writing documentaries. Unit 1 Basics of Scriptwriting Structure of script Units of Time. Script Form. Fiction. Script Form. Audio for video-Effects. Lonzell Watson. Adobe Premiere Pro: Complete Course. Women programmes.Timeline editing T rack labels. B and C Plots.Baker. MIDI and sampler-Tools Video production Trimming tools. 2004. John Wiley. restoration. Radio and Internet. CMP Books. Copyright Issues. Treatment. Writing Scripts for Television News. Promos. Moving clips-Dramatic effects. PSAs. This helps in the other course that is related to productions stages. Markers and regions-Recording. To operate audiovisual equipment Course Outcome: Students will be able to produce Audio and Video Programmes of their owm.Transcoding and outputting Reference Books: 1. Donna L.

Nested Classes. The set_new_handler() function. Destructors. Inheritance: Introduction to Inheritance . Text Book 1. Radio Spot. the filler scene.Function Prototyping .Member Functions and Member Data . Daily soap. Create obstacles. Unit I Introduction to C++: Comparison of C++ with C . Story board writing. April 2001 Reference 1. Story elements: Characters.Console Input/ Output in C++ . Dynamic Memory Allocation. and target Audience consideration. Unit V Exercises Write Script for 1 minute Add Promo. twist in plots. preparation of shooting script. Focal Press. idea for television. Unit IV Scenes and Dialogues Scene: What is a scene? How to create scene for play? Types of scenes.Inline Functions . Plot: Its importance. Jan Johnson Yopp and Katherine C. elements of Teleplay. relief characters. The thriller story. Namespaces. polarization of characters in story. Soap.5 minute Scriptorama. Dialogue: Importance of dialogues.Reference Variables in C++ . what are the elements necessary for character for your story. thrillers and TV films. Antony Friedman. subsidiary characters. Objects and Arrays. the end scene. Constructors and Destructors: Constructors. How to create interesting characters.2 minute Awareness Programme.Base Karunya University 14 . character stories. Analysis of a scene script. McAdams. the opening scene.Variables in C++. Unit 3 Concept and Story Idea Idea: What makes a good concept.Objects and Functions. Generate a script inclusive of all elements of a feature. and Dramatic points in the story.Commercials. Reaching Audiences: A Guide to Media Writing.Function Overloading .Class and Objects: Introduction to Classes and Objects . Unit II DYNAMIC MEMORY MANAGEMENT: Introduction. 2002 10MT214 C++ & DATA STRUCTURES Credit 3:1:0 Course Objective: To have a basic understanding of the object oriented language c++ and data structure concepts and algorithms in c++ Course outcome: The students will have a clear idea on the basic concepts and algorithms of data structures which will be helpful while the subjects of database management are dealt with.Farmers and youth. Dynamic Memory Deallocation. Series story-the comedy. Dialogues for different genres like comedy. breaking Individual tracks into scenes.Default Values for Formal Arguments of Functions . The Philosophy of OOPS. Writing for Visual Media.

Class and Derived Class Objects. The Protected Access Specifier . 10MT215 INTRODUCTION TO FILM STUDIES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objectives: 1. This knowledge will help them to step into film industry and produce good films. Object-Oriented Programming with C++ by E Balaguruswamy. BINARY AND OTHER TREES: Trees. Formula based representation. C-Style Handling of Error generating Codes. To study about Indian and International film makers. Tata McGraw Hill.by Sourav Sahay. Application Text Books: 1. Linked Representation. Priority Queues. PHI. Accessing Members of the Base Class in the Derived Class. Common binary tree operations Binary Tree traversal. Derived Classes and inheritances.by Sartaj Sahani. To introduce History and major movements of cinema 2. Unit III OPERATOR OVERLOADING: Operator Overloading . Object-Oriented Programming with C++ . Formula based Representation. Reference Books: 1. Algorithms. 3. 2. Unit I Film History and Major Movements Early Cinema(1893-1903). Binary Trees. Applications.Deriving by Different Access Specifiers. To teach the students the film making process. 2004 2. Simulating Pointers. Linear list. The Class Binary Tree.French Impression and Surrealism(1917-1930). Properties of binary Trees. Linked representation.by Glenn.W. Limitation of Exception Handling Unit IV DATA REPRESENTATION: Introduction. 2nd Edition. and Applications in C++ . Representation of Binary trees. Function Templates. The ADT Binary Tree. Linked representation. The Standard Template Library (STL) EXCEPTION HANDLING: Introduction.Overloading the Various Operators – Overloading the Increment and the Decrement Operators TEMPLATES: Introduction. Oxford University Press. Data Structure.Rowe. Course Outcome By the end of the course students will learn the history and evolution and different forms / aspects of cinema. STACKS: The abstract data types.Soviet Montage(1924Karunya University 15 .Development of classical Hollywood cinema (1903-1927). McGraw-Hill. Formula based representation. Unit V QUEUES: The abstract data Types. Indirect Addressing. Class Templates. 2000. Applications. ADT and Class Extensions. 2000. Applications. C++ Style Solution – the try/throw/catch Construct. 2006.German expression (1919-1924). Introduction to Data structures and algorithm with C++ . elements of film and Genre.

alternative to continuity editing. Griffith. .1986 Karunya University 16 . grammar.Macmillan. Unit III Elements of Film Mise-en-scene.2001 2. Direction &Cinematography. Satyajith Ray.Monoco. Production-Shooting. continuity editing. non-narrative films.Delhi. Dubbing . Narrative and Non Narrative films. functions of film sound. duration of the image. Cinematic codes. fundamentals of film sound. Post productionEditing.Special effects.London. syntax). Thoraval.aspects of mise-en-scene. Ingmar Bergman.An introduction to film studies. Akira kurusowa.The French New Wave(1959-1964).The Classical Hollywood Cinema after the coming of sound. Alfred Hitchcock.Routledge. Sound –the powers of sound.Graeme. Indian (Hindi. Budgeting.London. theatrical sound formats.1930).Film as social practice. Cinematographer properties-the photographic image. Italian neo-realism(1942-1951). Reference Books: 1. dividing a feature film into parts and Genres(language.Gasdton(19770:Films for an ecology of Mind 4. narrative functions of mise-en-scene.The new Indian cinema. the power of mise-en-scene. Space and time.Routledge.1996 6. Financing.Jill. framing.Roultledge. Pre-production-Concept/Story development. Unit V Great Auteur Study of Great Indian and International filmmakers like D.Aruna. The concept of form in films. Sound recording. principles of film. Distribution and Exhibition. Unit II Film making Process Planning. Adoor Gopalakrishnan and others. dimensions of film sound.Japanese cinema.Documentary genres. Vasudev. style. Locations.Yves(2000)The Cinema of India(1896-2000) 3. montage and long take. Turner. Unit IV Genre Approaches to studying film. Cinema in the third world. Graphics and Final mixing.How to read a film. Casting. Scripting/Screen play writing.1993 5. narrative form.Contemporary trends. Structure of a narrative film. Roberge.W.London.James. Nelmes.Tamil & other languages). Editing-dimensions of film editing. Charlie Chaplin.

  DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & MEDIA TECHNOLOGY   .

Libertarian Theory. according to Fred Siebert. Scope and purpose. a number of activity may be assigned. and the same may be presented and analysed. Persuade-Dysfunction of mass communication-Communication and public opinion. Two-step & Multi-step Theory. Unit II : Communication Process Introduction: Process of Communication . channel.  NEW SUBJECTS Code 10VC201 10VC202 10VC203 10VC204 Subjects Introduction to Mass Communication Graphic Production Corporate Communication Computer Fundamentals 10VC201 INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To understand the types and models of communication • To understand the process communication • To understand the applications of communication in advertising • To understand the functions of mass media • To understand the relationship between culture and communication Course Outcome: • To assess the learning out comes .Barriers of communication -Socio economic changes and the emerging trend in Communication.Source. feedbackNoise.Mass CommunicationOrganizational Communication . Commercial Theory. Unit I : Introduction Communication Introduction: Communication . Social Responsibility Theory. Play Theory Uses & Gratification Theory. Selective Perception & Selective Retention Theory.each student’s work to be assessed by the team of subject experts. Unit III : Theories And Models Of Communication Hypodermic Needle Theory. Inter-personal Communication. Types of noise-Encoding and Decoding Process -Formal and Informal channelModels of Communication.Forms of Communication Intra-personal Communication. Theodore Peterson & Wilbur Schramm Authoritarian Theory. receiver .Verbal and Non Verbal Communication . Other Theories: Development Media & Democratic Participant Theory Unit IV : Mass Media Introduction -Characteristics of mass media-Functions of mass media .Definitions. Meaning of theories based on scientific study &analysis. Educate. Berlo. Lasswall. Individual Difference Theory. Shannon and weaver . message. Selective Exposure. Four major theories of Press.Inform –Entertain. Department of Electronics and Media Technology  1  Credit 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:1:0   .

principles of layout and design.halftone proinciple.Type face-Type styles.Characteristics of each style.plate making-pre press proofs.measurement techniques.kerning-spacing techniques. Unit I : Introduction to Commercial Arts Design stage:Typography.Stripping.methods and techniques.Rotogravure. such as: posters. Kumar “Mass communication in India” Jeyco Pubslisher 2007. folders.kerning-spacing techniques. banners.Offset litho printing. • To develop pre-press material for tradeshows.other modern techniques and technologies in printing industry Unit IV: Desktop Publishing Department of Electronics and Media Technology  2    .Newspaper and magazine design can be done on their own.screen printing-process. Karl E. Keval J.measurement techniques-Comprehensive Layouts:Layout and design importance. Unit III : Press Work Operations Letterpress prointing. Mc Quil “Mass communication theory” Sage Publicaiton 5th edition-2005 10VC202 GRAPHIC PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To Draft and execute layouts and graphics on existing web interfaces.halftone photography.publishing softwares.elements of design.font identification.Description of Types.application of each printing method.Graphic Arts Photography. Unit II : Pre Press Design stage:Typography.Characteristics of each style. Course Outcome: • The student will be familiar about page layouts.printing.Type face-Type styles.  Unit V : Communication And Culture Introduction : Communication and culture -Global media – multi cultural content Mass media and developing countries -Cross cultural Communication. Reference Book : 1. Problems and challengesPolicies and implications Text Book : 1. Rosengren “Communication an introduction” Sage Pulblication 2006 2. • To learn computer aided print production and learn publishing software’s.continous tone images.Description of Types.font identification.design.line art photography. • Advertisements.advantages and disadvantagers.

7. use of graphic elements. newsprint quality and cost.NY. 8. Edmund Arnold.NY. References: 1.cost effective communication tactics and program execution –Role of Department of Electronics and Media Technology  3    . 2.1980 3. printing applications.Prentice Hall. cost. printing methods.Ink.Newspaper layout and design(4th edition)Surjeet Publications.London. Desktop system. Unit V : The Production Designing and Production of a newspaper. Softwares: Quark Xpress-Page Maker. 10VC203 CORPORATE COMMUNICATION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective : • To introduce the students to strategic planning and execution of media and people • Able Stress Management and Exploring possible avenues • Perspectives of Strategic Corporate communication Course Outcome: • Students are able to understand the significance of planning and execution. Heinemann.Routledge.Heinemann. Mc Kay.1981 4. printing applications. such as government and investor relations Unit II : Planning and Research Functions Define the key variables in a strategic communication plan.2000. Frank Ramano et al. Scanners and Scaning process. Understand key aspects of media relations.1999.Harper Collins.US.Prentice Hall.’Magazine Design That Works.London. design and graphic arts elements.Importance and value of strategic planning .Magazine layout and design techniques. paper amd other materials-cost.  Computer aided print production. King.1976 5.’Magazine Handbook’. hardware requirements.’The desktop publishing Book’. Moen. Harold Evans.. graphic elements-production cost. Designing a print advertisement. Bruce Vanden Bergh and Helen KatzAdvertising Principles.Stacey.Deigning and printing of brochures.Model of Corporate communicationSignificance of community. employee.2001.NTC Business Books. and media relations to an organization.Encyclopedia of Graphic Communication.’Designing the total Newspaper’.1988.’Newspaper Design’.NY. folders etc.Delhi. Peter Warlock. Mario Garcia’Contemporary Newspaper Design’.Daryl. Organise strategies in Crisis and Understand the New Technology and its implications Unit I : Introduction Definition and meaning of corporate communication . advantages and disadvantages.2004 6. 9.1998.Special communication functions.Jenny.

nonprofits.L Caywood “The Handbook of Strategic Public Relations and Integrated Communications”:. associations. Mike McCurry”Media relations handbook for agencies. Joep Cornelissen “Corporate communication: theory and practice” SAGE. Course Outcome: This course will enable the students to understand the possibilities and limitations of computer technology in the media industry.control and flow of news and information to external publics-Growth of new media and changes in Corporate Media Relations practices Unit IV: Corporate Communication Technology Changes in corporate communication practices driven by the rapid evolution of computerbased technologies-Costs and benefits of corporate intranet and Internet-based communication programs and tactics. Brad Fitch. Mcgrew-Hill 1997 Reference Book: 1.Web sites and traditional relationships between external media representatives and internal media relations specialists-Impact of technology on employee communication programs and the resulting affects on workforce information flows-Impact of Electronic media in corporate decision making Unit V : Crisis Communication Definition and Meaning of Crisis communication -The value of rapid response communication planning -Importance of media relations training in terms of rapid and credible response-The need to invest in realistic crisis communication training scenarios-Indepth communication team training.  spokesperson source selection in communication problem solving -Communication research methods used to evaluate program effectiveness.Explore problem solving strategies associated with crisis communication Text Book : 1.Primary and secondary research: Unit III : Media Relations Distinguish between traditional and new methods of social and cultural communicationHistory and the viability of traditional media-Implications and impact of the “New Media”interaction between age and media uses and gratifications-New media.impact . 10VC204 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS Credit :3:1:0 Course Objective: The students will be taught about computer hardware and operating system fundamentals required to understand a PC workstation. Clarke. 2004 2. and Congress : The Capitol Net Inc. It will also pave way for the students to develop the ability to custom build PC workstations catering to the various production demands in the media industry. Department of Electronics and Media Technology  4    . 2004.

Motherboard .Network problems .Building a basic system .Installing the CPU . Unit III: Advanced Hardware assembly Building a Pentium 4 LGA in a mid tower case .Network adapter .General assembly guidelines .Building an Athlon 64/64FX in a mid tower case .Problems during and after OS installation .Installing Windows 7 .Soundcard errors .Soundcard and Speakers . 8th edition.Building a Pentium 4 in a tower case .Selecting a CPU Memory . O'Reilly.USB . QUE Publishing.Optical disk booting . Morris Rosenthal.Problems during system run .POST .Precautionary methods .SCSI .Installing Windows Vista . 2004.Ethernet booting Installing Windows XP .DVD drives and Recorders .SATA . Robert Thompson.Video adapter .Installing the DVD recorder CMOS setup.I/O Ports . 4th Edition.Modems .Optical drive errors .Printers and Scanners.External Peripheral errors.SCSI RAID assembly SATA RAID assembly.Hard Disk booting . Video and Graphics.Installing Ubuntu Studio . 2nd Edition.Motherboard connections .RAM . Text Book 1.IDE .CPU .CD drives and recorders . Unit V: Testing and Troubleshooting Power up problems . “Build Your Own PC”. Unit IV: Operating system installation and tweaking Booting .Printers and Scanners errors . “Building the Perfect PC”.Firewire . Unit II : Basic Hardware assembly Handling parts . The McGraw-Hill companies.Hard drive errors .Keyboard and Mouse .  Unit I : Understanding Computer hardware Cabinet and power supply .Booting problems .Tweaking OS for Audio.Video errors .Beep codes .Comparing device performance .USB booting . “How computers work”.standard peripheral connections . Reference Books 1.Installing DDR2 RAM . Department of Electronics and Media Technology  5    . 2006.Installing two drive array . Barbara Fritchman Thompson.Installing the Hard drive array .Preparing the cabinet . 2005 2.Video monitor . Ron White.Installing the motherboard .Installing adapters .IDE RAID assembly .

              SCHOOL OF MEDIA                   .

Unit I-Introduction to Commercial Arts Design stage:Typography.Rotogravure. Softwares: Quark Xpress-Page Maker.Characteristics of each style.Graphic Arts Photography. cost.design.font identification.Stripping.Press Work Operations Letterpress prointing.halftone proinciple.The Production School of Media   3.publishing softwares.plate making-pre press proofs.halftone photography. Unit II .kerning-spacing techniques.Type face-Type styles.kerning-spacing techniques.measurement techniques-Comprehensive Layouts:Layout and design importance. Course Outcome: • The student will be familiar about page layouts.other modern techniques and technologies in printing industry Unit IV.continous tone images.Desktop Publishing Computer aided print production. • To develop pre-press material for tradeshows.advantages and disadvantagers.measurement techniques.Offset litho printing. hardware requirements. Scanners and Scanning process.elements of design. Desktop system.Description of Types. Unit V . printing applications.Description of Types. banners.methods and techniques. • Advertisements.font identification. advantages and disadvantages.printing. folders. 1    . such as: posters.  ADDITIONAL SUBJECT Subject Code 10VC205 Graphic Production Subject Name Credit 4:0:0 10VC205 GRAPHIC PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To Draft and execute layouts and graphics on existing web interfaces.Type face-Type styles.screen printing-process.Pre Press Design stage:Typography.line art photography.principles of layout and design. • To learn computer aided print production and learn publishing software’s.Newspaper and magazine design can be done on their own.application of each printing method. Unit III . use of graphic elements.Characteristics of each style.

Delhi.London. Mc Kay. Heinemann.  Designing and Production of a newspaper.Magazine layout and design techniques.1988. King.2004 6. Peter Warlock. Harold Evans. 9. School of Media   3. 2    .US.NY.Designing and printing of brochures.’Designing the total Newspaper’.Prentice Hall.’The desktop publishing Book’. Bruce Vanden Bergh and Helen KatzAdvertising Principles.1998. printing methods.’Magazine Design That Works. paper amd other materials-cost. Moen. Mario Garcia’Contemporary Newspaper Design’. design and graphic arts elements.NY.NTC Business Books. 8.1981 4.Encyclopedia of Graphic Communication.Jenny.Ink.London.Routledge..2000.1980 3. printing applications.Stacey.Heinemann.Daryl. Edmund Arnold.NY. newsprint quality and cost. Designing a print advertisement.Harper Collins.’Newspaper Design’. 2. Frank Ramano et al.Prentice Hall.1999.1976 5. 7. graphic elements-production cost.Newspaper layout and design(4th edition)Surjeet Publications.’Magazine Handbook’. folders etc.2001. References: 1.

Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code 11MT201 11MT202 11MT203 11MT204 11MT205 11MT206 11MT207 11MT208 11MT210 11MT211 11MT212 11MT213 11MT214 11MT215 11MT216 11MT217 11MT218 11MT219 11MT220 11MT221 11MT222 11MT223 11MT224 11MT225 11MT226 11MT227 11MT228 11MT229 11MT230 11MT231 11MT232 11MT233 11MT234 11MT235 11MT236 11MT237 11MT238 11MT239 11MT240 11MT241 11MT242 Name of the Subject AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING ANALOG ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS I ELECTRONIC DEVICES INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION STUDIO ACOUSTICS ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB PHOTOGRAPHY LAB AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB PROGRAMME PRODUCTION LAB DIGITAL COMPOSITING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS LAB MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES LAB SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RADIATION PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION COMPUTER ANIMATION 3D MODELING AND RENDERING VIRTUAL REALITY TECHNOLOGY COMPUTER NETWORKS COMPUTER GRAPHICS SOFTWARE RADIO IP TV AND INTERNET VIDEO MICROCONTROLLERS AND ITS APPLICATIONS DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING TELEVISION PROGRAMME FORMATS 3D LIGHTING 3D TEXTURING DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO EFFECTS 3D ANIMATION LAB MEDIA ECONOMICS APPLICATION OF DSP FOR AUDIO AND IMAGE PROCESSING MEDIA MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP Credits 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 2:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4: 0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 1  Academic Information   .

Simultaneous Masking. Academic Information   2  . Venkatraman Atti. Masking Asymmetry. Algorithms and Quality Measures MIDI Versus Digital Audio. and the Spread of Masking. FM Synthesis. Hybrid Sinusoidal Coders Unit V Audio Coding Standards. Pre-echo Control Strategies. Critical Bands. Audio Signal Processing and Coding. Pre-echo Distortion. Harmonic and Individual Lines Plus Noise Coder (HILN). 2004. Course Outcome: On successful completion of the subject. Audio Signal processing for Next Generation MultiMedia communication systems. Dolby Audio Coding Standards. Filter Banks for Audio Coding: Design Considerations. Yiteng Huang and Jacob Benesty. Springer. Sinusoidal Model. Example Codec Perceptual Model: ISO/IEC 11172-3 (MPEG . Adapted WP Algorithms. The Sines + Transients + Noise (STN) Model. Quantization and Entropy Coding. Multichannel Surround Sound. Perceptual Entropy. Reference Book 1. Perceptual Transform Coder Unit IV Subband and Sinusoidal Coders Subband Algorithms. Optimum Coding in the Frequency Domain. Adaptive Transform Acoustic Coding (ATRAC). Confounding Factors in Subjective Evaluations Text Book: 1. Wiley Interscience. Analysis/Synthesis Audio Codec (ASAC). DTS – Coherent AcousticsSubjective Quality Measures. MPEG Audio Standards. Andreas Spanias. 2007.1) Psychoacoustic Model Unit III Time-Frequency Analysis: Filter Banks and Transforms Analysis-Synthesis Framework for M-band Filter Banks. Ted Painter. Non simultaneous Masking.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 11MT243 11MT244 11MT245 11MT246 11MT247 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS MEDIA RESEARCH AUDIO PROGRAMME PRODUCTION LIGHTING TECHNIQUES GAME PROGRAMMING WITH C++ 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 11MT201 AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn about the basics principles of acoustics and coding standards highlighting audio signal processing. DWT and Discrete Wavelet Packet Transform (DWPT). Unit I Introduction Signal Processing essentials. students will know the coding frequencies and the band for audio signal processing. Linear prediction in narrow band and wide band coding Unit II Psychoacoustic Principles Absolute Threshold of Hearing.

Analysis for Vdc and ripple Academic Information   3  . limiter.signal equivalent circuits to determine gain input impedance and output impedance iii. Calculation of overall upper and lower cut off frequencies of multistage amplifiers. Bisection theorem. UNIT I TRANSISTOR BIASING BJT – Need for biasing . Mid – band analysis of amplifier circuits using small . UNIT V RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES Half-wave. Multistage amplifiers. push-pull power amplifiers. Use of Self bias circuit as a constant current circuit. Calculation of power output. High frequency analysis of FET amplifiers. Amplifier rise time and sag and their relation to cut off frequencies. UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS General shape of frequency response of amplifiers. Comparison of CB. full-wave and bridge rectifiers with resistive load. High frequency analysis of BJT amplifiers to obtain upper cut off frequency. Gain-bandwidth product of FETs. Darlington connection using similar and Complementary transistors. Crossover distortion and methods of eliminating it. Low frequency analysis of amplifiers to obtain lower cut off frequency Hybrid – pi equivalent circuit of BJTs. CE and CC amplifiers and their uses. Use of constant current circuit to improve CMRR.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 11MT202 ANALOG ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS I CREDITS: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor amplifier circuits and power supplies.Fixed bias circuit. Basic emitter coupled differential amplifier circuit. General expression for frequency response of multistage amplifiers. AB. Miller’s theorem. Heat sink design. input impedance and output impedance. CG and CD (FET) amplifiers. Method of drawing small-signal equivalent circuit. Load line and quiescent point. Design of power amplifiers and heat sinks v. CS. Methods of biasing transistors & Design of simple amplifier circuits ii. CB and CC amplifiers. Midband analysis of various types of single stage amplifiers to obtain gain. Transconductance. Use as Linear amplifier. Use of JFET as a voltage variable resistor. Variation of quiescent point due to hFE variation within manufacturers tolerance. Source self bias and voltage divider bias for FET. RC coupled and transformer-coupled power amplifiers. Method of stabilizing the Q point to the extent possible. Methods of increasing input impedance using Darlington connection and bootstrapping. Advantage of Self bias (voltage divider bias) over other types of biasing. efficiency and power dissipation. Analysis and design of power supplies and power control using SCR. Method of calculating cutoff frequencies and to determine bandwidth iv. COURSE OUTCOME On completion of this course the student will understand the i. CMRR. UNIT IV LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS Classification of amplifiers (Class A. Class B complementary-symmetry. Efficiency of class A. Different types of biasing circuits. Differential gain. Stability factors. Definition of cut off frequencies and bandwidth. C&D). B. Heat flow calculations using analogous circuit. Derivation of transfer characteristic. Calculation of actual power handling capacity of transistors with and without heat sink. High frequency equivalent circuit of FETs. amplitude modulator. UNIT II MIDBAND ANALYSIS OF SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS CE.

UNIT I ELECTRON BALLISTICS AND INTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTORS Force on charge in electric field – Motion of Charge in uniform and time varying electric fields – Force on a moving charge in a magnetic field – calculation of cyclotron frequency – calculation of electrostatic and magnetic deflection sensitivity. " Integrated Electronics ". Band structure of PN Junction – Current Component in a PN Junction – Derivation of diode equation – Temperature dependence of diode characteristics.. capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively.8th Edition.c power supplies. REFERENCE BOOKS i. Electronically regulated d. Tata McGraw-Hill. Line regulation. TEXT BOOKS i. Nagrath. Pearson Education. 2008. Basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field 2. TMH. Power control using SCR. and MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices. Operation of BJT. 2001.C. 2003. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky. Electronic Devices. et.. L-C and C-L-C filters. drift current and conductivity – Diffusion current – Continuity equation . output resistance and temperature coefficient. CL. iii. 11MT203 ELECTRONIC DEVICES CREDITS: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation.Salivahanan. UNIT III SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS OF PN JUNCTION AND SPECIAL DIODES Calculation of transition and diffusion capacitance – Varactor diode – charge control description of diode – switching characteristics of diode – Mechanism of avalanche and Academic Information   4  . Electronics – Analog and Digital. COURSE OUTCOME On completion of this course the student will understand the 1. ii. 2002. Sixth edition. Switched mode power supplies. “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”. S. UNIT II EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR AND PN JUNCTIONS N and P type semiconductors and their energy band structures – Law of electrical neutrality – Calculation of location of Fermi level and free electron and hole densities in extrinsic semiconductors – Mobility. Robert L. I. Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors 3. Millman J.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology voltage with C. Diode operation and switching characteristics 4. “Electronic Devices and Circuits”. Energy band structure of conductors. PHI. 2nd Edition. semiconductors and insulators – Density distribution of available energy states in semiconductors – Fermi. PHI. FET.Diac probability distribution function at different temperatures – Thermal generation of carriers – Calculation of electron and hole densities in intrinsic semiconductors – Intrinsic concentration – Mass Action Law.Hall effect. 2009.J. Voltage multipliers Zenerdiode regulator. Floyd. and Halkias .al. iv.

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Zener breakdown – Temperature dependence of breakdown voltages – Backward diode – Tunneling effect in thin barriers Tunnel diode – Photo diode – Light emitting diodes. UNIT IV BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS AND FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS Construction of PNP and NPN transistors – BJT current components – Emitter to collector and base to collector current gains – Base width modulation CB and CE characteristics – Breakdown characteristics – Ebers – Moll model – Transistor switching times. Construction and Characteristics of JFET – Relation between Pinch off Voltage and drain current – Derivation. MOSFETS – Enhancement and depletion types. UNIT V METAL SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTS AND POWER CONTROL DEVICES Metal Semiconductor Contacts - Energy band diagram of metal semiconductor junction Schottky diode and ohmic contacts.Power control devices: Characteristics and equivalent circuit of UJT - intrinsic stand off ratio. PNPN diode – Two transistor model, SCR, TRIAC, DIAC. TEXT BOOKS i. Jacob. Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 2003. ii. David A.Bell, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCE BOOKS i. Donald A.Neaman,” Semiconductor Physics and Devices” 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002. ii. S.Salivahanan, N.Sureshkumar and A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH, 2008. iii. S.M.Sze, Semiconductor Devices – Physics and Technology, 2nd edn. John Wiley, 2002. iv. Ben G.Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Pearson Education, 2000. v. Nandita Das Gupta and Amitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices – Modelling and Technology, Prentice Hall of India, 2004. 11MT204 INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION Credits 2:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the types and models of communication • To understand the process of communication • To understand the applications of communication in advertising • To understand the function of mass media • To understand the relationship between culture and communication Course Outcome: To assess the learning out comes, a number of activity may be assigned, and the same may be presented and analyzed, each student’s work to be assessed by the team of subject experts. UNIT I INTRODUCTION COMMUNICATION Introduction: Communication Definitions, Scope and purpose – forms of Communication Intra personal Communication, Interpersonal communication – Mass Communication –
Academic Information   5 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Organizational Communication – Verbal and Non Verbal Communication – Barriers of Communication – Socio economic changes and emerging trends in Communication. UNIT II COMMUNICATION PROCESS Introduction: Process of Communication – source, message, channel, receiver, feedback – Noise, Types of noise – encoding and Decoding Process – Formal and Informal Channel. UNIT III MODELS OF COMMUNICATION What is a Model -The Advantages of Models -Limitations of Models -Classical Communication Models -Aristotle’s definition of rhetoric - Early Linear Models- The Shannon-Weaver Mathematical Model, 1949- Berlo’s S-M-C-R, 1960- Schramm’s Interactive Model, 1954-Non-linear Models-Dance’s Helical Spiral, 1967-Westley and MacLean’s Conceptual Model, 1957-Becker’s Mosaic Model, 1968-Multidimensional Models-Ruesch and Bateson, Functional Model, 1951-Barnlund’s Transactional Model, 1970-Suggestions for Communication Models-Systemic Model of Communication, 1972Brown’s Holographic Model, 1987-A Fractal Model-Suggested Readings UNIT IV MASS MEDIA Introduction – Characteristics of Mass Media – Functions of Mass Media – Inform – Entertain – Educate, Persuade – Dysfunction of Mass Communication and Public Opinion. UNIT V COMMUNICATION AND CULTURE Introduction: Communication and culture – Global Media- Multi Cultural Content – Mass Media and Developing countries – Cross cultural Communication, Problems and challenges, Policies and implications. Text Book: 1. Keval J. Kumar “ Mass Communication in India” Jeyco Publisher 2007. Reference Book: 1. Karl E. Rosengren “ Communication an Introduction: Sage Publication 2006. 2.Mc Quil “ Mass Communication Theory” Sage Publication 5th edition- 2005

11MT205 STUDIO ACOUSTICS CREDITS 3:0:0 Course objective: • To Understand Sound and it’s properties • To gain knowledge about acoustics • Enlightening on the various technicalities involved in acoustic design of studios Course Outcome: • The students will have thorough understanding about acoustics and sound-proofing, which will enable them in acoustic design of studios. Unit-1-Sound Sound source-Propagation of sound-Sound waves-Sound in free space-Sound and obstaclesWavelength-frequency-Complex waves-Pitch-Timbre-harmonics-phase-partials-octavesLinear and Logarithmic measures-Understanding Decibel -Units of sound- Sound Pressure level-Sound Intensity level –Acoustics-Reverberation-Sound transmission class-Echo-Effect of boundaries-Absorbers-Diffusers-Adjustable acoustics-Reverb Time and it’s techniquesAcoustic properties of materials-The human ear
Academic Information   6 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Unit-2-Acoustics of a small recording studio Acoustical characteristics of a studio-reverb-studio design-studio volume-room proportionsreverberation time-diffusion-noise-studio design procedure-studio features-elements common to all studios-Air handlers-Sound isolation-Minimising structure-borne sound Unit-3-Acoustics for control room Initial time delay gap-live end-specular reflections vs diffusion-low frequency resonancesmanaging reflections-control room frequency range-outer shell of the control room-inner shell of the control room-representative control rooms-study of designs-consultants Unit-4-Acoustics for listening room Acoustical link-peculiarities of small room acoustics-room size-room proportions-reverb time-low frequencies-control of modal resonances-bass traps-modal colorations-mid-high frequencies-identification and treatment of reflecting points-lateral reflections-control of spaciousness Unit-5- Acoustics for Multitracking Flexibility-Advantages and disadvantages of multitracking-Achieving track separation-studio acoustics-distance between artists-microphone management-barriers for separation-electronic separation- electronic instruments and separation Text Book: F. Alton Everest,Master Handbook for Acoustics- V Edition, MCGraw-Hill,2010. Reference Book : Michael Talbot Smith, ‘Sound Engineering explained’, Focal Press, 2001

11MT206 ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objectives: The main objective of this curriculum/course is to make the students well versed with basic electronic components and circuits. The students can • Understand the nature and scope of modern electronics. • Describe physical models of basic components. • Design and construct simple electronic circuits to accomplish a specific function, e.g., designing amplifiers, ADC converters etc. • Understand their capabilities and limitations and make decisions regarding their best utilization in a specific situation. Course Outcome: The combination of lecture and laboratory sessions provides learning opportunities that should enable the student to do the following upon completion of this course: • Set up a bias point in a transistor. • Verify the working of diodes, transistors and their applications. • Build a common emitter/base/collector amplifier and measure its voltage gain. • Understand the use of RPS and CRT. • Explore the operation and advantages of operational amplifiers. • Learn to design different types of filters and apply the same to oscillators and amplifiers. • Exploring the circuitry which converts an analog signal to digital signal.
Academic Information   7 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

List of Experiments: 1. Characteristics of PN diode, Zener diode and Photo diode 2. Rectifiers (diode application) 3. NPN-PNP Transistors Biasing 4. Design of UJT/BJT amplifier 5. Characteristics of BJT in common emitter/base/collector configuration 6. Input and Output Characteristics of FET/JFET 7. Filters (R-C/ L-C / R-L-C) 8. Clippers and Clampers 9. RC coupled Amplifier 10. Op-Amp Inverter/Non Inverter 11. Op-Amp Differentiator and Integrator 12. Analog to Digital Conversion 11MT207 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To train the students in the basics of framing artistically with photography and its software applications. To introduce the students the process of photography in studios. Course Outcome: Students will be well equipped with all the basics of framing artistically with photography and its software applications practically which helps them in doing photography. List of experiments Introduction Basics of photography-The still camera-Accessories and equipments-Rules for compositionLighting 1. Framing and composition 2. Pictures under different light conditions 3. Black and White photography 4. Portrait photography 5. Texture/ Pattern photography 6. Travel/Architecture photography 7. Product photography 8. Fashion photography 9. Abstract photography 10. Sports/Action Photography 11. Nature/Wildlife photography 12. HDR photography References 1. Dan Simson, Digital Photography Bible, Wiley, 2004 11MT208 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives: • For the student to understand the various aspects of the Audio studio
Academic Information   8 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

• •

Understanding production workflow To acquire In-Depth knowledge on consoles and Digital audio workstations

Course Outcome: The student will be well versed in the technologies in Audio and Music production at the end of this subject Unit I Microphones and Audio Capturing Sound Electronically-Magnetic and Electronic Principles, Dynamic Transducers, Ribbon Transducers, Carbon Particle Transducers, Piezoelectric Transducers Reversed Transducers. Microphones-Technical Features, Pickup Patterns, Microphone Usage, Specialized Microphones, Microphone Placement, Miking techniques, Off-axis Coloration, Proximity Effect ,Acoustic Phase Relationships, Distant Miking. Unit II Mixers and Recorders Pre-amplification, Peak Indicators, Faders and Potentiometers Level Indicators, Headroom, Signal Routing Signal Sends, Split and Inline Mixers, Control Room Monitoring, Mute and Solo, Pan Potentiometers, Channelized Mixers, Mixer Automation, Digital Consoles, Broadcast Consoles, Automatic Consoles, Digital Audio Workstations and Computers Unit III Post production Systems Audio post production equipments, Pre production for post production, Track planning and Post Production sequences, Transmission and reproduction of audio post production materials, Digital Audio Transfers, Synchronizing and controllers, sound effects, stereo, music, monitoring and the environment Unit IV Editing and Processing Purposes of Editing, Foundations of Editing: Adjusting Levels, Control Surfaces in Editing. Audio Processors and Processing-Amplification and Level Control, Dynamic Processors, Frequency Processors, Temporal Processing, Digital Signal Processing, Noise Reduction Processors, Forensic Sound, Monitors and Loudspeakers, Transporting Sounds Unit V Music Production Genres in music, music production workflow, MIDI, Sampling, Quantization, MIDI automation, Synchronization, MIDI clock, MIDI timecode. Text Book: 1. David Miles Huber, Modern Recording Techniques, Sixth edition, Focal Press,2005. 2. Zack Price, Computer based music production, Cherry lane music, 2005. Reference Books: 1. Michael Talbot Smith, Sound Engineering explained, Focal Press,2001. 2. Bobby Owsinski, The mixing engineers handbook, 2nd edition, Thomas Course Technology,2006. 3. Jay Rose,Audio Post production for digital video,CMP books,2002.

11MT209 VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives: • The students will learn about the working of a professional camera. • They will also learn the various aspects of lighting for television production • In-depth study on the various phases of production
Academic Information   9 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course outcome: The students will be well read about the various aspects and people involved in a production and they will be empowered to produce shows themselves. Unit-1 The camera Types of cameras-parts of a camera-camera controls-lens-Exposure-Shutter-Shutter speedWhite balance-Focusing-Filters-Camera mounts-Shot-Composition-Rules for compositionFraming-Depth of field-Camera angles-Camera movements-scene-sequence-Continuity Unit-2 Lighting for television Need for lighting-Technical reasons-Artistic reasons-Nature of light-Light intensity-Color quality of light-Color Theory-Color temperature-light temperature -light dispersion-direction of light-light sources-types of lights used in production-lighting techniques-lighting instruments-lighting accessories-controllers for lights-lamp care-safety-lighting on locationlighting and camera rehearsal-gaffer Unit-3 Television production- An overview Equipment-Production Team- role of director-role of producer -Production crew-TalentFreelance crew-Production Methods-Venue-Television Studio-Remote production facilitiesProduction Switcher-Production Process-Three stages of production-Planning-Idea-goals and objectives-target audience-budget-limitations-production plan-production methods-schedulecoverage-outline-research-scripting-treatment-pacing the program-camera plan-story boardlocation survey Unit-4 Before the shootBackground-Sets-semi permanent sets-virtual sets-pictorial backgrounds-Props-Make upcostumes-Basic organization-Studio plan-floor plan-lighting plot-cyclorama-camera heightforeground pieces-creating depth-set problems- setup-rehearsal- cues Unit-5-Production techniques Single camera techniques-Multi camera techniques-visual clarity-Studio production-floor manager-cueing-recording the production-tape formats-production style-remote production vehicles-OB van-live transmission and event coverage-test equipments Textbook Gerald Millerson, Jim Owens ,Television production handbook,Focal Press,2008

Reference Books 1. Martha Mollisson, Producing Videos, Black Inc books, 2010. 2. Paul Wheeler, Practical Cinematography, New Riders Press, 2002. 11MT210 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objectives: • To introduce number systems and codes • To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions • To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions • To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits • To introduce the concept of memories, programmable logic devices and digital ICs.
Academic Information   10 

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Media Technology

Course Outcome: On completion of this course, the students can design combinational and sequential digital logic circuits. Also they will have knowledge on Programmable Logic devices and its usage. Unit I: Number Systems and Boolean algebra Binary, octal, hexadecimal number systems, Complements, representation of signed numbers, floating point numbers -BCD-ASCII-EBCDIC-Excess 3 code-gray code-error detecting and correcting codes. Boolean Algebra: Postulates and theorems of Boolean Algebra –canonical forms – simplification of logic functions using Karnaugh map. Unit II: Combinational Logic Design Logic gates –implementation of combinational logic functions – encoders & decoders – multiplexers & demultiplexers –code converters – comparator - half adder, full adder – parallel adder – binary adder – parity generator/checker – implementation of logical functions using multiplexers. Unit III: Counters and Registers RS, JK, Master–slave, D&T flip flops – level triggering and edge triggering – characteristic tables, characteristic equations, excitation tables –asynchronous & synchronous counters – modulus counters–shift register –Johnson counter- ring counter – timing waveforms Unit IV: Sequential Logic Design Basic models of sequential machines – concept of state table – state diagram – state reduction implementation of synchronous sequential circuits – asynchronous sequential logic – Fundamental mode operation – Transition Table, Flow Table, Race, Primitive Flow Table, Reduction of primitive flow table, Reduction of state and flow tables, Race free assignment. Unit V: Programmable Logic and Digital Integrated Circuits Semicustom design – Introduction to PLD’s – ROM – PAL – PLA – FPGA. Digital IC – Characteristics - Logic Families: RTL, TTL, ECL, CMOS, Comparison of performance of various logic families. Text Books: 1. Morris Mano, Digital Design, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. Reference Books: 1. John M.Yarbrough, ‘Digital Logic, Application & Design’, Thomson, 2002. 2. Thomas L.Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, PHI, 2003. 11MT211 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS CREDITS: 4:0:0 Course Objectives • • • • • To introduce the basic building blocks of linear integrated circuits. To teach the linear and non-linear applications of operational amplifiers. To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers and PLL. To teach the theory of ADC and DAC To introduce a few special function integrated circuits.

Course Outcome

Academic Information  

11 

UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS Linear and Nonlinear Circuits using operational amplifiers and their analysis. A/D converter-Flash. Differentiator. Switched capacitor filter. Non-linear function generator. McGraw-Hill. Voltage regulators-linear and switched mode types. Successive approximation. UNIT V SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs Astable and Monostable Multivibrators using 555 Timer. Switches for DAC. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Single slope.. 2002. Inverting and Non inverting Amplifiers. 11MT212 ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II CREDITS: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of Academic Information   12  .Stanely. Pearson Education. 2004. ‘Integrated Electronics’. McGraw-Hill. PM and FSK modulators and demodulators.2001. supply and temperature independent biasing. Monolithic IC operational amplifiers. UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS Analog switches. Dual slope. ‘Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits’. 3. 2000. Voltage to current converter. ‘OP-AMP and Linear IC’s’. Tuned amplifiers. High speed sample and hold circuits and sample and hold ICs. Precision rectifier. Instrumentation amplifier. Current driven DAC. ‘Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits’. Prentice Hall / Pearson Education. Millman. frequency compensation. 4. 2002. Ramakant A. Digital Integrated Electronics. UNIT III ANALOG MULTIPLIER AND PLL Analysis of four quadrant (Gilbert cell) and variable transconductance multipliers. Comparator.J. “Linear Integrated Circuits”. Sine wave Oscillator. 2. Video amplifiers. Taub and Schilling. Voltage to Time converters. Prentice Hall of India. specifications. Multivibrators and Schmitt trigger. TEXT BOOKS 1. 5.Gayakwad. Ltd. Closed loop analysis of PLL.Michael Jacob. Triangular wave generator. J. Fiber optic ICs and Opto-couplers. the students will have a thorough understanding of operational amplifiers with linear integrated circuits. and Halkias. 2000. 2. ‘Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits’. Integrator. Power amplifiers and Isolation Amplifiers. Types of D/A converter. McGraw-Hill. UNIT I CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION FOR LINEAR ICs Current sources. Band gap references. Delta Sigma Modulation.C.C. Also students will be able to design circuits using operational amplifiers for various applications.Roy Choudhry. Frequency synthesizers. Low-pass and band-pass filters. Frequency to Voltage converters. Voltage controlled Oscillator. Log and Antilog amplifiers. New Age International Pvt. D. Shail Jain. William D. AM. Analysis of difference amplifiers with active loads. Compander ICs. Sergio Franco.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology On completion of this course. slew rate and methods of improving slew rate. 2000.

Broad banding using Hazeltine neutralization. 2002 3. 8th edn. multivibrators. feedback factor and basic amplifier configuration with loading effect of feedback network taken into account. and Taub H. Schilling and Belove. Miller and Pierce oscillators. Quartz Crystal Construction. Gain with feedback. "Electronic Circuits". Current time base generators. Tata McGraw-Hill 2001 2. inverters. Input and Output resistances with feedback. Third Edition.. 2004. Colpitts. Millman J. Millman and Halkias. amplifiers. Bootstrap and Miller saw-tooth generators. Storage delay and calculation of switching times. TMH. wave shaping circuits. UNIT III TUNED AMPLIFIERS Coil losses. UNIT V BLOCKING OSCILLATORS AND TIMEBASE GENERATORS Monostable and Astable Blocking Oscillators using Emitter and base timing. C.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology feedback amplifiers.. Diode clippers. Analysis of single tuned and synchronously tuned amplifiers.. blocking oscillators and time based generators. Robert L. Frequency control using core saturation. Linearization using constant current circuit. oscillators. Narrow band neutralization using coil. Electrical equivalent circuit of Crystal. The four basic feedback topologies and the type of gain stabilized by each type of feedback. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky.. Clapp. Desensitivity of gain. Bell. Text books: 1. Wienbridge Oscillator and twin-T Oscillators. Method of identifying feedback topology. "Pulse Digital and Switching waveform". Mechanism for start of oscillation and stabilization of amplitude. Instability of tuned amplifiers. “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford university Press. Analysis of LC Oscillators. 3. clampers and slicers.e. UJT sawtooth generators. 1992. wave shaping circuits. David A. Analysis of Oscillator using Cascade connection of one RC and one CR filters. Hartley. Stabilization techniques. tuned multivibrators and blocking oscillators. Monostable multivibrator. Class C tuned amplifiers and their applications. Frequency range of RC and LC Oscillators. McGraw-Hill International 2000 Reference Books 1. tuned amplifiers. Collector coupled and Emitter coupled Astable multivibrator. Crystal Oscillator circuits. RC phase shift Oscillator. Schmitt trigger circuit. Bistable multivibrators. Efficiency of Class C tuned Amplifier. " Solid State Pulse Circuits ". Pulse transformers. COURSE OUTCOME On completion of this course the student will understand the • Advantages and method of analysis of feedback amplifiers • Analysis and design of RC and LC oscillators. Nyquist criterion for stability of feedback amplifiers. Triggering methods. Speed up capacitors. 2002. Loop gain. UNIT II OSCILLATORS Barkhausen Criterion. Pushpull operation of Astable blocking oscillator i. “Integrated Electronics”. UNIT 1 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS Block diagram. Prentice Hall of India. Distortion and cut off frequencies with feedback. Academic Information   13  . PHI. Analysis of feedback amplifiers. Sedra Smith. UNIT IV WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS RL & RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits. 2. unloaded and loaded Q of tank circuits.

Analog to digital converter 12. Counters 8. Lighting 10. Project 2.This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically operational in broadcast production Industry. Radio Edit 3. Multiplexer and De-multiplexer 4. List of Exercises: 1.Outdoor production 11MT215 DIGITAL COMPOSITING Credits: 4:0:0 Academic Information   14  . Course Outcome: The students will have good knowledge about the concepts of digital electronics and they will be able to apply all these concepts practically. Course Outcome: . Basic Radio Production 2. Code converter 5.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 11MT213 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To impart the concepts of digital electronics practically and train students with all the equipments which will help in improving the basic knowledge. IC timer 10. Shift registers 9. Music production. Linear editing using multi camera production 11. Camera angles 9. Half adder and Full adder 3. Flip-flops 7. Project 1. Encoder and Decoder 6.Indoor production 12.Digital Audio MIDI 4. Camera Movements 8. Outdoor sound sampling 5. Logic gates 2. List of Experiments: 1. Location sound 6. Basic shots 7. Digital to analog converter 11MT214 PROGRAMME PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: The students will be practically taught to apply Programme production techniques involved in Radio Production and TV Production. Parity generation and checking 11.

Format Conversion Pipeline . converting and combining formats Unit V Creating Elements and Integration techniques Lighting. Text Book: Ron Brinkmann. Procedural matte extraction. Time and Temporal Manipulations: Apparent Motion. Clean Plates. Color Manipulations. Working With Proxy Images. 11MT216 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Academic Information   15  . Interface Interactions: Workflow. Methods of representing the compositing process. Common video formats. Shadows. Morphing. Curve Editors. the evolution of Interactivity. Specialized Film Formats. Course Outcome: The students will have good knowledge about the latest trends and technologies involved in digital compositing and they will be able to apply all these concepts practically. Expression Language. digital color matching. Key Framing. Focal Press. Steve Wright. spill suppression. Camera Movements. HSV and YUV Color Representation. lens flares. Unit I Digital Representation of Visual Information Image Generation. Stabilizing a Plate. Using Tracking Curves Manually. Compositing With Pre multiplied Images. Integration Techniques: Scene Continuity. Tracking Multiple Points. Limiting the Search Area. Choosing a Format. Human Intervention. Spatial filters. Temporal Resolution. Film Grain and sensor noise. Matte creation and manipulation: Rotoscoping. Film Formats: 35mm Formats . Morgan Kaufmann. File Format Features . Masks. Choosing a File Format. Additional Channels. Normalized Values. Unit III Image Tracking and Stabilization Tracking an Element into a Plate. Spatial Resolution. second edition. Coriolis. scale and perspective. Digital Image File Formats. Blue screen versus Green screen. matte manipulations. The Integrated Matte Channel. Matched Cameras. Other Formats. Reference Stand-in. Film Stock. Camera tracking. 2006 2. motion blur. Deciding on a Resolution for an Aspect Ratio. Shooting Order. Bit Depth. Reference Books: 1. Temporal Artifacts. 2008. Matte Image. Format Conversion Example. Working with non square pixels. Dough Kelly. Multi source Operators. Filters. Interactive Lighting. camera characteristics: Camera Mismatches. Components. Filtering Algorithms. Digital Compositing for Film and Video. geometric transformations.Vendor –specific File Format Implementations. Nonlinear Color encoding. Lighting. Image Viewing and Analysis Tools Unit IV Film Formats Aspect Ratio: Non square Pixels. Video Formats: Fields. Color Resolution. Color and lighting. Timelines. Atmosphere. Compression. Pixels. Choosing the Feature to Track. 2000. Lighting and Shooting with Blue screens.16mm Formats. Digital Composting in-Depth. Gamma. Unit II Basic Image Manipulation and Compositing Terminology. Focus. light wrapping. Channels.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Course Objective: The objective is to teach students about different concepts involved in digital compositing which will help them to apply these entire concepts practically. Image Input Devices. Changing the Length or Timing of a Sequence. The Art and Science of Digital Compositing. Motion Blur.

McGraw Hill. • To understand the various noises in communication systems. PSK. Deviation ratio. Power signals. Sources of noise. Frequency spectrum. Thermal noise. their operation and performance evaluation. Text Book: 1. 2003.Kennedy. Unit-II Amplitude Modulation Amplitude modulation – Modulation Index. Sampling. Adjacent channel selectivity. COURSE OUTCOME Academic Information   16  . Pulse code modulation – Compression. FSK. “Electronic Communication Systems”. Amplitude limiters. Course Outcome: This course will provide a clear understanding of various communication system techniques. AM transmitters. 2. Modulator demodulator circuits. SSB reception. probability of error. Equivalence between FM and PM. Unit-III Frequency and Phase Modulation Frequency modulation – Frequency spectrum. demodulation and radio receivers. low frequency noise. Noise. • To understand source digitization. ASK. Line codes and waveforms. McGraw Hill. Energy signals. balanced modulator. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis. DSBSC. Noise in FM. QPSK. G. AFC. spectrum. Basic digital communication systems. digital carrier systems. Power. PHI. 11MT217 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER Credits: 4:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVE: To introduce and learn the architecture. Super heterodyne receiver. Pulse Width Modulation. Unit-I Waveform Spectra and Noise Waveforms. Angle modulator. Differential PCM. shot noise. Unit-V Digital Communication Symbol. programming and interfacing of microprocessors and microcontrollers.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To understand basic signals. Dennis John Roddy and Coolen. partition noise. 2000. AGC. FM transmitter. Single-sideband principles. Signal to noise ratio. Reference Books 1. Baud. 2003. Time division multiplexing. tuning range. Phase modulation. Pulse Position Modulation. power. Image rejection. Delta modulation. Principles of Communication Systems. SSB generation. Noise factor. analog modulation. Bit. digital multiplexing and modulation. double –conversion receivers. Noise temperature. Electronic Communications. Unit-IV Pulse Modulation Pulse amplitude modulation. Taub and Schilling. FM broadcast and stereo receivers. Angle modulation Detectors .

2003 11MT218 POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To do a detailed study on post production To gain knowledge about the technologies involved in various post production aspects Course Outcome: The students will gain comprehensive knowledge about post production Unit I Editing Systems Academic Information   17  . 3rd Edition. Pearson Education Asia. Penram International Publishers (India).Bus: RS232CRS485-GPIB UNIT III 8086 CPU Intel 8086 Internal Architecture – 8086 Addressing modes.M. 2000 2. New Delhi. Ltd. New Delhi. Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing. Design.External memory –Counters and Timers. Programming and Interfacing. 3. ADC.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology The students will gain adept knowledge in Microprocessor terminologies. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems.parallel I/O (8255) –Keyboard and Display controller (8279) – ADC/DAC interfacing – Inter Integrated Circuits interfacing (I2C Standard). A. Microprocessors Theory and Applications: Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India. Ray and K. Penram International Publishing. Microprocessor Architecture. UNIT II PERIPHERALS INTERFACING Interfacing Serial I/O (8251). UNIT IV 8051 MICROCONTROLLER 8051 Micro controller hardware. Ramesh S Gaonkar. New Delhi.Serial Data I/O. REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Programming and application with 8085. 2003. UNIT I 8085 CPU 8085 Architecture – Instruction set – Addressing modes – Timing diagrams – Assembly language programming – Counters – Time Delays – Interrupts – Memory interfacing – Interfacing I/O devices.K. UNIT V 8051 PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS 8051 instruction set – Addressing modes – Assembly language programming – I/O port programming -Timer and counter programming – Serial Communication – Interrupt programming –8051 Interfacing: LCD. The 80x86 Family. Mohammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi. John Uffenbeck.I/O pins.Instruction set. McGraw Hill International Edition. Rafi Quazzaman. Stepper Motors.Interrupts-Interfacing to external memory and 8255. Pearson Education. 4th Edition. 2000. Sensors. 2002. ports and circuits. 2. Third Edition.Burchandi. TEXT BOOKS: 1. M. Keyboard and DAC. 3..8086 Assembly language Programming– Interrupts. Pvt. The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application. Kenneth J Ayala. New Delhi. 2004.

line/online edit system compatibility. 4. Transmission and reproduction of audio post production materials.1999. 3. offline editing process. Correctly operate standard electronics test equipment such as CRO. Track planning and Post Production sequences. DSO. online editing Digital video effects. Common colour errors and techniques. mixing consoles and audio processing equipments. stereo. Introduction to Advance colour correction Text Books 1 Jay Rose. Focal Press. 2003. Perceptions. Signal analyzers and Function Generators to test electronics Circuits Correctly analyze a circuit and compare its theoretical performance to actual performance. preparing for post production. Voice over perspectives. CMP Books. Audio workstations. mixing SD and HD. LCD monitors. CMP Books 2002. conversion problems. edit and deliver at one frame. Tim Amyes. Focal Press 2007. Digital video and video tape formats. video tape editing. Colour monitors and tools. working with multiple video tracks and layers Unit IV High Definition Post Production Frame recording method. Colour Correction for Digital Video: Using Desk Top Tools to Perfect Your Image. compression.High Definition Post Production: Editing and Delivering HD Video. shoot. Audio Post production in Video and Film. TV Signals. Focal Press. time code. Digital Audio Transfers and Recording. 2. Basics of the Video Production Diary. Steven Hullfish-Jaime Fowler. 18  Academic Information   . Audio Post Production for Digital Video. chromo sampling. Steven E Browne. A Professional Guide. off. bit depth. 11MT219 COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS LAB CREDITS 0:0:2 COURSE OBJECTIVE To learn circuit design and understand the theoretical concepts by hands on with circuit connections in breadboard for communication and Audio application. 2001. and techniques of video editing. Planning for post production. Audio post production for video Unit III Video Post Production Technology. Video Editing and post production. monitoring and the environment Unit II Audio Editing Editing software’s. computer file size for high definition video. COURSE OUTCOME On Completion of this lab the Student will be able to: • • • Implement properly any constructed circuits.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Audio post production equipments. music. Synchronizing and controllers. Focal Press. plasma screens. Des Lyver. sound effects. 2001. 2 Gary H Anderson. DLP monitors Unit V Colour Correction Colour theory. Reference Books 1.

Band pass filter d. Time Division Multiplexing 11. Study of Sampling Theorem 10. Programs on ascending/descending order using 8051 12.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology LIST OF PRACTICALS 1. ADC Interfacing using 8085 7. List of Experiments: 1. Classes of Amplifiers Design 6. Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8086 9. Course Outcome: The students will be equipped with the basic knowledge of microprocessor and microcontroller interfacing and their applications. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis Circuits Design 7. Amplitude Modulation & Diode Detector 4. Equalizer 2. Programs on finding largest/smallest number using 8051 11. Data Transfer operation using 8085 3. Parallel port Interfacing using 8255 6. PLL applications 12. Active Filters Design a. Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8051 10. Stepper motor interfacing using 8051 11MT221 POST PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES LAB Credits :0:0:2 Course Objective: The students will be practically taught to apply post production techniques and procedures involved in TV and Film Production. High pass filter c. IF amplifier. Mixer 8. Multivibrator Circuits Design 9. Frequency Modulation & Demodulator 5. DAC Interfacing using 8085 8. Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8085 2. Programs on finding largest/smallest number using 8085 5. Code conversions using 8085 4. Low pass filter b. Academic Information   19  . Band elimination filter 3. Radiation Pattern of Antennas a) Inverse Square Law of Propagation b) Reciprocity Theorem 11MT220 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: To introduce to students the basics of microprocessor and microcontroller Programming and their applications.

Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Course Outcome: . 5. smith chart. Cavity Resonators. characteristic impedance. 3. LF propagation and VLF propagation. Music Video 11MT222 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION AND RADIATION CREDITS: 4:0:0 Course Objective: The students will learn about transmission lines and the latest technologies in signal transmission systems Course Outcome: The course aims at training the students to become broadcast engineers. Music track 12. Titling ADR/Voice over track 8. Extremely low-frequency propagation. ionospheric propagation.This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically operational in TV and Film Industry List of Exercises: 1. 2. SFX track 10. Modes in Waveguides. Auxillary Components UNIT-III RADIO-WAVE PROPAGATION Propagation in free space. surface wave. time-domain reflectometry. lossless lines at radio frequencies. transmission lines as circuit elements. power gain of an antenna. VSWR. phase and group velocities. Tropospheric propagation. standing waves. polarization. Academic Information   20  . Matching & Attenuation. summary of radio-wave propagation UNIT-IV ANTENNAS Antenna Equivalent circuits. 6. effective area & effective length of an antenna. vertical antennas. Re-recording 11. Foley 9. Waveguide Coupling. loop and ferrite. folded elements. Research & reference Script breakdown & script Production-Shooting the concept Editing-Rough cut Editing-First cut Editing-Final cut with effects.rod receiving antennas. Circular Waveguides. 4. UNIT-I TRANSMISSION LINES AND CABLES Primary line constants. UNIT-II WAVEGUIDES RESONATORS & COMPONENTS Rectangular Waveguides. propagation coefficient. coordinate system. slotted-line measurements at radio frequencies. Isotropic radiator. Hertzian dipole. 7. phase velocity and line wavelength. radiation fields.

photo detectors. Strategy and Plans. light sources for fiber optics. Students can be made into groups and conduct an advertising and PR Campaigns. Creative Strategy and Copywriting – Art Production – Print Production – Electronic Production Unit IV Media Media Choice.Intercultural and International Advertising Unit III Creative Process The Creative Process – Creativity. dispersion. fiber optic communication systems TEXT BOOK 1.Dennis John Roddy and Coolen. 4. McGraw Hill Higher Education.Advertising Research. 2003 REFERENCE BOOKS 1. 3. Prentice Hall. PHI. McGraw Hill. UNIT I : INTRODUCTION Understanding advertising today-The foundations of advertising -The advertiser Agency Partnership-The advertising Environment.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology nonresonant antennas. 2002 Louis E Frenzel.Sales promotion and supplementary media – public relations and special communications. the same be assessed by subject experts. connectors and splices. strategy and planning –print media – electronic mediadirect marketing and out of home advertising. 2000 11MT223 PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0 COURSE OBJECTIVES: To understand the purpose and meaning of advertising To understand advertising as an industry To understand the process of communication in advertising To evaluate the need of Public Relation and PR function as a Mass Media COURSE OUTCOME To assess the learning out comes. activities based on developing and making of an advertisement may be assigned. 2. lasses in fibers.G. McGraw Hill. driven arrays. and Planning – Audience analysis and buyer behavior – Segmentation . VHF-UHF antennas.Putting the campaign together.Objectives. Unit II Audience and Advertising Audience Definition. Communication Electronics. 2002 Roy Blake. 2. Electronic Communication Systems. Davis Electronic Communication Systems. Schweber. microwave antennas UNIT-V FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION Principles of light transmission in a fiber. and the same may be presented and analyzed. Electronic Communciation Systems.Kennedy.Media Objectives. Electronic Communications.Targeting and Positioning. Taub and Schilling – Principles of Communication Systems. Research. 2004. parasitic arrays. 2003 William L.local advertising –from plan to results: The complete campaign Academic Information   21  . Delmar/Thomson Learning.

UNIT II: Distributed multimedia systems – Features – Resource management – Networking – Multimedia operating systems – Distributed multimedia servers – Distributed multimedia applications – Multimedia Communication Standards – MPEG – MPEG 2 – MPEG 4 – DMIF – MPEG 4 Video. Delhi.(2001). Encyclopedia of Advertising”. 2000. definition and relevance of PR role – Mass media & PR. 3. PR ethics and regulations. writing for PR. Advertising Excellence: McGraw Hill Publications. Principles of Advertising and IMC. implementation and operation of multimedia communication and signal processing systems and their applications. Text Book Courtland L. New York. 2000. PR and corporate Communications. McGraw Hill. UNIT III: ITU-T Standardization of Audio visual communication system – IETF and Internet Standards – Multimedia Communications across networks – Packet Audio/Video in the network environment – Video transport across generic networks UNIT IV: Multimedia transport across ATM networks – Multimedia across IP networks – Multimedia across DSLs – Internet access networks – Multimedia across wireless UNIT V: Mobiles Networks – Broadcasting networks – Digital Television infrastructure for interactive multimedia servers. Course Outcome: The students will be well equipped with the knowledge of Multimedia Communication Systems Unit I: Multimedia Communications – Introduction – Model – Requirements – Audio-Visual Integration – Media interaction – Lip reading – Lip synchronization – Lip tracking – Audio to visual mapping – Multimedia processing in communication – Digital media – Signal processing elements – Challenges – Perceptual coding of audio – Transform audio coders – Subband coders – Image coding – Video coding – Watermarking – Organization storage and retrieval issues – Signal processing for networked multimedia(NN) – NN for multimedia processing – Multimedia processors. John McDonough. 2000. PR in Government. The Advertising and Hand book. design. McGraw Hill. 11MT224 MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce to the students theory. Reference Books: 1.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Unit V Public Relations Evolution and growth. public and private sectors. Academic Information   22  . Audio –MPEG 7 – MPEG 21. 2. Sean Brierley. Vol 1. Bovee.

rendering and advanced animation techniques. 2003. 2002. Prentice Hall India. UNIT I: Preproduction and Modeling Basics Preproduction:Introduction-Storyboarding-Character and Model Design-Sound Design – Technical Tests-Producton Scheduling Modeling Basics:Introduction-Polygon ModelingSplines and Patches-Coordinate Systems-Viewing Windows-Geometric PrimitivesTransformations-Common Modeling Techniques-Hierarchies-Booleans and Trims-Basic Deformations UNIT II: Rendering Basics Introduction-The Camera-Lights-Surface Characteristics-Shading Algorithms-Rendering Algorithms-Background Images-Surface Texture Mapping-Solid Texture Mapping-Final Rendering UNIT III: Animation Basics and AdvancedModeling Animation Basics:Introduction-Keyframing-Interpolations-Parameter-curve Editing-Dope Sheet Editing-Forward Kinematics-Inverse Kinematics-Motion Paths-Shape DeformationsCamera Animation-Animating Light and Surface Properties-Pose-based Animation. Milocanovic.Rigid Bodies-Soft-Body Dynamics-Particle SystemsCloth Dynamics-Motion Capture-Camera-Motion Matching-Character Rigging:Movement Controls. Multimedia Communication Systems. Advanced Modeling:Introduction-Virtual Sculpting-Digitizing Techniques-Procedural Modeling-Stitched Patches-Subdivision Surfaces-Displacement Mapping-Hair and FurPaintbased Modeling-Higher-level Primitives UNIT IV: Advanced Rendering Introduction-Atmospheric Effects-Fractals-Lighting Subtleties-Advanced TexturingTexturing Polygons-Background Shaders-Non-Photorealistic Rendering-Reflection Maps and Environment Procedures-More Rendering Algorithms-Rendering for Output UNIT V: Advanced Animation and Postproduction Introduction-Animated Fillets-Limits and Constraints-Metaballs-Expressions and Driven Keys-Motion Dynamics:Principles. Multimedia and Communication Technology. Course Outcome: Students will be clear with each and every working of animation software. Rao. ISBN 81-7808532-1. Second Edition. Bojkovic. Pearson Education. Focal Press. ISBN 81-8147-145-8 11MT225 COMPUTER ANIMATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To make the students know animation in detail starting from preproduction till postproduction with modeling.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Text book: K. Fred Halsall. Text Book: Academic Information   23  . Dragorad A.R. Reference books: 1. 2001. ISBN 81-203-2145-6. Steve Heath. Multimedia Communications. Zaron S. 2.Deformation Controls-Facial Animation –Nonlinear Animation Postproduction: Introduction-Compositing-Editing.

ISBN 0-393-73083-2. Principles of Three-Dimensional Computer Animation. Daniel Cunliffe.BSpline for design .HSR method for curved surfaces.Removing hidden surfaces .Introduction to shading models . Marcia Kuperberg.W. Springer-Verlag. UNIT II Curve and surface design – Introduction .W.Second Edition.Finding better blending functions The B-Spline basis functions and useful properties. UNIT III Color theory .S.2003.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Michael O’Rourke. Third Edition. 2001.JR. Prentice Hall. ISBN 81-203-2813-2. Essential Computer Animation.Aliasing and antialiasing technique . Geoff Elliott.Creating more shades and colors. A Guide to Computer Animation. ISBN 1903337-18-6. UNIT V Ray tracing – Introduction .The popularity algorithm . ISBN 0-24051671-0.On hidden line removal methods . John Vince.Bresenham’s line drawing algorithms .A Glimpse at interpolation – Modeling curvedsurfaces. 2.Adding shadows of objects . Reference Books: 1. UNIT IV Hidden surface removal – Introduction .Area subdivision approaches .Drawing shaded pictures of scenes . Course Outcome: Students will be clear with every detail behind the concept of modeling and rendering.Manipulating pixmaps – Combining pixmaps .The depth buffer algorithm revisited .Flat shading and smooth shading .Overview of the ray tracing process .Intersection of a ray with an object .Adding texture to faces .List priority HSR method . 11MT226 3D MODELING AND RENDERING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To make the students know animation in detail about modeling and rendering in 3D animation which plays a vital role in any animation.Scan line HSR method .Color quantization .Filling polygon defined regions . 2000.Describing curves by means of polynomials Interactive curve design . UNIT I Rendering faces for visual realism . Focal Press. Crucial. 2002. ISBN 1-85233141-0.Adding surface texture – Extents .Hill.Organizing a ray tracer application Intersecting rays with other primitives .Median cut algorithm .Defining and filling regions of pixels Manipulating symbolically defined regions . 3.Reflections and transparency Compound objects: Boolean operations on objects Text Book: F.Uniform quantization .Norton & Company Ltd. Computer graphics using Open GL. Academic Information   24  .Adding shadows for greater realism ..The international commission on Illumination standard .Rational Splines and NURBS curves .Color spaces .Introduction-describing colors .Setting up the geometry of ray tracing .Octree quantization. Multimedia Computing.Bezier curves for curve design . 2003.Tools for raster displays – Introduction .

Kinematics Modelling. Second Edition. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers. To introduce key trends on network principles and practices.2003. 11MT228 COMPUTER NETWORKS Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: 1. UNIT V Human Factors in VR-Methodology and Terminology-User Performance Studies-VR health and safety Issues-VR and Society Textbook: Grigore C. 2000. 2003.Alan B Cranig. Course Outcome: Students will know the technology behind rapidly advancing virtual reality. Interactive Computer Graphics –A Top Down approach with OpenGL.Understanding Virtual RealityInterface. Course Outcome: Academic Information   25  .ISBN 0-471-36089-9. Wiley Interscience. (Chapters 1-7). 11MT227 VIRTUAL REALITY TECHNOLOGY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: The sole objective of virtual reality technology is to study the technology behind an environment as realistic as possible. ISBN 0-201-38597-X.Physical Modelling-Behavior Modelling-Model management-VR Programming-Toolkits and Scene Graphs-World ToolkitJava 3D-General Hap tics open Software Toolkit-People shop.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Reference Book: Edward Angel.Sound displays-Hap tic Feedback UNIT III Computing Architecture of VR-The Rendering Pipeline-PC Graphic Architecture-Work station based Architectures-Distributed VR Architectures UNIT IV Modelling – Geometric modelling. To provide a top down approach which focus on the internet and its accessible styles. 2. Addison Wesley.Application and Design. UNIT I Introduction-Input devices-Three dimensional position trackers-Navigation and Manipulation Interfaces-Gesture Interfaces UNIT II Output Devices-Graphic displays. Reference Book William R Sherman. Virtual Reality Technology.Burdea and Philippe Coiffet.

UNIT I Academic Information   26  . Course Outcome: Students will be able to apply these principles in 2D. Prentice Hall of India.multiple access protocols-Link layer addressing-Ethernet. Eighth Edition. ISBN 0321497708.Delay and loss in packet switched networks. 4th Ed.Socket Programming with TCP.P2P file sharing. K. Visible Surface Determination. 3D Graphics. Kurose. Data and Computer Communications. Computer Networks.Electronic mail in the internet.Multiplexing and De– Multiplexing.What’s inside a router?. Socket Programming with UDP UNIT III Transport Layer: Introduction to transport layer services. A Top-Down Approach Featuring the Internet.2007. are studied in detail for a competitive computer professional.Richard H Austing.Computer Networks and Open Systems.The web and the HTTP.DNS.File transfer: FTP.ISBN9780132433105 2. F.The Internet protocol (IP): Forwarding and addressing in the internet. 11MT229 COMPUTER GRAPHICS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: The aim of this course is to give the fundamentals of graphics and animation. Ross.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Students will be able to manage networks and the applications behind it. 2007.Connectionless transport: UDP. UNIT I Introduction: Computer Networks and the Internet-The network edge-The Network CoreAccess networks and physical media-ISPs and Internet backbones.the Internet standard management frameworkASN 1 Text Book: 1.Tanenbaum. 2002 ISBN 0130661023. William Stallings.The Internet’s Directory Service.Protocol layers and their service models UNIT II Application Layer: Principles of network applications. Reference Books 1. J. Addison-Wesley. Network Management: IntroductionThe Infrastructure for Network Management. Prentice Hall.Jones and Bartlett Publishers.Routing in the Internet UNIT V Link layer: introduction and services.2001. Andrew S. Computer Networking. Lillan N Cassel.Error detection and correction techniques. 3. W.3D graphics and virtual reality. fourth edition.Routing algorithms. The concept of Principles of 2D Graphics.Principles of reliable data transferConnection-oriented transport: TCP-Principles of congestion control-TCP congestion control UNIT IV Network Layer: Introduction-Virtual circuit and datagram networks.

S. John Wiley.Projections in Java 3D-Modelling Three dimensional objects-Three Dimensional objects and their surfaces-Topological notions-Modelling techniques-Surface Modeling with polygons in java 3D-importing geometric objects in to java3D-Parametric curves and freedom surfacesnormal vectors for surfaces.Drawing arbitrary curves-Antialiasing-Drawing thick lines-Filling areas-Buffered images in java 2D-Displaying text-Text in java 2D-Grey images and intensities-Colour Model-Colour Interpolation with java 2D. 11MT230 SOFTWARE RADIO Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: 1.stereoscopic viewing Text Book: 1. Fundaments of Computer Graphics.implementations of interpolators in Java 2D-Single or double precision UNIT II Drawing lines and curves: Lines and pixel graphics-The midpoint algorithm for linesStructural algorithms-Pixel densities and line styles-Lineclipping-Midpoint algorithm for circles. 2002.jr . To cover every issues and techniques that an engineer must understand to successfully utilize DSP in their radio systems and subsystems Academic Information   27  . Morgan Kaufmann publishers. To introduce the key concepts of software radio design 2.Interaction-Interaction in Java 3D-Collision detection-Collision detention in Java 3DSound effects-Sound effects in Java 3D. F. 2005.Prentice Hall of India.Computer graphics using Open GL. ISBN: 978-1. 2008. Rick Parent.Hill.56881-269-4. ISBN:0471430366 . UNIT V Special effects and virtual reality: Fog and particle systems.Elementary geometric objects in java 3D-The scenegraph in java 3DAnimations and moving objects.Dynamic surfaces. Computer Animation Algorithms and Techniques. UNIT III Basic principles of three-dimensional graphics :Geometric transformations-The scenegraph. The Art of 3D Computer Animation and Effects.Fog in Java 3D.2813-2 3. 4. Frank Klawonn.Interpolators for continuous changes. et al. Peter Shirley. AK Peters Ltd.2004. Springer.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Basic principles of two dimension graphics: Raster versus vector graphics-The first java 2D program-Basic geometric objects-Geometric transformations-Homogenous coordinatesApplications of transformations-Geometric transformations in java 2D-Animation and movements based on transformations. ISBN: 978-1-84628-847-0 Reference Books: 1. Issac Victor Kerlow. ISBN 1558605797 2.2006. Introduction to Computer Graphics Using Java 2D and 3D.iSBN—81203. UNIT IV Visible surface determination: Clipping volumes-Algorithms for visible surface determination-Image precision techniques-Priority algorithms-Illumination and shadingLight sources-Light sources in java 3D-Reflection-Shading in java 3D-Shading-ShadowsTransparency-Textures-Textures in java 3D-The radiosity model-Ray tracing.

.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Course Outcome: Students will be able to implement these concepts while designing a software radio and other related project works with DSP concepts. Artech House. ISBN 1-58053-347-7 11MT231 IP TV AND INTERNET VIDEO Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: 1. “Digital Synthesizers and Transmitters for software Radio”. software. 2003. “Software Defined Radio for 3G”. Madani. Jeffrey H. Alonistioti. Digital Hardware Choices: Key hardware elements-DSP processors-field programmable gate arrays-trade off using DSPs FPGAs and ASICs-Networks-Object oriented programming-Object brokers-mobile application environments. UNIT I Introduction: Need for Software Radio-Characteristics-Benefits-Design Principles-RF Implementation issues: Purpose of RF front end-Dynamic range-RF receiver front-Enhanced flexibility of the RF chain with software radios-Importance of components to overall performance-transmitter architecture and their issues-noise and distortion in RF chainFlexible RF systems with micro electro mechanical systems. To provide an overview of hardware. Reed. Burns. Dillinger. Prentice Hall PTR.”Software Radio: A Modern Approach to Radio Engineering”.“Cognitive Radio Technology”. ISBN-13: 9780750679527 4. Academic Information   28  . UNIT III Digital Generation of Signals: Direct digital synthesis-approaches to direct digital synthesis analysis of spurious signals-spurious components due to periodic jitter-band pass signal generation-performance of direct digital synthesis systems-hybrid DDS PLL Systemsapplications of direct signal synthesis-generation of random sequences-ROM compression techniques. systems. Jouko Vankka. UNIT II Multi Rate Signal Processing: Introduction-sample rate conversion principles-poly phase filters-digital filter banks-time recovery in digital receivers. 2006. ISBN 0-13-081158-0 Reference Books: 1. Springer Verlag. UNIT IV Analog to Digital and Digital to analog conversion: Parameters of ideal data converters parameters of practical data converters-common ADC and DAC architectures UNIT V Smart antennas: vector channel modeling. 2005 2. and Internet technologies.”Software defined radio : architectures.ISBN-13: 9780470851647 3.Elsevier Science & Technology Books. 2002. Text Books: 1.benefits of smart antennas-structures of beam forming systems-smart antennas algorithms-diversity and space time adaptive signal processing hardware implementation of smart antennas. and functions” Wiley. 2002. Bruce Fette.

Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 2.Addressing Modes. Next Generation IPTV Services and Technologies. ISBN: 0849374154 11MT232 MICROCONTROLLERS AND ITS APPLICATIONS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn about the basics of PIC Interfacing and ARM Processor. ISBN: 0240809548 Reference Books: 1. 2007. Gilbert Held. CRC Press.Instruction Sets. Wes &Howard Greenfield. Academic Information   29  . Engineering Consortium. IPTV and Internet Video: New markets in television Broadcasting. Howard J. WileyInterscience. 2006. 2007. Understanding IPTV. Intl.Instruction Format. UNIT I: Introduction to PIC Microcontroller: Overview of PIC18 MCU – Architecture .2007. UNIT IV Bandwidth: DSL technologies-DSLAM-Home gateway-multiple televisions-Calculate Bandwidth UNIT V Set top boxes & Internet video technologies: Basic functions-middleware-STB selection issues internet video technologies-types of internet streaming-commercial players-content creation workflows Text Book: 1. their bandwidths etc UNIT I Introduction: Internet Protocol-Market for IP Video-Characteristics of IPTV-Internet videoIPTV versus internet video-constructing an IPTV network-constructing an internet video system UNIT II Internet Protocol & video compression: Packet – types of IP Networks-IP Addresses-key parts of an IP network-Transport protocols-Multicasting-video compression-groups of pictures-MPEGMicrosoft Windows Media and VC-1-Other compression techniques UNIT III Video Quality& servers: Maintaining video quality and security-video servers-video on demand servers-advertising servers-live streaming servers-encryption and right management. Course Outcome: On successful completion of the subject.CPU Registers – Pipelining. To introduce key trends and drivers transforming the world of broadcast television and the Web. ISBN 9781931695589 2. students can able to write the assembly language coding for Various application in Linux Environment.PIC18 Memory Organization. The Basics of IPTV.ISBN :0470163720 3. Focal Press. Gunn. Course Outcome: Students will know the working of internet protocol and other characteristics like video compression. Gerard O'Driscoll.

Han-Way Huang.Interrupt Handling Schemes .Need for padding – Convolution and correlation UNIT II Image Enhancement Basic gray level transformations – Histogram Equalization and matching – Arithmetic and logic operations – Spatial averaging – Directional smoothing – Median filtering – Unsharp Academic Information   30  .Reentrant Interrupt Handler . David Seal.I2C.Core Extensions . UNIT V: Exception and Interrupt Handling: Interrupts . 11MT233 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the fundamental concepts of Image processing techniques.ARM V5E Extensions .Multiple Register Load .Addison Wesley Professional.Loading Constants .store instructions – Software Interrupt Instruction .Nested Interrupt Handler .Architecture revisions .Non-nested Interrupt Handler .Branch Instructions – Load .Software Interrupt Instructions.ARM Thumb Interworking .2nd edition. Course Outcome: Can develop simple algorithms for image processing. Andrew N.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology UNIT II: PIC Interfacing: PIC Interrupts.Conditional Executions.Embedded System Hardware . “ PIC Microcontroller. Program Status Register – Pipeline – Exceptions – Interrupts . Sloss.Parallel Ports – Interfacing with simple output Devices. Dominic Symes & Chris Wright.ARM Processor families. Morgan – Kaufmann Publishers. UNIT I Introduction Fundamental steps and applications of digital image processing – Elements of visual perception – Image sensing and acquisition – Image sampling and quantization . REFERENCE BOOK 1.D/A ConverterTimers.A/D converter. UNIT IV: Introduction to the ARM and Thumb Instruction Set: Data processing Instructions .ARM Architecture Reference Manual.USART.Embedded System Software Registers.Prioritized Simple Interrupt Handler – Prioritized Standard Interrupt Handler TEXT BOOKS 1.An Introduction to Software and Hardware Interfacing”.and the Vector table . Thumb Register usage .Program Status Register Instructions .Data Processing Instructions . UNIT III: ARM Processor Fundamentals: ARM Design philosophy .2004. “ARM System Developer’s Guide – Designing and Optimizing System Software”. First Indian Reprint CENGAGE Learning – 2008.Single – Register Load – Store Instructions .Store Instructions – Stack Instructions . 2.Basic relationship between pixels – 2D DFT and its properties – Computing inverse Fourier transform .SPI.2001.

The production planning and the production techniques are addressed in detail along with the TV broadcasting prerequisites.Smoothing and sharpening frequency domain filters – Homomorphic filtering UNIT III Image Restoration & Color image Processing Image degradation/restoration model – Restoration in the presence of noise only spatial filtering – Periodic noise reduction by frequency domain filtering . Lighting & Power departments .Gonzalez and Richard E. 2002 REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Audio. Academic Information   31  . Indian Reprint.Shooting Floor .Dance shows – Soap Operas – Game Shows . “Digital Image Processing”. 3rd edition.Zooming .Recording studio . Crew & Cast . Prentice Hall of India. 2002 2. John Wiley and Sons. Woods.Tele serial – Comedy – Reality – Music .Presenting Programme .TRP rating.2002 11MT234 TELEVISION PROGRAMME FORMATS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: The objective of this module is to describe the process of producing a programme for television. K. Unit II: TV Programme Format – Entertainment Segment Telecini Films – Drams .Audience preference . Anil K. “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”. Rafael C.Master Control Room CAR & Server Room .Pratt.Studio Staff: Talents.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology masking – Gradient and Laplacian operators . Adaptive and multispectral – Region based segmentation TEXT BOOK 1. in lucid style & interest.Play out & transmission Room . Course Outcome: The students will understand the programming techniques of making a video film for television and will be able to present it different approved formats that can communicate the message intended.Production Planning Tools – Post Production Methods . “Digital Image Processing”.OB Van – Equipments in Video. global. Unit I: Production Planning & Studio Practice Pre Production Planning . William.Inverse and Wiener filtering concept – Color models – Pseudocolor image processing – Color transformations – Smoothing and sharpening UNIT IV Image Compression Fundamentals – Image compression models – Elements of information theory – Variable length coding – LZW coding – Bit plane coding – Lossless predictive coding – Lossy predictive coding – Transform coding UNIT V Image Segmentation Detection of discontinuities – Edge linking based on local processing and Hough transform – Thresholding: local. PHI 2nd edition.Commercials.Jain. 9th edition.

Unit V: TV Programme Format – Science & Sports Segment Nature – Wild Life – Space – Scientific Experiments – Live Sports – Teleshopping – Interactive Shows Text Books: 1. UNIT – I Introduction to Lighting: Lighting in real world .Pivot point .Optical FX Attributes.Depth map and retraced shadows Shadow catching .Barn doors .Light source attributes.Light decay .Point light .Lighting quality .Lighting direction -Lighting source .Shadow linking – Glows – Halos . Film Production Management by Bastian Cleve Focal Press – 3rd Edition 2007 2. The Video Maker Guide to Video Production by the Editors of Video maker Magazine.Lens flair .Cone radius Penumbra radius .Volume light -Light links .Light attributes editing menus .Shadow links .Light linking . Focal Press .Creating a Maya light source .Light liking editor .Principles of light and shadow -Absorption.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Unit III: TV Programme Format – Educational & Children Segment Quiz Programme – Talent Shows .Docudrama – Health. UNIT III Lighting Menus: Show. resize light manipulator .Lighting color .Area light . hide.Shadow in Maya .Color temperature . Unit IV: TV Programme Format – News & Current affairs Segment Live & Recorded News – Interviews – News Documentaries – Talk Shows .Documentary . 11MT235 3D LIGHTING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: To make students know all the lighting techniques and options available in Maya.Decay regions . Reference Books: 1.4th Edition 2008. UNIT V Mental Ray for Maya Lighting: 32  Academic Information   .Default lighting in Maya . UNIT – II Light & Shadow in Maya: Sources of direct light .Investigative Candid & Hidden Camera Source.Lighting equipments . Allan Unwin publication (Australian Film Television and Radio school) Edition 2007. Producing Video – A complete Guide by Martha Mollison. Agricultural & Awareness Programme – Reality Shows – Puppet & Crafts – Cartoons.Determining a light’s area of illuminationLinking light sources to surfaces-Illuminating specific object-Control a spot light’s circle boundary UNIT IV Types of Light in Maya Directional light . Course Outcome: Students will be able to apply lighting options effectively.Centre of interest . refraction of light.Spot light .Ambient light . reflection.

Render node attributes .Creating and assigning materials to surfaces Mapping and positing textures .Creating nodes .Deleting nodes -Import and export shading .Ray tracing concepts . UNIT – III Applying colors. Label mapping . Reference Book Jeremy Bion.Using layered textures -Converting texture shading to a file texture .High dynamic range imaging HDRI . Maya materials: Surface . Text book: Lee Laniel.File textures-Texture filtering .Digital lighting and Rendering.2006. UNIT IV Working with Mental Ray Shaders Using custom mental ray for Maya shader .Global illumination – Caustics .Mental ray for Maya shaders -Mental ray connections .Render Nodes .displacement-Volumetric materials .Advanced Maya Texturing and Lighting. colour.Navigating hyper shade .Shading networks .Image based lighting Sun and sky simulating .Texturing-Hyper shade .Final gatheringAmbient occlusion .Custom mental ray text .2D and 3D texture positioning.Creating nodes Changing default connections .Surface Texture .Working with custom mental ray text .Mental ray area light-Native light linking in mental ray -Color bleed Photon maps .Assigning text to entities . UNIT – II Maya textures: 2D and 3D textures .rayrc file -Using mental ray-Specifying light parameters . UNIT – I Shading and Texturing Surfaces: Shading .Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Lighting concepts .Animating node attributes -Working with shader libraries . • To understand the ray file options • To learn the techniques texturing the background Course Outcome: Students should be equipped with texturing skills so that they may be able to apply the colours and light & shadow.Layered textures.Render node connections.Hyper shade tabs .Creating texture reference object.Photon tracing .Layered Shaders . 11MT236 3D TEXTURING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To understand the texturing for 3d models • To identify the difference in application of 2d & 3d textures • To learn matching the environment light.Double sided shaded surface.2000.New Riders Press.Texture mapping Mapping methods .Adjusting node attributes . shading and textures: Customizing hyper shade .Material nodes -Texture node Environment textures .Editing maya.2nd edition.Mental ray shadow maps.Procedural textures .Assigning shading group .Advanced information.Duplicating nodes .Loading shaders .Working with phenomenon . and shadow.Sybex.Texture placement vs. Menus: Lighting and shading . The important component of this programme is to enrich the knowledge of texturing models appropriately.custom vertex data . UNIT – V Shading Backgrounds: Academic Information   33  .Surface Shading .

convolution code. Unit I Digital Audio Fundamentals Samplers. Time compression. CD readout.Simulated reflections .Hard Surface shading and texturing.Rendering menu set .Hill. Ken C. Positioning image plane Static image file . 1997.computer networks and file transfers. Channel coding. Digital audio tape Hardware. Text book: Andrew and Russell Hazelden.2006. 2000. their interfaces and error control. over sampling A/D converter. Principles of Digital Audio. John Wiley. switch utilities. Udo Zolzer.Animated file . Focus and tracking systems.3D image file . render node utilities.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Backgrounds . error concealment Unit III Digital Audio Interfaces and Tape Recorders Introduction to the AES/EBU Interface. Dither. Sampling rate conversion.Reflections on basic shapes Creating fog – smoke – dust . hard disc recorders. Digital audio extractions.Creating textured backgrounds . An introduction to Digital audio. Channel code of CD and mini disc. hard disc recording. player’s structure: DVD video and audio Coding Unit V PC Audio PC Buses and interfaces.Volume primitives .Creating backgrounds . sources of errors.2nd edition. Error correction strategy. Internet audio. PC Audio software applications.Baking textures and vertices with mental ray .Baking textures and vertices . Creating reflections: True reflections . Error correction.Baking global illumination . Pohlmann. cyclic Redundancy check code.Basic color and texture backgrounds . John Watkinson. Focal Press 1994.Baking illumination and colors . Red Solomon codes. Reference Books 1.Dover Studios Professional. Asynchronous operation. multi channel audio digital interface. Pulse code modulation.Using color utilities.Maya Shading Networks. Reference Book: Art_link. McGraw. Text Book 1. Academic Information   34  . Sub-band coding Transform coding. 2. Interfacing and time code Unit IV Optical Disc Types of optical discs.Image file backgrounds . New Riders Press. Unit II Error Correction and Coding Digital mixing. sound cards. general utilities.2010(e-book) 11MT237 DIGITAL AUDIO Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the fundamentals of digital audio.Image planes. Editing.Creating. Course Outcome: Students will be able to know every details while working in audio digitally with error correcting strategy. Digital Audio Signal Processing.

Stereo enhancement. Phase vocoder implementations Text Book 1. Course outcome: Students will be well equipped with all the basic animation concepts practically which helps them in doing character modeling. spectrum analysis of digital signals. Udo Zolzer. Spatial enhancements.Tme varying Filters Unit II Delay and Modulation Effects Basic delay structures. Equalisers. 2003 11MT239 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course objective: To train the students in the area of 3D Animation and its software application. Phase vocoder basics-Filter bank summation model. Dynamics processing-Limiter.. Introduction to Digital Audio Coding and Standards. The students will be trained the area of character designing and concept designing in 3D animation. Maina Bosi. John Wiley sons Ltd. Infinite Limiters.FIR Filters. Demodulators. Parametric. De-esser. Academic Information   35  . lighting. Digital systems. Frequency and phase modulators. Time shuffling and Granulation.Lowpass. 3. LP. Typical Applications Unit III Non Linear Processing Introduction. Udo Zolzer. modulators-Ring. Distortion and fuzz. time stretching. Reverberation. Ltd. Linear Processors-Basics of non linear modeling. Principles of Digital Audio. To make the students understand the process of 3D animation production in studios. AP. Noise gate. Basic effects. Exciters and enhancers Unit IV Spatial Effects Introduction. Pitch shifting. McGraw-Hill. John Wiley Sons. filters used the timing and their implementations. Filters. texturing and animations. Harmonic and sub harmonic generations. 2002. 3D with loud speakers. Unit I Review of Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals of Digital signal processing-Digital signals. Compressor and expander. Sound radiation and simulation Unit V Time-Segment and Time Frequency Processing Variable speed reply. Overdrive.DAFX:Digital Audio Effects. 3D with head phones. Valve simulation. Kluwer Academic Publishers. Richard E Goldberg. Digital Audio Signal Processing.Amplitude. Ken Cpohlmann. Delay based audio effects. 2008. Course Outcome: Students will know all the effects. BP Filters. 2000.single Side band. 2.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 11MT238 DIGITAL AUDIO EFFECTS Credits: 4: 0:0 Course Objective: To learn the fundamental concepts of Digital audio effects using DSP. Reference Books 1.

leveraging new media. Digitalized media contents. using SMS. Paint Effects 10. Role of PR in the success of a product /service. vertical supply chain for television. Impact of new distribution technologies. Publicly funded broadcasting.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology List of Experiments: 1. Television programme production-Economics of programme supply. Surface modeling 5. economics of scale. Unit IV New Media Internet and E-commerce. Ownership Structure. 12. Course Outcome: The students will be well versed with all the economic policies and practices of media companies. Monopolies and technological change: Events and sponsorships. economics of scope. Media Economics and Public Policy. advertising and public relations. concentrated media ownerships. Market structure. NURBS modeling 4. 2. film production. entertainment programs. Polygon modeling 3. International trade in audio visual contents. Economics of Advertising. Unit V Media Economics and Public Policy Free market Vs interventions. Unit II Media and PR Introduction to media: Overview of media/ the media industry in India/ Types of Media/ role of each medium/ advantages and disadvantages of each medium. demand and supply. Shading and Texturing surfaces 7. mobile communications. understanding streaming video net and mobile. Decision making. The relationship between marketing and Advertising and PR/ The relationship between sales and PR/ how sales benefits from PR. Understanding value added services. nCloth 9. overview of Academic Information   36  . increasing economics of scale and scope interactivity. Unit III Print and Television Media Economic characters of news paper and broadcasting. MAYA interface. Lighting 6. Unit I Introduction to Media Economics Macroeconomics and microeconomics. Key economics characteristics of the media. broadcast. support measures for media contents. Dynamics. Rendering 11MT240 MEDIA ECONOMICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the economic policies and practices of media companies and disciples including journalism and the news industry. economic methodologies. Camera Movements 11. Internet. 8. Animation in Maya. internet and mobile communication and possibilities. print.

2003. 2007. Morphological Image Processing Computed Tomography Unit V Data Compression Data Compression Strategies. Telecommunications. Digital Signal Processing. Proakis and Dimitris G. Course Outcome: Students will get the basic knowledge of digital signal processing and its application in the field of audio and image processing. Television Video Signals Other Image Acquisition and Display. Students will be well equipped with all the DSP concepts and its applications. 3×3 Edge Modification. Text Books 1. References 1.. C. UK. Marketing Management. Reference Books: 1. Media Economics-Applying Economics New and Traditional Media. 2000. Imaging Processing Unit II Audio Processing Sound Quality vs. Understanding Media Economics. High Fidelity Audio. certain sponsorship proposals. 11MT241 APPLICATION OF DSP FOR AUDIO AND IMAGE PROCESSING Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: To teach about DSP and its applications in the field of audio and image processing. FFT convolution. Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Prentice Hall. Camera and eye. Brightness and Contrast Adjustments.R. Philip Kotler.. structuring sponsorship deals. New Delhi. PHI of India Ltd. Understanding of common terminology and jargon in media. Jervis. Sage. Nonlinear Audio Processing Unit III Image Formation & Display Linear Image Processing Digital Image Structure. Grayscale Transforms. 2002.ColinHoskins. Algorithms and Applications. Data Rate. Run-Length Encoding. Digital Time Signal Processing. Prentice Hall of India. Audio Processing. Delta Encoding LZW Compression. Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach. Spatial Resolution Sample Spacing and Sampling Aperture. John G. 2. Openheim and Schafer. Companding Speech Synthesis and Recognition. Addison Wesley Longman Ltd. Warping. Gillian Doyle. Convolution by Separability Unit IV Special Imaging Techniques Example of a Large PSF. JPEG (Transform Compression). Emmanuel C. 2003. 2. Echo Location. Convolution. Closer Look at Image Convolution. Ifeacher and Barrie W. Sage Publications. Fourier Image Analysis. Unit I Introduction Roots of DSP. MPEG Text Book: 1. Academic Information   37  . 2004. Huffman Encoding.Manolakis.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology how events are marketed.

Feasibility Report reparation and Evaluation Criteria.Screen writing.language-Visual and the copy – timing and Duration – post testing .the budget pretesting. production.effects on sales – INS accreditation.Community Radio – Television channels – Production house – setting the studios – Professional photographer Cinematographer – Cinema .P.International Business. EDII.Khanka. 2. Entrepreneur – Knowledge and Skills Required for an Entrepreneur.media selection. creativity and technical – Intellectual Property Rights.target audience. Unit I Entrepreneurial Competence Entrepreneurship concept – Entrepreneurship as a Career – Entrepreneur – Personality Characteristics of Successful. 2001.Starting news paper.The media laws and ethics followed in newspapers. Text Books 1.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology 11MT242 MEDIA MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This subject is to equip the students with the management skills improving their personality. Ess Pee Kay Publishing House.magazine.online journal – FM Radio. 2. Entrepreneurship. Oxford University Press.Chand and Company Limited.Jain (ed.Criteria for Selection of Product Ownership . Academic Information   38  . Saravanavel.identifying the problem.). Broadcasts are highlighted.Matching Entrepreneur with the Project .P.McGraw Hill. Entrepreneurial Development. journals. 11MT243 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This will give an overall idea about the Indian constitution . Entrepreneurial Development.Hisrich.. Unit III Business Plan Preparation Sources of Product for Business – Pre-feasibility Study . 2001. S.story board proposal for getting bank loan and identifying various sources to generate money.Role of Family and Society .Animation and Graphics.C.Entrepreneurship Development Training and Other Support Organizational Services . 2001.Central and State Government Industrial Policies and Regulations . To make them know how to plan and implement the concepts in media industry.Preproduction. Unit II Entrepreneurial Environment Business Environment . Unit IV Media Industry Print. 2000.idea-concept –media planning. Handbook for New Entrepreneurs.Budgeting Project Profile Preparation . References 1. Tata. Course Outcome: This will help the students to know and develop skills and become a successful entrepreneurial in media industry in the future. publicity and distribution Unit V Advertising and Animation Advertising agency.Capital .S.S.

Pearson. Functions of Executive. Telephone recordings. Copy right Act and IPR. Right to information and Official Secrets Act. piracy. Right o information Act. Broadcasting Bill. Directive principles of state policy. Law of the Press in India. Practice Hall of India. Fundamental rights. Drugs and magic remedies Act. Distributors. Cases and Moral Reasoning. Defense of India Act. Domain name registration issues Unit IV Code and Ethics Recommendations of Press Commission I and II. 2001. Technology. Issues Capes. Digital signature. Freedom of the Press and restrictions these upon. Subpoenas and Shield Laws.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Course Outcome: Students when studies the laws and ethics to be followed in media they will start applying it in their media works and this will make them a successful media professionals in the society. Unit V Journalistic Ethics Gathering the news. Duties of citizens. The Press (Objectionable matters) Act 1957. Broadcasting policies. Provisions for declaring Emergency. 2004. Academic Information   39  . 2004. TRAI. Basu. Powers and Privileges of parliament. Use of the word alleged Apparent authority. 3. 4. Cable TV Networks (Regulations) Act. Definition of Ethics. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. Effects of Competition Situational Ethics . Practice Hall of India. Self regulation and code of ethics. Unit I Overview of Indian Constitution Overview of the Indian Constitution. References 1.. 2. Course Outcome: This will help the students to apply these research methods in their project works and other related works which lies as the starting point of a successful project. Legislative. Indian Press Laws.Christians. Lee Wilking. Defamation. Media Ethics. press ownership and monopolies. 2006. Juveniles as News Sources. Radha Krishna Murthi. Mac Bridge Report. Libel. censorship and control of the press. Thomson Learning. McGraw Hill. 11MT244 MEDIA RESEARCH Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To make the student know the procedures. Delivery of Books and News paper (Public Libraries) Act. Mass Communication Ethics. The News paper (Prices and Pages) Act 1956. Access Laws. Invasion of privacy. elements and the nature of different types of researches in detail. Press Council Act. Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. 2. Trade Mark Act and patents Act. Leslie. 2003. Introduction to Indian constitution. various committees of broadcasting. Unit III Civil and Criminal Laws Laws of Libel and defamation. Act regarding to working journalists. BRAI. Cyber Laws. Philip Patterson. Basu. Centre-State relations Unit II Media Laws in India PRB Act 1867. Case Studies in Ethical Dilemmas Text Books 1. Media Ethics.Cinematographic Act 1952. Provision for amending the Constitution. Clifford G. Judiciary. 2003. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Indian Publishers.

Unit IV Experimental Research Basic experimental designs-Pretest-posttest control group. Sage Publications. 2000. Studio etiquette. Factor analysis. Basics of Radio programming: conception to execution of ideas. Course Outcome: This will make the students do different varieties of audio programmes on their own starting from writing script to managing the whole production. Sanjaya S. Talk back units.Gaur.Goodness of fit: Parametric statistics-the t-testAnalysis of variance-Two-way ANOVA-Correlation-Partial Correlation-Simple linear regression-multiple regression. phones. Reference Book 1.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Unit I Introduction Research Procedures -Elements of research -Research ethics –Sampling . Text Book: 1. studio bible and style book Academic Information   40  . Unit V Basic Statistical Procedures Using SPSS Nonparametric statistics .Content analysis . Literature review. screens.Gaur Statistical Methods for Practice and Research. Studio fault log. Bibliography Unit II Qualitative and Quantitative research methods Field observations-Focus groups-Intensive Interviews: Quantitative methods. Formats and styles in radio production.-Research in media effects. competition log. Inside the studio: Sources. Solomon four group designs. Validity. Layout. Gathering survey data-mail surveys –advantages –disadvantages -Telephone survey-Personal interviews-mail interviewsInternet surveys-Group administration.limitations-steps in content analysis-Universe –sample-unit of analysis constructing content categories-establishing a quantification system-coding the contentanalyzing the data-interpreting the results . Wardsworth Publishing Company. Unit I Basics of Radio Programming Brief history of broadcasting in India. 11MT245 AUDIO PROGRAMME PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: This is to learn about different types of programmes done with audio especially radio programmes.Reliability.Population and sample-Probability and Non probability samples. Mass Media Research. 2006. Assessment and analysis of Target audience. Characteristics of radio.uses. design.Chi-Square . lights. Quasi experimental designs. Posttest-Only control group. Roger D Wimmer. Foot notes. Joesph R. Starting from postproduction till broadcasting is covered. End notes. Research collection of background materials. Nature and scope of communication research. Field experiments.Dominick. Ajai S. Factorial studies. Content analysis in Print and electronic media Unit III Survey Research Descriptive and analytical survey-advantages and disadvantages of survey-constructing questions-Questionnaire design-Question order.

Course Outcome: This will enable the students to do creative lightings for their production with all the techniques they leant bringing the best output. Conversational writing. Reference Book 1. Contribution studio and remote studio. types of interviews. 2006. Seven P’s . A&C Black Publications. 11MT246 LIGHTING TECHNIQUES Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn all the lighting techniques in detail including different instruments. How to Present and Produce a Radio Show. out side broadcasting vehicle. and telephone reports. Programme evaluation and training Autonomy. Interview – Art of Interview. Discussion programme selection of subjects for discussion. Ratios in the Lighting Triangle. Use of background music. Radio Drama – Fiction and drama. Text Books 1. News – Concept and definition. Fill Lights Spots. Stewart Peter. Intensity Controlling Light Intensity. 2-Point Lighting. Creating audio special effects Unit V Radio Station Organization and Management On air studio. Safety and Efficiency. Basic Lighting Triangle: 3-point Lighting. Light Character Color Temperature. Use of effects. Basic rules for radio writing. portable sound recorders. commercials. programme for special audiences Unit IV Script Writing Broadcast styles. Mounts and Connectors for Lighting Equipment. phone-in programme. elements of news values. drama audition. Planning and scripting for educational radio programme. Essential Radio Skills. Radio Jingle production. Media Fusion. advanced radio production techniques using digital technologies. talk programmes. Radio Feature and Documentary – Difference between features and documentary. Accessories for Spot Lights. Educational programmes. Light Control Consoles. Light entertainment programmes. Reflectors and PAR Banks as Fills. Commercial broadcasting. visualizing the words. Audio script – types of audio scripts. Radio car. Robert Mc Leish. Unit I Lighting Techniques Lighting Variables: Measuring Light. Music programmes. News and current affairs programmes. Radio Station Organization and Management.2005. talk studio.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Unit II Different types of Programmes Microphone talent. Day parting. Prasar Barathi.Radio Production. news gathering and writing. reflectors used and the implementation of it. Documentaries and magazine programmes. Other Lighting Objectives Unit II Lighting Instruments and Accessories Spotlights. Focal Press. Fill Light Accessories. Portable telephones. accessories. Principles of recording.cues and links Unit III Radio Programme Production Basics of programme production. Artistic or Mood Lighting Academic Information   41  .

2D Games and Images. Scripting. sound . Installing OGRE 3D. Materials and Scripts. Drawing Surfaces. Scenes and Design. 2008. Creating 3D Scenes. painting. extending ray tracing algorithm. FMOD. Overview -Using Scene Manager Unit III 3D Games. ClanLib. Introduction to spherical harmonic lighting Text Book 1. Scene Implementation. OGRE 3D. Course Outcome: At the end of this course students will be able to develop their own games using c++ programming language. Input. Sprites. Unit V Lighting Implementation Basic lighting math’s.making scenes are all learnt. NSISWindows Installer. Layers. Sound and Music. Riley Maynard and Thomas Spann. Documentation Unit IV Exploring OGRE 3D. Lights. Diffuse reflection models. Billboards. Scene Node Properties and Methods. Worldware Publishing. Creating an OGRE Application Using a Wizard. Irradiantions and luminance. Real time raytracing. wood. Bidirectional reflectance distributions and functions. Downloading ClanLibBuilding ClanLib. OGRE. Unit I Game Programming & 2D Games and ClanLibGame Development. 3D Scenes. Advanced Lighting and Materials with Shaders. Fundamentals of Television Production. Materials-Plastic. Kelly Dempski and Emmanuel Viale. Running the OGRE 3D Samples. Ralph Donald. Resources. per pixel warn lights. Diffuse materials. First ClanLib Application. Scenes. Per-vertex warn Lights. More Middleware. Pearson. Creating an OGRE Application Manually. Open-Source Software. XML. 11MT247 GAME PROGRAMMING WITH C++ Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: To learn 2D and 3D game programming using c++ programming language in detail. Basic set up and diffuse materials. Metals Unit IV Lighting Reflectors Models Rendering equation. Games and the Message Loop. Painting a Layer. Lamberts Law. Compiling the OGRE 3D Samples.images . OGRE Log. Downloading OGRE 3D. Drawing. Surfaces. Cameras. 2005. Specular materials. GraphicsSound and Music. Open Media Formats Academic Information   42  . Software Abstraction. development of surfaces. BASS. Particle Systems Frame Listeners. Reference Book 1. backward ray tracing. Specular materials. Specular and metallic reflections models. Graphics Rendering Unit II ClanLib-Core Classes & ClanLib-Scene Management.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Unit III Ray Tracing Techniques Ray tracing algorithm. Transformation. Input Unit V Other Gaming Libraries-Install and Sound.

2006. Alan Thorn. Wordware Publishing Inc.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Media Technology Text Book 1. Introduction to Game Programming with C++. 2007. David Conger and Ron Little . Charles River Media . 2.2003. Noel Llopis. Reference Books 1. First Impression. Academic Information   43  .C++ for Game Programmers. Creating Games In C++.

Karunya University School of Media SCHOOL OF MEDIA Academic Information 0 .

Karunya University School of Media ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Subject Code 11VC201 11VC202 11VC203 11VC204 11VC205 11VC206 11VC207 11VC208 11VC209 11VC210 11VC211 11VC212 11VC213 11VC215 11VC216 11VC217 11VC218 11VC219 11NM301 11NM302 11NM303 11NM304 11NM305 11NM306 11NM307 11NM308 11NM309 11NM310 11NM311 11NM312 11NM313 11NM314 11NM315 11NM316 11NM317 11NM318 11NM319 11NM320 11FT301 11FT302 11FT303 Academic Information Name of the Subject Film Studies Production Planning and Management Commercial Broadcasting Radio Programming Television Production E .Technology Multimedia lab Video Production lab Web designing lab Interactive Multimedia applications Graphics and Animation Media convergence and management Digital video editing in Avid E learning management systems Graphics and Animation lab Avid lab E – learning lab Instructional Technology Knowledge Management E – Content Writing Media Research Screenplay Writing (Level I) Digital Photography Pre Production Techniques Credits 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 1 .Content Writing Radio Production Lab Television Production Lab Commercial Production Lab Media Research Corporate Communication Advertising Professional Photography Introduction to Social Psychology Advertising – I Web Designing Advertising – II Audio Visual Media Visual media and Communication Web Designing Scripting and Audio – Video production Multimedia Technologies Introduction to E .

Shaping society. Commodity and Communication Media.Appreciation. Course Outcomes: • After completing this paper the students will be able to discuss the parameter of genre as an aspect of film. To enable the students to practice in writing scripts for international films.Film as an experience.The origin of cinema.CriticismDefinitions -Qualities of film critic. knowing about great film script writers in India and at international level.Film review.Film and society. Unit II Academic Information 2 .Film and politics.Commercials Film theory Introduction to Social Psychology Video Commercial lab Video post production lab Advertising lab Study of Film makers Directorial practice Research Methods & Statistics Acting theory Documentary theory Documentary production lab Digital film production lab Film analysis lab 11VC201 FILM STUDIES 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • • To make the learners know about the different genres of films. Environment.Responsibilities of a film critic . its types and the methods of digital film production. Unit I Cinema as an institution. • They can identify and analyze the key criticism of both genre films and the industry that greets them.Karunya University School of Media 11FT304 11FT305 11FT306 11FT307 11FT308 11FT309 11FT310 11FT311 11FT312 11FT313 11FT314 11FT315 11FT316 11FT317 11FT318 11FT319 11FT320 11FT321 11FT322 11FT323 11FT324 Television Studies Elements of Video production Photography lab Pre production technique lab Experimental video/ short video production lab Film appreciation Non linear editing theory E .

Unit V Study of Great Indian and International filmmakers like Satyajit Ray.Camera and Camera movement – Editing .Sound Narrative. London.Setting – Props – Costume. To know the basics of studio management department and crews. To learn the application of studio operations. Fourth edition 2006 2. Adoor Gopalakrishnan.Elements of Production planning . James.French new wave .Representation of gender and sexuality . Oxford. 2000 Reference Books: 1.Audience positioning .Audience as the meaning makers . • The students will be able to study how to manage the studio and project planning for a professional set up. Unit-2 Planning of Studio operations .Problematising the film audience.Pre production and Post production planning . Unit-1 Need for production planning. Akira Kurusowa. Lighting . Unit III Genre. Production office .Karunya University School of Media Approaches to studying film.directing the crew planning in career. London.Hero worship .Performance and movement.Mise-en-scene.Narrative and Non Narrative films.Production Package. Monaco. How to read a film. London. star and auteur . it’s set up and design. Graeme.Structure of a narrative film Cinematic codes . Academic Information 3 .Best laid plans. Text Book 1. Costing and budgeting of programme -Commissioned and sponsored programme.Soviet montage cinema Unit IV Film audience . Routledge.Set designing and make up – visualization and composition aesthetics-directing the actors .German Expressionism . Turner. Production Designers. Film as social practice. Routledge.Duties and responsibilities of producer/director .Neo Realism .Third world Cinema -Political Cinema .Fan clubs . Ingmar Bergman and others. Third edition 2000 11VC202 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • • • To familiarize the learners in managing the studio production and managing the equipments in meeting the schedules of production management. Oxford guide to world cinema. Course Outcome: • Students can acquire skills in basic studio set up.

Markets and marketing . Filmmakers and Financing.idea/ concept development.brief from client. physical systems. Simon Cottle. UNIT II Academic Information 4 .Rich Media .Karunya University School of Media Unit-3: Planning in career . popular TV ad formats. UNIT I Development of ideas. 2006 11VC203 COMMERCIAL BROADCASTING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • The course imparts the techniques and the application of the commercial production in preparing the script.Streaming management . agency interpretation.Anti-piracy measures. Unit-4 An overview of management theory . New Delhi. Unit-5 Project planning . roles. with emphasis on financial management. Fourth edition. • To learn about the various scripting formats in producing a commercial. • To know the about the advertising strategies.Financing a production .creative potential of TV. 2004 3. Raindance Producers Lab: Lo-to-No Budget filmmaking. to create a concept for commercial production. Course Outcomes: • The students will be familiar about the production techniques involved in commercial industry.Repurposing of assets . Focal Press. personnel management.Moving the budget down. script/ story board. Digital Asset Management. Sage Publications. advertising strategy. Focal Press. programming. cable and corporate facilities.Storage management and archiving .Rights management .Digital Asset Management .Planning and Production of indoor and outdoor shootings . client approval. media department and client approach in the media industry.Planning and management of live shows . media approval.Sample business plan for a fictional company.Functions. Elliot Grove. 2003 Reference Books: 1. and skills of media managers in broadcast. and regulations. David Austerberry. 2003 2. Louise Levison.Project Development Life cycle . • The learners will be able to produce the commercials for television can be done on their own. creative work. Text Book 1. Focal Press.Contracts management . Media Organization and Production.

problems with inhouse production. • To impart the programming skills in news gathering and reporting for various radio programmes. Oxford.sources of casting.traditional film editing/ non linear editing. Text Books 1.Budgeting. 2004 2.recording the sound track and creating the special effects . Digital compositing for Film and Video. Steve. UNIT III Production of the commercial. Course Outcomes: • After learning this paper the students can plan and execute creative radio programme. film stocks.choosing the production team. Gerald.the agenda. Zettl. 2001 11VC204 RADIO PROGRAMMING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives: • To provide an understanding of radio programming and different types of programme formats. Focal Press.special effects and animations. 2000. Kelsey. reviewing the production company cassettes future of TV commercial production.Broadcast management – Public & Private Radio Stations / Laws & regulations / Community Radio / Audience research Unit II: Academic Information 5 . Wright. Mark. Television Production Handbook (7th edn. UNIT V Economics of commercial production.finding production companies for bidding specialization of production companies. 2007 2. factors affecting budgeting. crew. planning of special elements. Storyboards Motion in Action (2nd edn. Herbert. Reference Books 1.finishing the audio elementsconfirming the picture. • To equip the students in knowing about the functioning of a community radio. Unit 1: History of Radio: ALL INDIA RADIO – its growth & reach .set shooting/ location shooting.Karunya University School of Media Pre production. Pre production meeting. importance of casting director. cast. Simon.) Oxford: Focal Press. UNIT IV Editing the commercial. • The learners will also be technically aware of the production tools in radio production industry. Writing for Television.film formats.Pre scoring and Post scoring. Unistar.) Belmont: Wadsworth Publishing.

2008 Reference Books 1. Srivatsava. News Presentation. Political discussion.Karunya University School of Media Radio Programming Skills: Writing for Radio – News gathering and reporting skills / Other genre of radio progammes Unit III: Radio Presentation Skills: Effective speaking skills – announcements – news reading / Interview skills / Voice culture Unit IV: Radio Production Techniques: Nature of sound / Sound recording techniques – indoor & outdoor / Post-production techniques – voice. Evaluation will be based on theoretical knowledge as well as production of radio content. election campaign.. Course Outcomes: • The course will enable the learners to produce their own television programme. • The students who are technically inclined in television production will be taught the fundamentals of a television workstation. Vigyan Publication. Experimental video. Tata Mc Graw Hill. quiz. Sharma Books. Mencher. Unit-II Genre of Single camera Production.Music shows. weather report. personality interview. current affairs. Basic News Writing. music and special effect Unit V: Broadcasting Techniques: Equipments / Studio operations / OB operations Workshops on Voice Culture. Teleserials. Broadcasting. 2004 11VC205 TELEVISION PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • The students will be taught to apply the production techniques involved in the television production industry. reality shows. Basic Business communication. • This paper helps the students understand the process of television production. Soft stories. Text Book 1. Unit – I Genre of Studio based productions and target audience. Crime subjects enacted.Station visits are part of the course module. Election Results & analysis. Tele film. Outdoor. New Delhi 2. Lesiler &Flat lay. dance shows.Documentary. M. TV production. Unit-III Academic Information 6 . Recording techniques etc and Radio .

E Rhetoric’s – Writing/Editing Nuts and Bolts – Script and Proposal Formatting: Outlines – Proposals – Storyboards – Scripts – Final Documents Academic Information 7 . Direct to home.. Course Outcomes: • The learners will be aware of the styles of writing for different types of documents.David Lusted and Christine Geraghty (2009) 2. web streaming. women. Text Book 1. cable with & without CAS (set top box). UNIT II – Interactivity and Writing Interactive Multimedia – Interactive Writer – Interactivity and Control – Thinking Interactively – Interactive Devices Information and Interactive Architecture – Narrative Design – Content Expertise and Strategy – Writing for Search Engines Technical Skills: Flowcharting – Other Organizational Tools. Subject Matter Experts. Political leaders and senior citizen. Unit V How audience are influenced by TV Programmes and commercials.Terrestrial. Sports TV. • The students will gain knowledge about the architecture of multimedia/web content writing. An Introduction to Television Studies . American Psychological Association (APA) Format Content Writing: Roles of Content Writer. 2006 11VC206 E CONTENT WRITING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives: • • To familiarize the basics of online writing techniques To learn the skills required for a multimedia/web writer.Jonathan Bignell -: Routledge. UNIT I – Basics of Writing Language Varieties – Skills – Writing – Basics of Content Writing – Sub skills for Content Writing – Traditional Content Vs E-Content – Language Use in ELearning – Advantages and Limitations – Coherence – Cohesion – Accuracy – Brevity – Clarity – Style Guides: Microsoft Manual of Style for Technical Publications. IPTV Unit IV Public service TV. Cartoon Network etc. Religious TV.Karunya University School of Media Advantages and Disadvantages of various distribution systems.Children. TELEVISIONS: An Introduction to Television Studies Glen Creeber British Film Institute. The Television Studies Book. Youth. Commercial TV. Discovery channel / National Geographic Channel. UNIT III – Formats Defining Goals – Techniques to Achieve Common Goals – Audience – User Prism . Instructional Designer. 2004 Reference Books: 1.

Timothy Garrand.Karunya University School of Media UNIT IV – Writing Narration Architecture: Linear – Linear with Section Branching – Hierarchical Branching – Parallel/Multiple Path Architecture – Dynamically Generated Websites – Active and Passive Information Delivery Writing Non-Narrative. 2000 2. Magazines. Produce radio programmes for • News • Interview 2. John Wiley & Sons Inc. 2004 11VC207 RADIO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives: • To train the students in gaining knowledge on various formats of radio programme production. Academic Information 8 . creative writing & editing 4. Katy Campbell. Information Science Publishing. 2006 Reference Books 1. Sound recording Editing – Sound effects 5. Writing for Radio – Style grammar – format writing tools. Script writing for radio programmes – Standard Script forms 3. Linear Narrative. Elsevier Inc. Course Outcomes: • Students will be able to produce radio programmes on their own. Interactive Narrative – Interactive Narration: Character and Role of the Player – Structure and Navigation – Exposition UNIT V – Case Studies Writing a corporate website Writing a museum kiosk Writing interactive lessons Writing learning content for a simulation Writing classic lessons to a computer game Text Books 1. Music recording.. Effective Writing for E-Learning Environments (Cases on Information Technology). Developing Online Content: The Principles of Writing and Editing for the Web. Writing for Multimedia & the Web: A Practical Guide to Content Development for Interactive Media. 2002 2. Remote broadcast. Irene Hammerich. Writing for the Media. List of Exercises: 1. Ltd. Sunny Thomas. Vision Books Pvt. Location of recording. • To impart technical knowledge in broadcasting various radio programmes. Style of radio announcements – Compeering – Narration – Voice Modulation 6. Methods of Interviews. Claire Harrison.

Making commercials and discussion programmes. 11VC208 TELEVISION PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives: • To train the students in gaining knowledge on various formats of television production. Produce and shoot a television talk show programme 12. 8. Shoot a 5 min to 25 min duration Song Picturization 7. pronunciation. Mime type programme and Studio Live (a live studio exercise) 4. quotation marks.Karunya University School of Media 7. 9. Produce a radio programme for a radio documentary 10. Course Outcomes: Students will be able to produce various television programmes on their own. 8. Shoot video on any genre including Animation 10. Current affairs type programme 2. Shoot a 5 min to 25 min duration Tele Play 6. Errors and emergencies. List of Exercises Topic/theme based programme will be based on producing 1. List of Exercises: 1. Produce a radio programme for a radio drama. News reading and presentation methods. Produce and shoot a television live show. Course Outcomes: It enhances the students to produce various types of commercials on their own. 9. • To impart the students in making them know about the production techniques of both radio and television commercials. Produce a radio programme for music talk. 11. Shoot a 5 min to 25 min duration TV Documentary. • To impart technical knowledge in broadcasting various television programmes. Shoot video on a testimonial television commercial 11. vocals stressing. Inflection. Shoot a 5 min to 25 min duration a Quiz programme. Produce a radio programme for a radio group discussion 12. Produce a Radio commercial Academic Information 9 . 11VC209 COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives: • To make the learners train in various types of commercial production. Drama Practical (simple drama exercise) 3. Interviewing 5.

Produce a Television news bulletin. Produce a commercial for an emotional appeal ad. research and statistics and computer application. Produce a TV commercial with animation effects 10. Produce a script and story board for a TV commercial 7. To understand the principles of evaluation. Produce a TV commercial 6. Course Outcomes: • After learning this paper the learners will be able to know the research methods and statistics applied in media industry. Unit IV Methods of data collection – field studies – Holistic approach – observation – Interviews – Questionnaires – structured and unstructured schedules – sampling – content analysis – approach. 12. Produce a Radio jingle 3. • The students will also be able to initiate new media research proposals in their respective field. Produce a Public service TV advertisement 8. method and use – techniques basic – data analysis techniques.Karunya University School of Media 2. Record a celebrity endorsement commercial for a product 5. Produce a live product demo for a commercial 9. Unit III Types of research design – Exploratory studies – descriptive studies – diagnostic studies – experimental studies – their relevance and use in communication research. Unit II Designing a research study – the problems and the method – preparing a research proposal – sources of research – primary and secondary etc. Unit I Introduction to research – nature of scope and distinction between research in natural and social sciences – nature and scope of communication research – review of research related to effects research – limitations of effects research – basic parameters of media related studies. Produce a signature tune for a radio programme 4. 11. Academic Information 10 . Produce a commercial for a rational appeal ad 11VC210 MEDIA RESEARCH Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • • • To understand research methods and statistical tools in media field. To prepare model research proposals for research studies and report writing.

Wadsworth Pub. Research Methods in Mass Communication by Stempell and Westley Prentice Hall. Methods and Uses’ by Severin and Tankard. Unit V Academic Information 11 . (2008) New Age Publication Reference Texts: 1.. Unit II Understanding Corporate Communication – Employee Communication – Managing Government Relations – Writing for Media and Media Relations Unit III Corporate communication in brand promotion – Financial communication – Crisis communication. It also helps them to plan and execute the business documentation used in corporate culture. Research Methodology – Kothari. Course Outcome: It enhances the learners to maintain good work team communication. Unit I Communication basics – Business Communication – components – Types – formal communication network – Work team communication – variables – goal – conflict resolution – non – verbal communication – Cross cultural communication – Business meetings – Business Etiquette. ‘Mass Media Research – An Introduction’ by Roger Wimmer and Joseph Dominick. 2006. 1999 3. • To enable the students to learn the basic communication skills in the usage of communication technology in the modern workplace. 11VC211 CORPORATE COMMUNICATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand the elements of workplace communication. Text Book 1. Hastings House Publishers. Communication Theories: Origins. Unit IV Report writing: Characterizing & business reports – Types and forms & reports – Project proposals – collection of data – table’s constitution – charts – writing the report – documenting the sources – proof reading.Karunya University School of Media Unit V Writing a research project – organization – chapterization – citation – footnotes. 1989 2.

2008 11VC212 ADVERTISING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To enhance the learners in making them to learn the types and different phases of advertising. radio stations and TV channels – tariff – space and time allocation – schedule preparation .tariff. biztantra. Course Outcome: • The learners will b able to know the different types of advertisement campaigns. UNIT – II Advertising departments in Media: Print and Electronic media – Advertising policy and regulations of newspapers. • The students will also be able to promote various advertising and marketing strategies with respect to various media industry.products and advertisers on TV – channel competition – tariff – production cost – creativity.effectiveness in advertising. (2008) Reference Book Scot Ober. second edition . Fifth edition. reach and ad. Radio advertising – jingles – spots – production cost – reach and effectiveness . A guide to theory and practice. cost. Text Book A guide to Corporate communication. exposure –– Cost . UNIT – IV Rural Advertising: Rural market characteristics – growth – penetration of brands – brand competition – media and rural market – nature of products and services for rural markets – media Academic Information 12 . 8th edition. responsibilities and functions of Advertising and PR managers – planning and execution – coordination with advertising and agency.agency relations – client relations – coordination with other departments – advertising revenue generation UNIT-III Media for Advertising: Newspapers and Magazines – Characteristics.Karunya University School of Media Business Presentation: Written and oral presentation – work – team presentation – Delivering the business presentation visual aids – Slides – electronic presentation – Hand-outs – Delivering the presentation – career planning – preparing Resume – job applications – preparation for a job interview – employment interviews – follow-up. UNIT – I Advertisers – Leading National and International Clients –– Advertising campaigns – other promotional campaigns – Advertising and PR Department of the clients– Role. • To make the learners in developing creative campaigning strategies for ads. Contemporary business communication. 2007 Excellence in Business Communication. TV advertising: effectiveness – reach.

city life and people. Unit 3 Photography as a mirror of reality and symbol . Photomicrography . Course Outcomes: • The learners will acquire the basic photography skills and techniques adopted in the industry. Advertising Management concepts and cases’ M. chemicals. surrealism and expressionism. UNIT-V Multinational Brands – Multinational Advertising Agencies – Indian Agencies with Foreign Agencies – Multinational campaign strategies and cost considerations – creativity and content in International advertisements – cultural differences and global advertising campaigns – implications – regulations. Text Book 1. action and sports.study by magnification. • To introduce the students to the profession of digital photography. Black & white and colour photography – films. Photo essay and documentary . filters. Unit 2 Still life. Photo feature. Otto Kleppner. close-up lenses and devices. Special effects Techniques and Manipulation of images.realism. Tata Mc Graw Hill. The Practice of Advertising’ Norman Hart.economics of rural advertising. architecture. lenses. light meters. landscape. • The students will come to know about the various types and recent trends in the photographic industry. Understanding exposure and lighting techniques – indoor and outdoor. Thematic presentation of nature. Mohan. Prentice Hall.expression of idea and emotion. Close-up. 2000 2. 2000 3. Advertising worldwide Marieke de Mooij. London. Unit 1 The equipments – cameras. flashes and accessories. 2008 11VC213 PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To learn the applications and thrust areas in digital photography • To understand the digital studio set up and commercial projects undergone in photography industry. Heinemann Pub. Fundamentals of Advertising’.Karunya University School of Media planning – use of outdoor media – successful rural advertising and marketing campaigns – Rural advertising agencies. people and events. Reference Book 1. Academic Information 13 . New Jersey. processing and printing. macro and microphotography. editorial reportage. UK. 2000. Prentice Hall.

formation and change .sets props. editorial. Peter K Burian .use of drawing and photographs.The Formation and Change of Attitudes .Socialization and Motivation. Digital Photography.Digital Camera functions and techniques.The Methods of Social Psychology.Social Factors in perception . studio.Communication and Persuasion . Unit 5 Video Photography . computer aided applications and creativity. Michael Langford.visualizing . UNIT IV: Academic Information 14 . Le Bon. Basic Photography. production for advertising. 2008 11VC215 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To identify the mob and group behavior of media audience.Role of Mass communication in Public Opinion Formation and change. dependency. Course Outcomes: • The students will be able to understand the target media audience psychology.studio and location. Text Book 1. John Hedgeese’s New Introductory Photography Course. indoors and outdoors locations. . Fashion Photography . London. G h Mead. 2007 Reference Book 1. Aggression. UNIT II: Specialization : Social Learning Process . • To learn the applications of psychological principles applied for different mass media. Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging.2004 2.compact camcorder techniques. Consumer and industrial products . Reed consumer Books Ltd. Durkheim.Society and Personality. Focal Press. casting. Need Achievement. UNIT I: The Nature and Scope of Social Psychology. etc . London.Public opinion –Nature. measurement. Cooley.Karunya University School of Media Unit 4 Advertising . scoreboard.The Development of Social Psychology: Early Beginnings – the Contributions of Sociologists and Psychologists : Comte. Mitchell Bearley. UNIT III: Attitudes and Opinions The Nature and Dimensions of Attitudes . affiliation.copy and illustrations . advertising. beauty and portrait. Mc Doughall. • It enhances the students to maintain the relationship in workplace environment.

UNIT IV Advertising campaign: objectives. . Sage publications.Diversification and competition – full service agencies – multinational clients – challenges and opportunities. industrial. Jamie Gruman. cooperative and Public service advertising. 3. Course Outcome: • The learners can produce their own advertisement campaigns • The students will be able to promote various advertising and marketing strategies with respect to various media industry. Springer Pub. Leading agencies in India. reading the advertisement .review with current ad campaigns. UNIT III Advertising agency: Structure and functions.Audiences and Collective Behaviour .Intentional Audiences and Audiences and Mass Media. advertising budget.tone and content. Mc David and Harris . Introduction to Mass communication – Keval J.Collective Behaviour – the mobs and the different kinds of Mobs . appeals. Schneider. UNIT V: Mass Psychology . Frank V. advertising industry in India – advertising as a process of communication . Text Book 1. Applied social psychology. Harper & Row.Karunya University School of Media Groups and group Processes.Cooperation and competition. creative strategy: message. retail.Group norms and conformity.Classification of Collective masses Casual Audiences .Conditions Conclusive to Development of Groups. Social Facilitation Group structure and group performance .. “An Introduction to Social Psychology” . corporate. group Dynamics . • To make the learners in developing creative campaigning strategies for ads. 2005 11VC216 ADVERTISING – I Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To enhance the learners in making them to learn the advertising promotions. Media planning. target market. Handbook of Social Psychology . 2005. UNIT-I Advertising and its role in the market place. pre testing and post testing. UNIT-V Academic Information 15 . 2000 2. level of response.John D DeLamater – 2003. Nature and Types of groups.Social effects of advertising.Kumar.The Psychology of Mass Movements. Jaico Publishers Reference Books 1. UNIT II Types of advertising : consumer.

Karunya University School of Media Professional ethics in advertising. Gupta. Norman. Text Books Fundamentals of Advertising’. Sen. Hart. HREF. Tata McGraw Hill.cases of ethical violations -Advertising Standards Council – Social and cultural issues – Global regulations and Future trend. To learn Javascript to develop dynamic pages. returning values. Brand Positioning. To learn Dreamweaver and its features to design web pages. Base. submit. Otto Kleppner.C. The practice of advertising. Course Outcome: • The students will be able to design their own web page using basics of HTML UNIT I – HTML Anatomy of HTML file – Lists – Nested Lists – Font – Anchor – Image – Sound – Colors – Horizontal rules – Borders – Alignment – mail to – Preformatted text – Title. 2003 2. Chunnawalla and K. New Jersey. 2002 3. integrating function & HTML) Text Book Academic Information 16 . Meta tags – Transition effects – Visual Filters UNIT II – Programming Principles Table: Table Alignment – Cell Alignment – Colors – Adding Images Frame: Multiple frames – Inline frames Form: Label – Text – Text Areas – Password Input – Buttons (Button. Heinemann Pub.. 2000. “Foundations of Advertising: Theory and practice (1997) 11VC217 WEB DESIGNING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • • • To understand and use HTML tags for designing web pages. New Delhi. Reference Books 1. reset) – Checkbox – Radio Button – List Box – Hidden Input in Forms UNIT III – Designing Core Pages in Dreamweaver HTML Editors – Features of Dreamweaver – Accessing the Code – Building Style Sheets – Working with Text – Inserting Images – Establishing Web Links UNIT IV – Advanced Design Features in Dreamweaver Working with Div and Layer – Using Behaviors – Setting Tables – Interactive Forms – Creating Lists – Using Frames and Framesets – Using Templates – Using Library Elements UNIT V – Javascript Introduction – keywords – Data types – Variables – Operators – Comments – Arrays – Expressions – Control Structures – Functions (calling a function. Prentice Hall. Sethia . London.

Graham. et al. UNIT – I Advertisers – Leading National and International Clients – Ad Spend – Advertising campaigns – other promotional campaigns – Advertising and PR Department of the clients– Role.M. Prentice Hall. UNIT – IV Rural Advertising: Rural market characteristics – growth – penetration of brands – brand competition – media and rural market – nature of products and services for rural markets – media planning – use of outdoor media – successful rural advertising and marketing campaigns – Rural advertising agencies. Out-door media characteristics –cost. 2002 11VC218 ADVERTISING – II Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To enhance the learners in making them to learn the contribution of advertisements. Ltd .J. P.effectiveness in advertising. Wiley DreamTech India Pvt. • To make the learners in developing creative campaigning strategies for ads. UNIT-V Academic Information 17 . Web Design with HTML/Flash/Javascript & Ecommerce BIBLE. Deitel. Course Outcome: • The learners can produce their own advertisement campaigns • The students will be able to promote various advertising and marketing strategies with respect to various media industry.economics of rural advertising. UNIT – II Advertising departments in Media: Print and Electronic media – Advertising policy and regulations of newspapers.. 3rd Ed. HTML 4. reach and ad.0 Sourcebook. Internet & World Wide Web – How to program. Radio advertising – jingles – spots – production cost – reach and effectiveness – radio audience – tariff. Deitel. 2003 Reference Books 1. radio stations and TV channels – tariff – space and time allocation – schedule preparation .Karunya University School of Media 1. 2000 2. executives/representatives. responsibilities and functions of Advertising and PR managers – planning and execution – coordination with advertising and marketing agencies.exposure – Products and advertisers of Print media – Cost . H. Wiley Publications. David Crowder and Rhona Crowder. TV advertising: effectiveness – reachproducts and advertisers on TV – channel competition – tariff – production cost – creativity. UNIT-III Media for Advertising: Newspapers and Magazines – Characteristics.agency relations – client relations – coordination with departments – advertising revenue generation – ad. Ian S..

. TV as a powerful Audio – Visual Media – Commercial and Sponsored Programme – Educational Service (ETV) – Satellite Instructional Television Experiment (SITE) – Role of TV in Social Changes – Cultural Exchanges – Economic Uplift – Advertisement in TV – Specialist causes and consequences – Academic Information 18 .Effects – Cinema as Main Source of Entertainment – Powerful Media to Spread Message – Cinema for Political supremacy. Successful advertising research methods’ Haskins & Kendrick. (1995) 3. The Practice of Advertising’ 3rd Fdn. Norman Hart. 2008 11VC219 AUDIO VISUAL MEDIA Credits 4:0:0 Course objectives: • To make the learners know about the development of radio and television broadcasting • To make them aware of the types of programmes targeted to the different type of audience segmentation Course Outcome: • This paper explores on the current audio visual trends which enhances the students to know about the basics of radio and television broadcasting.Karunya University School of Media Multinational Brands – Multinational Advertising Agencies – Indian Agencies with Foreign Agencies – Multinational campaign strategies and cost considerations – creativity and content in International advertisements – cultural differences and global advertising campaigns – implications – regulations. New Jersey. Text Book Advertising worldwide (2nd Edn). Heinemann Pub. Women and Youth. Women Welfare – Children Welfare – Health and Family Planning – Rural Development – Urban problems Unit 3 Cinema and Society – Influence over Society. Prentice Hall. Film Censor – Film Censor Enquiry Committee – Documentary Film – Newsreels – National and International Film Festivals – Film Awards – Future of Indian Cinema. Unit 1 Development of Radio Broadcasting in India – Ownership – Control – Autonomy for Radio – Types of Radio services. UK. Unit 2 Special Audience Programmes – Rural and Farm Broadcasting – Educational Programmes – Programmes for Children. 2008 2. NTC Busin. Otto Kleppner. Prentice Hall. London. Marieke de Mooij.Radio as a source of News – Broadcast News – Value – Radio Language – News Bulletin – News Source for Radio – Reporters. Editors and Agencies – External News Services Interviews – Features – Writing for Radio. Fundamentals of Advertising. 2002 Reference Books 1. Unit 4 Development of Television in India – News Programmes: a) News cast b) News Review – Formats of TV Programmes – Documentary – Special Features – Interviews.

New Delhi. Applications of visual communications in commercial contexts. Photographs and their communication. 2000 3. Definition. Bombay.R. Visual thinking and Designing of Visual media. educate. culture and society. Illustration problems. Publications Division. Academic Information 19 . Keval J. Traditional media. Indian Broadcasting. Panorama of twentieth century cinema. Kumar. Mass Communication in India. Kinds of films and their impact on society. H. • To know about the elements of visuals and basics of photography and fine art. Elements of communication. Madras. • To know about the application point of view of new media technologies. Mass media and functions of mass media. its application and development. Reading Pictures. theatre arts. Barriers to communication. Unit-I Evolution of Human Communication. Unit-II Visual Elements. Photo-features. Group dynamics. Illustration. History of Films in India. Kinds of mass communication. Role of NGOs. Visual Pleasure and Visual Disruption. Types of illustrations. Unit-III Evolution of Visual communication. Landscapes. Vocabulary of color. Delhi. Drawings. Bangalore. Audio-Visual Media in Developing Countries – Future of Audio-Visual Media in India – Research in Audio-Visual Media – Implications of Press Media over Audio-Visual Media. Art Direction. Unit 5 Governments policy on AIR to inform. 2005 Reference Books 1. Calcutta. National Book Trust.Karunya University School of Media TV News and Agencies. New Delhi 1986 11NM301 VISUAL MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives • To know about the different types of communication applied in media. Visual culture. Broadcasting and the People. entertain and elevate a common man – Government Control over AIR in functioning – Competition among the Audio-Visual Media – Development of Videography – Cable TV. Text Book 1. Films divisions. Fine arts.Conceptual approach. Qualities of a good illustration. Educational Media. Mehra Massani. Jaico Publishing House. history and background of communication. Introduction to Media. Course Outcomes: • This paper makes the learners to know about the basics of communication. Functions and objects of communication. Luthra. Illustration techniques. Portraits. Listening.

Global and National TV viewers.Kumar. Hubs. Digital Television-Transmission and Reception. Steven Bernstein. Film production. Extranet – Client-Server Networks – History of Internet – DNS – ISP – Internet Connections – Network Devices: Cables. Media and Communication management-C.M. New Delhi-2000. Role of reach by visual media communications. Technology Evolution. Modems – FTP UNIT II – HTML Anatomy of HTML file – Lists – Nested Lists – Font – Anchor – Image – Sound – Colors – Horizontal rules – Borders – Alignment – mail to – Preformatted text – Title.Karunya University School of Media Unit-IV History of Television. • To know the design of table. Cable Television. Gillian Rose. Ku. Bridges. cell phones. Sage publications. MAN. Television transmission. Visual methodologies. Himalay Publishing House. Internet. Flour and Evelette Dennis. 3. Reference Books: 1. 2004. c-band. K. Theories of Mass Communication. HREF. Meta tags – Transition effects – Visual Filters Academic Information 20 . Component and Composite Video.S.. Base. Imax and 3D movies. Routers.S.Srivastava. TV Journalism. • To understand and use basic HTML tags for designing web pages. UNIT I – Introduction to Networks Computer networks: LAN. Gateways. WAN.Raghu. Focal Press. S. TV picture resolution. Vol-3. TV reception methods. Awards and recognition for visual media Text Books 1. Receiver plans and devices. Ltd. frame and form using HTML tags. 2004 4. Course Outcomes: • It makes the students to know about the basic and advanced features of Dreamweaver in order to design web. 2000 2. Communication and Public Policy. Intranet. Mass media and Communication Theory. Unit-V Modern methods of Visual Communication including mobile systems. K. Kanishka Publications. Sterling Publishers Pvt.band and telecast channels.band. Remote control systems. Growth of TV in India. 2001 11NM302 WEB DESIGNING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the basics of networks and the network devices. Media Education.. Mumbai. 2006 2.New Delhi. Ved Prakash Gandhi. Melvin D. 1995 5. New Delhi. Himalaya Publishing House. Repeaters.

M. Wiley Publication. 2000 3. • They will also be able to apply and correlate this with the audio and video production. P. Wiley publications. Lowrey. Unit I Introduction to Production and Script Writing . Tom Muck. 3rd Ed.. Deitel. • To understand the procedures to follow in producing audio and video programs. et al. Internet & World Wide Web – How to program. Prentice Hall. reset) – Checkbox Radio Button – List Box – Hidden Input in Forms UNIT IV – Designing Core Pages in Dreamweaver HTML Editors – Features of Dreamweaver – Accessing the Code – Building Style Sheets – Working with Text – Inserting Images – Establishing Web Links UNIT V – Advanced Design Features in Dreamweaver Working with Div and Layer – Using Behaviors – Setting Tables – Interactive Forms – Creating Lists – Using Frames and Framesets – Using Templates – Using Library Elements. Ray West. The HTML.J. Text Books 1. Bible.. 2006 Reference Books 1. • To familiarize the equipments used in audio and video production. Dreamweaver 8 Bible. submit. Course outcomes: • The learners will be able to develop scripts of various formats. David Crowder. Joseph W. Deitel. H. Dual-Column – Concepts. Web development Sourcebook by Ian Graham. Mc Graw Hill Publications. 2000 11NM303 SCRIPTWRITING AND AUDIO-VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the types of scripts and know-how of audio and video scripting.Karunya University School of Media UNIT III – Programming Principles Table: Table Alignment – Cell Alignment – Colors – Adding Images Frame: Multiple frames – Inline frames Form: Label – Text – Text Areas – Password Input – Buttons (Button. 2002 2. Web design with HTML/Flash? Javascript &E – Comm. 2003 2.Phases of Production: Preproduction – Production – Postproduction – Audio Vs Video Scripts – Visual Writing – Role of Scriptwriter – Script Format: Master Scene. Formats and Types of Storyboard Stages of Script Development – Creative Concept Development – Copywriting Vs Scriptwriting – Script for Fiction and Non-Fiction – Types of Documentaries – Writing Commentaries – Writing for Long-Form Scripts Script for Training and Educational Video: Show and Tell – Job and Task Description – Dramatization – Instructional Video How-to-do Videos Unit II Academic Information 21 . Dreamweaver MX: The Complete Reference.

• It also helps them to involve their concept in relation to the applications of virtual reality. Focal Press.Lighting Instruments – Lighting Control Equipments – Quality of Light – Color Temperature – Light Intensity – Light Balancing – Lighting Techniques – ENG/EFP Lighting.Types of Audio & Video Studio – Control Room – Studio Maintenance – Stage – Set: Props. Unit I: Introduction Academic Information 22 . Thomson Wadsworth Publication. Dressing .Audio Production Equipments – MIDI – Acoustics Unit IV Video Systems and Production . Gerald Millerson. Eighth Edition. 2007 2.cybercollege.History of Audio & Video Recording – Audio Formats – Audio Tape Formats –Video Formats – Video Tape Formats – Digital Audio & Video – Roles of Video Production Team – Roles of Audio Production Team Unit III Audio Systems and Production . Text Books 1.Types of Camera – Parts of Camera – Mounting Equipments – Lenses: Types. Fourth Edition.Karunya University School of Media Basics of Audio-Video Production. Jenny Bartlett. Bruce Bartlett. Second Edition. Television Production Handbook. Writing For Visual Media. Focal Press. Practical Recording Techniques. TV Production Modules. audio and video file formats and various devices used for multimedia storage. www. 2006 2.com Reference Books 1.Types of Lighting – Types of Lamps – Studio Lighting Instruments – Field . Elsevier Publication. 2000 11NM304 MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGIES Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the design issues of multimedia in communication networks. 2005 3. Anthony Friedmann. Course Outcomes: • It makes them to understand the interfaces and its importance towards the design and use of multimedia elements.Types of Sound – Types of Recording – Recording Systems – Microphones – Cables and Connectors – Monitoring Equipments – Mixing Equipments – Remote . Herbert Zettl. Video Camera Techniques. Optical Characteristics – Filters – Camera Operation Techniques – Color Balancing – Camera Movements – Multiple Camera Production – Types of Shots – Working the Camera: Do’s & Don’ts Unit V Lighting in Video Production .Legal and Ethical Issues of Production. • To learn the graphics.

Strategies of Multimedia Communication.TECHNOLOGY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To understand the basic concepts of e-learning. William Vanryper. PCI. Removal HDD – Optical Storage: Characteristics of CDs & DVDs – CD Formats – DVD Formats – Replication and Duplication Process – Blu-ray Discs Unit V – Virtual Reality Definition – Applications – Real-Time Computer Graphics – Animation and Virtual Reality – Input Devices – Output Devices – Immersive Vs Non. John Vince. SCSI. Macintosh Formats. Watkinson. Security. • To understand the technology mediated communication in e-learning.Immersive – Physical Simulation – The Future Text Books 1. Compression Techniques Unit III: Interfaces Multimedia Search: Text. • To know the teaching and learning processes in e-learning environment. Girish Saxena. Virtual Reality Systems.Karunya University School of Media Introduction to Multimedia and Hypermedia – History of Multimedia – Applications and Challenges – Multimedia and learning – Communication Network and Multimedia: Bandwidth. Direct3D – Interfaces: Parallel. AGP. Cross Platform Formats – Audio & Video File formats – Audio & Video Streaming Formats – Graphics and Animation for Web – Web File Formats – CODEC: Lossy Vs Lossless. 2005 2. Multimedia: Making it Work.. Encyclopedia of Graphic File Formats. PCI Express – Graphics Cards – TV Tuners Unit IV: Storages Multimedia Servers – Removal Storage: Floppy. Vista International Publishing House. 2006 Reference Books 1. Direct X. Speech. Seventh Edition. IDE/ATA. Murray. Encyclopedia of Graphics File Formats. SATA. Support for Mobility and Traffic Unit II: Formats Raster Graphics – Vector Graphics – Image File Formats: Windows Formats. McGraw Hill Osborne Media. James D. Second Edition by James .. Addison Wesley Longman. Firewire. 2000 3. Course Outcomes: • To learn the services that manage e-learning environment. Tay Vaughan. Audio. Session Management. Image and Video Based Indexing – API: Open GL. 2004 2. Serial. Flash Drive. USB. (2004). Jazz. ZIP. 11NM305 INTRODUCTION TO E. Academic Information 23 . O’Reilly Publication. iPod.

2006 2. 2002 11NM306 MULTIMEDIA LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives: • To create e-page. Information Search Service. Michael Allen. S. Collaboration – Services: Expert Service. 2002. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication. Sandhir Sharma. Trends – Technology: Authoring.P. Sharon Brown. P. Voice Mail. E-Learning: An Expression of the Knowledge Economy. Virtual Classroom – Barriers to e-Learning Roles and Responsibilities: Subject Matter Expert – Instructional Designer – Graphic Designer – Multimedia Author Programmer – System Administrator – Web Master Unit II – Technologies Satellite Broadcasting – Interactive Television – Call Centers – Whiteboard Environment Teleconferencing: Audio Conferencing – Video Conferencing – Computer Conferencing Internet: E-mail. File Sharing. E-Learning: New Trends and Innovations. Gaurav Chadha. Sharing of knowledge. Michael W. 2002 2. Bulletin Boards.M. Dynamic Content. Instant Messaging. Delivery.Karunya University School of Media Unit I – Introduction Evolution of Education – Generations of Distance Educational Technology – Role of E-Learning – Components of e-learning: CBT. Nafay Kumail. Utilization of knowledge – Knowledge Management in E-Learning Unit IV – Teaching-Learning Process Interactions: Teacher-Student – Student-Student – Student-Content – Teacher-Content – Teacher-Teacher Content-Content Role of Teachers in E-Learning – Blended Learning – Cooperative Learning – Collaborative Learning – Multi Channel learning – Virtual University – Virtual Library Unit V – Development Issues Assessment in E-Learning – Quality in E-Learning – Tools for Development – Costs for Developing and Using E-Learning Environments – Challenges and Careers – Future of eLearning Text Books 1. Singh. WBT. Academic Information 24 . Michael Allen's Guide to E-Learning. Wiley Publication. Carol Fallon. CRC Press. Chat. Allen. power point presentations and desktop publishing. E learning standards: A Guide to Purchasing. Deep & Deep Publications. Developing and Deploying Standards – Conformant E – learning. Streaming Audio and Video Unit III – Management Content: E-Content. Discussion Forums. Knowledge Creation Service – Learning Objects and E-Learning Standards Process of E-Learning: Knowledge acquisition and creation. Reference Books 1.

Include summary. flowchart. (PowerPoint) 3. Aim for a cohesive look. News Reader. Production Planning and Design: Create a proposal for your final project. Desktop Publishing: Create a 2-page desktop-published "newsletter.Audio Production: Prepare an audio package and shoot an audio production 11NM307VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective To introduce students to the profession of producing programme for TV. Academic Information 25 . Outdoor – Single Camera set-up Interview 3. LIST OF LAB WORKS 1. Grammar of Out-door Production. Desktop Publishing: Create a 2-page desktop-published "newsletter. Preproduction & Presentation Graphics: Create a 5 slide presentation in your favorite presentation graphics application." Submit a PDF copy.Karunya University School of Media • It imparts the techniques the multimedia so that the students will come across to produce an appropriate design. Course Outcome: They learn all the technical details that is related in making of a program in production stage and post production stages for TV. Making of these television programs in two or single camera set-up is real hand on experience for the student in the TV Program process. Game Shows 7.Digital Video: Use video capture to digitize your video shoot to another video source to create short production (20-30 seconds) 11. PSA 6.Two Camera Set -up 4. Drama 5. Educational Shows. Course Outcome: • The students will be aware of various designing process in multimedia production. 8. Create three basic Web pages using Dreamweaver 12. 8. E-PAGE with visual aid 2. Submit a PDF copy. element and resource lists. 7. Writing the screenplay. Anchor. Indoor – Single Camera set-up Interview 2. 6. Types of TV Programme 1. Typefaces and Graphics: Create 1 vector and 1 bitmap graphic 4. Multimedia Sound: Create 2 soundtracks and 2 EFX sounds 9. prepare the storyboard and cue sheet etc. Include 2 backgrounds and 1 button set." Submit a PDF copy 5. Video Production: Prepare storyboard and shoot a short video production 10. User Interface Design & Graphics II: Create a user interface.

Design a website using HTML. JAVA. 3. 7. • To make the learners know the basics of HTML helps and guides the student how to create a web page on own with sources code without the help of the other automatic software’s. 11NM308 WEB DESIGNING LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To apply the skills learned to develop web pages using HTML tags. Design an academic website 12. 11. Equipments and location – the shooting. Create a webpage using basic hyperlinks 10. Developing and integrating at least 4 instructional web pages using FRAMES and suitable hyperlinks. Create a webpage for social awareness 8. etc List of Exercises 1. 5. Teamwork and work ethics. Course Outcomes: Academic Information 26 . Formulate a script and coin a concept and do the research on any particular theme. Breaking down the scripts develop a plot 10. some legal issues in production. • To understand the project management and responsibilities of team members. 4. 2. 11NM309 INTERACTIVE MULTIMEDIA APPLICATIONS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To know the basics of multimedia and tools used to develop multimedia. Course Outcomes: • It helps the learners to learn the basics. so that it can be really helpful in their other course related to web in the advance stages like VB. Developing a webpage using basic HTML tags and hyperlinks. 6. Constructing a webpage using FORM tag to enter student bio-data. CSS. Creating a webpage which contains a set of images (minimum 10) in same size inserted in table. Create a website for banner ads 11. Creating web pages with transition and visual effects. Using a particular concept bring out the grammar of editing visual and sound track. Create a webpage for with visual effects 9.Karunya University School of Media 9. contracts. Developing a webpage using TABLE tag to display class timetable. Making the choice of the crew. 12.

Instructional -Designers.Karunya University School of Media • • • They will learn the phases of instructional designing and interactivity in designing. Creating Instructional Multimedia Solutions: Practical Guidelines for the Real Academic Information 27 . Unit III – Media Text: Guidelines for Creating Text – Spacing – Justification – Fonts – Variable .Surrounding Multimedia Multimedia Hardware: Platforms – Peripherals .Creation Tools: Painting and Drawing Tools – Image Editing Tools – 3-D . 2000 Reference Books 1. To know the process involved in delivering multimedia products. Copyright and Support Agreements – Copyright Issues – Legal and Ethical Issues – Packaging. Text. Multimedia: Making it Work. Animation) – Feedback and Error Messages Unit V – Delivery Testing: Alpha Testing – Beta Testing Delivery: freezing the Product – Archiving – Project Debrief – Licensing. Sound. Tay Vaughan. Principles of Interactive Multimedia. Buttons & Controls.Spacing – Scrolling – Scrolling – Display Speed – Screen Focus Points – Hypertext and Hypermedia Images: Images and Learning – Displaying Images – Appearance – Costs – Digitization Animation: Animations and Learning Displaying Animations – Costs Audio: Audio and Learning – Scriptwriting Guidelines – Speech – Sounds – Music – Audio Quality – MIDI – Digitization -Video: Video and Learning – Strengths of Video Difficulties with Professional Quality Video. Seventh Edition. Content Writers. 2006 2. Panels. SubjectMatter Experts. Text Books 1. Video. Unit II – Project Management and Instructional Design Project Management Issues – Roles of Project Managers. McGraw Hill Osborne Media.Producers Instructional Development Phases: Analysis & Planning – Design – Development – Implementation – Evaluation & Revision. Images. McGraw-Hill. Programmers.Modeling and Animation Tools – Audio and Video Editing Tools Authoring Tools: Card and Page Based Tools – Icon Based Tools – Time Based Tools – Cross-Platform Authoring – Evaluating Authoring Tools. Unit I – Introduction to Multimedia Benefits of Multimedia in Instruction – Media and Motivation – Issues . Unit IV – Designing Interactivity Interactivity: Definition – Purpose – Process of Interactive Design Information Design: Product Definition – Audience and Environment – Development Choices – Organizing Information – Information Flowchart Interaction Design: Orientation – Image Maps and Metaphors – Navigation – Usability – Functionality – Storyboard Presentation Design: Tasks of Presentation Design – Resolution – Anti-aliasing – Color and Palettes – Interface Style – Layout – Interface Elements (Background. Mark Elsom-Cook. Media . They will also learn the proper use of media technological environment.

• To create effective visual communication by incorporating design techniques. Ray Kristof. Macintosh Formats. Peter Fenrich. Rules.Formats – CODEC: Lossy Vs Lossless. 11NM310 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the basics of graphics and animation principles and techniques to design. Informing Science Publication. concept development. Character animator. Mark Elsom-Cook. Graphic Designer. Compositor Unit IV – Image Processing Raster Graphics – Vector Graphics – Image File Formats: Windows Formats. Frame by Frame.Karunya University School of Media World. Shadows.Design: Whitespace. Clean up artist. Color stylist. Boxes. McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. 2000 2 Interactivity by Design: Creating & Communicating with New Media.Immersive – Physical Simulation – The Future. Stop Motion Animation. Course Outcomes: • They will be able produce the rendering technology involved in designing 2D & 3D animation. Borders. Unit V – Virtual Reality Definition – Applications – Real-Time Computer Graphics – Animation and Virtual Reality – Input Devices – Output Devices – Immersive Vs Non. Layout artist. visual thinking. Amy Satran.Creators: Visual Development artist. 2000. Compression Techniques. Bleeds – Illustrations – Working with Photographs – Working with Color Designing for Print: Newsletters – Newspapers – Magazines – Brochures – Pamphlets – Posters Unit II – Animation Definition – Types of Animation: Cel Animation. . Effects animator. Keyframe Animation – Applications – Hardware – Software – Considerations for selecting tool Animation Techniques: Transformation – Compositing – Color Correction – Modeling – Lighting – Masking – Layering – Shading – Particles Unit III – Rendering and Career Prospects Rendering: Types – Features – Techniques – Real-Time Rendering – Software .Computer Animation. Animator. Academic Information 28 . Cross Platform Formats – Audio & Video File formats – Audio & Video Streaming Formats – Graphics and Animation for Web – Web File . Principles of Interactive Multimedia. Pearson Education Publication 3. Unit I – Graphics Definitions – Print Design Vs Digital Design – Elements of Graphic Design – Tools of Organization – Architecture of Type/Font – Building Blocks of Graphic . • They will also be able to produce the concept and applications of virtual reality.

Media economics.sole proprietorship. John Vince. market segmentation.Budget control 29 Academic Information . private limited companies. controlling. 2002 2.Branding and media.genesis. Course Outcomes: • Students can acquire skills in basic studio set up. targeting. emails and SMS to interact with hosts in television . and media planning for cross platform media . convergence regulationAdvertising. James D.Media pricing. Understanding media exposure – internet conversion rates. partnership. • To learn the application of studio operations. directing .impact. Unit II Media convergence. Murray.Understanding the consumerbuying behavior models. William Vanryper. project planning in professional set up. sponsored contents. record keeping. its functions and synergy. Encyclopedia of Graphic File Formats. Management functions. Addison Wesley Longman.Ownership patterns. (TRPs. hits.planning. quality control and cost effective techniques . Frequency). Organizational structure of different departments. profiling and positioning. 3D Graphics & Animation. it’s set up and design. Unit III Cross media interactivity in television-Using twitter. • The students will be able to study how to manage the studio.media industry analysis . O’Reilly Publication 3. control practices and procedures .Planning and execution of programme production – production terms. Unit I An overview of media: global. public limited companies. Guide to Computer Animation (Focal Press Visual Effects and Animation). Focal Press. television ratings. • To familiarize the learners in managing the studio production and managing the equipments in meeting the schedules. Mark Giambruno.Karunya University School of Media Text Book 1. New Riders Press.Rate cards. transmitting. developing spot rates-integrated branding approach across different media. 2002 Reference Books 1. national & local scene.property creation. paradigm shift in social space . Virtual Reality Systems. Reach. organizing. Alexa.Administration and programme management in media – scheduling. 2003 11NM311 MEDIA CONVERGENCE AND MANAGEMENT Credits 3:0:0 Course Objectives: • To brief the learners about the concept of various studio and media management techniques employed in media industry.

Unit V Understanding worldwide customer bases. 2002. 2. Albarran. Bins.Identifying unconventional media spaces and business opportunities. Delivering digital media entertainment over the Web and mobile. Leaving Readers Behind – The Age of Corporate Newspapering: ed. UNIT I – Introduction to Video Editing and Avid Editing: Definition. 3.University of Arkansas Press.– Mobile social networking.Cross media promotion of films through games-Digital Audio broadcasting – Digital Multimedia broadcasting – WiMAX mobile environment. 2004. • They will also be able to know about adding special effects and mixing audio with the visuals in Avid. UNIT II – Terminologies and Recording Media files. Breach of Faith – A Crisis of Coverage in the Age of Corporate Newspapering: ed Gene Roberts. 11NM312 DIGITAL VIDEO EDITING IN AVID Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the different types of editing. Effect palette. Principles. Projects – Timeline. 2001. foreign equity in Indian media.Introduction to Avid Xpress DV – Hardware and Software Requirements.piracy and legal disputes: an overview.Karunya University School of Media Unit IV Diffusion of innovation: new media and its influence on Indian consumer. International media houses and their business model . Clips. Effect editor.Business process outsourcing and the challenges. Management of Electronic Media: Alan B. Wadsworth. 2001.developing a niche sphere . Copying. Stages – EDL – Role of Editor – Continuity & Dynamic Editing – Linear & Non-Linear Editing – Physical & Electronic Editing – Control Track & SMPTE Editing – A/B Roll Editing. Source monitor – Tool palette – Bin Views – Importing. Text Books 1.Issues in intellectual property rights . Digital Interactive marketing.Planning for international campaigns . Composer monitor. 2002. Gene Roberts. Balancing on the Wire – The Art of Managing Media Organizations: James Redmond & Robert Trager. 2. Internet conversion ratios and related evaluation. Sequences.Ethical issues in entertainment and content regulation .Broadcasting regulations-licensing and content. The Business of Media: David Croteau & William Hoynes. University of Arkansas Press. Course Outcomes: • The learners will acquire full knowledge on editing and titling skills. Pine Forge Press. Atomic Dog.issues and challenges. Sub clips. • To understand the terminologies and concepts of Avid video editing software. Moving Academic Information 30 .Online production and broadcasting.New media project management . Reference books 1.

Extracting and Copying Segments – Slip Trim & Slide Trim – Finding Frames and Clips Titling: Editing. Audio and Video Channels – Controlling Decks.Cataloging Footage – Setting up a Sequence – Setting up Tracks – Undoing / Redoing Edits – Splice-in Edit & Overwrite Edit – Lifting. Ronald J. Advantages. MPEG. San Francisco State University. Fading Titles. Unit II – Introduction to Content Management Academic Information 31 . Matte) Freeze Frame – Variable Speed – Strobe Motion – Reverse Motion UNIT V – Working with Audio and Exporting Soloing Audio Tracks – Audio Scrubbing – Audio Effect Tool – Audio Mix Tool – Automation Gain Tool – Adjusting Volume in Timeline – Audio EQ Tool – Audio Suite Plug-Ins Mixing Video Tracks – Recording to Tape – Exporting Formats (MPEG-1. Avid Xpress DV Effects Guide. • To enable the students to understand about Learning Management Systems. Replacing Fill Tracks UNIT IV – Special Effects Types of Transition Effects – Single and Multiple Effects (Transition & Segment) – Rendering – Keyframeable and Non.QuickTime. Replacing. Barriers. OMF) Text Book 1. UNIT III – Editing and Titling Customizing Monitor Displays – Playing Video in Client Monitor – Loading and Clearing Footage on Monitor – Controlling Playback – Marking and Sub. Future and Careers – Components of e-learning: CBT. WBT and Virtual Classroom – E-Learning Tools Learning Management Systems: Definition – Components – LMS Vs LCMS – LMS Products. Luma. 2004 Reference Books 1.Karunya University School of Media and Deleting Clips in Bins IEEE 1394 – Selecting Deck/Tape. DV Stream. Compessi. • They will also know the importance of security in e-learning systems. Unit I – Introduction E-Learning: Definition. Course Outcomes: • The students will know about the format and structure of content management systems. Removing. 2004 11NM313 E LEARNING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand the basics of e-learning. 2002 2. Characteristics.Keyframeable Effects – Defining Motion Paths using Keyframes – Layered Effects – Nested Effects – Key Effects (Chroma. Sixth Edition. Target Drives. Avid Xpress DV User’s Guide. Video Field Production and Editing.

E-learning Tools and Technologies: A consumer's guide for trainers. Springer Publication. S. 2005 3. Bob Boiko. Global E-learning in a Scandinavian Perspective. 2007 11NM314 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course objectives • To train the students in the area of animation and its software application. Weippl. teachers.Karunya University School of Media Data – Information – Content – Format and Structure of Content Content Management: Parts of CMS – Composition Management – Schema. 2005 2. E-Learning: An Expression of the Knowledge Economy. William Horton. Wiley Publishing Inc. Online Education and Learning Management Systems.. educators. Academic Information 32 . Quantitative and Qualitative Risk Analysis – Access Control –Authentication. Course Outcome: • The students will have knowledge in the area of character designing and concept designing in animation.Driven Systems – Principles of Document Management – Limits of IT Groups – Legacy of Multimedia Industry – Challenges of Communication – Personalization. 2003 2. 2002 Reference Books 1. Unit III – Entities of CMS Metadata: Definition – Types of Metadata Entities of CMS: Audiences – Publications – Content Types – Authors – Acquisition Sources – Content Access Structure – Templates CMS Team: Managers – Information Architects – Infrastructure Staff – Software Developers – Publication Staff – Content Processing Staff – Content Creation Staff Unit IV – Systems in Content Management Collection Systems: Authoring System – Conversion System – Acquisition System – Aggregation System Repository Interface Management Systems: Repository – Versioning System – Source Control System – Localization System – Workflow System – CMS Administration System Publishing Systems: Templating System – Personalization System – Deployment System – Web System – Print System – E-Mail System – Syndication System Unit V – Content Security Introduction: Categories of Security – Security Requirements for Authors and Teaching Content Protection: Texts. Video Security Risk Analysis: Purposes. Security in e-Learning. Audio. Morten Flate Pauls. Text Books 1. • To make the students understand the process of animation production in studios. Gaurav Chadha. Content Management Bible. Edgar R. Willey Publishing Inc. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing.M Nafay Kumail. and instructional designers. Images. Standard Method. Katherin Horton.

Basic drawing tools c. Squash and Stretch b. Light setup 6. Frame by frame animation 7. Academic Information 33 . Tweening 9. Follow through and overlapping actions c. The Pre-production Phase a. Story board 5. Inbetweens & Secondary actions 8. Embedding video 11NM315 AVID LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To produce an educational video by applying the skills learned to operate about the video editing system. Character actions 2. Camera movement 11. • Developing the following materials and preparing a record which explains the steps followed to develop. Basic animation & principles a. Model sheet 4. Animating rough blue and planning red d. Setup and Marking menus e. The lines b. Concept drawing b. Timing d. Software interface a. Head formation e. • To experience the importing and exporting in Avid. Exaggeration 3. Character designing a. Working with Layers f. Expressions f.Karunya University School of Media List of Practical Exercises 1. Screen layout b. Basic formation of shapes c. Character creation c. Basic formation of characters d. Key frame. Motion guide 12. Background & Compositing for animation 10.

8. AVID 1. Designing storyboards and developing an interactive instructional material which contains text and images for a variety of concepts and courses 4. 5. Develop an instructional material of any of the media subject to your choice. Using Blooms taxonomy design a study material for KG level of education Academic Information 34 . Develop a program learning material using brancing method 3. 2. Importing the selected shots from tape/CD/DVD in to avid editing system. Applying suitable motion and other special effects to the video. Program trailor 7. Preparing a sequence that plays for at least 3 minutes by editing and applying suitable transition effects. To construct an instructional material adding different media. Advertisement edditing 6.Karunya University School of Media Course Outcome: • The learners will be able to know about the entire practical applications of Avid software. Creating an interactive video based instructional material after designing suitable storyboards. Create an E-learning package using flash for Biodiversity 9. One frame shot 12. Extending the above instructional material by including audio options wherever possible. Public service advertisement 11NM316 E . Create a CBT package for car company 7. Documentary editing 10. 1. Course Outcome: It enables the students to have an in – depth knowledge in designing story boards and instructional text.LEARNING LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • • To apply the skills learned to develop an instructional material using Macromedia Flash. Develop a story board and design a e-learning package for Karunya Univeriy 10. 5. 3. News editing 8. Making a VCD/VDVD for the above video sequence. Speed effects 11. Develop a program learning material using linear method 2. Shortfilm editing 9. 6. List of Exercises Developing the following materials and preparing a record which explains the steps followed to develop. 4.

Prepare an e-learning package for social awareness programme 12. Gagne and Briggs Method. Krathwohl’s Affective Domain. ABCD Method. Prepare an e-learning package to promote an FMCG product 11NM317 INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNOLOGY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand the meaning and significance of Instructional Technology. Problem-Solving. • They will also understand how to evaluate the instructional materials and assessment of learning. Cognitive Strategy. Simpson’s Psychomotor Domain – Writing Objectives: Mager Method. Concepts. Psychomotor Skill. Attitude. Unit II – Instructional Models Instructional Development Models: Kemp Model – Instructional Development Institute Model – Inter service Procedures for Instructional Systems Development Model – CRI Model – ADDIE Model Unit III – Instructional Theories Gagne-Briggs’ Instructional Events – Gropper’s Behavioral Approach to Instructional Prescription – Landa’s Algo-Heuristic Theory . Course Outcomes: • The learners will know the importance of instructional theories and models in Instructional System Design which is applied in the e – learning industry. Text Books Academic Information 35 . Harrow’s Psychomotor Domain. • To relate instructional objectives to instructional technology. Unit V – Evaluation and Assessment Evaluation of Instructional Materials: Overview – Evaluation Process – Evaluation Models Assessment of Learning: Overview – Purposes – Types of Assessment – Models of Assessment of Learners’ Achievement – Characteristics of Good Assessment Instruments – Formats of Assessment.Scandura’s Structural Learning Theory – Collins-Stevens’ Cognitive Theory of Inquiry Teaching – Merrill’s Component Display Theory – Reigeluth-Stein’s Elaboration Theory of Instruction – Keller’s Motivation Design of Instruction. Principles. Procedures. Unit IV – Instructional Media & Strategies Instructional Methods and Media – Instructional Strategies for Declarative Knowledge.Karunya University School of Media 11. Unit I – Introduction to Instructional Technology Definition – History of Instructional Technology – Concept of Systems Approach – System Analysis – Curriculum Development and Process – Need Assessment – Task Analysis Taxonomies of Educational Objectives: Bloom’s Cognitive Domain. Dave’s Psychomotor Domain.

Charles E. Rinehart and Winston.Knowledge Capture. Merrill Publishing Company. 5. Hannum.Knowledge Storage and Retrieval . Robert Mills Gagné.Knowledge Capture and Codification: Tacit Knowledge – Explicit Knowledge. 1997 2. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publication. et al. Charles M. ISBN 0898592755. Course Outcomes: • They will be having knowledge in models of Knowledge Management. 11NM318 KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand the applications of Knowledge Management in Education.Knowledge Application Unit II – Models KM Models: Von Krogh and Roos Model – Nonaka and Takeuchi Spiral Model – Choo Model – Wigg Model – Boisot I-Space Model Unit III – Knowledge Capturing Contents: Types – Structure – Quality – Media and Size .Methods to Capture Explicit Knowledge: Cognitive Maps – Decision Trees – Knowledge Taxonomies . Creation and Management Tools. • They will also learn about the application of Knowledge Management tools in learning environment. Martin Tessmer. Inc Publication. Methods of Teaching: A Skills Approach. Unit I – Introduction and KM Cycle Knowledge Management: Introduction – History – Knowledge Hierarchy – KM Team – Future Challenges KM Cycle: Knowledge Creation . Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. Reigeluth.Methods to Capture Tacit Knowledge: Interviewing – Learning by Told – Learning by Observation . Lawrence Erlbam Am. 1992 4. Kent L. Book by Wallace H. Jonassen. • To familiarize the students about knowledge capturing and sharing. Task Analysis Methods for Instructional Design. Holt. 2002 Reference Books 1. Instructional-Design Theories and Models: An overview of their current status. Instructional Technology: Foundations. Frederick G.Karunya University School of Media 1. David H. Unit IV – Knowledge Sharing Knowledge Sharing: Social Nature of Knowledge – Knowledge Sharing Communities – Obstacles of Knowledge Sharing -Systems: Centralized and Distributed Architecture Knowledge Sharing and Dissemination Tools. Inc Publication. 1999 2. Academic Information 36 . Knirk. Paul Eggen. Instructional Technology: A Systematic Approach to Education. Gustafson. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates. David Jacobsen. 1999 3.Knowledge Transfer .

Instructional Designer. Mark W McElroy. Gary Jones. Elsevier Publication. Springer Publication. Subject Matter Experts. 2002 11NM319 E CONTENT WRITING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To familiarize the basics of writing. Knowledge Management Systems: Information and Communication Technologies for Knowledge Management. Course Outcomes: • They will know about the styles of writing for different types of documents. • To learn the skills required for a multimedia/web writer. UNIT II – Interactivity and Writing Interactive Multimedia – Interactive Writer – Interactivity and Control – Thinking Interactively – Interactive Devices -Information and Interactive Architecture – Narrative Design – Content Expertise and Strategy – Writing for Search Engines. UNIT I – Basics of Writing Language Varieties – Skills – Writing – Basics of Content Writing –Traditional Content Vs EContent – Language Use in E-Learning – Advantages and Limitations – Coherence – Cohesion – Accuracy – Brevity – Clarity –Content Writing: Roles of Content Writer. 2005 2. Kimiz Dalkir. Knowledge Management in Education. 2003 2. Joseph M Firestone. Elsevier Publication. 2004 Reference Books 1.Karunya University School of Media Unit V – Knowledge Application Knowledge Application at Individual Level: Characteristics of Individuals – Bloom’s Taxonomy in Knowledge Application – Task Analysis and Modeling Knowledge Application at Group Level: Knowledge Reuse – Knowledge Repositories – Knowledge Application Tools Text Books 1.Technical Skills: Flowcharting – Other Organizational Tools UNIT III – Formats Defining Goals – Techniques to Achieve Common Goals – Audience – User Prism –Script and Proposal Formatting: Outlines – Proposals – Storyboards – Scripts – Final Documents UNIT IV – Writing Narration Academic Information 37 . Edward Sallis. • They will also understand the architecture of multimedia/web. Routledge Publication. Knowledge Management in Theory and Practice. Key Issues in the New Knowledge Management. Ronald Maier.

Experimental. Effective Writing for E-Learning Environments (Cases on Information Technology). Checklist. Schedule. Achievement test. 2006 Reference Books 1. Course Outcome: • After learning this paper the learners will be able to know the research methods and statistics applied in media industry. Information Science Publishing. Variables: Discrete and Continuous Variables.Writing interactive lessons . Unit II – Tools. Educational Communication and Educational Technology .2000 2. • The students will also be able to initiate new media research proposals in their respective field. Linear Narrative. Participatory and Ethnography Research Methods Quantitative Research Methods: Survey. Irene Hammerich. Independent and Academic Information 38 .Writing learning content for a simulation . Unit I – Research Methods Research: Meaning. • To understand the principles of evaluation.Writing classic lessons to a computer game Text Books 1.Karunya University School of Media Architecture: Linear – Linear with Section Branching – Hierarchical Branching – Parallel/Multiple Path Architecture – Dynamically Generated Websites – Active and Passive Information Delivery . Interactive Narrative – Interactive Narration: Character and Role of the Player – Structure and Navigation – Exposition UNIT V – Case Studies Writing a corporate website . Socio-metric. Writing for Multimedia & the Web: A Practical Guide to Content Development for Interactive Media.Writing Non-Narrative. Variables and Scales of Measurement Tools for Data Collection: Observation. Writing for the Media. 2004 11NM320 MEDIA RESEARCH Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand research methods and statistical tools in media field. • To prepare model research proposals for research studies and report writing. Case Study. Timothy Garrand. 2002 2. Action and Longitudinal Research Methods. Sunny Thomas. Ltd. Interview. John Wiley & Sons Inc.Writing a museum kiosk .Research Trends in Education.Qualitative Research Methods: Historical Research. Attitude Scale and Content Analysis – Construction and Standardization of Tools. Elsevier Inc. Nature and Scope and agencies of Educational research . Claire Harrison. Katy Campbell. research and statistics and computer application. Questionnaire. Vision Books Pvt. Developing Online Content: The Principles of Writing and Editing for the Web.

Karunya University School of Media Dependent Variables. Chi-Square. Mode – Measures of Central Tendency and Standard Deviation – Bivariate Analysis: Correlation Methods. 2007 11FT301 SCREENPLAY WRITING (LEVEL I) Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the level of understanding of writing script at a basic level. Kerlinger. and ANOVA Unit V – Computer Application and Report Writing Computer applications: Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS). John Best. OneTailed and Two-Tailed Tests Unit IV – Advanced Statistical Techniques for Research Introduction to Statistics: Meaning. Ordinal. 2000 Reference Books 1. McGraw Hill Edition. Standard Scores/’Z’ Scores.Skewness and Kurtosis .Scales of Measurement: Nominal. Frequency. Foundations of Behavioral Research. Type-I and Type-II error. etc . Frequency Polygon. Pie Diagrams. Histogram. T-test. Percentile.Normal Probability Curve: Practical Application of Normal Probability Curve and Characteristics of Normal Probability Curve. • To know about the level of understanding of story treatment and scripting techniques adopted for different categories of films. Scope and Types – Hypotheses Formulation and Testing: Statistical Significance. Cumulative Frequency Graph or Ogive . Importance and Limitations of Statistics and Data – Descriptive and Inferential Statistics. Excel.Writing Research Proposal and Research Report Text Books 1. Levels of Confidence. Course Outcome • The learners will be able to write their own script for producing a film UNIT –I 39 Academic Information .Univariate Analysis: Mean. Simple Random Sampling. Smoothed Frequency Polygon. Interval and Ratio Scales Unit III – Sampling Techniques and Hypotheses Meaning of Population and Samples – Sampling Method: Purposive Sampling.Hypotheses: Meaning. Variance. Parametric and Non-Parametric Statistics . Methods in Social Research. Sampling error.Range. Microsoft word. Systematic Sampling. Multi Stage Sampling. Research Methodology – Kothari. H. Fundamentals of Social Research. Harcourt College Publisheer. Fred. Scope. Median. Intervening and Manipulating Variables. Thomson Learning Inc. Degrees of Freedom and Sampling Error . 2004 2. 2000 2. Stratified Random Sampling and Cluster Sampling. Goode & Hatt.. Statistical Significance Diagrammatic Graphical Presentations: Bar Diagrams.

Plot patterns .Conflict .Usage. Film script writing.the struggle .II The sources of information – Combination . The Art of Dramatic Writing. Roretta Books.Transitions of action : Motive . 1988 .Point of view.Usage.Play and screenplay .Forstar 5.Swain 4.Treatment – Screenplay – Master scene .Exposition and preparation .Adaptation of novel and drama for TV and Film -Audience participation . UNIT .V Melodrama .Dwight V.External and internal aspects of a character . UNIT . Focal Press.Co-ordination – Duplication .Eugen vale. 2002 .E. Reference Books 1.Karunya University School of Media Introduction to the Art of writing – One line story .Writing for TV-comedy and tragedy . 2007 . Film – Types.The undisturbed story – the disturbance . middle.Speed and Academic Information 40 . Film.Step outline .Script – Shooting script – Writing scripts with computers. Screenplay writing. 1980 . Wildside Press.Exposition of time and place – Plot and sub-plot . Duplap Publishers 1972 .Development-Climax (Beginning.Novel . UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY Define Photography. Screen writing for Narrative film and Television. Course Outcomes • The students can be aware of the basic applications in the areas of digital Photography • The learners can be able take up their own commercial projects and work with par to the industry standard.Orchestration and unit of opposites-Dialectical approach .the adjustment .Outline .Biography or Bone structure of a character . Groset. 11FT302 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand elements of Photography.dialogues.William Miller 3. UNIT . Filters –Types.Lajos Egri 2.Suspense .IV How to get ideas .Usage.Intention – Goal – Conflict . Lights-Types. Lens-Types. • To understand the Techniques of Photo Composition.Causes and effect .Understandability – Probability – Identification – Art of Confrontation UNIT . end) – Synopsis – basic story . Aspects of the Novel. Brief History and Development of Photography.III Characterization .Theme-Ideas-Complex structure of a story .Writing comic sequences .M. Hastings House Book Publlishing.Surprise.Usage. Camera –Types.Narrative structure .

Photo Printers. Ninth Edition. Academic Information 41 . Popular Photography Websites.Focal Press. Camera Operation.Types-Usage.Sports-Indoor/Outdoor. 2. Working with Scanner -Types . Advantages. • To learn the art of script preparation. Printing Paper-Types UNIT IV AREAS OF PHOTOGRAPHY Portrait-Architecture. Mastering the Basics of Photography by Susan McCartney. Equipments and Budget. Equipments and Budget. Alfred A. by Roger Hicks and Frames Schultz. Aperture-Usage.Design. A Plume Book. Basic Lighting. Switzerland. Setup for Digital Imaging . Knopt Inc.Photo Quality. 1999 by John H edgecoe.How Printer works.2002. Other Useful Accessories. Software for Digital Processes( Digital Dark Room) -Image Editor. Photo Power Point Presentation. Focal Length. Text Book: 1.Data Storage and Transfer Options.Usage. 11FT303 PRE PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To learn pre production techniques in film production.Usage. UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Define -Digital. The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) by Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm.File Formats – Converters. Depth of Field. 5.Digital Still Camera. Mode. Assignments. ALL Worthi Press.Key Light-Fill Light.Picture Format. Corporate Studio. 2000 4. Light Meter. The Manual of Photography (2000) by Ralph E Jacobson/Geoffrey G Attridge/Sidney F Ray.Usage. Desktop Computer Components. Photo Essay. Rotovision. Angle of View.Scanning Techniques.Knopf Publisher. Alfred A.Speed.Product. Interior Shots .First edition. Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging (2001) – Peter K Burian – Publisher Sybex.Karunya University School of Media Size. 2003 3. The Photographer’s Handbook. Reference Books 1. Working with Digital Camera – Major Components and Functions.Fashion-Travel-Environmental Panoramic.USA. Creating Photography Website. Shutter. Photo Documentary. Rule of Third. Low Key and High Key Picture. UNIT II PHOTO COMPOSITION Basic Techniques for Better Image.Windows and Macintosh.Small Budget Studio-Design. –Action –Aerial-Macro- UNIT V DIGITAL STUDIO Photography Project. Connecting Images for Internet Use.Electronic Flash – Selection of Right Flash Mode. Digital SLR Camera – Types.Film Scanning. Flash. Tripod–Types.

Unit IV Steps in pre production Shooting script-story board-scene-sequence break up-character –main character-relief character subsidiary character.various formats –news-TV programme-ads-proms-commercial-special programme.special programmes. • To know about the functioning of different types of television channels and its production facilities.Karunya University School of Media • To create the concept for a production of a film and knowing the process of video production techniques and the various script formats. Unit II Basic elements in script Script-visual writing-budget-target audience-steps of developing concept.script formats –proposal-treatment-develop steps in script writing. Antony Friedman” writing for visual media”-focal press.angles& camera movements-introduction -lighting and colors-single camera – multicamera production-indoor studio-outdoor -properties. Martha Mollison ” producing videos”-focal press. 2010 11FT304 TELEVISION STUDIES Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To provide an understanding of different levels of television production.daily soaps—documentaries-interview-film.dramatic points in the story twist in plot. Text Books 1.daily soaps.documentaries-interview-TV programme-ads commercial. Unit-I Basic . Course Outcomes • The students gain knowledge about the basics of pre production in film making. John Hart “the art of the story board”-focal press.plot-story character dialogue . Unit-V Various script formats Script writing. • It enable the students to work on scripts creatively. 2010 2. Academic Information 42 . Dwight V Swain “film script writing”-focal press.III Basic production technique Basic shot . 2007 Reference Books 1. 2010 2.concept making Idea-seed of the programme-creative inspiration-visual thinking-discussion with team-format of the programme-types of formats like-news.character introduction important of dialogues-dialogue writing . Unit.

News Presentation. Sports TV. women. Teleserials. Political discussion. An Introduction to Television Studies . 2004 4. Routledge. Soft stories. Taylor & Francis Group. Youth. Allen. • To learn the editing principles Course Outcomes The students will be able to understand the aesthetics of video production UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO EQUIPMENTS Academic Information 43 . tele film. Unit V How audience are influenced by TV Programmes and commercials. cable with & without CAS (set top box). The Television Studies Reader-Edited by Robert C. quiz. Unit-II Genre of Single camera Production. Commercial TV. TV production. Discovery channel / NGC. 2006 11FT305 ELEMENTS OF VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To identify the elements and continuity of shots. dance shows. reality shows. Annette Hill. Outdoor. TELEVISIONS: An Introduction to Television Studies Glen Creeber British Film Institute.Documentary.Terrestrial. • To learn the camera options and production techniques.Jonathan Bignell -: Routledge 2007 3. personality interview. Unit – I Genre of Studio based productions and target audience. current affairs.. Direct to home. Religious TV. The Television Studies Book. IPTV Unit IV Public service TV. weather report. 2009 2. Experimental video. Political leaders and senior citizen.David Lusted and Christine Geraghty. Election Results & analysis.Karunya University School of Media Course Outcomes: • The students gain knowledge about the types of shows and classification of programmes in television. Unit-III Advantages and Disadvantages of various distribution systems. Cartoon Net etc.Children. Reference Books 1.Music shows. web streaming. Crime subjects enacted.

music director. lighting director. UNIT IV UNDERSTANDING THE POST PRODUCTION Online production – offline production – Edit Decision List – dimensions of editing – spatial – rhythmic – graphic – temporal editing .Karunya University School of Media Digital video camera – types of video cameras – format – major accessories – camera formats – camera operations and functions – aperture – shutter – white balance – focusing methods . cameraman.continuity editing. • To learn the techniques of photographing various subjects. focal press – 2001 2. Indoor photography Academic Information 44 . UNIT II THE SHOT Elements of the shot: the shot – definition. art director. scene. 2009 REFERENCE BOOK 1. gaffer. UNIT IV TYPES OF PRODUCTION Single camera production: the shot. story board types of script. etc. Digital cinematography – Paul Wheeler. Dimensions of film sound – voice over – dubbing – re recording – titling – adding special effects. TEXT BOOKS 1. Film art – David Boardwell – thirteenth edition. sequence. script writer. multi camera production – rehearsal – floor manager . Video production techniques – Zettl – Thomson Learning Publication.focal length – depth of field – video signal – video format. 2002 11FT306 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To learn the types of photography and lighting techniques. lighting for a scene – colour temperature – dolly – trolley – grips and camera accessories – tripod – montage – lighting equipments.the realism of mise-en-scene – the power of mise-en-scene – time and space in mise-en-scene UNIT III THE PRODUCTION Cinematography properties – basic types of shot . Course Outcomes: • The learners will able to work with various types of photography on par with industry standard. mise-en-scene: aspects of mise-enscene – lighting in a shot – setting aspect in a shot – character expression and movement – costume and makeup of the character .camera movement – camera framing – camera angle – duration of the shot – long take..the crew – director. location scouting .. LIST OF LAB WORKS 1.the production phase. production assistant.documentary production – short film production – electronic field production – talk shows interviews.

1. Fashion photography 7. Basics of Script b. Product photography 6. Script writing. Architecture photography 5. Course Outcome • The learners will be able to create concept and produce scripts for producing a film. Dialogue writing 7. Action photography 10. Sports and Panoramic photography 11FT307 PRE PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To learn practically pre production techniques in film production. angles& camera movements. Treatment 4. Design & composition of color &light 11FT308 EXPERIMENTAL VIDEO/ SHORT VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • To get a deep understanding of producing short a short video production including all the three phases of the production work Course Outcome Academic Information 45 . Shooting script 10. One Line Story 2. Outdoor photography 3. 9. Environmental photography 9. Formats of script c.sequence breakup 8. Portrait photography 4. Scripting and story board a. Concept &idea d. Basic components of story board 12. Aerial photography 11. Basic shot. Proposal 5.Karunya University School of Media 2. Story board 11. Plot 3. Macro photography 12. 6. Scene . Travel photography 8. • To learn the art of script preparation.

Camera work -editing style with emphasis on chase sequences . Interpreting those visual into number of shots along with compositions 8. Political. structural characteristics -– Factors to be appraised while appreciating films . The learners would be able to gain knowledge of various video production techniques in a fast pace. its narration and different case studies of film reviews.How to read and understand cinema.Inductive approach and Deductive approach – Social.Editing style use of nonactors. Visualization of the elected idea 7.I Definition and need for film Appreciation . Sound mixing 12.The narrative and stylistic elements. To know about the various film styles. its styles and their method of production.use of sound effects . Academic Information 46 .use of sound effects and music. The structure of the film .Camera work .its structure .Camera work – Lighting . UNIT. List of Experiments: 1. Course Outcome • The learners will be aware of internationally renowned film contributions to the industry. Thinking at random 4. Concealing number of ideas 5. Technical and Aesthetic aspects of Cinema .the social criticism . Editing 11. Choosing a topic 3. Writing story board 9. Cultural.subject content. Brainstorming 2. Economical. UNIT-III Appreciation of thrillers with special reference to Alfred Hitchcock’s films: Psycho (1960) .its structure .North by North west (1959) .Dramatic development . UNIT II Appreciation of Neo-realistic films with a detailed analysis of Vittorio-Desica’s Bicycle Thieves (1948).A comparative study of Cinema and other aesthetic expressions The types of films to be appreciated .Psychological thrills . Video shooting 10.Editing style . Concretizing to one single idea 6.Karunya University School of Media • • The learners would be able to gain knowledge of various video production techniques in a fast pace. Final screening and getting the feedback 11FT309 FILM APPRECIATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • • To know about the different genres of films.

STEPHENSON AND DEBRIX 11FT310 NON LINEAR EDITING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To know the different types of editing. Source monitor – Tool palette – Bin Views –Importing. Stages – EDL – Role of Editor – Continuity & Dynamic Editing – Linear & Non-Linear Editing – Physical & Electronic Editing –Control Track & SMPTE Editing – A/B Roll Editing. Copying. Art of the Film. 1985. Composer monitor. Audio and Video Channels –Controlling Decks UNIT III – Editing and Titling Customizing Monitor Displays – Playing Video in Client Monitor – Loading and Clearing Footage on Monitor – Controlling Playback – Marking and Sub-Cataloging Footage – Setting up Academic Information 47 . “Red” .use of actors . Sequences. Deluxe Edition .The dramatic structure . Bins. UNIT I – Introduction to Video Editing and Avid Editing: Definition. Course Outcome • The learners will be aware of adding special effects and mixing audio with the visuals in Avid. Film as Art. 2009.JAMES MONACO.Karunya University School of Media UNIT -IV Analysis of Orson Wells’ film “Citizen Kane” – Its structure camera work . 2006.Depiction of domestic culture . How to read a film .“Blue”. • To acquire the editing and titling skills. Effect palette. “White”. • To understand the terminologies and concepts of Avid video editing software.editing style . Oxford University 2.The prison commander and the British Colonel – The camera work Editing style and the creative use of sound – Doctor Zhivago (1966) structure-Visual appeal and Artiste performance.ERNEST LINDGREN 3.Art Direction-Appreciation of Epic films of David Lean with special reference to the Bridge on the River Kwai (1959) scripting study of the characters .Mobility of camera. Target Drives. Projects – Timeline. Cinema as Graphic Art Studio Pubication -VLADIMIR WILSEN 4. which enables them to work to industry standard.The use of long takes and deep focus technique . Sub clips.Use of low angles and long takes. Appreciation of Yasujiro Ozu’s films with special reference to Tokyo Story (1953) Study of the style and craft . UNIT V Appreciation of Kriztof Kieslowski films with special reference to the Colour Trilogy .Introduction to Avid Xpress DV – Hardware and Software Requirements UNIT II – Terminologies and Recording Media files.“Shomingeki” tradition . Moving and Deleting Clips in Bins IEEE 1394 – Selecting Deck/Tape.Study of the style . Reference Books: 1.Fragmented narrative . . Clips. Effect editor. Principles.

Reference Book Avid Xpress DV Effects Guide 11FT311 E . DV Stream. OMF) Text Books 1. Sixth Edition. Pre production meeting.sources of casting. Extracting and Copying Segments – Slip Trim & Slide Trim – Finding Frames and Clips Titling: Editing. Avidtechnology Inc.2. Avid Xpress DV User’s Guide. Luma. client approval. 2006.agenda. planning of special elementschoosing the production team. Replacing Fill Tracks UNIT IV – Special Effects Types of Transition Effects – Single and Multiple Effects (Transition & Segment)– Rendering – Key frameable and Non-Key frameable Effects – Defining Motion Paths using Key frames – Layered Effects – Nested Effects – Key Effects (Chroma. Fading Titles. UNIT III Academic Information 48 . advertising strategy. San Francisco State University. Course Outcomes: • The students will be able to produce their own video commercials UNIT I Development of ideas.idea/ concept development.film formats. MPEG. script/ story board. Internet radio. Replacing.creative potential of TV and Radio. UNIT II Pre production – radio commercial production . crew.Karunya University School of Media a Sequence – Setting up Tracks – Undoing /Redoing Edits – Splice-in Edit & Overwrite Edit – Lifting. media approval. role and responsibilities of casting director. cast. Video Field Production and Editing.brief from client. kinds of appeals and market segmentation of the target audience. QuickTime. Ronald J. ABACom INC 2. popular TV ad formats.COMMERCIALS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To train the students in knowing about the types of commercials. Matte) Freeze Frame – Variable Speed – Strobe Motion – Reverse Motion UNIT V – Working with Audio and Exporting Soloing Audio Tracks – Audio Scrubbing – Audio Effect Tool – Audio Mix Tool –Automation Gain Tool – Adjusting Volume in Timeline – Audio EQ Tool – Audio Suite Plug-Ins Mixing Video Tracks – Recording to Tape – Exporting Formats (MPEG-1. Compessi. 2004. Removing. agency interpretation. creative work. • To understand the Economics and future of advertising industry.

Oxford: Focal Press. Alan MCPHERSON & Howard Timms. London.a complete guide to the world of audio. Pudovkin: Relational editing.).C. NTC Business Books. 2005. 4. UNIT IV Editing the commercial for radio and TV .choosing production companies . Eisenstein – The raw material of film – Cinematic means: Creation through montage – Russian philosophy and Piaget – Film form – The final purpose of film – Montage – Typage: Battleship Potemkin and its five chapters – V.set shooting/ location shooting. 2001 5. Oxford. Steve. New Age International: New Delhi.I. 3. Herbert. UNIT. Digital compositing for Film and Video. Reference Books 1. Academic Information 49 . The Audio.future of TV and radio commercial production – mobile radio and digital audio broadcast. Chicago.Visual handbook.visual techniques. UNIT – II Sergi M.recording the sound track and creating the special effects.Budgeting and other factors affecting production . Simon. Mark. Television Production Handbook (7th edn.Karunya University School of Media Production of TV commercial .Belmont: Wadsworth Publishing.traditional film editing/ non linear editing finishing the audio elements. • To know about the various aspects of world level film theories. 2000 2.specialization of production companies . Mathur. Advertising Management.Pre scoring and Post scoring.I Introduction to film theory – Dichotomies of film theory – 4 Aristotelian categories – Transposition – Interdependence of questions – Expressionism and Realism – Realism and Formalism – Russian formalism – Formative film theory – Hugo Munsterberg : Matter and means – Form and function – Rudolf Arnheim : Material – The creative use of medium – Film form – The purpose of film.). UNIT V Economics of radio and television commercial production. Zettl. 2005. Course Outcome: • The students will be aware of realism in film production and will gain knowledge about different film makers. 1988 6.special effects and animations. 2000. Text and Cases. Hooper White. Focal Press. 11FT312 FILM THEORY Credits 4:0:0 Course objectives • To know about the different types of film theories applied for film production.confirming the picture. How to produce effective TV commercials (3rd edn.). Storyboards Motion in Action (2nd edn. Wright. Pelham books.

Andre Bazin : The raw material – Cinematic means and form – The plastic image – Deep focus – The resources of montage – The use and misuse of montage – Cinematic purpose – The function of cinema. UNIT I The Nature and Scope of Social Psychology .Bill Nicholas. Film Form. Reference Books: 1. Oxford University Press. 1976 8. Film theory and criticism Introductory readings . affiliation. 5.Introductory Readings. Gh Mead. Need Achievement. Durkheim. 1985 11FT313 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To identify the mob and group behavior of the film and television audience • To learn the applications of psychological principles applied for different mass media Course Outcomes • The students will be able to understand the audience psychology • It enhances the students to maintain the relationship in workplace environment. 2000 2. 2009 9. Film theory – Robert Lapsley and Michael Westlekil. Sign and meaning. Film Language – Christian Metz 6. Society and Personality. etc. Wiley Inc. UNIT – IV Contemporary French film theory – Jean Mitray : Raw material – Creative potential in film – The form and purpose of cinema.Lee Brandy and Marshall Cohen. What is Cinema? – Andre Bazin. dependency. Socialization and Motivation. Film Sense – Sergi Eisenstein. Mc Doughall UNIT II Specialization : Social Learning Process. Aggression. Cooley. Academic Information 50 .The Methods of Social Psychology. California Press.Dudley Andrew. Oxford University Press. The Development of Social Psychology : Early Beginnings – the Contributions of Sociologists and Psychologists : Comte. UNIT – V Semiology – Christian Metz and Semiology of cinema – Raw material of Semiology of film – The means of signification in cinema – Film is not a true language nevertheless film is like a language – Code / message – Text / system – The form and possibilities of film – Semiology and purpose of film. 1977 4. 2000 Focal Press 3. Movies and methods volume I & II . Harcourt Publ. 1973 7. Le Bon. The major film theories . Social Factors in perception.Karunya University School of Media UNIT – III Realistic film theory – Siegfried Kracaur – Matter and means – Compositional forms – The purpose of cinema – Rebuttals . Film theory – Focal press.

Public opinion – Nature. Reference Books 1. UNIT V Mass Psychology. Produce a TV commercial 6. Audiences and Collective Behaviour. Casual Audiences. Intentional Audiences and Audiences and Mass Media. Classification ofCollective masses. measurement. Group structure and group performance. Produce a talkshow 12. 2007 11FT314 VIDEO COMMERCIAL LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • This helps the students in developing an understanding of producing various kinds of video commercials Course Outcomes • The students can be able to produce their own television commercials. The Psychology of Mass Movements.Produce a presentation show Academic Information 51 . Group norms and conformity. Sherif. Produce a Television news bulletin. Nature and Types of groups. Collective Behaviour – the mobs and the Different kinds of Mobs.W. Produce a Public service TV advertisement 8. New York. UNIT IV Groups and group Processes. Produce a script and story board for a TV commercial 7. Cooperation and competition. E L “Individual in Society”. 1999 2. Conditions Conclusive to Development of Groups. RS and Ballachey. LIST OF PRACTICALS 1. Role of Mass communication in Public Opinion Formation and change. N and Sherif C. Record a celebrity endorsement for a product 5. Produce a TV commercial with animation effects 10. Produce a commercial of emotional and rational appeal 3. 11.The Nature and Dimensions of Attitudes. formation and change. group Dynamics. Produce a signature tune for a TV programme 4. New York. Produce a live product demo for a commercial 9. Produce a Social service television commercial 2. McGraw Hill. Communication and Persuasion. The Formation and Change of Attitudes.Social Facilitation. D Crytchfold. ”An Outline of Social Psychology” Harper & Row.Karunya University School of Media UNIT III Attitudes and Opinions .

Produce a social service advertisement 3. EDIT. EDIT-Music Album NOTE: Edit note should be prepared and the visuals should be done accordingly. Course Outcome • The learners will be aware of different advertisement production formats List of Exercises: 1 Produce a visual dominant advertisement 2.Drama 5.Outdoor – Single Camera set-up Interview (CUT TO CUT) 3. EDIT -PSA 6. Course Outcomes • The learners can be able to do editing and post production techniques with par to the industry standard. List of Experiments 1. Docudrama 11. Consumer product advertisement 10. 8.Indoor – Single Camera set-up Interview (CUT TO CUT) 2. 11FT316 ADVERTISING LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • It provides a deeper understanding in writing story boards. Talk shows. EDIT _ Game Shows 7. EDIT . Produce an ad for a consumer product Academic Information 52 . developing concepts and producing different kinds of advertisements for both commercial and social service promotion. EDIT .Debate 9.Karunya University School of Media 11FT315 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To introduce students to the profession of editing in NLE and give the professional exercise of basic editing.Educational Shows. Promotional video 12.Two Camera Set -up 4. EDIT. Group discussion NOTE: Edit note should be prepared and the visuals should be done accordingly.

Academic Information 53 . rough and comprehensive artwork and copy for all the items listed above) 11FT317 STUDY OF FILM MAKERS Credits 4:0:0 Course objectives • To know about the different types of film theories applied for film production. Produce an ad for FMCG product (Record should contain the thumbnail. UNIT – IV Parash Pather (The philosopher’s stone) – A compilation of comedy – Fantasy – Fares – Satire – Touch of pathos – Jalsaghur ( The music room ) – A Chekhovian theme – Devi ( Goddess): The strong resonance of India – His television films. Produce an ad with fear appeal 11.Treatment.Karunya University School of Media 4. UNIT – II Detailed study of Kurosowa’s films – Rashomon (1950) – Seven Samurai (1954) – Throne of Blood (1957) with special reference to his style – Red Beard (1960): The story – Characterization – Treatment – Production – Introduction to study film makers – Abbas Kiarostami . Produce a corporate advertisement 5. UNIT – III A brief life history of Satyajit Ray – Ray as a graphic artist – Ray’s development of interest in cinema – The Calcutta film society – His first directorial venture – The detailed study of Satyajit Ray’s Film Triology : Pather Panchali (1955). • To know about the various aspects of world level film theories.Mohsen Makhmalbaf. Majid Majidi – Content and Form. Aparajitho (1964) and Apur Sansar (1959).Production. plots and other aspects of film making techniques UNIT – I A brief life history of Akira Kurosova – His first directorial venture – Sanshiro Sugata (1943) – Kurosowa’s style – His script work – Sonata form – Circular form – Metamorphosis – His camera techniques – Editing style – Handling of artists – Creative use of sound and music – Ikiru: The search for affirmation – story. Produce a 15 or 10 sec advertisement 7. Produce a 55 sec testimonial advertisement 6. Course Outcome • It enables the user to understanding about renowned film makers and their contribution in developing different themes. Produce an ad with humor appeal 12. Produce and develop a comparative advertisement 8. • The students will understand the realism in film production and will gain knowledge about different film makers. Produce an ad for brand promotion of any consumer product 9. Produce an ad with emotional appeal 10.

Ltd. Liverright Publisher 11FT318 DIRECTORIAL PRACTICE Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • It helps to understand the techniques of film direction. UNIT – IV Mise-en-Scene – The power and aspects of Mise-en-Scene – Mise-en-Scene in time and space Break down into shots – Mise-en-shot – Filmic technique – Master scene – Triple take technique – Directing the actor – Make up .Mahesh Butt – Debaki Bose and their style – Study of contemporary Tamil film makers with special reference to C. 2001.Internal structure – Filmic material and its organization – Use of chance material – Film as an art: Film and and painting – Film and Novel – Film and Theatre – Film and Music. • The learner will understand the aesthetic aspects of producing a film. Course Outcome • The students will gain knowledge about film making techniques which includes details of lighting and direction. UNIT –III Screen direction – Dynamic and Static – Constructive and relational editing – Parallel cutting – Editing pattern for static dialogue scene – Cutting after the movement – Motion inside the screen – Motion in and out of the shot – 20 basic rules for camera movements – Unconventional camera movements for creativity. Mahendran.Cinema of Satyajit Ray – Chandra Das Gupta. 2. Signet Publisher 3.Satyajit Ray (Inner Eye) – Andrew Robinson. & K. I BTauris and Co. 2009. Balu Mahendra. UNIT – V Academic Information 54 . Bharthiraja. Reference Books 1. Manirathinam. 1987. UNIT – I Filmic space and Filmic time – Film structure: External structure . Akira Kurosowa – Donald Richie.various types .Composition – Movement within the frame – Camera angles – Camera movements and lenses – Special effects in camera – Special effects : Miniatures – Matte shots – Computer aided effects – Front and Back projection – Principles of narrative construction – Narration : The flow of story information.V. Balachander. UNIT – II Director and the camera – Diachronic and Syntax . Sridhar.Karunya University School of Media UNIT – V Study of contemporary Indian film makers – Shyam Benegal – Adoor Gopalakrishnan .Directing the crew – Composition – Symmetrical – Asymmetrical –Vertical – Horizontal – Dutch/Slanting –Diagonal composition – Set: Plan – Section view – Elevation and Projection – Story board.

Ordinal. Stratified Random Sampling and Cluster Sampling. • To prepare model research proposals for research studies and report writing. Variables: Discrete and Continuous Variables. 2009. Focal Press. One-Tailed and Two-Tailed Tests and Uncorrelated Data. Unit II – Tools. Variables and Scales of Measurement Tools for Data Collection: Observation. Directing-Film techniques and aesthetics – Michael Rabiger. Film as Art – Rudolf Arnheim. Da Capo Press 5. Kehoe. Systematic Sampling. Schedule. Degrees of Freedom and Sampling Error Hypotheses: Meaning. research and statistics and computer application. Levels of Confidence. Scope and Types – Hypotheses Formulation and Testing: Statistical Significance. Cine / Grafic Publication. 2007 3. Independent and Dependent Variables. Oxford University Press 2. Simple Random Sampling. Educational Communication and Educational Technology Qualitative Research Methods: Historical Research. Checklist. Questionnaire. Attitude Scale and Content Analysis – Construction and Standardization of Tools.Karunya University School of Media Lighting: Flat lighting – Rembrandt lighting – Chiaroscuro lighting – Silhouette – Cameo – Limbo – Creative uses of sound in films: Synchronous – Asynchronous – Role of film music – Realistic and functional music – Dialogue: Comparative study of film and theatre – New technical developments: Use of computers in various aspects of film making . Case Study. 5 C’s of Cinematography – Josheph V.R. Academic Information 55 . Hasting House Pub. Experimental. Theories of Probability. • To understand the principles of evaluation. Participatory and Ethnography Research Methods Quantitative Research Methods: Survey.Digital film making and its creative possibilities . Intervening and Manipulating Variables Scales of Measurement: Nominal. Interval and Ratio Scales Unit III – Sampling Techniques and Hypotheses Meaning of Population and Samples – Sampling Method: Purposive Sampling. 1965 6. Socio-metric. Action and Longitudinal Research Methods. Nature and Scope Research Trends in Education. Course Outcome • The students can apply the knowledge of statistics and research in professional media work place Unit I – Research Methods Research: Meaning. How to read a film – James Monaco. 11FT319 RESEARCH METHODS AND STATISTICS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • To understand research methods and statistical tools in education. University of California Press. 2006 4. 1979. Interview. Achievement test. 1969.Wide screen – 3 D – Dolby system – DTS – IMAX. Lessons with Eisenstein – Nizany. Mascelli. Reference Books: 1. Technique of Film make-up – Vincent J. Multi Stage Sampling.

Allyn and Bacon. 2004. Variance. Realistic and Formalistic acting – Personal and experimental style. Computer Programming in Basic. Frequency Polygon. Edwards A. Covers P. John Best. Harcourt College Pub. Foundations of Behavioral Research. 1952 3.Karunya University School of Media Unit IV – Advanced Statistical Techniques for Research Introduction to Statistics: Meaning. Frequency. H. Goode & Hatt.S. Importance and Limitations of Statistics and Data – Descriptive and Inferential Statistics. Excel.. Experimental Design in Psychology and Education. Pie Diagrams. Stat Graph etc . Mode – Measures of Central Tendency and Standard Deviation – Bivariate Analysis: Correlation Methods. 1988 11FT320 ACTING THEORY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • It helps to understand the history of acting and the techniques employed for the artists in making a film. UNIT – I Acting – Definition – Origin and development of acting – Allied forms of acting – Mime – Dance – Music and Martial arts – Acting in different genres and styles – Content and form formulate the style of acting . Expressionistic. Mental. Statistical Significance Diagrammatic Graphical Presentations: Bar Diagrams. 1993 5. Kerlinger. Ogive Univariate Analysis: Mean. Fred. Romantic.test..Preparation of Research Studies. Madras Allied Publishers Ltd. Vocal. Microsoft word. Taylors & Francis group 6. ANOVA and MANOVA Unit V – Computer Application and Report Writing Computer applications: Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS). Scope.2000 2. Histogram. Social. Scientific Social Survey and Research. Type-I and Type-II error. Prentice – Hall INC 1966 4.Radio – Television – Film – Basic requirements for an artiste – Physical. Preparation of Review of Related Studies and Preparation of the Review of Research Proposals and Reports Reference Books 1. Median. Standard Scores/’Z’ Scores. UNIT – II Important theories on acting – Bharatha Muni – Tholkappiyar – Meyer Hold (Bio-mechanism) – Betrold Brecht (Alienation Theory) – Stanislavsky (Method acting) – Acting in different media and orientation of those techniques – Stage . Moral – Three dimensions of a character – Straight acting and Character acting Academic Information 56 ...Classic. • To know about the dramatic and aesthetics aspects of acting Course Outcome • The students will gain knowledge about different aspects related to acting. Sampling error. L. T. Methods in Social Research.. McGraw-Hill.Parametric Statistics Normal Probability Curve: Practical Application of Normal Probability Curve and Characteristics of Normal Probability Curve Range. Paulin Young. Parametric and Non. Chi-Square. Fundamentals of Social Research. Percentile.

Building a character – Stanislavsky.Theory – Night Mail – Song of Ceylon – Principle of documentary films – The documentary idea today – The different style of documentary film making – Journalist approach – The Impressionist approach – Types of documentaries. Routledge. Berlin – “The Symphony of a city” – Kino-eye. UNIT – V Artiste: The psycho-physical examination – Schematic elements of personality – Mechanics of film acting: Space – Time and Edited images – Influence of cinematic elements on character image: Camera angles – shots – Camera set-up and movements – Actor’s technique: Use of self – Film characterization – Conduct and expression – Aids to characterization – Analysis of film performances – Character actor – Personality actor – Physical actor – Mental actor – Dynamics of acting: Skills. UNIT – II Traditions in documentary films: Naturalist – Realist – News reel – Propagandist – Detailed study of Lousiana Story. 1971 4.The difference between Fact film and Fiction film –Brief study of different types of factual films – Educational films. Nadigarkalukku oru kaiyedu (Tamil) – O. Academic Information 57 . INC. • To understand the types and styles of documentary production. Travel films.Speech – Diction – Emotional expression – Body language – Improvisation – Flat-round character – Static-developing character – Cast to the type and cast against the type – Consistency – Motivation. Routledge 1979 2. Reference Books 1. Holt. 1960 6. Director interprets and Actor recreates” – proving this axiom – How to analyse acting – Analysing the great artiste of World. Rineharts Winston.I. process and style. Improvisation – John Hodgson Harper and Row Pub. Techniques of acting – Ronald Heyman. India and Tamilnadu. 1989 3. Course Outcome • The students will acquire knowledge about documentary making and styles involved in the production UNIT – I The definition of documentary. UNIT -IV Relationship of artiste with other artiste and technicians – Rehearsals and monitors – “ Writer creates. Publicity films. Newsreel films. Pudovkin Grove Press.Karunya University School of Media UNIT –III Basic principles of casting and handling of artiste – Voice . Madan Gabriel 11FT321 DOCUMENTARY THEORY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives • It familiarizes the students with concepts and practices of developing a documentary. Technique of Film acting – V. An actor prepares – Stanislavsky. 1974 5. Instructional films.

Special equipment Requirement. 1983 2. Thinking in Visuals. Sage Pub. Lauren – Evaluation of video documentaries.GERALD MILLERSON. Board. 2009 4. Gulf Pub. Writing Story 4. 7. Focal Press.out door. Deciding on Audio on the script. UNIT –V The proposal outline – Fact film treatment – The information line – Interesting line – The presentation line – The sequence outline – Shooting script – Writing narration for non-fiction script. COHEN.MICHAEL RABIGER. Pre production Planning.Indoor. Actual Shooting 9. News interview . Fixing the artists and rehearsal 8.C’s TV programmes. 3. Course Outcome • The students will produce a documentary using single camera List of Experiments: Choice Production in single camera 1. How to make Documentary for video and Film . Properties and set or Set or real locations. UNIT –IV Development of documentaries in India – The Government approach to sponsorship – The Film Division of India – The independent documentary filmmaker – Television documentary films and educational films – U. writing log sheet for editing 10. deciding on actors.MIKE WOLVERTON 3. Reference Books 1. Video editing Academic Information 58 .AKIBA.Final Script 5. Writing Shooting Script – Order of shooting logistics. Brainstorming 2. Choosing locations. Directing the Documentary . The Technique of Television Production .G.Forming an Idea. 2009. 6. A. 1987 11FT322 DOCUMENTARY PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • It helps the students in getting to know about producing different kinds of documentaries. Focal Press.Karunya University School of Media UNIT – III Contemporary documentaries – Chris Maker – Special reference to “LE Joli Me” – Study of documentary films of Mani Kaul and Anand Patwardhan – Experimental approach in NonFiction films – The style of Norman Mc.

Selection of Properties or real locations. 3. Choosing locations. Digital editing. Thinking in Visuals. French movie Italian movie Indian movie American movie 59 Academic Information . 12. List of Exercises . Special title work to suit the themes and final finished product. Actual Shooting. 2.Indoor. Course Outcome • The students will produce project work which involves all stages of production. deciding on actors. Writing Shooting Script – Order of shooting logistics. 2. Special title work to suit the themes and final finished product 11FT324 FILM ANALYSIS LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • It helps the learners in understanding the techniques of analyzing a movie and writing a brief analysis on it. Fixing the artists and rehearsal 8. Pre production Planning. Special equipment Requirement 7. Analyzing and writing a review of 1. Set Designing . Deciding on Audio script.out door. • To understand the working atmosphere in production and post production stage. Course Outcome • The students will be aware of trends in world cinema and be able to review the movies. List of Exercises 1. Writing Story Board. 4. 12. Sound Mixing.Final Script 4. 11FT323 DIGITAL FILM PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objectives • To understand the process involved in pre production. 11. Sound Mixing.Karunya University School of Media 11. Writing log sheet for editing 10. 9. 6.Forming an Idea. 5. 3.

Asian movies Academic Information 60 . Other country movies 10. Japanese movie 6. Itanian movies 8.Karunya University School of Media 5. World all time favourite movies 11. European movies 7. Swedish movies 9. Oscar winning movies 12.

LIST OF SUBJECTS Sub.I Visual Arts Lab Computers in Communication design – II Introduction to Social Psychology Visualisation of Commercial arts Introduction to Mass Communication Creative Suite – Lab . Code 12VC201 12VC202 12VC203 12VC204 12VC205 12VC206 12VC207 12VC208 12VC209 12VC210 12VC211 12VC212 12VC213 12VC214 12VC215 12VC216 12VC217 12VC218 12VC219 12VC220 12VC221 12VC222 12VC223 12VC224 12VC225 12VC226 12VC227 12VC228 12VC229 12VC230 12VC231 12VC232 12VC233 12VC234 12VC235 12VC236 12VC237 12VC238 12VC239 12VC301 12VC302 12VC303 12VC304 School of Media Name of the Subjects Audio Visual Media Dynamics of Visual Communication Writing for Electronic Media Computers in Communication design – I Creative Suite Lab .II Applied Arts lab Digital Photography Media laws and Ethics Elements of Video production Pre Production Techniques Advertising – I Video Production lab Applied Photography Lab Audio Engineering Non linear editing 2D Graphics and Animation Web designing Radio programming Web designing lab Audio Production lab Video Post Production lab (FCP) Film Studies Production planning and Management Commercial Broadcasting Television Production Corporate Communication Radio production lab Television production lab (Computer Graphics) Commercial Production lab Media research Advertising II Professional Photography Studio Management Broadcast Journalism Principles of Cinematography Advanced Multimedia Lab Non Liner Editing using FCP Credits 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 Page No.28-0 .

12VC305 12VC306 12VC307 12VC309 12VC310 12VC311 12VC312 12VC313 12VC314 12VC315 12VC316 12VC317 12VC318 12VC319 12VC320 12VC321 12VC322 Event and Media management Video Post Production Lab using FCP Multi Camera Production Lab Direction & Production Interactive Multimedia Technologies Research Methodology Research Methodology .Lab Authoring and Virtual Reality Introduction to 3D Animation Media Technology Streaming Media Blogging and Podcasting Lab Introduction to Visual Design and Culture Video SFX Lab using AE Combustion 3D Animation lab 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 School of Media Page No.Lab Digital Music Production Digital Audio Production .28-1 .

6th Edition. 1985 2. Text Books: 1. H. Publications Division. Mehra Massani. Luthra. Women Welfare – Children Welfare – Health and Family Planning – Rural Development – Urban problems Unit III CINEMA: Cinema and Society – Influence over Society. New Delhi. Warren K. Audio-Visual Media in Developing Countries – Future of Audio-Visual Media in India – Research in Audio-Visual Media – Implications of Press Media over Audio-Visual Media. Calcutta School of Media Page No. New Delhi. educate.Effects – Cinema as Main Source of Entertainment – Powerful Media to Spread Message – Cinema for Political supremacy.12VC201 AUDIO VISUAL MEDIA Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective: • To make the learners know about the development of radio and the types of programmes targeted to the different type of audience segmentation. Unit II RADIO PROGRAMMS: Special Audience Programmes – Rural and Farm Broadcasting – Educational Programmes – Programmes for Children. Women and Youth. Film Censor – Film Censor Enquiry Committee – Documentary Film – Newsreels – National and International Film Festivals – Film Awards – Future of Indian Cinema. Editors and Agencies – External News Services Interviews – Features – Writing for Radio. entertain and elevate a common man – Government Control over AIR in functioning – Competition among the Audio-Visual Media – Development of Videography – Cable TV. Introduction to Mass Communication. Unit I INTRODUCTION RADIO BROADCAST: Development of Radio Broadcasting in India – Ownership – Control – Autonomy for Radio – Types of Radio services. Unit IV TELEVISION: Development of Television in India – News Programmes: a) News cast b) News Review – Formats of TV Programmes – Documentary – Special Features – Interviews. Indian Broadcasting. National Book Trust. Broadcasting and the People. Course Outcome: • The students will know the role of Radio. Unit V BROADCASTING NORMS: Governments policy on AIR to inform. TV and Cinema in Media. 1986 3.Radio as a source of News – Broadcast News – Value – Radio Language – News Bulletin – News Source for Radio – Reporters.28-2 . Oxford &IBH. TV as a powerful Audio – Visual Media – Commercial and Sponsored Programme – Educational Service (ETV) – Satellite Instructional Television Experiment (SITE) – Role of TV in Social Changes – Cultural Exchanges – Economic Uplift – Advertisement in TV – Specialist causes and consequences – TV News and Agencies.R. Agee.

Creative visualization School of Media Page No. Ahuja B. Audio Visual Journalism. • To understand the principles of Principles of visual media communication • To learn the Visual Application and visual design • To understand Visual language and culture • To understand important perspectives Course Outcome: • The students will get know the impact of visual communication and use of visual language in the media industry. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VISUAL COMMUNICATION: Historical Development Conceptual development . Ltd. D. P. Sterling publishing Pvt. Broadcast Journalism. New Delhi. 1987Bangalore. Publications Divisions. Andrew Boyd. Madras. Unit II VISUAL MEDIA: Principles of visual media communication -Video medium Non Projected audio visuals -Scientific visual media . Heinemann Professional Publication. Blackwell. Krisha Sondhi. The Moving Image: An international History or Film Television & Video.Sensual and perceptual theories. Broadcasting in India. Robert Tyrell.M... Calcutta. Sage Publications. Delhi. Radio and TV Journalism. 1989. Bombay. 7. The Work of the Television Journalism. Brazil 5.N.R. New Delhi.C. Shrivastava K.. Reference Books: 1. One-Way Free Flow 12VC202 DYNAMICS OF VISUAL COMMUNICATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand visual and visual communication fundamentals. Ivor Yorke. Documentary Films and National Awakening. The Techniques of Television News. Mankekar. Sugeet Publication. 9. New Delhi 1980 3.Tools for visualization. 10. Keval J. Mass Communication in India. Focal Press 8. BFI Publishing. 1987 2. Sugeet Publication. Oxford 1989 6.Visualization process .Visualization environment.4. Problems of Communication in Developing Countries.28-3 . 1990 4. 11. John Wyver. Vision Books. Jaico Publishing House. Jag Mohan. Chatterji. Delhi. Kumar. Techniques of Radio and TV News.

Course Outcome: • the students will learn the techniques and aesthetics of writing for TV. Unit I IDEA VS MEDIA: Developing ideas and conceptualization. Writing jingles and radio commercial – Idea – Strategy – Brand Positioning – Preparing Creative blue print. mood and experience. corporate programmes.28-4 .visual media communication (2001) – Authors press – New Delhi 12VC203 WRITING FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA Credits:4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the students to the technique and aesthetics of writing for different forms of electronic media programmes. prime time programme. writing for radio commentary. News report. sociology and ethics Temple grandins views on autism and visual thought -Abstract thought Visual thinking and mental imagery -Implication in visual syntax.instruction. Unit II SPOKEN LANGUAGE WRITING: -Writing for radio and TV commercials and announcements. to use celebrities – voice – over. narration.Ground rules for writing for different time chunks. Unit V SIX IMPORTANT PERSPECTIVES: Image Analysis –Typography -Graphics design Informational Graphics . Writing to inform.for special audiences: programme for children. Paul martin. Unit III WRITING FOR BOTH RADIO AND TV: . 2. farmers and Youth . and using music. Visual communication images with messages by paul Mrtin lester(2008) wordsworth – United states Reference Books: 1.script design. Presentation . Writing the script for electronic media . Pradeep mandav. writing headlines. talk programmes.Unit III VISUAL APPLICATION: Rendering and rasterisation -Visual perception -Information design Communication design –Graphic design –Cartoons Unit IV VISUAL LANGUAGE AND CULTURE: Study of Visuality -World culture -Visual rhetoric. Visual communication (2008) Global vision publishing house – New Delhi.Cartoon –Photography Text Book: 1. afternoon programme. variety and comedy .Features and documentaries. Women. late night programme. School of Media Page No. News writing. Radio and Internet. Voice over and narration. Interview/Discussions. script format.

Hastings House .1989. conflict and resolution. Production problems. other genres. Writing.Barry Humps . 2. hardware & software requirements.Syd Field . Multimedia – evolution.New York -1976. serials.Dwight Swan . 12VC204 COMPUTERS IN COMMUNICATION DESIGN – I Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand history software and hardware of computers • To gain knowledge in communication design • To understand the basic concepts of Ms Office its applications and basics and features of Corel draw. scenes and sequences. applications and advantages.Dell Publishing Co. Structure variation.28-5 .Basics of computers -Hardware & Software . Film Script Writing . storyboard. Screen Writing for narrative Film and Television . treatment. Video Script Writing . terms used for camera movement and editing.Hastings House . Script Writing for Video and Audio media . Application of computers in the media industry. treatments. Screenplay -The Foundations of Screen Writing .William Miller . 2. TV spot techniques Idea presentation.Operating systems. Characterization.commercials.Penguin U. 3. Unit II School of Media Page No.Unit IV WRITING FOR TV: . Reference Books: 1. soap operas. big idea. DTP (Desk Top Publishing).S.1993.New York -1976. Scripting. Tele Writing scripts for TV Commercials – format for TV Commercials – preparing the story board and art direction.A Inc . Text Books: 1. shot breakdown and film genre..Dwight Swan . script and its formats and storyboard. Course Outcome: • The students will get a sound knowledge on computer and its applications such as MS Office and CorelDraw! Unit I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS: History and generation of computers . Unit V PLAY WRITING: .Narrative structure.Columbus books – London .

Exploring the toolbox . Edward Willet.Application window . rhythm.I Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • The course imparts the techniques and the application of the software coral draw so that the leaner will come across to produce an appropriate design. Differences in features of Quark Xpress and Page Maker.undoing. First edition 12VC205 CREATIVE SUITE – LAB .choosing viewing modes . U. working with graphics & formatting. word processing techniques. Unit V COREL DRAW.features & advantages. Role of computers in designing. 2D Graphic – CorelDraw12 (Latest Version) School of Media Page No. Quark Xpress – features.previewing a drawing .PowerPoint.A.zooming.adding and accessing drawing information .by Jorge Frascara (Editor) Publisher: Allworth Press. and repeating actions . Course Outcome: • The students will get hands-on experience in using graphics software (CoreDraw!) for prepress output.features & tools. Designing Effective Communications (2001): Creating Contexts for Clarity and Meaning . 2000 2. proportion. It will enable the students to learn various designing process and print production. page layout and design.starting and opening drawings finding content . Unit III MS OFFICE AND ITS APPLICATIONS: MS Word – tools.working with views . special effects and other supporting components of CorelDraw . typography and drawing programs. panning. redoing. IDG Books. Language of design: white space.Workspace tools – Standard toolbar .Corel DRAW workspace . Principles of design. nature & scope. PageMaker. working with colors. and scrolling .exploring basic tasks. Fundamentals of layout.working with text. 1997 Reference Book: 1. pictures. Corel Draw for Dummies. balance. The practical will include 1. MS Excel – features & utility.S. Elements of design.28-6 .backing up and recovering files .COMMUNICATION DESIGN: Definition.FEATURES: Corel Draw. IDG Books. Text Books: 1. movement. Deke Mc Celland.acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras .text & visuals. working with vector/raster images. Unit IV COREL DRAW BASICS: Vector graphics and bitmaps . fonts. MS Office – Bible. tools & applications. Principles of design: Unity. Design process.saving drawings .

Design a POP using Corel Draw 11. This subject will enable the students to visualize of their own and will help them to create an appropriate visual through the application of perspective composition and light and shadow Course Outcome: • The learners will experience practical training in visualizing and creating and drawing. List of Experiments: List of Exercises 1. Design a ‘visiting card’ & ‘letter head’ for any five famous Banks Executives. Design New Sign board for the following a.28-7 . 8. Design a ‘logo’ for an academic institution 2. Design a ‘2-fold greeting card’ for an occasion of your choice.2. Elements of art a. Design a ‘CD cover’ to be brought out by a music band. Colour e. Speed breaker b. Design a dangler using Corel Draw 10. Design a single fold Menu card. Shape d. Hospital Zone d. Texture School of Media Page No. Design a brochure 4. Form c. Design a poster for any event of your choice 3. Adobe illustrator List of Exercises: 1. Space f. Line b. 5. 6. Design a ‘calendar’ 7. 12. Blind curve 12VC206 VISUAL ARTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To educate the students in drawing. Hotel e. School Zone c. 9. Design the ‘label’ & package cover of any consumer product. Value g.

Zoom Tool. • To learn the application of design. Text Tool. creativity in design. Focus Tool. Choosing Color. Operations and Usage of Tools.Pencil Tool. Drawing animals 7. Paint Bucket Tool. Drawing architectures 10.28-8 . Foundation b. Buttons. Proportion 4. Eye Dropper. Drawing landscapes 5. Portrait drawing 11. design and composition. Cartoons and caricatures 12. Unit I DESIGN PROCESS: Conceptualization. • To learn the techniques of Photoshop in image editing Course Outcome: • The students would get an experience in using graphical software (Photoshop) for TV and Print. Basic shapes in perspective c. Drawing still life 6. Drawing objects 9. Magic Wand. traditional and modern designs – technology in designing. colour combinations. Morgue Tool. Lasso Tool.2. Gradient Tool. and light & shadow in image editing. Toning. Brush Shape. colour. Text and Images: typography. Air Brush Tool. School of Media Page No. types of design. stages involved. Point perspective 3. illustration techniques. Logo design. psychology of colours.styles and features. Colour in design: colour theory. Smudge Tool. Designing of fonts 12VC207 COMPUTERS IN COMMUNICATION DESIGN – II Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the workings of image editing. Aerial perspective e. Palettes. Composition a. application and techniques in design. colours and meanings. Drawing birds 8. Light and shadow b. Photoshop Workspace. Unit II INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL IMAGING: Define Photoshop. • To identify the application of Photoshop software. Colour composition c. Paint Brush Tool. Perspective Drawing a. Linear perspective d.

G h Mead. Trashcan. Unit I THE NATURE AND SCOPE OF SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY. Plug ins. Unit V ADOBE PHOTOSHOP ADVANTAGES: Photoshop Short cut keys and menus.July 2007 12VC208 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective: • • To identify the mob and group behavior.Unit III DIGITAL IMAGE MANIPULATION: Features of Photoshop – Image editing – image selection – image resizing – image manipulation – Art Marks. Digital color Process. Fill Tool. Dynamic Learning: Photoshop CS3 By Jennifer Smith. To learn the application of psychological principles applied for different mass media Course Outcome: • The students will know about the format and structure of content management system. • They will know importance of instructional theory model of system design in e-learning industries. Le Bon. Types. Clone Align. Create Layer. Digital Workflow -Digital Press. Unit II School of Media Page No. Leading. Art Filter. The Methods of Social Psychology. Digital Inputs. Photoshop CS3 Photographer's Handbook By Brad Hinkel. Art Layers. Unit IV DIGITAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES: Working with layers – masking – filters – text editing – background – fore ground – colour palette selection – histogram in photographs – hue – saturation – value – modes & adjustments – saving files . Text Book: 1. Digital Image on Various Media. Cooley. Mc Doughall. File Formats.Digital Image. Aquent Graphics Institute (AGI) – July 2007 Reference Book: 1. Kerning. Stephen Laskevitch . The Development of Social Psychology : Early Beginnings – the Contributions of Sociologists and Psychologists : Comte. Rule of Thumb. Layer Mark. Durkheim.28-9 . Cloning.

Unit–I School of Media Page No. New York Reference Book: 1. Text Books: 1. Society and Personality. Nature and Types of groups. Unit V Mass Psychology. Aggression. E L “Individual in Society”. Unit III Attitudes and Opinions The Nature and Dimensions of Attitudes. Communication and Persuasion. D Crytchfold. Collective Behaviour – the mobs and the Different kinds of Mobs. Harper & Row. The Formation and Change of Attitudes. “An Introduction to Social Psychology” . Role of Mass communication in Public Opinion Formation and change. formation and change. Casual Audiences. N and Sherif C. Need Achievement. Classification of Collective masses. Mc David and Harris . Conditions Conclusive to Development of Groups. group Dynamics. 1968 2. Social Factors in perception. McGraw Hill. Group structure and group performance. Unit IV Groups and group Processes. Social Facilitation. measurement. dependency. etc. ”An Outline of Social Psychology” Harper & Row. Socialization and Motivation. RS and Ballachey. Group norms and conformity. New York 12VC209 VISUALISATION OF COMMERCIAL ARTS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • • To understand elements of visualization.W. Public opinion –Nature. Intentional Audiences and Audiences and Mass Media. To understand the Process of Visualization To learn the Applications Commercial arts To learn the Layout Design To understand Computers in Commercial Production Course Outcome: • The students will learn to visualize and convert their creativity into visual art. affiliation. Audiences and Collective Behaviour. Sherif. The Psychology of Mass Movements.28-10 .Specialization : Social Learning Process. Cooperation and competition.

Evaluation –creative inputs – issues of plagiarism in creative production.28-11 . Texture.VISUALISATION: Mass media and creative – Creativity in Production – Need for Visualization – definition and elements of visualization-visual persuasion in advertising Unit II PROCESS OF VISUALISATION: Creative process: Orientation. Prentice Hall. Layout . Handbook of Advertising Art Production. Proportion. Richard Schlemmer. Shape. Frank Ramano et al. Emphasis. Size. Australia. Unit III COMMERCIAL ARTS: Commercial art Vs Fine art – Fundamental elements of design – Line. Space– Design principles – Balance.2000.Steps in designing. Color. NY. Tension and surprise. New York Reference Books: 1. Paul martin lester. 2. Ideation. Unity. Unit IV LAYOUT DESIGN: Structuring of message. Unit V COMPUTERS IN COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION: Managing cost and quality in commercial production – material inputs – Black and white and color – Pantone color matching system – Artist’s tool kit – Computer applications in creative industries. Encyclopedia of Graphic Communication. Analysis. Preparation. Incubation.Choosing a basic design. 12VC210 INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • • To understand the types and models of communication To understand the process communication To understand the applications of communication in advertising To understand the functions of mass media To understand the relationship between culture and communication Course Outcome: • The students will understand the strategy for communicating in the corporate.application of creativity in designing. School of Media Page No. 1998. Working with copy and visuals – Camera ready pages – Designing software. ‘visual communication. Text Book: 1. Synthesis. wadsworth. Prentice Hall. Sequence.

Types of noise-Encoding and Decoding Process Formal and Informal channel. Berlo. channel. Theodore Peterson & Wilbur Schramm Authoritarian Theory. Social Responsibility Theory. Unit V COMMUNICATION AND CULTURE: Introduction : Communication and culture -Global media – multi cultural content Mass media and developing countries -Cross cultural Communication. Unit III THEORIES AND MODELS OF COMMUNICATION: Hypodermic Needle Theory.Forms of Communication -Intra-personal Communication. Selective Exposure.Models of Communication.Policies and implications Text Book : 1. Scope and purpose. Persuade-Dysfunction of mass communication-Communication and public opinion. Unit I INTRODUCTION COMMUNICATION: Introduction: Communication . Problems and challenges. Twostep & Multi-step Theory.Inform –Entertain.Verbal and Non Verbal Communication . Educate.Organizational Communication . Rosengren “Communication an introduction” Sage Pulblication 2006 2. Libertarian Theory.II Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: School of Media Page No. Selective Perception & Selective Retention Theory. receiver . Individual Difference Theory. Shannon and weaver . Mc Quil “Mass communication theory” Sage Publicaiton 5th edition-2005 12VC211 CREATIVE SUITE – LAB . Four major theories of Press.Barriers of communication -Socio economic changes and the emerging trend in Communication.28-12 .Mass Communication. Commercial Theory. Inter-personal Communication. Play Theory Uses & Gratification Theory.Definitions. Lasswall.Source. Unit II COMMUNICATION PROCESS: Introduction: Process of Communication . feedback. Kumar “Mass communication in India” Jeyco Pubslisher 2007.• They will learn the different facets of Media and the role of communication in them. Other Theories: Development Media & Democratic Participant Theory Unit IV MASS MEDIA: Introduction -Characteristics of mass media-Functions of mass media .Noise. Keval J. Reference Books : 1. according to Fred Siebert. message. Meaning of theories based on scientific study &analysis. Karl E.

(freezing movements) Montage Visual with models. 5. Visual of a benefit from using the product. Visual of the product alone. 2. Abstract illustration. 4. Special effects. 6. Symbolism. TYPES OF LAYOUTS Big picture Big copy Omni bus Mortise Free form Scatter Continuity strip 12VC212 APPLIED ARTS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: School of Media Page No. 8. Contrast between before and after using the product. Course Outcome : • Hands-on experience in developing creative art by visualization. 3. 11. Visual showing the loss or disadvantage resulting from not using the advertised product. Visual of the product in the package. Dramatizing a detail (in the product) 9.• To provide opportUnit Ies to the students to prepare certain exercises for possible demonstration of skills acquired by them to the specific level of acceptable performance. Comparison between two brands. Visual in use. Visual of the product in a setting where it is used. Visual of the product ingredients or raw materials.28-13 . –PHOTOSHOP TYPES OF VISUALIZATION: 1. Visuals using Trade Characters. 10. Dramatization of the evidence. 7. 12. Dramatization of the headline. (logo) Continuity strip Mood setting visual.

Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY Define Photography. The arm 6. Anatomy Drawing 2. Modelling human forms. • To understand the Techniques Photo Composition • To learn the Digital Photography • To learn the Applications and Areas of Photography • To understand Digital Studio and Commercial projects Course Outcome: • The students will know the techniques of using a digital still camera for photography. 12VC213 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand elements of Photography.Usage. Course Outcome: • Students will learn to use art work in drawing of human autonomy. Filters –Types. Light Meter.Types-Usage. Flash.Types. Film – Types. Lights-Types. • They will know the different skills sets for creating images on film. Lens. The head and neck 4.Usage.28-14 .Usage.Electronic Flash – Selection of Right Flash Mode. Unit II School of Media Page No. The hand The leg 7.Speed and Size. Film. Brief History and Development of Photography. Other Useful Accessories. 10. Modelling shapes 12.• To learn the anatomy of the human parts through the drawing principles and perspective. Study of expressions. The foot 8. Camera –Types. The Ecorche and face 9. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. Proportion of the human body The skeleton 3. Tripod –Types. The torso 5.Usage. Clay modeling Terracotta 11.Usage.Usage.

Digital Still Camera.Design.2002. 2003. Switzerland. Digital SLR Camera – Types. Photo Power Point Presentation. Setup for Digital Imaging. Printing Paper-Types Unit IV AREAS OF PHOTOGRAPHY Portrait-Architecture. by Roger Hicks and Frames Schultz. Understanding Digital Photography by Joseph A .Knopf Publisher. 1999 by John H edgecoe. Corporate Studio. Photo Printers. Digital Portrait Photography and Lighting: Take Memorable Shots Every Time 2005. 2. Desktop Computer Components. Alfred A. Focal Length. Low Key and High Key Picture. Unit III INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY Define -Digital. Rotovision.Scanning Techniques. Unit V DIGITAL STUDIO Photography Project. The Photographer’s Handbook. Basic Lighting. Photo Essay. Working with Scanner -Types .. Depth of Field. Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging (2001) – Peter K Burian – Publisher Sybex. Alfred A.28-15 .PHOTO COMPOSITION Basic Techniques for Better Image. Rule of Third. Equipments and Budget. Assignments..USA.USA. Iippolito. Camera Operation.First edition. 6. 1999 by John H edgecoe. Equipments and Budget.Windows and Macintosh.USA. 8. London .Fashion-Travel-Environmental –Action –Aerial-Macro-Panoramic. Angle of View. Working with Digital Camera – Major Components and Functions.File Formats –Converters. Rotovision. Thomson Delmar Learning. Mode. ShutterSpeed. 2003. 4. 12VC214 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits: 4:0:0 School of Media Page No.Product. The Photographer’s Handbook.Key Light-Fill Light. Aperture-Usage. 5. Ninth Edition. The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) by Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm Mastering the Basics of Photography by Susan McCartney 3. Connecting Images for Internet Use. Popular Photography Websites. The Basic Book of Photography (Fourth Edition) by Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm Mastering the Basics of Photography by Susan McCartney 7.How Printer worksPhoto Quality.2002. Thomson Delmar Learning. Iippolito. by Catherine Jamieson/ Sean McCormick -Publisher: Wiley Jamieson and McCormick. Interior Shots .Usage. Interior Shots . Photo Documentary. Advantages.Film Scanning. Text Book: 1.Data Storage and Transfer Options. The Manual of Photography (2000) by Ralph E Jacobson/Geoffrey G Attridge/Sidney F Ray.Sports-Indoor/Outdoor. Picture Format. by Roger Hicks and Frames Schultz. Creating Photography Website. Switzerland. Understanding Digital Photography by Joseph A .Knopf Publisher. Software for Digital Processes( Digital Dark Room) -Image Editor.Focal Press. Reference Books: 1. Small Budget Studio-Design.

Mac Bridge report. Unit IV CODE AND ETHICS: Recommendations of press commission I and II. Law of the Press in India. Media council and media ombudsman in the world. Broadcasting Bill. Provisions for declaring Emergency. convergences bill. Basu. Judiciary. Unit V: CYBER LAWS IN INDIA: Nature and scope of cyber laws. Act regarding to working journalists. The Cinematographic Act 1952. Provision for amending the constitution. Trade Mark Act and patents Act. Right to Information and Official Secrets Act. Practice Hall of India(2003) 2. The right to Publish and right to privacy. • They will learn the legal points in media industry.Course Objective: • To understand Overview of the Indian constitution. Practice hall of india(2003) Reference Books: 1. Fundamental Rights. Duties of citizens . Self regulation and code of ethics. Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. Domain name registration issues. New IT Law IT 2000. Various committees of broadcasting. Drugs and magic remedies Act. Broadcasting policies. Cable TV Networks (regulations)Act. Text Book: 1. the press(objectionable matters)Act 1957. The News Paper (prices and Pages)Act 1956. Powers and Privileges of Parliament. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. Press Council Act.Directive principles of state policy. Digital signature . Unit III CIVIL AND CRIMINAL LAWS: Laws of Libel and defamation. Basu. • To understand the Media Laws In India • To learn the Civil And Criminal Laws related to Media • To understand the Broadcasting Code And Ethics • To understand the cyber laws in India Course Outcome: • The learners will understand the limitations of media in public life. Defence of India Act. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Introduction to Indian Constitution. freedom of the press and restrictions these upon. Copy right Act and IPR. Piracy. Unit I INDIAN CONSTITUTION: Overview of the Indian constitution. Unit II MEDIA LAWS IN INDIA: PRB Act 1867. press ownership and monopolies. Delivery of Books and News paper (public libraries)Act. Radha Krishna Murthi . Functions of Executive.28-16 . Legislative. Indian Press Laws School of Media Page No. Centre-state relations. censorship and control of the press.

Press in the Indian Constitution. • They will understand the different type of production techniques for creating a video movie.continuity School of Media Page No.K Ravindran.documentary production – short film production – electronic field production – talk shows.the production phase.the crew – director. location scouting . To understand the continuity of shots To learn the editing principles Course Outcome: • Students will come to know the use of video camera in producing a video. music director. lighting director. Distributors 12VC215 ELEMENTS OF VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • • To understand the aesthetics of video production To identify the elements of shot. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO EQUIPMENTS: Digital video camera – types of video cameras – format – major accessories – camera formats – camera operations and functions – aperture – shutter – white balance – focusing methods . Unit IV TYPES OF PRODUCTION: Single camera production: the shot.focal length – depth of field – video signal – video format. sequence. art director. story board types of script.camera movement – camera framing – camera angle – duration of the shot – long take.3.28-17 . gaffer. mise-en-scene: aspects of miseenscene – lighting in a shot – setting aspect in a shot – character expression and movement – costume and makeup of the character . Indian Publishers. etc. scene. Unit III THE PRODUCTION: Cinematography properties – basic types of shot . Unit II THE SHOT: Elements of the shot: the shot – definition.the realism of mise-en-scene – thepower of mise-enscene – time and space in mise-en-scene. Unit V UNDERSTANDING THE POST PRODUCTION: Online production – offline production – the edl – dimensions of editing – spatial – rhythmic – graphic – temporal editing . cameraman. production assistant. lighting for a scene – colour temperature – dolly – trolley – grips and camera accessories – tripod – montage – lighting equipments. script writer.. To learn the camera options and production techniques.. multi camera production – rehearsal – floor manager . R.interviews.

editing. Unit II BASIC ELEMENTS IN SCRIPT: Script-visual writing-budget-target audience-steps of developing concept.CONCEPT MAKING: Idea-seed of the programme-creative inspiration-visual thinking-discussion with team-format of the programme-types of formats like-newsdocumentaries-interview-TV programme . Unit. • Various elements in pre production techniques will be taught in this curriculum.III BASIC PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE: Basic shot . Unit I BASIC . focal press – 2001 2. Text Books: 1. Unit IV STEPS IN PRE PRODUCTION: Shooting script-story board-scene-sequence break upcharacter –main character-relief character subsidiary character-character introduction important of dialogues-dialogue writing . Film art – david boardwell – thirteenth edition Reference Book 1.plot-story-character dialogue script formats –proposal-treatment-develop steps in script writing. Video production techniques – zettl – 2002 12VC216 PRE PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • To learn pre production techniques in film production. To learn the art of script preparation. To create the concept for a production. Course Outcome: • The students will learn the grammar of movie making from the scratch.special programmes. dimensions of film sound – voice over – dubbing – re-recording – titling – adding special effects. School of Media Page No.dramatic points in the story-twist in plot.angles& camera movements-introduction -lighting and colors-single camera –multicamera production-indoor studio-outdoor -properties. Knowing the process of video production techniques and the various script formats.adscommercial. Digital cinematography – paul wheeler.daily soaps.28-18 .

corporate. Course Outcome: • The students will come to know the functioning of advertising agency and the different type of advertising being created to promote a product. creative strategy: message.cases of ethical violations -Advertising Standards Council – Social and cultural issues – Global regulations and Future trend. Leading agencies in IndiaDiversification and competition – full service agencies – multinational clients – challenges and opportUnit Ies. Unit III ADVERTISING AGENCY: Structure and functions. target market. media planning. level of response. cooperative and Public service advertising. advertising industry in India – advertising as a process of communication . John Hart “the art of the story board”-focal press Reference Books: 1.28-19 . Antony Friedman” writing for visual media”-focal press 2.various formats –news-TV programme-adsproms-commercial-special programme. Martha Mollison ” producing videos”-focal press 12VC217 ADVERTISING – I Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • This curriculum offers an insight into the advertising industry and its components. appeals. • Legal and ethical issues governing the advertising the industry will be learned. School of Media Page No.tone and content. retail.daily soaps—documentaries-interview-film. Unit V ETHICAL ISSUES: Professional ethics in advertising.Unit-V VARIOUS SCRIPT FORMATS: Script writing. Unit IV ADVERTISING CAMPAIGN: Objectives.. advertising budget. pre testing and post testing.Social effects of advertising. industrial. Unit II TYPES OF ADVERTISING: Consumer.review with current ad campaigns. Text Books: 1. reading the advertisement . Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISING: Advertising and its role in the market place. Dwight V Swain “film script writing”-focal press 2.

“Foundations of Advertising: Theory and practice” 12VC218 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To introduce students to the profession of producing programme for TV. Tata McGraw Hill. New Jersey. Sen. “Advertising management concepts and cases”. Brand Positioning. Heinemann Pub. 1990. Page No. Mooij. Kleppner. 1989. The practice of advertising.Mariekae de. Game shows (3mins) 6. Course Outcome: • Making of this seven Television programs in Two or single camera set-up is real hand on experience for the student in the TV Program process.28-20 School of Media . Norman. Fundamentals of Advertising. Indoor – Single Camera set-up Interview (5 mins) 9. Gupta.C. 3. Sethia . New Delhi. 3. 2. List of Exercises 1. Hart. New Delhi. Music video (1 min) 3. Opinion survey (3 mins) 11. M. Mohan.1994. PSA (30 – 45 sec) 8. To learn the techniques of photographing various subjects. Otto. Documentary (5mins) 5. Reference Books: 1. News cast (2mins) 7. Tata McGraw Hill. ‘Advertising Worldwide (2nd edn. Prentice Hall.). 1990. Producing video on organizational profile (3 mins) 12. Montage (2 mins) 12VC219 APPLIED PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn the types of photography. To learn the lighting techniques.Text Books: 1. 1980. Educational video production (3mins) 4. London. UK. • They learn all the technical’s that is related to making of a program in production stage and post production stages. 2. Thematic production (3mins) 2. Prentice Hall. Outdoor – Single Camera set-up Interview (5 mins) 10. Chunnawalla and K..

Delay . Aerial photography 11.Output Transducers . Action photography 10. Sports and Panoramic photography 12VC220 AUDIO ENGINEERING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The students will be taught about Audio related Engineering fundamentals and the techniques involved in Audio production.Microphone techniques for stereo . Unit I ANALOG AUDIO: Input Transducers .Reference voltages in audio signals . Indoor photography 2.Parametric EQ-Graphic EQ .Equalizers . • The students will know the functioning of different equipments in recording industry.channel differences -Stereo loudspeaker matching Phase . Macro photography 12.Expander . Course Outcome: • The intricacies of recording and reproducing audio will be taught in the studio.Sidechain .Professional and domestic standards .Inputs and connections .Dynamic processors Compressor . Architecture photography 5.Course Outcome: • The students will be taught the technique of taking different types of photographs in the lab and outdoor.Limiter .Methods of producing inter .Paragraphic EQ – Talkback .Manual control of levels . Unit III School of Media Page No.Filters . Outdoor photography 3.Production of the different polar responses .Polar responses .Phaser .Phantom power . Product photography 6.Chorus . Environmental photography 9.Important features of a mixer .Microphones . Travel photography 8.Balanced wiring Specific applications of microphones .Reverb . Fashion photography 7.Shelving EQ Semi parametric Eq .Electronic level control – Signal processors .Technical monitoring .Gate – Multiband compressor .Loudspeaker . Portrait photography 4.Output stage . LIST OF LAB WORKS 1.Effect processors .Flanger – Audio lines and Patchbays.28-21 . Unit II AUDIO ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS: Sound mixers .Aural monitoring .The basic channel .Types of Microphones .Headphones for stereo monitoring.

Sanctuary Publications.Applications .Punching . 1995 2. 2002.General Maintenance .ATR – The fundamentals of magnetic recording .Technology Basic PA systems .MOH . 3rd edition.TTL . 2nd Edition.Cassette quality .Tape speeds .Routing Recording .Head alignment .Ear safety Electrical safety . Principles. Unit V DIGITAL AUDIO: Basic Principles – Analog vs Digital – Analog to Digital Converter – Digital to Analog Converter – Application of Digital Audio – Digital audio hardware . Backbeat Books.Safety .Editing . Stages – EDL – Role of Editor – Continuity & Dynamic Editing – Linear & Non-Linear Editing – Physical & Electronic Editing –Control Track & SMPTE Editing – A/B Roll EditingIntroduction to Avid Xpress DV – Hardware and Software Requirements Unit II School of Media Page No. 2003. “Sound Engineering Explained”.Basic Analog Mixing.Head and tape cleanliness . 3rd Edition. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO EDITING AND AVID: Editing: Definition.formats Storage medium – Digital mixers – Digital audio workstation –Editing – Mixing .Indoor systems .Signal flow .Outdoor Systems . Ken Pohlmann. Reference Books: 1. • To understand the terminologies and concepts of Avid video editing software. Paul White. “Analog Recording”.Auto punch . 2006. Focal Press. McGraw-Hill.Full Range sound Reinforcement systems .Transport controls .Mastering – Audio Post production for Video. 3.28-22 .Two track systems . 12VC221 NON LINEAR EDITING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To know the different types of editing. David Simons. “Principles of Digital Audio”.Noise reduction .Choice of Equipment . “Basic Live Sound”.ANALOG RECORDING: Objectives and problems in recording .Multi track systems .FOH .Tape standards . Text Book: 1. • To learn adding special effects and mixing audio with the visuals in Avid. Course Outcome: • The students will understand the techniques of editing video clips in the nonlinear editing systems using Avid software.Analog Recording devices and systems . • To acquire the editing and titling skills. Michael Talbot-Smith.Mechanical safety – Fire safety. Unit IV BASICS OF LIVE SOUND ENGINEERING: Need for Sound Reinforcement .

San Francisco State University 2. Bins. Composer monitor. Fading Titles. Matte) Freeze Frame – Variable Speed – Strobe Motion – Reverse Motion Unit V WORKING WITH AUDIO AND EXPORTING: Soloing Audio Tracks – Audio Scrubbing – Audio Effect Tool – Audio Mix Tool –Automation Gain Tool – Adjusting Volume in Timeline – Audio EQ Tool – Audio Suite Plug-Ins Mixing Video Tracks – Recording to Tape – Exporting Formats (MPEG-1. Sub clips. Avid Xpress DV User’s Guide Reference Book: 1. Replacing Fill Tracks.TERMINOLOGIES AND RECORDING: Media files. Effect palette. OMF) Text Books: 1. Ronald J. Target Drives. Sequences. Luma.28-23 . Source monitor – Tool palette – Bin Views –Importing. Extracting and Copying Segments – Slip Trim & Slide Trim – Finding Frames and Clips Titling: Editing. Compessi. DV Stream. Audio and Video Channels –Controlling Decks Unit III EDITING AND TITLING: Customizing Monitor Displays – Playing Video in Client Monitor – Loading and Clearing Footage on Monitor – Controlling Playback – Marking and SubCataloging Footage – Setting up a Sequence – Setting up Tracks – Undoing /Redoing Edits – Splice-in Edit & Overwrite Edit – Lifting. QuickTime. Sixth Edition.2. To make the students understand about the 2D animation production. Projects – Timeline. Video Field Production and Editing. Replacing. Moving and Deleting Clips in Bins IEEE 1394 – Selecting Deck/Tape. MPEG. Effect editor. Removing. Avid Xpress DV Effects Guide 12VC222 2D GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the animation techniques. • To learn the types of animation compositing techniques and post production in 2D Animation School of Media Page No. Unit IV SPECIAL EFFECTS: Types of Transition Effects – Single and Multiple Effects (Transition & Segment)– Rendering – Key frameable and Non-Key frameable Effects – Defining Motion Paths using Key frames – Layered Effects – Nested Effects – Key Effects (Chroma. Clips. Copying.

Course Outcome: • The students will understand different types of animation in 2D. • They will learn preproduction techniques, software and compositing. Unit I TYPES OF ANIMATION: Types of animation: Traditional Animation – Cell Animation, Clay Animation , Stop motion Animation , Cutout Animation , Computer Generated Animation – 2D Animation Vs 3D Animation - Styles of animation – Principles of animation. Unit II DIFFERENT ANIMATION STYLES: Disney animation – Japanese animation – Russian animation – Comparative study of different animation styles – basic anatomy – proportions – staging – posing – timing – actions. Unit III PREPRODUCTION: Scripting – storyboard screen play – timing – duration – Character design – Turn around – colour schemes – attitudes – props. Tools for 2D animation : Colour keys – background – layout – source of light – styles – paper sources – paper quality. Unit IV SOFTWARE INTERFACE: Creating a document – creating accessible flash content - writing scripts – creating an application – working with layers – layout tools – drawing – creating symbols – adding animation and navigation – adding text – creating timeline action. Unit V COMPOSITING: Special Effects – Foley – sound design – software packages – US animation – Flash animation – animation pass -= compositing animation actions – compositing backgrounds – scanning images – compositing cels – compositing objects. Text Book: 1. The Animator's Workbook: Step-By-Step Techniques of Drawn Animation [ILLUSTRATED] (Paperback) by Tony White 2. Timing for Animation (Paperback) by Harold Whitaker , John Halas Cartoon Animation (The Collector's Series) (Paperback) by Preston Blair Reference Book: 1. Character Animation: 2D Skills for Better 3D, Steve Roberts, Focal press, Second edition 2007.

12VC223 WEB DESIGNING Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand and use HTML tags for designing web pages. • To learn Dreamweaver and its features to design web pages. • To learn Javascript to develop dynamic pages. School of Media Page No.28-24

Course Outcome: • The students will be introduced HTML programming and designing a web page in Dreamweaver software. Unit I HTML: Anatomy of HTML file – Lists – Nested Lists – Font – Anchor – Image – Sound – Colors – Horizontal rules – Borders – Alignment – mail to – Preformatted text – Title, Base, HREF, Meta tags – Transition effects – Visual Filters Unit II PROGRAMMING PRINCIPLES: Table: Table Alignment – Cell Alignment – Colors – Adding Images Frame: Multiple frames – Inline frames Form: Label – Text – Text Areas – Password Input – Buttons (Button, submit, reset) – Checkbox – Radio Button – List Box – Hidden Input in Forms Unit III DESIGNING CORE PAGES IN DREAMWEAVER: HTML Editors – Features of Dreamweaver – Accessing the Code – Building Style Sheets – Working with Text – Inserting Images – Establishing Web Links Unit IV ADVANCED DESIGN FEATURES IN DREAMWEAVER: Working with Div and Layer – Using Behaviors – Setting Tables – Interactive Forms – Creating Lists – Using Frames and Framesets – Using Templates – Using Library Elements Unit V JAVASCRIPT: Introduction – keywords – Data types – Variables – Operators – Comments – Arrays – Expressions – Control Structures – Functions (calling a function, returning values, integrating function & HTML) Text Books: 1. HTML 4.0 Sourcebook, Ian S. Graham, Wiley Publications, 1998 (Unit I, II) 2. Internet & World Wide Web – How to program, 3rd Ed., H.M. Deitel, P.J. Deitel, et al., Prentice Hall, 2003 (Unit I, II, V) Reference Books: 1. Web Design with HTML/Flash/Javascript & Ecommerce BIBLE, David Crowder and Rhona Crowder, Wiley DreamTech India Pvt. Ltd (Unit I, II, V) 2. Dreamweaver 8 Bible, Joseph W. Lowrey, Wiley Publication, 2006.

12VC224 RADIO PROGRAMMING Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective:

School of Media

Page No.28-25

To provide an understanding of radio programming and radio programme formats and equip the students to apply these in regular programmes.

Course Outcome: • The learners will be taught the growth of radio industry in India and abroad. • They will understand the various activities of creating and broadcasting a radio programme. Unit1: HISTORY OF RADIO: All India radio – its growth & reach / Broadcast management – Public & Private Radio Stations / Laws & regulations / Community Radio / Audience research Unit II: RADIO PROGRAMMING SKILLS: Writing for Radio – News gathering and reporting skills / other genre of radio progammes Unit III: RADIO PRESENTATION SKILLS: Effective speaking skills – announcements – news reading / Interview skills / Voice culture Unit IV: RADIO PRODUCTION TECHNIQUES: Nature of sound / Sound recording techniques – indoor & outdoor / Post-production techniques – voice, music and special effect / Unit V: BROADCASTING TECHNIQUES: Equipments / Studio operations / OB operations Workshops on Voice Culture, Recording techniques etc and Radio - Station visits are part of the coursemodule. Evaluation will be based on theoretical knowledge as well as production of radio content. Text Book: 1. H.R.Luthura, Indian Broadcasting Review, Ministry of I & B Reference Books: 1. Srivatsava, Broadcasting, Vigyan Publication, New Delhi 2. Mencher. M., Basic NewsWriting, Sharma Books 3. Lesiler &Flat lay, Basic Business communication. Tata Mc Graw Hill.

12VC225 WEB DESIGNING LAB Credits 0:0:2 School of Media Page No.28-26

Course Objective: • To apply the skills in developing web pages using HTML tags. To know the basics of HTML and to create a web page with source codes without the help of the other automatic software’s.

Course Outcome: • It helps the learners to learn the basics of web designing which helps in the advance stages like VB, JAVA, etc. List of Exercises 1. Develop a webpage using basic HTML tags 2. Create a web page with transition effects 3. Creating a webpage which contains a set of images (minimum 10) in same size inserted in table. 4. Develop a webpage using TABLE tag to display class timetable. 5. Develop and integrate at least 4 instructional web pages using FRAMES and suitable hyperlinks. 6. Construct a webpage using FORM tag to enter student bio-data. 7. Developing a webpage using basic hyperlinks 8. Creating web pages with visual effects. 9. Create a website for social awareness message 10. Create a website for banner ads. Ads should change for every 10 – 15 sec 11. Design an academic website 12. Design a website using HTML, CSS

12VC226 AUDIO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • The students will be practically taught to apply Audio production techniques involved in Radio Production, Music Production and Audio Post Production for Video using Digital Audio Workstations. Course Outcome: • It enables the students to be creatively and technically operational in the audio industry. List of Exercises: 1. Record and edit a narration with appropriate BGM 2. Produce an interview Production (Indoor) 3. Interview Production (Outdoor) 4. Signature tune 5. Live multi-tracking of one instrument and vocals using Zoom H4 6. Overdubbing of one instrument in stereo with vocals School of Media Page No.28-27

7. Recording SFX using Zoom H4 8. Ambient Sound Sampling using Zoom H4 9. Automated Dialogue Replacement 10. Music and Effects 11. Preparation of automated dialogue replacement 12. Preparation of effects track for video

12VC227 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB (FCP) Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • • To introduce students to the profession of editing in NLE and give the professional exercise of basic editing. Here its hand on experience in EDIT Suit for the students to edit the visuals according to the category.

Course Outcome: • Students will able to experience techniques of video editing using Avid software in the NLE Suite. List of experiments: 1. Understanding tools 2. Introduce transition 3. Introduce video effects 4. Motion tracking 5. Masking 6. Basic Titling 7. Basic audio editing 8. Keying 9. Synchronization with audio effects 10. Film titling 11. Colour correction 12. Create one trailer

12VC228 FILM STUDIES Credits 4:0:0 Course objective: • To make the learners know about the different genes of films its types and the methods of digital production.

School of Media

Page No.28-28

Course Outcome: • To make the students understand the history of cinema and its growth. • They will also get to know the elements and perspective of film industry. Unit I CINEMA – INTRODUCTION: Cinema as an institution. The origin of cinema. Film review. Appreciation. Criticism. Definitions. Qualities of film critic. Responsibilities of a film critic. Film and society. Film and politics. Shaping society. Film as an experience, Environment, Commodity and Communication Media. Unit II CINEMA – ELEMENTS: Approaches to studying film. Narrative and Non Narrative films. Structure of a narrative film. Cinematic codes. Mise-en-scene. Setting. Props. Costume. Performance and movement. Lighting. Camera and Camera movement. Editing. Sound. Narrative Unit III CINEMA – PERSPECTIVE: Genre, star and auteur. French new wave. Neo Realism. German Expressionism. Third world Cinema. Political Cinema. Representation of gender and sexuality. Soviet montage cinema. Unit IV CINEMA – AUDIENCE: Film audience. Audience positioning. Audience as the meaning makers. Hero worship. Fan clubs. Problematising the film audience. Unit V WORLD CINEMA: Study of Great Indian and International filmmakers like Satyajit Ray, Adoor Gopalakrishnan, Akira Kurusowa, Ingmar Bergman and others. Text Books: 1. Turner, Graeme. Film as social practice, Routledge, London, 1993 2. Monoco, James. How to read a film, Routledge, London, 2001 Reference Books : 1. Nelmes, Jill. An introduction to film studies, Routledge, London, 1996. 2. Vasudev, Aruna. The new Indian cinema, Macmillan, Delhi, 1986. 3. Oxford guide to world cinema, Oxford, London, 2000.

12VC229 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT Credits 4:0:0 Course objective: • To familiarize the learners in managing the studio production and managing the equipments in meeting the schedules. School of Media Page No.28-29

Course Outcome: • The students will come understand the production of video film and the management of various factors involved. Unit I ELEMENTS OF PRODUCTION PLANNING: Need for production planning.. Pre production and Post production planning. Duties and responsibilities of producer/director. Production Package, Production Designers. Production office. Best laid plans. Unit II PLANNING OF STUDIO OPERATIONS: Set designing and make up – visualization and composition-aesthetics-directing the actors-directing the crew planning in career. Costing and budgeting of programme. Commissioned and sponsored programme. Unit III PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT: Planning in career. Planning and Production of indoor and outdoor shootings. Planning and management of live shows. Functions, roles, and skills of media managers in broadcast, cable and corporate facilities, with emphasis on financial management, personnel management, programming, physical systems, and regulations. Unit IV MANAGERIL SKILLS IN MEDIA INDUSTRY: An overview of management theory. Financing a production. Moving the budget down. Markets and marketing. Digital Asset Management. Rich Media. Streaming management. Re-purposing of assets. Storage management and archiving. Rights management. Contracts management. Anti-piracy measures. Unit V PROJECT PLANNING: Project Development Life cycle. Sample business plan for a fictional company. Text Books: 1. Media Organisation and Production, Simon Cottle, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2003 2. Filmmakers and Financing, Louise Levison, Focal Press, 2003. Reference Books: 1. Raindance Producers Lab: Lo-to-No Budget filmmaking, Elliot Grove, Focal Press, 2004. 2. Digital Asset Management, David Austerberry, Focal Press, 2003.

12VC230 COMMERCIAL BROADCASTING Credits 4:0:0 Course objective: School of Media Page No.28-30

Pelham books. Focal Press. agency interpretation. crew. Course Outcome: • Students will be able to develop ideas for commercial broadcasting and also handle various stages involved in it including financial management. Digital compositing for Film and Video.a complete guide to the world of audio. Oxford: Focal Press.creative potential of TV. importance of casting director. The audio.).film formats.). NTC Business Books. reviewing the production company cassettes future of TV commercial production. Herbert.C. media approval. Unit II PRODUCTION: Production of the commercial.the agenda. Kelsey.idea/ concept development. Advertising Management. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Development of ideas. 2005.special effects and animations. popular TV ad formats. London. Unit II PREPRODUCTION : Pre production. Storyboards Motion in Action(2nd edn. How to produce effective TV commercials (3rd edn.traditional film editing/ non linear editingfinishing the audio elements. 4.sources of casting. Hooper White. Belmont: Wadsworth Publishing. Wright. Roger. 2000 3.). Unit IV POST PRODUCTION: Editing the commercial. London: Blue Print. film stocks. Steve. advertising strategy. Mathur. client approval.). Text Books : 1. 4. 3. Mark. Chicago.Budgeting. Alan MCPHERSON & Howard Timms. script/ story board. Reference Books : 1. New Age International: New Delhi-2005.• The course imparts the techniques and the application of the commercial production in preparing the script. 1995. Crittenden.set shooting/ location shooting. 2.visual techniques.finding production companies for bidding specialization of production companies. Oxford. problems with in-house production.Pre scoring and Post scoring. 2004. Unistar. factors affecting budgeting. Gerald. Film and Video Editing (2nd edn. Page No.brief from client.28-31 School of Media .confirming the picture. Text and Cases. creative work. cast. planning of special elementschoosing the production team. Unit V FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT: Economics of commercial production. Simon. 2.recording the sound track and creating the special effects . Television Production Handbook(7th edn. to create a concept for the commercial production and knowing about the various scripting formats in producing an commercial. Pre production meeting . 2000. Writing for Television. Zettl.visual handbook.

Teleserials.David Lusted and Christine Geraghty 2. Youth. Political leaders and senior citizen. How audience are influenced by TV Programmes and commercials. quiz. Crime subjects enacted. TV productionMusic shows. Cartoon Net etc Unit V INFLUENCE OF TV PROGRAMME. • This paper helps the students understand the process of television production. Direct to home. Tele film. Text Books: 1. Outdoor. women. IPTV Unit IV TV CHANNELS: Public service TV.Documentary. Unit I TV PRODUCTION: Genre of Studio based productions and target audience.Children. Experimental video. TELEVISIONS: An Introduction to Television Studies Glen Creeber British Film Institue. Discovery channel / NGC. The Television Studies Reader-Edited by Robert C. An Introduction to Television Studies . Political discussion.Terrestrial.28-32 . personality interview. reality shows. dance shows. Course Outcome: • The course will enable the learners to produce their own television programme. Religious TV. Election Results & analysis.12VC231 TELEVISION PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The students will be taught to apply the production techniques involved in the television production. The Television Studies Book. Annette Hill 4. Unit-III TV BROADCAST DISTRIBUTION: Advantages and Disadvantages of various distribution systems. current affairs. Commercial TV. web streaming. News Presentation. Sports TV. 2006.Jonathan Bignell -: Routledge 2007 Reference Books: 3. Allen. weather report. election campaign. Soft stories. Unit II TV PROGRAMMING: Genre of Single camera Production. cable with & without CAS (set top box). School of Media Page No.

Unit I INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION: Communication basics – Business Communication – components – Types – formal communication network – Work team communication – variables – goal – conflict resoulation – non – verbal communication – Cross cultural communication – Business meetings – Business Etiquette.12VC232 CORPORATE COMMUNICATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objectives To enable the students to learn the basic communication skills and the usage of communication technology in the modern workplace. Unit II INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE COMMUNICATION: Understanding Corporate Communication – Employee Communication – Managing Government Relations – Writing for Media and Media Relations Unit III TYPES OF CORPORATE COMMUNICATION: Corporate Communication in Brand Promotion – Financial Communication – Crises Communication. • Students are able to understand the significance of planning and execution of media relations. Course Outcomes • It enhances the learners to maintain good work team communication.28-33 • . Unit IV DOCUMENTATION: Report writing: Characterizing & business reports – Types and forms & reports – Project proposals – collection of data – table’s constitution – charts – writing the report – documenting the sources – proof reading. • It also helps them to plan and execute the business documentation used in corporate culture. School of Media Page No. Unit V BUSINESS PRESENTATION: Written and oral presentation – work – team presentation – Delivering the business presentation visual aids – slides – electronic presentation – hand-outs – delivering the presentation – career planning – preparing Resume – job applications – preparation for a job interview – employment interviews – follow-up.

To impart technical knowledge in broadcasting various television programmes. Course Outcome • Students will be able to produce radio programmes on their own. Produce radio programmes for News and Interviews 2. Produce a radio interview with the location of music recording and remote broadcast. creative writing & editing. vocal stressing. 7. Produce a radio programme for a music talk. Produce 60 sec radio announcements using the appropriate Compeering. • To impart technical knowledge in broadcasting various radio programmes. 11. Produce a 45 sec radio commercial on any product of your choice 9.Text Book: 1. Scot Ober. List of Exercises 1. 3. Contemporary business communication. fifth edition. Script writing for radio programmes – Standard Script forms -Writing for Radio – Style grammar format writing tools. Inflection and quotation marks 8. Produce a radio programme for a radio group discussion programme. 12VC233 RADIO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • To train the students in gaining knowledge on various formats of radio programme production. biztantra.28-34 . 12. Produce a programme on radio drama. Produce a radio programme using and highlighting the appropriate sound recording editing With Sound effects 5. Narration and Voice Modulation 6. School of Media Page No. 12VC234 TELEVISION PRODUCTION LAB (Computer Graphics) Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To train the students in gaining knowledge on various formats of television production. Produce a radio documentary 10. Produce a news reading and presentation methods with proper pronunciation. Produce a radio ad for social awareness programme 4.

Produce and shoot a television talk show programme 12.Course Outcome • Students will be able to produce various television programmes on their own according to the technical format. Course Outcome: • In enhances the students to produce various types of commercials on their own. Produce a television new bulletin School of Media Page No. Produce a Radio commercial 2. • To impart the students in making them know about the production techniques of both radio and television commercial. Produce a TV news cast 7. Produce a script and story board for a TV commercial 7. Produce a signature tune for a radio programme 4. Shoot a slice of life programme for 5 min 6. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. 9. Interviewing personalities 5. Record a celebrity endorsement commercial for a product 5. Produce a public service TV advertisement 8. Produce a live product demo for a commercial 9. Produce a radio jingle 3. Shoot video on a testimonial television commercial 11. 8. Produce a simple drama exercise for 5 min 3. Produce a TV commercial with animation effects 10. Produce a television Current affairs type programme 2. Mime type programme 4. Produce a TV commercial 6. Shoot 10 min duration TV Documentary. Shoot 5 min duration a Quiz programme. Shoot and produce a 5 min TV environmental awareness programme 10. List of Exercise Topic/theme based programme will be based on producing 1. Produce an instructional television programme 12VC235 COMMERCIAL PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To make the learners train in various types of commercial production.28-35 .

Unit I INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH: Nature of scope and distinction between research in natural and social sciences – nature and scope of communication research – review of research related to effects research – limitations of effects research – basic parameters of media related studies. 2. • To prepare model research proposals for research studies and report writing. research and statistics and computer application. Research Methods in Mass Communication by Stempell and Westley Prentice Hall. (III EDITION). ‘Mass Media Research – an introduction’ by Roger Wimmer and Joseph Dominick. hastings House Publishers. Course Outcome • After learning this paper the learners will be able to know the research methods and statistics applied in media industry. 3. Methods and Uses’ by Severin and Tankard.. School of Media Page No. Unit III TYPES OF RESEARCH DESIGN: Exploratory studies – descriptive studies – diagnostic studies – experimental studies – their relevance and use in communication research. Unit V Writing a research project – organization – chapterization – citation – footnotes Text Books: 1. method and use – techniques basic – data analysis techniques. Unit II DESIGNING A RESEARCH STUDY: The problems and the method – preparing a research proposal – sources of research – primary and secondary etc. Communication Theories: Origins. • The students will also be able to initiate new media research proposals in their respective field. 12VC236 MEDIA RESEARCH Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective • To understand research methods and statistical tools in media field. Wadsworth Pub. 1991. 1979.11. Produce a commercial for an emotional appeal ad.28-36 . Unit IV METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION: Field studies – Holistic approach – observation – Interviews – Questionnaires – structured and unstructured schedules – sampling – content analysis – approach. • To understand the principles of evaluation. Produce a commercial for a rational appeal ad. 12. 1981.

Unit III MEDIA FOR ADVERTISING: Newspapers and Magazines – Characteristics. Unit IV RURAL ADVERTISING: Rural market characteristics – growth – penetration of brands – brand competition – media and rural market – nature of products and services for rural markets – media planning – use of outdoor media – successful rural advertising and marketing campaigns – Rural advertising agencies.economics of rural advertising. Radio advertising – jingles – spots – production cost – reach and effectiveness – radio audience – tariff. 2. Unit II ADVERTISING DEPARTMENTS IN MEDIA: Print and Electronic media – Advertising policy and regulations of newspapers. ‘Studies in Mass Communication and Technology’ Ed. the off.agency relations – client relations – coordination with other departments – advertising revenue generation – ad. 1984. Also. London. reach and ad. consumers & the society to progress. By Sari Thomaas. Students will come to know the stages through which manufacturers have to travel for promoting their products by deploying various advertising techniques. TV advertising: effectiveness – reach. Unit I Advertisers – Leading National and International Clients – Ad Spend – Advertising campaigns – other promotional campaigns – Advertising and PR Department of the clients– Role. Outdoor media characteristics –cost.Reference Books: 1. responsibilities and functions of Advertising and PR managers – planning and execution – coordination with advertising and marketing agencies. radio stations and TV channels – tariff – space and time allocation – schedule preparation .effectiveness in advertising. Course Outcome • This curriculum has been designed to teach the students why advertising is part of Marketing Management and how it helps the industry.shoot of advertising in to Public Relations has also been deliberated to give an insight to this area.28-37 . Unit V School of Media Page No. Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.exposure – Products and advertisers of Print media – Cost . 12VC237 ADVERTISING – II Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective • To introduce the students to the advertising world and brief them on various stages involved in the process of producing & launching digital media advertisements. executives/representatives. By James Fletcher. Ablex Publishing Company.products and advertisers on TV – channel competition – tariff – production cost – creativity. ‘Handbook of Radio and TV Broadcasting’ Ed. 1981.

Tata Mc Graw Hill. 1980. macro and microphotography. action and sports. UK. architecture. close-up lenses and devices.28-38 . Special effects Techniques and Manipulation of images. Text Books: 1. 1990 2. Heinemann Pub.expression of idea and emotion. Photo feature. 3. London. 2. surrealism and expressionism. editorial reportage. people and events. New Delhi. processing and printing. Sen Gupta. Marieke de Mooij.exposure and lighting techniques – indoor and outdoor. Tata Mc Graw Hill. ‘ Advertising world wide’ (2nd Edn). 1994. city life and people. lenses.realism.study by magnification. Understanding . Unit III PHOTO JOURNALISM: Photography as a mirror of reality and symbol . Course Outcome: • The students will understand various stages in the growth of photographic technology from analogue to digital and how to use today’s expertise for capturing images and manipulate them using editing software for different applications. Prentice Hall. Photomicrography . flashes and accessories. Close-up. Unit II MACRO PHOTOGRAPHY: Still life. 3. ‘Brand positioning’ . Photo essay and documentary . filters. Prentice Hall. ‘The Practice of Advertising’ 3rd Fdn. chemicals. ‘Fundamentals of Advertising’. Otto Kleppner. Black & white and colour photography – films. Unit IV School of Media Page No. The students will also appreciate the ways to use photography for gainful employment & as a rewarding hobby. landscape. Unit I PHOTOGRAPHIC GEAR: The equipments – cameras.1990. ‘Advertising Management concepts and cases’ M. 1989. Mohan. Reference Books: 1. ‘Successful advertising research methods’ Haskins & Kendrick. light meters. New Jersey. NTC Business 12VC238 PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The syllabus is focused to orient the students on the professional photographic techniques and the professional equipments used in the media industry. Thematic presentation of nature.MULTINATIONAL ADVERTISING: Multinational Advertising Agencies – Indian Agencies with Foreign Agencies – Multinational campaign strategies and cost considerations – creativity and content in International advertisements – cultural differences and global advertising campaigns – implications – regulations . Norman Hart.

• They will be able to manage the men. scoreboard. production for advertising . Rotoision.studio and location. computer aided applications and creativity.PHOTOGRAPHY IN ADVERTISING: Advertising . taking care of intricate details. The 35 mm Photographer's Handbook. advertising. infrastructure such as lighting. Digital Photography 12VC239 STUDIO MANAGEMENT Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To brief learners on the concept of various broadcast & non-broadcast studios for Radio & Television. Mitchell Bearley. Julian Calder and John Garrett. Cassell. Video. Text Books: 1. • Manpower and budget to run the studio are also explained. casting. Unit V PHOTOGRAPHY FOR VIDEO: Compact camcorder techniques. Jonathan Hilton. London 1996 4. Dave Sounders. requirement of Audio. Consumer and industrial products . Practical Photography. 1986. Michael Langford. London. Modelling studios – Broadcast & Non Broadcast studio – Designing & constructing a studio – Layout – School of Media Page No. 2. Action Photography. power & air-conditioning. Fashion Photography . beauty and portrait. 1986 3.visualizing . Focal Press. Graphic. indoors and outdoors locations. London 1999 Julie Adair King. London 1988 3. London. Focal Press. • To describe the designing & construction of studios. Merchurst Press. Switzerland 1997 2. Professional Advertising Photography. Basic Photography. studio. Course Outcome: • Knowledge gained in this module will help the candidate to design. Reed consumer Books Ltd. Michael Langford.sets props. Unit I ESSENTIALS OF A STUDIO: Perception of a studio – Audio. build & operate a broadcast or non-broadcast studio. London. John Hedgeese’s New Introductory Photography Course. Video.copy and illustrations use of drawing and photographs.Digital Camera functions and techniques. Roger Hicks. Pan Books.Digital Photography. material & time efficiently to bring out a video programme and budget it economically. Storage & Broadcast equipments. 1998 Reference Books: 1. Advanced Photography.28-39 . • The learner will be able to choosing the right technical equipments for each department and maintain them for skilful functioning of the studio. editorial.

Cables.Tape & E-Library . amplifiers. SECURITY & LEGAL ISSUES: Work Place Conditions . liner & non liner recorders.Hardware & Software for Audio & Video NLE .Mandatory Government Licenses for filming & broadcasting – Intellectual Property Right – Film Trade Unions – Crew Protocol . House Lighting. cable. stand. CCU. SAFETY. Router switch – Patch Bay Monitors Recording Medium & Formats . Martha Mollison & Allen Unwin. Focal Press. Unit IV RECORDING & POST PRODUCTION : Pre-shoots Technical Checks in Hot studio – Rehearsal & Blocking Technique – Set Etiquettes & Studio Procedure – Establishing Communication & Talkback system – Studio Calls . & Virtual studio – OB Van – Insight into Indian & Inter nation studios. Text Book: 1. Material. Video equipments: Cameras. Camera mounts. Film Production Management.Chemical Fire -Extinguishers & Fire Fighting Methods Electrical Shock – Means to prevent electricity related accidents – Medical Emergency & First Aid – Screening Audience for Security – Preventing Theft & Pilferage – Insurance Cover for Men. Grid. Bastian Cleve. Studio management – Manual. Building and Vehicles .Studio Lighting Equipments: Studio Lights. Technical. Mounts. prepared by Tony M. Published by South Asian Edition 2007.Contracts.28-40 .Audience Management – Stagecraft & Show Control Graphic Station . Reference Books: 1. Vector scope. Bonds & Agreements of Cast & Talents. Connectors. Unit V FIRE. Lens. Producing Videos . Air-conditioning & Data communication .Fire Hazard & Risk Assessment – Prevention of Fire . monitors.AVG Chain from Studio to Storage .Infrastructural requirements of an ideal studio – Norms for planning Power. Edition 2007. Filters. connectors. WFM. expanders. Cast. 2.Sound Proofing Techniques – Crafting a Shooting floor: Stage. Accessories.Liner & Non Liner Recorders – CAR Room .A Complete Guide by. Vision Mixer. Lighting Controls.Basic Transmission Equipments.Shooting Floor & Control Room Dialogue – Non Verbal Cues during shoot . Supervisory. Unit II BUDGETING & STAFFING: Scope for generating Income for a broadcast & non-broadcast studio – cost of operating & maintaining a studio – Budgeting for and marketing a TV program / Music Recording – Staff pattern & hierarchy in a mid & large size BS / NBS studio – Roles and responsibilities of creative & non creative staff : Administrative. Blue/Green Screen. Crew & Talents. Set. mixers. Jawahar (E&MT-KU) 12VC301 BROADCAST JOURNALISM School of Media Page No. Unit III TECHNICAL GEAR REQUIREMENT & USAGE: Equipment for Audio: Different types of microphones. compressors.

Unit III TV NEWS COVERAGE: Electronic News Gathering – Camera Shots – TV Script Writing – Compiling the Report.Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • Two of the objective of radio & TV media points to instruction& information. Course Outcome: • Students will come to how the Radio & TV news goes on air from start to finish. Unit I NEWS GATHERING: Introduction to Broadcast Journalism – Qualities of a Journalist – Freelancing & Training . Freedom & responsibilities – Censorship in developing nations – Objectivity & Impartiality – Responsible reporting – Internal pressure on reporting – Journalist code of Professional Conduct .What is news – Source of News – Getting the Story. Text books: 1.Interviews – News desk & News room Management –– Programme production – Specialized programmes. This job lies on the shoulders of broadcast journalist. Broadcast Journalism by Andrew Boyd. 12VC302 PRINCIPLES OF CINEMATOGRAPHY Credit 4:0:0 School of Media Page No. Aditya Sengupta: Electronic Journalism – Principles & Practices: Authors’ Press. New Delhi Ist PB Edition 2006.Teletext – Satellite Images for news Computerized News room. Basic Radio Journalism by Paul Chantler & Peter Stewart. Unit II BASIC RADIO JOURNALISM: Radio News Room Structure – News Writing – News Bulletin – News Presentation .Legalities Unit V THE NEWS STUDIO: The News Studio Set & Control room – Video Journalism . • The curriculum deals with the responsibility of the electronic news journalist and the procedure of broadcasting in the media.Research – News online –3 Qualities of an online journalist . Vth Edition Focal Press 2007 2. • They will understand the activities & protocol involved in the process. Focal Press 2007 Reference Book: 1.Editing the Image & Visuals used Unit IV DUTIES & RESPONSIBILITIES: Power.28-41 .

• These techniques are adopted from the works of Shri.Course Objective: • The videography techniques are the copy of the practices followed in cinematography except for the medium used & the perception of lenses. Unit I CAMERA ANGLE: Introduction .Cross Cutting & uses. Cutting (editing). Subject Angle & Camera Height – Scene requirements.28-42 . Unity & Eye Scan – Framing – Image Size. Unit V COMPOSITION: Introduction – Still vs. Close up camera angle & image size – player movements into & out of close up – Close up camera set up & background.Scene. Motion Picture Composition – Composition Rules – Composition Languages – Balance. Subjective & Point of View) – Subject size. Course Outcome: • The students will learn the time tested concept of applying 5 Ps in their production that Hollywood follows in their film making techniques – Camera Angle.Directional Continuity. Camera Angle – Frame & Frame Requirements – Frame Focus & Movement – Compositional Variety. Integrated composition. Different types of Action Axis. • One of those major factors for making a production interesting is the inspirational presentation style. Text Book: School of Media Page No. Types of close ups (Cut in & Cut away) Close Up Choice – Close Up look. Triple-Take) . Transitional Devices (Sound & Picture) Unit III CUTTING (EDITING): Introduction – Types of Editing (Continuity & Compilation) . Over the Shoulder. Unit IV CLOSE UPS: Introduction – Extreme. Continuity. Close-Ups & Composition. Joseph V Mascelli. an acclaimed cinematographer & the author of “The 5 Cs of Cinematography”. Scene Direction (Dynamic & Static). Esthetical & Narrative). Unit II CONTINUITY: Introduction – Cinematic Time & Space – Filming the Action (Controlled & Uncontrolled) – Filming Techniques (Master Scene. Sound Editing Problems – Sound Flow – Editorial Requirement (Technical. Shot & Sequence –Types of Camera Angles (Objective. • Successful formula used in commercial cinematography to make the visuals pleasing & meaningful is discussed here to expose the students to various possibilities of applying similar creativity in video production.

Masking & Motion guide 8. Focal Press 2007 2. Creating movements (character) using bone tool 9. Ivan Cury: Directing & Producing for Television. Creating Camera movements 7. Silman-James Press. Course Outcome: • The students will gain hands on experience by undergoing different tools of 2D animation using Flash software. • They will be able to create a 2D cartoon animation at the end of the experiments.28-43 . The 5Cs of Cinematography (Motion Picture Filming Techniques) by Joseph V. Introduction to action scripting 11. which will help students gain knowledge about cartoon animation. School of Media Page No. Mick Hurbis-Cherrier: Voice & Vision-A creative approach to narrative Flm & DV Production. The Pre-production Phase 2. Motion and Shape Tweening 5. 12VC303 ADVANCED MULTIMEDIA LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • This exercise will introduce the advanced concepts of 2D animation. Background Compositing for animation 6. techniques. Converting objects into symbols 4. Character designing 3. Keyboard and mouse interfacing using Action script 12VC304 NON LINEAR EDITING USING FCP Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the grammar of video editing on a NLE system.1. • To learn the procedures. List of Experiments: 1. Creating basic movements using Action Script 12. Mascelli. California Reference Books: 1. and standard practices in motion picture editing. Creating Transition effects 10.

Roll & Ripple edits – Trimming clips .Dramatic Continuity .Editing complex Dramatic Scene Analysis of film sequences from editing point of view .Timecode – Building blocks of project – Working with project – Connection between clips and media files – File naming considerations – Keyboard shortcuts . Undoing changes – Timecode for navigation – Browser basics – Customizing browser display – Viewer basics – Canvas basics – Timeline basics. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO EDITING: Aesthetics / Principles of editing . Unit V AUDIO & OUTPUTS: Audio editing basics – Evaluating levels with audio meters – Overview of audio mixer – Mixing audio in timeline .Transitions – Transition editor –Sequence to sequence editing – Matching frames – Video filters – Motion parameters .Import.Audio filters – Exporting audio for other applications – Media management – Importing & Exporting EDLs – Output to tape – Print to video – Sequences for DVD.Analog & Digital Recording . Diana Weynand.Course Outcome: • Students will acquire knowledge on various techniques involved in motion picture editing and post production work flow. Rhythm & Pace . Unit II FINAL CUT PRO BASICS: Final cut pro post production work flow – Video formats – Audio formats .Buttons .Shortcut menus – Customizing interface – Doing.28-44 . Text Book : 1. clips & sequences – Adding clips to sequence – Using markers – Edit points – Working with tracks in timeline – Three point editing – Arranging clips.Parallel Cutting .Liner & Nonlinear Editing -Spatial & Temporal possibilities . Slide.Introduction to digital editing -Television Aspect ratio .Editing Action Sequence .Creating sub clips – Working with projects.Animation: Cell animation.Editing Advertising & Promotional video .Titles – Rendering & video processing – incorporating motion graphics – third party plugins.Manipulation of time. • They will familiarize with the tools available in Final Cut Pro NLE software for executing various commands in editing.Different television standardization .Computer animation-Incorporating animation & live action. Using Deng media files into project – Organizing footage .Clip speed –Freeze & still frames – Compositing & layering . “Apple Pro Training Series” 12VC305 EVENT AND MEDIA MANAGEMENT School of Media Page No. Unit III WORKING WITH PROJECTS: Scratch disk – External video monitoring– AV settings – Device control presets – Sequence settings -Log and capture . Unit IV ADVANCED EDITING: Linking and editing audio & video in sync – Slip.Cross Cutting .

Process of event marketing . Unit V EVENT BUDGET AND SAFETY MEASURES: Budget breakeven point .Managing the environment.promotional materials . implementing & controlling major events in media industry.K Chaturvedi.Choosing event site . Unit III EVENT MARKETING AND PROMOTION: Nature of event marketing .Media Effects (Cultivation/ Culture Effects) Business of Entertainment .executing .size of events .corporate events .speakers protocol .Introduction: definition of event management .Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • To understand the importance of professionally managing an event and handle the audience in the corporate & entertainment world.Prepare event proposal .balance sheet . Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ENTERTAINMENT AND SOCIETY : Entertainment DefinitionCharacteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment .putting together a team .Dress for formal occasion .incident reporting.cash flow analysis .advertising campaign.Marketing mix .Markets .Planning tools .Types of events .Image/ Branding .A Practical Handbook.-code of ethics for events .Developing the theme . To learn the steps involved in planning.Religious and cultural protocol .fund raising events . Text Books: 1 Successful event management .Conducting rehearsals .cause -related events .Interactive Media .Preparing dignitaries .profit and loss statement . Anton Shone.in-house publications .establish aim and objectives .evaluating . Unit II DESIGNING AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Process: planning .Public Relations .Regulations .Trends .Narrative Theory .Sponsorship .Organization accommodations . B. 2009 School of Media Page No. 2004 2 Media Management.press conference . Course Outcome: • The learners will acquire knowledge on the requirement of managing a big event and the inherent grey areas associated.Qualities of event managers .Event characteristics .Types of events: business events . • Thy will be able to foresee constraints and plan for contingency.trade fairs.financial control system .exhibitions .Managing the media: drafting the press release .Sports ceremonies .media coverage .General events . Bryn Parry.security occupational safety and health .budgeting the event .Dramatic Theory Understanding Entertainment Audiences .Advertising & publicity .Providing services .Event team .28-45 .event protocol . Unit IV EVENT PLANNING AND OPERATION: Develop mission / purpose statement .

Carlos. Basic editing 3. Dandunlop . Event Management for tourism. The Social Media Management Handbook. 2. 2010 12VC306 VIDEO POST-PRODUCTION LAB USING FCP Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To teach advanced editing techniques used in film and broadcast industry using FCP.28-46 . Using compressor for converting files 12. Exporting and Edit to tape 9. Multi-camera editing 11. Importing / capturing / ingesting footage from a tapeless source 2. culture business and sporting events.Reference Books: 1. 2008. Multi-clip editing 4. LAB PROJECT – Student’s own choice 12VC307 MULTI CAMERA PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn the techniques of using multi-camera in a production environment. School of Media Page No. LIST OF EXERCISES 1. Lynn Van Der Wagon Brender R. Advertisement / promo editing using video transitions & effects 6. Titling 5. Skit editing 10. Course outcome: • • Students will be able to edit a video using the tools available in FCP Will gain experience in post-producing a commercial video project independently. Audio effects & Mixing 8. • To help the students know various multi camera shooting format used in the industry. Song editing using visual effects 7.

Two Camera Interview Post Production – Video 5. Routing cables for multi-camera setup production 9. Familiarizing with Video Mixer. School of Media Page No. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 1. Three Camera Tele play production pre planning 8. • They will learn the responsibilities of each staff working in the studio and the work flow of producing special programme & formats. Three Camera Tele play post production – Adding Graphics 12. Vector scope & Waveform Monitor & its controls 7. • Subjects in running the show and the protocol of filming major programmes are also discussed. • They will be able to operate various equipments in the multi camera production. Three Camera Post production – Audio sweetening 12VC309 DIRECTION & PRODUCTION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • This curriculum deals on the intricacies of the studio infrastructure & the function of key personnel involved in production.Course Outcome: • The learners will be able to set up a studio for two & three camera shoot. Three Camera Tele play live mixing video recording 10. Two Camera Interview Post Production – Audio 6.28-47 . Course Outcome: • The students will understand how a studio is constructed to meet various production needs. Three Camera Tele play post production – Adding inserts 11. • They will be professionally equipped to produce various programmes in the studio. Two Camera Interview set-up inside studio 2. Two Camera Interview Production Pre planning 3. Two Camera Interview standalone video recording 4.

Stock shots – Music Production – TV studio & production rehearsal – Commercial pre-production & production . Shooting Script. location shooting schedule. Unit III DEMONSTRATING FORMATS & SCRIPT FORMAT: Director in control – Guidelines for Creation – Coordinate pictures with ideas. Rehearsal procedure & Shoot. Audience. Display area. Popular music – Sports Programme – Cross shooting. Demonstration & single camera Demonstration programme – Drama. Directing & Producing for Television by Ivan Cury . Camera placement. Producers. Mascelli. Wardrobe. Set & Art Director. Silman-James Press. Ground Plan. Lighting Designer. video. NEWS & DOCUMENTARY PRODUCTION: Music preproduction – Recording steps (audio. Screening Room Unit II WHO’S WHO IN PRODUCTION & PANEL PROGRESS: Executives. Scheduling. camera positioning – Hardware & Crew – Form sports & Game rules – Preproduction. Control Room – Audio & Video gear. Support Area – Green room. Mick Hurbis-Cherrier: Voice & Vision-A creative approach to narrative Flm & DV Production. Marking Blocks & Camera. Unit V MULTIPLE CAMERA REMOTE: Basics of multi-camera gear – Jibs & cranes – Presentation Material – Stage. Unit IV MUSIC. Shot Sheets – Studio walk through & run through – Daytime drama & sitcom rehearsal – Scored music & dance script. The 5Cs of Cinematography (Motion Picture Filming Techniques) by Joseph V. Studio Manager. Accounting. Production & Post production protocol. Programme routine. shot list). COMMERCIAL. Production Manager. Engineering Crew. Directors. Ground Plan. Talents – Graphics. Office & Lobby – Media Stores. Script Format. Sound. Post Production Technicians – Panel Programme (Seating. Focal Press IIIrd edition -2007 2. Make Up & Dressing. Light.Unit I INTRODUCTION & PRODUCTION FACILITIES: TV production Formats – Basic rules for all productions – Production Facilities – Studio & Shooting Floor. Create routine. Text Books: 1. Paul Wheeler: Digital Cinematography – Focal Press 2005 Reference Books: 1. 12VC310 INTERACTIVE MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGIES Credits 4:0:0 School of Media Page No.28-48 . California 2.Cost Analysis – Special Talents – Production & Shot procedure – Keeping a Log – News Programme characteristics – Routines & rundowns – Presentation on air – Documentaries Ideas & format Production Plan – Log for montage. Conventions.

Copyright and Support Agreements .Surrounding Multimedia.Archiving . Images.Subject-Matter Experts .Information Flowchart Interaction Design: Orientation Navigation .Variable Spacing .Scriptwriting Guidelines . Panels.Strengths of Video Difficulties with Professional Quality Video.Audio Quality MIDI . Buttons and Controls.Music .Project Debrief – Licensing . Video. Unit IV DESIGNING INTERACTIVITY: Interactivity: Definition .Image Editing Tools .Purpose .28-49 .Course Objective: • To know the basics of multimedia operation and tools used to develop them. Sound.Appearance .Sounds .Speech .Scrolling .Legal and Ethical Issues .Spacing .Costs Digitization Animation: Animations and Learning Displaying Animations .Peripherals Creation Tools: Painting and Drawing Tools . Unit III MEDIA: Text: Guidelines for Creating Text .Process of Interactive Design Information Design: Product Definition .Storyboard Presentation Design: Tasks of Presentation Design .3D Modeling and Animation Tools . Animation).Time Based Tools.Roles of Project Managers Instructional Designers . School of Media Page No.Packaging.Justification . Unit V DELIVERY: Testing: Alpha Testing . Course Outcome: • They will learn the phases of instructional designing and interactivity in designing.Functionality .Color and Palettes .Displaying Images .Beta Testing Delivery: freezing the Product .Evaluation and Revision.Display Speed . • To understand the project management and responsibilities of team members involved in interactive multimedia technologies. Text.Fonts .Usability .Costs Audio: Audio and Learning .Media and Motivation .Development Implementation .Interface Elements (Background.Audience and Environment . • They will also learn the proper use of media technological environment & the process involved in delivering multimedia products. Unit II PROJECT MANAGEMENT: Project Management Issues .Content Writers .Media Producers Instructional Development Phases: Analysis & Planning .Design .Icon Based Tools .Development Choices .Organizing Information .Copyright Issues .Screen Focus Points .Digitization -Video: Video and Learning . Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA: Benefits of Multimedia in Instruction .Interface Style .Hypertext and Hypermedia Images: Images and Learning .Programmers .Multimedia Hardware: Platforms .Scrolling .Layout .Audio and Video Editing Tools Card and Page Based Tools .

Descriptive and Inferential Statistics. Seventh Edition. McGraw-Hill.Independent and Dependent Variables Intervening and Manipulating Variables . VARIABLES AND SCALES OF MEASUREMENT: Tools for Data Collection: Observation . School of Media Page No.Interview . Unit IV ADVANCED STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES FOR RESEARCH : Introduction to Statistics: Meaning. Case Study. research and statistics and computer application and to prepare a model proposals for research studies and report writing.Sampling Method: Purposive Sampling. Ordinal.Cook. Systematic Sampling. Unit III SAMPLING TECHNIQUES AND HYPOTHESES: Meaning of Population and Samples .basic parameters of media related studies .Univariate Analysis: Mean. Experimental.Hypotheses Formulation and Testing. Mark Elsom . Action and Longitudinal Research Methods. Interval and Ratio Scales. McGraw Hill Osborne Media. 2000. • Also to understand the principles of evaluation. Simple Random Sampling. • The students will also be able to initiate new media research proposals in their respective fields.Qualitative Research Methods: Historical Research. Levels of Confidence. Principles of Interactive Multimedia. Parametric and Non-Parametric Statistics .Questionnaire .Achievement test. Scope and Types . 2006 2. Unit II TOOLS. Participatory and Ethnography Research Methods Quantitative Research Methods: Survey.Text Books: 1.nature of scope and distinction between research in natural and social sciences . 12VC311 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the research methods and statistical tools available in media field. Scope. Course Outcome: • After learning this paper the learners will be able to know the research methods and statistics applied in media industry.28-50 . Multi Stage Sampling. Variables: Discrete and Continuous Variables . Stratified Random Sampling and Cluster Sampling. Unit I RESEARCH METHODS: Introduction to research .Checklist .Schedule . Sociometric. Importance and Limitations of Statistics and Data .Construction and Standardization of Tools. Tay Vaughan. Attitude Scale and Content Analysis .Scales of Measurement: Nominal.nature and scope of communication research limitations of effects research . Degrees of Freedom and Sampling Error Hypotheses: Meaning. Multimedia: Making it Work.

2004 2. Write the Questionnaire 5. analyzing.Measures of Central Tendency and Standard Deviation . interpreting the data. Methods in Social Research. Susanna Hornig Priest. Mode .Square. An Introduction. Process Data 10. 2000 2.28-51 . sorting. etc . Fred.Bivariate Analysis: Correlation Methods. Collect Data 9.Median. H. Excel. Microsoft word. and ANOVA. Doing Media Research. Choosing of Topic & purpose of the survey 2. Interviewers 8. Foundations of Behavioral Research. • They will be able to produce a report for publishing a Research Document. Research Methodology – Kothari. Kerlinger. Goode & Hatt. Pilot Test 6. Assess Resources 3.through SPSS School of Media Page No. Unit V COMPUTER APPLICATION AND REPORT WRITING: Computer applications: Statistical Package for Social Sciences (SPSS). List of experiments: 1. Analyze the Results . 2000 Reference Books: 1. Chi .Writing Research Proposal and Research Report. T-test. Prepare the Sample 7. Text Books: 1. Choosing the Method 4. 2009 12VC312 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • This exercise will introduce the concept of research methodology employed in media studies: Course Outcome: • The students will gain hands on experience by undergoing the steps in collecting.

Patch bay & Routers.28-52 .Creating comp takes. Connectors & Microphones .Archiving the project.Basic track recording dubbing .normalizing audio tracks Trimming digital audio tracks . Unit III MUSIC PRODUCTION – MIDI: What is MIDI .Mastering . • The will be exposed to the use MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.volume .The Final mix down .Effect Processors .Basic MIDI editing.MIDI channels .DIGITAL AUDIO: Recording fundamentals .side sequencing – Setting the index and gap .EQ types . School of Media Page No.11.Audio and MIDI Interfaces – Digital Audio Mixer – Audio Reference Monitors .Unlisted MIDI devices .MIDI connections .MIDI implementation charts . Interpret and Disseminate the Results 12.Punch-in recording Common MIDI Recording Problems and their Solutions .Static bytes and Data bytes .Recording studios .MIDI modes. Unit IV MUSIC PRODUCTION .Analog and Digital audio recording . Unit II HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SET UP FOR MUSIC PRODUCTION : PCI cards USB – Fire Wire/ i link . • They will be aware of the technologies and the digital tools used in music production. bass guitars and vocals .Test run.Surface controller setup .Headphones .Dynamic Processors . Unit V MIXING.Creating a new song file Setting up song parameters .Quantization options .Laying down MIDI tracks .monitoring the mix frequency.Step recording .Wet vs Dry recording – Mix and individual track MIDI to digital audio conversion Virtual MIDI instruments .Template setup . Course outcome: • This course will enable the students to be creatively aware of the skills in music production. MASTERING AND ARCHIVING: Mono. Hardware and software.Cables.A short mixing primer: Drums. Stereo & Multi Track . Result Publication 12VC313 DIGITAL MUSIC PRODUCTION Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective: • The students will appreciate the basics in the functioning of digital audio workstation.MIDI interface types and features – Sound Card Driver installation basics .Additional instruments .Audio interface considerations .Sample rates and resolutions .Preparing tracks for audio editing . Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DAW: Introduction to DAW. volume and overtones .PCMCIA Cards . Mac & PC platform for DAW.Audio interface features .Audio file preparation .

2005. Francis Rumsey. Focal Press. Introduction to Routing in a DAW 12VC315 AUTHORING AND VIRTUAL REALITY School of Media Page No. Recording and Editing in MIDI 4. Tim McCormick. Andrea Pejrolo. Introduction to Routing in a Studio 12. “Sound and Recording: An Introduction”. Mixing of Audio Tracks 8. Course Outcome: • The students will get the experience in working on a DAW & recording techniques. 2. Third Edition. “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Fifith edition.28-53 . Mastering for a CD 9. Sampling of SFX and Ambiance 5. Sampling of a Musical Instrument 6. 12VC314 DIGITAL AUDIO PRODUCTION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • The students can learn advanced knowledge in audio synchronization. Focal Press. Introduction to different types of miking 2. Live Sound Reinforcement 11. Recording and Editing using DAW 3. Zack Price. 2009 Reference Books: 1. • They will be able to know the application of higher level production techniques used for digital audio projects. Music for Video 7. Simultaneous Multi Track Recording 10. 2004. “Beginner’s guide to computer based music production”. “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”. Cherry lane music Company. Focal Press.Text Books: 1. • They will acquire the expertise in handling high quality digital audio assignments. 2006 2. Martin Russ.

Vikas Publishing House. Multimedia: Making it Work. Interactive presentations -Multimedia Development Tools . Integration of Media Elements Authoring. Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY : Definition and introduction – 3D animation and Augmented reality – Input devices – Output devices . Input Devices and Sensual Technology .CFD (Computational fluid dynamics) –Games – Virtual sets Costing – Virtual Reality Markup Language – Computing architecture for VR Past.Macromedia Director .flow diagram.Supporting CD-ROM or Laser Disc Sources . • They will learn the use of virtual reality markup language for various uses.various plug-ins for Web .Head Mounts Display (HMD). 2001 Reference Books: School of Media Page No. Unit V VIRTUAL REALITY APPLICATIONS :Applications of Virtual Reality – Education & training – Entertainment – Medical applications . Unit III AUTHORING TOOLS AND MULTIMEDIA PRODUCTION : Authoring tools . Multimedia in Action.Advantages & Disadvantages .HTML and Multimedia -Various Stages in designing & producing multimedia products for CD and Web: Planning. time line.Popular Authoring tools . Unit II AUTHORING SOFTWARE : Integrating Multimedia Elements .Script Language Programs Icon-based Programs .Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective: • Learn about the basics of Virtual Reality & VRML • To understand various authoring tools and its components.Authoring Environments. Text Books: 1. Preparation of Media Elements. authoring language. James E Shuman.Interactive Presentation Environments .Presentation tools Slide Presentation Environments . Tata Mc Graw Hills. Course Outcome: • The learners will be able to appreciate the use of authoring types and its software applications.QuickTime. Everest Authoring System . Unit I INTRODUCTION OF AUTHORING : Introduction of Authoring . present & future of VR .28-54 .Characteristic of Immersive VR Shared Virtual Environments. old versus new styles.Multimedia authoring program categories .Icon Author . Content Analysis. 2008 2.Different Authoring Styles . Instructional Design. Cave.Immersive and Non-immersive Virtual Reality . Boom.Cross-Platform Capability .DLLs for Extending Features .Glossary of VR terminology .Run-time Player for Distribution Authoring Tools .Supporting Video for Windows -Hypertext .Key factors of selecting CD based or Web-based multimedia . Tay Vaughan.Author ware.Image Q . Seventh Edition.

Wire parameters – Hierarchies and kinematics – Track view – Motion mixer – Saving & loading animation – Animation – Character animation .28-55 . Olivier Balet. Unit III MATERIALS & RENDERING IN 3Ds MAX: Materials introduction . • They will know modeling and rendering techniques useful for multimedia industry. Text Book: School of Media Page No.3D camera tacking – Applications of 3D animation.Lights .Hair – Fur – Cloth – Particles. Virtual storytelling. manipulating & viewing objects – Components & attributes – Polygonal modeling .NURBS modeling – Sub division surface – Character setup – Skeletons & Kinematics – Rigging .Shadows . Principles of Multimedia. 2003 12VC316 INTRODUCTION TO 3D ANIMATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To present basic concepts and applications in 3 Dimensional computer animation.Edit mesh – Edit poly – Patch objects – NURBS modeling Tools for low polygon modeling – Animation Concepts & methods . Patrice Torguet. Tata McGraw Hill.Animation controllers – Animation constraints .Renderers – Types of rendering – Render preview – Video post.Object properties – Creating geometry . 2006 2. Ranjan Parekh.Cameras – Editing – Caustics – Toon Shading – Lighting – Camera setup – Mental ray for MAYA rendering – Render nodes. Unit V MATERIALS & RENDERING IN MAYA: Painting – 2D painting – 3D painting – Polygon texturing . Gerard Subsol.1. Unit II MODELING & ANIMATION USING 3Ds MAX: Introduction – Basic Interface . Unit IV MODELING & ANIMATION USING MAYA: Introduction . Course Outcome: • The students will be able to understand the use of 3DSMAX & Maya in animation.Interface – Creating. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO 3D ANIMATION: Introduction to Animation – 3D animation & its concepts – Types of 3D animation – Skeleton & kinetic 3D animation – Texturing & lighting of 3D animation .Types of materials – Maps & shaders – Mapping – Rendering basics .Rigging. • To focus on 3DSMAX & Maya software in animation.Lights – Cameras – Designing materials – Material editor – Material / Map browser .

28-56 .Character Generators. Springer Science & Business Media Inc.Video tuning cards . Course Outcome: • The students will gain confidence in knowing the technology employed in broadcasting. Marcia Kuperberg. PAL & SECAM TV Standard – HDTV & 3D TV – Various Video and audio compression methods. “Guide to Computer Animation”.Video mixers . Unit IV VIDEO TECHNOLOGIES : ENG Cam and Broadcast quality Video Camera .Special Effect Generators . types and uses . types and usage – Audio storage media. School of Media Page No.Storage and memory of digital images . 3. Focal press. Surround Music Systems. Bowman.Video capturing devices .Audio equipments in Radio & TV broadcast.Audio mixers . tape & tapeless video storage. FIRST EDITION REPRINT 2008 Reference books: 1. Waveform Monitor & .Types of color video signals . Unit I RADIO & AUDIO: Radio Broadcasting. Unit II DIGITAL IMAGING: Photographic equipments – CCD & CMOS . 2002.Streaming of video over net Block diagram of color TV receiver and description of each element – CCU.Features of Video cameras .Frequency bands used in Radio communications . Kelly L.Component Video .Video editing systems and their components .Digital images and their characteristics . Kogent Learning Solutions INC.Digitizing tablets and Electronic boards.Image printing equipment .1.Murdock.. John Edgar Park. “3DS MAX 2009 IN SIMPLE STEPS”.storing and retrieving systems .Composite video S-video . • They will be able to guide the staff in the job area on simple technical solutions. Unit III VIDEO FORMATS: Analog and Digital Video . “3DS MAX 2008 BIBLE”. • Offers insight into analog & digital equipments used in broadcasting houses. 2005 12VC317 MEDIA TECHNOLOGY Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • Deals with the fundamental technologies used in Radio & TV industries.FM and AM Broadcast . “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”. 2009 2.Digital Cameras and their types . VTR.Pixels and resolutions .Scanners and their applications . Vector scope. Martin W.audio delivery systems (PA) .ADCs and DACs -MP3.NTSC.

2001.IMAX theater facilities Computer networking and equipment . The students will be know the process of audio & video content planning. Unit III School of Media Page No. R. encoding. HTML attributes. authoring and delivering for corporate & entertainment industry. styles. • To expose the techniques of pod casting. HTML elements. Bruce Bartlett and Jenny Bartlett. Focal Press.IPAD & PDAs . Fourth Edition. The Sound Studio. Gulati.how did the internet grow into its current form-controlling the internet-how does the world wide web work-who controls internet. web-casting. 2003. Text Books: 1. 2002. Seventh Edition. Color TV. video and other data types like Power Point Presentation.Multimedia projectors . 3. Third edition. Glen Ballou. headings. New Delhi. paragraphs. (P) ltd. 2001 2. New Age Int. Digital Imaging for Photographers. 2.28-57 .how do computers connect to the internet-types of internet connections.Types of cables and their uses. Focal Press.Understanding Internet Basics: understanding web browsing-HTML.tables and color. Reference Books: 1. links. Third Editions.. Focal Press. LED . Animation or White-Board type application over the internet. Plasma. Images .Principles and Practice. Handbook for Sound Engineers.R. DVD players Compatibility and convertibility of various instruments and files – Video Monitor – CRT. text formatting. 12VC318 STREAMING MEDIA Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To give an insight on the possibilities of using internet for broadcasting. Focal Press.Unit V DIGITAL TECHNOLOGIES: Computer components and other peripheral devices .VCD players.CD ROMs DVD and Blue Rays and their characteristics . website address Unit II BASICS OF HTML: HTML fundamentals. blogging. 2001. Practical Recording Techniques. Alec Nisbett. LCD. production. internet radio. Adrian Davies. 1. • Course Outcome: • Students will learn to use the cyber media to broadcast live audio. • Unit I INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET: Understanding Internet Basics: How do people use the Internet – How was the internet impacted society. rules and comments.

how podcasting works. compression and video formats. Katherine T. 2. Planning for blogging 2. • They will learn the techniques of broadcasting of audio & video on the internet. Tris Hussey . creating a compelling podcast. recording your podcast. Create Your Own Blog: 6 Easy Projects to Start Blogging Like a Pro . George Colombo. Planning for the blog. Music and intellectual property. Schneider. Chris Priestman. 2010 12VC319 BLOGGING AND PODCASTING LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To introduce the students to the streaming media technology in audio & video • To teach them techniques of creating content & broadcasting on the web. Creating a conversation School of Media Page No. components. streaming radio output. picking right tool for the job. Absolute Beginner's Guide to Podcasting . exporting. 2002. video blogging: recording video blog posts. ISBN10: 0240516354 4. processing and posting your podcast. ISBN-10: 0672330652. installing and setting up your first blog. Digital audio video basics. building community. strategies for planning each show. protecting your content Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO WEB CASTING AND BLOGGING: Basic web casting concepts. Course outcome: • The students will get hands on experiencing in creating & posting blogs. web cast encoding.INTERNET RADIO AND PODCASTING : What is radio on web. By Gary P. stream receivers. ISBN-10: 0470611952 3. 2005. Web Radio: Radio Production for Internet Streaming. Learn HTML and CSS with w3Schools by W3Schools. An overview of podcasting. Pinard The Internet: Illustrated. Hands on Guide to Webcasting (Internet Event & AV Production) by Steve Mack & Dan Rayburn. ISBN-10: 0789734559 Reference Books: 1. building personal blog Unit V ADVANCED BLOGGING: Creating podcast blog. writing and creating conversation. creating portfolio blog: what makes good content on a portfolio blog. Distributing. setting up your studio. The difference between radio and podcasting. Curtis Franklin . Jessica Evans.2010. creating your online stream Textbooks: 1.28-58 . List of Experiments: 1. Focal Press. 2007 2.

size. Portfolio blogging 8. color.Centrality of design Elements of design: Line. Production & Post production of audio for Podcasting 11. • While touching area in fundamentals & principles in design.Search for solution Refinement Analysis .Design process . Creating a personal blog 5.Unity.Various stages of design process .Decision making and implementation . texture. Pre production of audio for Podcasting 10. Unit II PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN: Emphasis . Creating a business blog 6. Video podcasting 12.problem identification . shape. Publishing for blogging 9. Building community 4. form. • They will understand various stages of visual designing and the lateral thinking process in the manifestation of creativity. Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF DESIGN: Definition approaches to design . Video blogging 7.28-59 . Unit IV School of Media Page No. direction.Research. a source of concept – Concept development.3. the syllabus encompasses the creative process and conceptualization of a sensory perception. value. Course Outcome: • The students will learn the role of design elements in creating an art form. Balance – Gradation – Rhythm – Contrast – Harmony – Unit III BASICS OF GRAPHIC DESIGN: Definition . Publishing for Podcasting 12VC320 INTRODUCTION TO VISUAL DESIGN AND CULTURE Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The subject deals with the graphic design for visual applications in media.

Course outcome: • Students will get hands on experience in using After Effects & Combustion software. 1982. Rotoscoping.Principles of Visual and other Sensory Perceptions . Understanding the interface & working with layers using Combustion 7. Astragal Books. Advertisement composition and final output rendering using AE 6. Creating special effects with operators using Combustion School of Media Page No. Tracking using AE 5.28-60 .The process of developing ideas .Materials. Unit V INTRODUCTION TO COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY: Left brain Vs right brain . Graphic designers. Tracking. • To help the understand the various composition techniques & special effects offered by these software. Evaluation – Creative inputs – Issues of plagiarism in creative productions . Frederic: Visual Elements of Art and Design.verbal.Color psychology and theory – Definition . Analysis. Tom and Goodman. Particle composition. template etc) 3. • They will be able to use the tolls in the software to create Text animation. Text Books: 1 Palmer. wipes.Associative techniques . Incubation. Synthesis. Sue: Manual of Graphic Technique For architects.Design execution and presentation. Preparation. Color correction etc LIST OF EXERCISES 1. visual _ Combination & thematic Visual thinking . and artists. tools .CREATIVE PROCESS: Semiotics in design . Long man. Reference Books: 1 Betty Edwards: The New Drawing on the Right Side of the Brain [Paperback] 12VC321 VIDEO SFX LAB USING AE & COMBUSTION Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • The make the students understand the use the application of After Effects & Combustion software in the media applications.Orientation. 1989. Creating animated output elements for an advertisement using AE (Titles. London .Thinking on the right brain – Creativity & conceptualization – Visual perception – Gestalt principles of design .Optical and Visual illusion. Creating Backgrounds for blue / green mattes using AE 2. Keying using AE 4. Idealization. 2 Porter.

8. Keying and Rotoscoping using Combustion 9. Color correction & Particle effects using Combustion 10. Creating a promo for an event using Combustion 11. LAB PROJECT (AE) – Implementing own concept 12. LAB PROJECT (Combustion)– Implementing own concept

12VC322 3D ANIMATION LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To offer the skills required to use computer application in media production. • To get familiar with the use of most popular 3D animation software in Media Industry. Course outcome: • Students will gain hands on experience in the use of Maya & 3DSMAX for animation. • They will learn 3D animation and advanced modeling and rendering techniques. LIST OF EXERCISES 1. Understanding the basic interface, viewports and primitives of 3DS MAX 2. Basic modeling techniques using 3DS MAX 3. Texturing & Lighting using 3DS MAX 4. Animation using 3DS MAX 5. Character animation & Rendering using 3DS MAX 6. LAB PROJECT 1 – Implementing student 's own concept using 3DS MAX 7. Understanding the basic interface, viewports of MAYA 8. Creating primitive objects using MAYA 9. Spline & NURBS modeling using MAYA 10. Lights & Materials using MAYA 11. Animation & Rendering using MAYA 12. LAB PROJECT 2 – Implementing student's own concept using MAYA

School of Media

Page No.28-61

 

ELECTRONICS & MEDIA TECHNOLOGY LIST OF SUBJECTS Sub. Code 12MT201 12MT202 12MT203 12MT204 12MT205 12MT206 12MT207 12MT208 12MT209 12MT210 12MT211 12MT212 12MT213 12MT214 12MT215 12MT216 12MT217 12MT218 12MT219 12MT220 12MT221 12MT222 12MT223 12MT224 12MT225 12MT226 12MT227 12MT228 12MT229 12MT230 12MT231 12MT232 12MT233 12MT234 12MT235 12MT236 12MT237 12MT238 12MT239 12MT240 12MT241 12MT242 Name of the Subject Circuit Theory Electronic Devices Script Writing and Video Production C++ and Data Structures Audio Engineering and Production Electronics Devices and Circuits Lab C++ Programming Lab Photography Lab Java Programming and Applications Analog Electronics Circuits I Digital Electronics Studio Acoustics Digital Signal Processing & Media Applications Audio Engineering and Production Lab Digital Electronics Lab Analog Electronic Circuits II Microprocessor and Microcontrollers Digital Television & Digital Video Engineering Graphics and Animation Elements of Video Production Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab Graphics and Animation Lab Video Production Lab Web Designing Electronic Communication Systems Computer Networks Advertising Digital Compositing IP TV Web Designing Lab Communication Circuits Lab Video Post Production Lab Digital Image Processing Computer Based Music Production Media Economics DSP Processors Audio Sampling and Synthesis Embedded Systems Principles of Digital Audio Digital Video Processing Equipment Maintenance & Servicing Satellite Communication Credits 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

 

 

12MT243 12MT244 12MT245 12MT246 12MT247 12MT248 12MT249 12MT250 12MT251

Game Programming with C++ Neural Networks 3D Animation Media Laws and Ethics ARM Cortex Architecture and Programming 3D Video and Graphics Digital Photography Electronic Media Management Audio Engineering and Production

3:1:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0

 

 

12MT201 CIRCUIT THEORY Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To develop the fundamental tools of linear circuit analysis. • To learn the "alphabet" of circuits, including wires, resistors, capacitors, inductors, voltage and current sources, and operational amplifiers. • To prepare students for more advanced courses in circuit analysis. Course Outcome: • Identify linear systems and represent those systems in schematic form • Apply Kirchhoff's current and voltage laws and Ohm's law to circuit problems • Simplify circuits using series and parallel equivalents and using Thevenin and Norton equivalents • Perform node and loop analyses and set these up in standard matrix format • Identify and model first and second order electric systems involving capacitors and inductors • Predict the transient behavior of first and second order circuits Unit I BASICS OF CIRCUIT ANALYSIS : Kirchoff's laws, DC and AC excitation, Series and parallel circuits, Sinusoidal steady state analysis, Mesh current and node voltage method of analysis, Matrix method of analysis. Unit– II NETWORK THEOREMS: Thevenin's and Norton's theorems, Super position theorem, Compensation theorem, Reciprocity theorem, Maximum power transfer theorem, Millman's theorem, Tellegen's theorem. Unit III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS: Series and parallel resonance, Quality factor and Bandwidth, Multi resonance circuits, Coupling co-efficient, Frequency response and bandwidth, Tuned circuit. Unit IV TRANSIENTS: Transient response of RL, RC and RLC circuits to DC excitation, Natural and forced oscillations. Unit V DUALITY AND TOPOLOGY: Concept of duality, Dual network, Graphs of a network, Trees, Chords and branches, Tieset and cutset of a graph, Application to network analysis.

Text Book
 

 

1. William H. Hayt and Jack E. Kemmerly, " Engineering Circuit Analysis ", McGraw Hill International Edition, 2006. Reference Books 1. Paranjothi S.R., " Electric Circuit Analysis ", New Age International Ltd., New Delhi, 2008. 2. Chakrabati A., “Circuit Theory (Analysis and Synthesis) ", Dhanpath Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2008. 3. Roland E. Thomas and Albert J. Rosa, “The Analysis and Design of Linear Circuits ", Prentice Hall International, 2nd Edition, 2008.

12MT202 ELECTRONIC DEVICES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the principle of operation, capabilities and limitation of various electron devices so that he will be able to use these devices effectively. Course Outcomes On completion of this course the student will understand the • Basics of electron motion in electric field and magnetic field • Mechanisms of current flow in semi-conductors • Diode operation and switching characteristics • Operation of BJT, FET, and MOSFET metal semiconductor rectifying and ohmic contacts and power control devices. Unit I ELECTRON BALLISTICS AND INTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTORS: Force on charge in electric field – Motion of Charge in uniform and time varying electric fields – Force on a moving charge in a magnetic field – calculation of cyclotron frequency – calculation of electrostatic and magnetic deflection sensitivity. Energy band structure of conductors, semiconductors and insulators – Density distribution of available energy states in semiconductors – Fermi- Diac probability distribution function at different temperatures – Thermal generation of carriers – Calculation of electron and hole densities in intrinsic semiconductors – Intrinsic concentration – Mass Action Law. Unit II EXTRINSIC SEMICONDUCTOR AND PN JUNCTIONS: N and P type semiconductors and their energy band structures – Law of electrical neutrality – Calculation of location of Fermi level and free electron and hole densities in extrinsic semiconductors – Mobility, drift current and conductivity – Diffusion current – Continuity equation - Hall effect. Band structure of PN Junction – Current Component in a PN Junction – Derivation of diode equation – Temperature dependence of diode characteristics.

 

 

Unit III SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS OF PN JUNCTION AND SPECIAL DIODES: Calculation of transition and diffusion capacitance – Varactor diode – charge control description of diode – switching characteristics of diode – Mechanism of avalanche and Zener breakdown – Temperature dependence of breakdown voltages – Backward diode – Tunneling effect in thin barriers Tunnel diode – Photo diode – Light emitting diodes. Unit IV BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTORS AND FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS: Construction of PNP and NPN transistors – BJT current components – Emitter to collector and base to collector current gains – Base width modulation CB and CE characteristics – Breakdown characteristics – Ebers – Moll model – Transistor switching times. Construction and Characteristics of JFET – Relation between Pinch off Voltage and drain current – Derivation. MOSFETS – Enhancement and depletion types. Unit V METAL SEMICONDUCTOR CONTACTS AND POWER CONTROL DEVICES: Metal Semiconductor Contacts -Energy band diagram of metal semiconductor junction Schottky diode and ohmic contacts.Power control devices: Characteristics and equivalent circuit of UJT intrinsic standoff ratio. PNPN diode – Two transistor model, SCR, TRIAC, DIAC. Text Books 1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 2003. 2. David A.Bell, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003. Reference Books 1. Donald A.Neaman,” Semiconductor Physics and Devices” 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002. 2. S.Salivahanan, N.Sureshkumar and A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and Circuits, TMH, 2008. 3. S.M.Sze, Semiconductor Devices – Physics and Technology, 2nd edn. John Wiley, 2002. 4. Ben G.Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Pearson Education, 2000. 5. Nandita Das Gupta and Amitava Das Gupta, Semiconductor Devices – Modelling and Technology, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

12MT203 SCRIPT WRITING AND VIDEO PRODUCTION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To do detailed study on script writing and video production. Course Outcome: • Students will gain comprehensive knowledge about video production and script writing.

 

 

Unit I THE PROPOSAL OUTLINE: – questions to ask before writing the script –Visual treatmentsubject factor – the film treatment – thinking through the treatment – the sequence outline – types of sequence – the shooting script- How shots are related – writing narration – the feature – preparing the presentation – the character – full length - the story treatment. Unit II THE ART OF CONFRONTATION: – confrontation dynamics – secondary function – the step outline –dialogue devices – the master scene script – format – adaptation and its problems – surviving story conferences- the story board – judging screen time – terminology used Unit III STORY OUTLINE: – proposal outline – script discussion – characterization – story treatment – master scene script – project presentation. Unit IV: BASIC SHOTS: angles & camera movements-introduction -lighting and colors-single camera – multi-camera production-indoor studio-outdoor -properties. Unit V: BUDGETING, Identifying sponsors, producer, insurance, safety measures, acquiring equipment, casting, hiring crew, sets, props, purchase of recording & storage material, location scouting, scheduling, transport, technical support, legal issues, permissions Text Books 1. Dwight V Swain, “Film Scriptwriting”, Focal Press publishers, 1998. 2. Steve Katz, “Film Directing Shot”, Focal Press publishers, 1991. 3. Paul Wheeler , “Digital Cinematography”, Focal Press, 2001 References Books 1. Steven Katz “Film Directing: Cinematic Motion “ Focal Press publishers, 2004. 2. Antony Friedman “Writing for media” ,Focal press, 2006. 12MT204 C++ AND DATA STRUCTURES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the systematic way of solving problems • To understand the different methods of organizing large amounts of data • To learn to program in C++ • To efficiently implement the different data structures • To efficiently implement solutions for specific problems Course Outcome:

 

Single linked list. error handling in file I/O. multiple inheritance. Unit V SORTING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUES: Sorting. Robert Lafore. public and private inheritance. Object Oriented Programming in C++. New Delhi. data conversion. pointers and arrays. and Pitfalls. 2. Arrays and Strings. Pune 2002 2. Object as function argument. Templates and exception: function templates. Unit II OPERATOR OVERLOADING: Overloading Unary and Binary Operator. New York. Friend functions. Herbert Schmidt. 4th Edition 2000. Peter smith. Binary Tree Search. Trees. Bubble sort. Applied Data Structures with C++. as function argument. file pointers. Pointers: address and pointers. Streams and files: stream classes. Algorithms and Applications in C++”. 12MT205 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION Credits 3:0:0   . McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. disk file I/O with streams. Narosa Publishing House. The Complete Reference. Unit III VIRTUAL FUNCTIONS: Virtual functions. Searching. Stack. Merge Sort. pointers to pointer. Galgotia Publishers. C++ Objects and Data types. Reference Books 1. 2004. C++. exceptions. class templates. Inheritance: derived class and base class. McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Insertion Sort. Overloading member functions. Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES: Linked list. stream errors. Overloaded Constructors. constructors. Simple class. election Sort. Circular Linked list. class hierarchies. 2nd Edition 2005. Linear Search. C++ objects as physical objects. derived class constructors. Fourth Edition. Static class data. pointer and c-type strings. Quick Sort. Text Books 1. Sartaj Sahni. Binary Search. Static functions. Double linked list. this pointer. Heap Sort. level of inheritance. Unit I OBJECTS AND CLASSES: Objects – classes – inheritance – reusability – creating new data types – polymorphism and Overloading. const and classes. “Data Structures. new and delete operator. Queue. Analyze the performance of algorithms and data structures.  • • Demonstrate strong problem solving skills in constructing C++ programs to address exercises inspired by real-world problems. Copy Constructors.

2005. Zack Price. Channelized Mixers. Split and Inline Mixers. Thomas Course Technology. Signal Routing Signal Sends. Synchronizing and controllers. 2. Miking techniques. The mixing Engineers Handbook. Microphone Usage. Broadcast Consoles. Music production workflow. Faders and Potentiometers Level Indicators. Computer based music production. Unit III POST PRODUCTION SYSTEMS: Audio post production equipments. Dynamic Transducers. Proximity Effect . Peak Indicators.2002. Carbon Particle Transducers. Pre production for post production. CMP books. Digital Consoles. Foundations of Editing: Adjusting Levels. Audio Processors and Processing-Amplification and Level Control.2001.  Course Objectives: • Understanding production workflow • To acquire In-Depth knowledge on consoles and Digital audio workstations Course Outcome: • The student will be well versed in the technologies in Audio and Music production at the end of this subject. Control Surfaces in Editing. Focal Press. Piezoelectric Transducers Reversed Transducers. MIDI. Focal Press. Text Book: 1.2006. Digital Signal Processing. Temporal Processing. music. MIDI timecode. Control Room Monitoring. Headroom. Monitors and Loudspeakers. Mute and Solo. Microphone Placement.Audio Post Production for Digital Video. Unit II Mixers and Recorders: Pre-amplification. MIDI automation. 2nd edition. Dynamic Processors.   . Jay Rose. Michael Talbot Smith. Digital Audio Workstations and Computers. Pickup Patterns. sound effects. 2005 Reference Books: 1. Automatic Consoles. Cherry lane music. Ribbon Transducers. Noise Reduction Processors. Distant Miking.Modern Recording Techniques. Bobby Owsinski. 3. Pan Potentiometers. Transporting Sounds Unit V Music Production: Genres in music. Specialized Microphones. 2. Unit I MICROPHONES AND AUDIO: Capturing Sound Electronically-Magnetic and Electronic Principles. Offaxis Coloration. Digital Audio Transfers. Quantization. Sixth edition. MIDI clock. Transmission and reproduction of audio post production materials. Microphones-Technical Features.Acoustic Phase Relationships. monitoring and the environment Unit IV EDITING AND PROCESSING: Purposes of Editing. Sampling. Mixer Automation. David Miles Huber. Track planning and Post Production sequences. Synchronization. Forensic Sound. Sound Engineering explained. Frequency Processors. stereo.

ADC converters etc. NPN-PNP Transistors Biasing 4. transistors and their applications. Zener diode and Photo diode 2. The students can • Understand the nature and scope of modern electronics. • Understand the use of RPS and CRT. Input and Output Characteristics of FET/JFET 7. Analog to Digital Conversion 12MT207 C++ PROGRAMMING LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To understand the basic concepts of C++ programming   . • Verify the working of diodes.  12MT206 ELECTRONICS DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objectives: The main objective of this curriculum/course is to make the students well versed with basic electronic components and circuits. Design of UJT/BJT amplifier 5. Clippers and Clampers 9. • Build a common emitter/base/collector amplifier and measure its voltage gain. Course Outcome: The combination of lecture and laboratory sessions provides learning opportunities that should enable the student to do the following upon completion of this course: • Set up a bias point in a transistor. • Learn to design different types of filters and apply the same to oscillators and amplifiers. designing amplifiers. Characteristics of BJT in common emitter/base/collector configuration 6. Filters (R-C/ L-C / R-L-C) 8. • Exploring the circuitry which converts an analog signal to digital signal. • Design and construct simple electronic circuits to accomplish a specific function. • Describe physical models of basic components. Rectifiers (diode application) 3. Op-Amp Inverter/Non Inverter 11. Characteristics of PN diode. List of Experiments: 1. RC coupled Amplifier 10. • Explore the operation and advantages of operational amplifiers. • Understand their capabilities and limitations and make decisions regarding their best utilization in a specific situation.g. Op-Amp Differentiator and Integrator 12. e..

• Create applications using object oriented programming principles List of Experiments 1. 12. Loops and control structures. Sports/Action Photography   . 4. Introduction to Classes and Objects. Portrait photography 5. 9. Function overloading in C++ 5. File handling. Operator overloading in C++ 7. 1. Texture/ Pattern photography 6. Abstract photography 10. Black and White photography 4. Pointers. Travel/Architecture photography 7. Friend functions 11. Arrays using functions and strings. Virtual functions 10. Pictures under different light conditions 3. Fashion photography 9. List of experiments: Introduction: Basics of photography-The still camera-Accessories and equipments-Rules for composition-Lighting.  • To know about the object oriented programming concepts Course Outcome: • To identify and program concepts using C++. Exception handling 12MT208 PHOTOGRAPHY LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To train the students in the basics of framing artistically with photography and its software applications. 3. To introduce the students the process of photography in studios. Framing and composition 2. Introduction to C++ 2. Inheritance 6. Course Outcome: • Students will be well equipped with all the basics of framing artistically with photography and its software applications practically which helps them in doing photography. 8. Product photography 8.

Shapes and Curves .Working with graphics – Working with Color – Working with font –Layout Managers –MenuBars and menus –Dialog Boxes. Digital Photography Bible. io_Java I/O classes and Interfaces – The Character Stream – BufferedReader –BufferedWriter . Nature/Wildlife photography 12. Image data storage.Events – Classes – Handling AWT Controls – Sources of events –Event Listener interfaces–Handling the events .Lang–Simle type Wrappers.AWT Classes –Windows fundamentals – Creating frame Window– Handing events in frame window . Transformations: translation in java2D. Clipping. etc. including dashed lines. Course Objective: • To learn advanced Java programming concepts like reflection. rotation in java 2D. shearing. Image processing in java2D: image color models. gradients. 12MT209 JAVA PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Outcome: • To enable the students to design and develop enterprise strength distributed and multi-tier applications – Using Java Technology. Input Output: Exploring java. and scaling Alpha compositing. Multithreaded Programming: Thread model –Creating a thread . native code interface. 2004. Unit III THE APPLET CLASS:HTML – Programming– applet initialization and termination – Applet skeleton – Simple Applet Display method – Passing parameters to applet . • To develop network and 2D animation programs in Java . Painting with solid colors.image data processing. Stroking paths. threads. Unit II THE JAVA STANDARD LIBRARY: Overview– interfaces – packages – Exploring java. Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO JAVA 2D AND APPLICATIONS: The rendering pipeline.Data members – methods – Overloading constructors – Class Assignment – This – Static members & methods Inheritance – Abstract classes – exceptions . and textures. HDR photography Reference Book 1. Geometry: Drawing 2D Lines. Unit V   . Dan Simson. Wiley.  11. Creating multiple thread– Thread Priority . Rasterizing and antialiasing. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO JAVA: Object oriented language – The JAVA environment – comparing JAVA C and C++–Keywords & operators – Identifiers – Literal – Expressions – Control flow – Arrays & Strings – Functions – Command line Arguments .

2001 12MT210 ANALOG ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS I Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor amplifier circuits and power supplies. Variation of quiescent point due to hFE variation within manufacturers tolerance.Fixed bias circuit. Unit I TRANSISTOR BIASING: BJT – Need for biasing . Text Books 1. Multistage amplifiers. projections in java3D. Java 2D Graphics by Jonathan B.Shape3D and Transform3D.2001. Animations in Scene Graphs. Method of stabilizing the Q point to the extent possible. Midband analysis of various types of single stage amplifiers to obtain gain. Different types of biasing circuits. Comparison of CB. Directional Light. Point Light. Load line and quiescent point. Canvas3D. Shapes and Curves.  INTRODUCTION TO JAVA3D AND APPLICATION: The structure of a 3D Program. The Complete Reference “Java 2“. Methods of increasing input impedance using Darlington connection and bootstrapping. Balaguruswamy. Use of Self bias circuit as a constant current circuit.TMH. Miller’s theorem. Advantage of Self bias (voltage divider bias) over other types of biasing.Ambient Light. 2. CS.texturing in java3D. CB and CC amplifiers. Herbert Schildt. input impedance and output impedance. Geometry: Drawing 3D Lines. Spotlight. Darlington connection using similar and Complementary transistors. Stability factors. Basic   . CE and CC amplifiers and their uses. Method of drawing small-signal equivalent circuit. Use of JFET as a voltage variable resistor. Java 3D Scene Graphs . Source self bias and voltage divider bias for FET. CG and CD (FET) amplifiers. Course Outcome: On completion of this course the student will understand the • Methods of biasing transistors & Design of simple amplifier circuits • Mid – band analysis of amplifier circuits using small . Second Edition. input impedance and output impedance • Method of calculating cutoff frequencies and to determine bandwidth • Design of power amplifiers and heat sinks • Analysis and design of power supplies and power control using SCR. E. lighting in java3D. Unit II MIDBAND ANALYSIS OF SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS: CE. The Java3D Package. Patric Naughton .signal equivalent circuits to determine gain . Knudsen O'reilly Media (May 2005) Reference Book 1.Third edition Tata Mc Graw Hills . Programming with Java .

Switched mode power supplies. Use of constant current circuit to improve CMRR. Efficiency of class A. S. 2002. “Electronic Devices and Circuits”.C. push-pull power amplifiers. 2003. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky. Millman J. Gain-bandwidth product of FETs.. amplitude modulator. Reference Books 1. AB. 2. efficiency and power dissipation. 2008.  emitter coupled differential amplifier circuit. Electronics – Analog and Digital. B.Analysis for Vdc and ripple voltage with C.J. Differential gain. CMRR. Electronic Devices. Tata McGraw-Hill. Heat sink design. Crossover distortion and methods of eliminating it. Robert L.al. 2009. Line regulation. Class B complementarysymmetry. TMH. 3. Unit V RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES: Half-wave. " Integrated Electronics ". 2nd Edition. Unit IV LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS : Classification of amplifiers (Class A. PHI. Electronically regulated d. Derivation of transfer characteristic. I. Floyd. Low frequency analysis of amplifiers to obtain lower cut off frequency Hybrid – pi equivalent circuit of BJTs. Nagrath. Unit III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS: General shape of frequency response of amplifiers. Pearson Education. 12MT211 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objectives: • To introduce number systems and codes • To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the correlation between Boolean expressions • To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions   . CL. Definition of cut off frequencies and bandwidth. and Halkias . full-wave and bridge rectifiers with resistive load. “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”. limiter. Amplifier rise time and sag and their relation to cut off frequencies. output resistance and temperature coefficient. Calculation of overall upper and lower cut off frequencies of multistage amplifiers. High frequency analysis of FET amplifiers. General expression for frequency response of multistage amplifiers. Power control using SCR. Calculation of power output. High frequency analysis of BJT amplifiers to obtain upper cut off frequency. Sixth edition. PHI. 2001. Use as Linear amplifier. RC coupled and transformer-coupled power amplifiers. Transconductance. Calculation of actual power handling capacity of transistors with and without heat sink. et.c power supplies.Salivahanan. High frequency equivalent circuit of FETs. C&D). Voltage multipliers Zenerdiode regulator. Text Books 1. Bisection theorem.8th Edition. 4. L-C and C-L-C filters. Heat flow calculations using analogous circuit..

ring counter – timing waveforms. representation of signed numbers. 2002. Course Outcome: • On completion of this course. Application & Design’. Thomson. Comparison of performance of various logic families. Boolean Algebra: Postulates and theorems of Boolean Algebra –canonical forms – simplification of logic functions using Karnaugh map. the students can design combinational and sequential digital logic circuits. full adder – parallel adder – binary adder – parity generator/checker – implementation of logical functions using multiplexers. Unit III COUNTERS AND REGISTERS: RS. Reduction of primitive flow table. Race. Unit I NUMBER SYSTEMS AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA: Binary. Digital IC – Characteristics Logic Families: RTL. John M.Yarbrough. “Digital Fundamentals”. programmable logic devices and digital ICs.Floyd. ECL. JK. Reduction of state and flow tables. characteristic equations. excitation tables –asynchronous & synchronous counters – modulus counters–shift register –Johnson counter. Morris Mano.  • • To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of combinational circuits and sequential circuits To introduce the concept of memories. Reference Books: 1. Also they will have knowledge on Programmable Logic devices and its usage. 2. 2002. Race free assignment. TTL. Master–slave. floating point numbers -BCD-ASCIIEBCDIC Excess 3 code-gray code-error detecting and correcting codes. hexadecimal number systems. Thomas L. D&T flip flops – level triggering and edge triggering – characteristic tables. Primitive Flow Table. Unit IV SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN: Basic models of sequential machines – concept of state table – state diagram – state reduction implementation of synchronous sequential circuits – asynchronous sequential logic – Fundamental mode operation – Transition Table. PHI. Text Book: 1. Flow Table. Digital Design. octal. Complements. ‘Digital Logic. Prentice Hall of India. Unit II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN: Logic gates –implementation of combinational logic functions –encoders & decoders – multiplexers & demultiplexers –code converters – comparator – half adder. CMOS. Unit V PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS: Semicustom design – Introduction to PLD’s – ROM – PAL – PLA – FPGA. 2003. 12MT212 STUDIO ACOUSTICS   .

Reference Book:   .electronic instruments and separation Text Book: 1. F.V Edition. MCGraw-Hill. Unit V ACOUSTICS FOR MULTITRACKING: Flexibility-Advantages and disadvantages of multitracking-Achieving track separation-studio acoustics-distance between artists-microphone management barriers for separation-electronic separation.Master Handbook for Acoustics. Alton Everest.2010.  Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To Understand Sound and it’s properties • To gain knowledge about acoustics • Enlightening on the various technicalities involved in acoustic design of studios Course Outcome: • The students will have thorough understanding about acoustics and sound-proofing.Sound Pressure level-Sound Intensity level –Acoustics-Reverberation-Sound transmission class-EchoEffect of boundaries-Absorbers-Diffusers-Adjustable acoustics-Reverb Time and it’s techniquesAcoustic properties of materials-The human ear Unit II ACOUSTICS OF A SMALL RECORDING STUDIO: Acoustical characteristics of a studioreverb-studiodesign-studio volume-room proportions-reverberation time-diffusion-noise-studio design procedure-studio features-elements common to all studios-Air handlers-Sound isolationMinimising structure-borne sound Unit III ACOUSTICS FOR CONTROL ROOM: Initial time delay gap-live end-specular reflections vs diffusion low frequency resonances-managing reflections-control room frequency range-outer shell of the control room-inner shell of the control room-representative control rooms-study of designs consultants Unit IV ACOUSTICS FOR LISTENING ROOM: Acoustical link-peculiarities of small room acoustics-room size room proportions-reverb time-low frequencies-control of modal resonancesbass traps-modal colorations-mid-high frequencies-identification and treatment of reflecting points-lateral reflections-control of spaciousness. Unit I SOUND: Sound source-Propagation of sound-Sound waves-Sound in free space-Sound and obstacles-Wavelength-frequency-Complex--waves-Pitch-Timbre-harmonics-phasepartialsoctaves-Linear and Logarithmic measures-Understanding Decibel -Units of sound. which will enable them in acoustic design of studios.

Focal Press. ‘Sound Engineering explained’. 2001 12MT213 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING & MEDIA APPLICATIONS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • • • This course will introduce the basic concepts and techniques for processing signals on a computer.FIR filter design using window method. By the end of the course. Linear. you be familiar with the most important methods in DSP.  1.Realization structures of FIR filters: Direct form-Cascade-Linear Phase Realizations. Michael Talbot Smith. The course emphasizes intuitive understanding and practical implementations of the theoretical concepts. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DSP AND FOURIER TRANSFORM:Signals. including digital filter design. • Understand the meaning and implications of the properties of systems and signals. Course Outcome: • Represent discrete-time signals analytically and visualize them in the time domain. Systems and Signal Processing: Basic Elements of a Digital Signal Processing System-Advantages of Digital over Analog Signal Processing. Discrete-Time Signals and Systems:-Discrete-Time Signals-DiscreteTime Systems-Analysis of DTLTI Systems-DT Systems described by Difference EquationsCorrelation of DT signals. circular convolution Sectioned convolution . transform-domain processing and importance of Signal Processors. Elliptic filters. Frequency sampling method.Transformation of Butterworth and Chebyshev filters into equivalent digital filters using Bilinear transform method and Impulse invariant method -Realization structures of IIR filters: Direct form I and II. cascade forms and Parallel forms Unit III FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS: Symmetric FIR filters-Linear phase response and its Implication . Unit IV FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS: Representation of numbers in registers ADC quantization noise Coefficient quantization error Product quantization error Limit cycles due to   . DTFT – DFTFFT Computations using DIT algorithms FFT Computations using DIF algorithms Unit II FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS : Review of classical analog filters: Butterworth and Chebyshev filters. Linkwitz Riley filters . • Understand the Transform domain and its significance and problems related to computational complexity.

• The students will gain in-depth knowledge in the terms and techniques in audio production. On-chip memory/cache-Extended parallelism Applications of Digital Signal Processing:Dual-Tone multifrequency Signal Detection-Spectral Analysis of Sinusoidal Signals-Spectral Analysis of Nonsationary Signals-Spectral Analysis of Random SignalsMusical Sound Processing-Digital Music Synthesis. Lonnie C Ludeman. Recording dialogue 3. ‘Digital Signal Processing Algorithms and Applications’. Special instructions.’Digital Signal Processing’. Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing.’Digital Signal Processing – a Practical approach’.4th Edition. Basic edits   . Replication.Johnson. 2nd 2004 Low Price Edition 3. ‘Digital signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’. 12MT214 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn the various trends and technologies in Audio engineering and production Course Outcome: • The students will be well trained in handling various audio software.. New Delhi.New Delhi.  product round-off Round-off Noise reduction scheme Addition overflow errors. Pipelining. • They would have learnt the working signal flow of a basic studio set up. 2008 4.New Delhi. Text Books 1. • They will also learn the nuances in handling equipment. Tata McGraw – Hill.2008 2.Mitra. MAC. List of Experiments 1.Harvard architecture.2011 2. setting up for a recording and troubleshooting. 3rd Edition.Manolakis. John G..”Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”. Johnny R. Reprint 2002 Reference Books 1.Reprint . Recording voice 2. Sanjit K.Ifeacher and Barrie W.PHI of India Ltd. Addison-Wesley Longman Ltd.Jervis. Principle of scaling Unit V SPECIAL TOPICS IN DSP AND DSP PROCESSORS: Introduction to general and special purpose hardware for Digital Signal Processors. PHI of India Ltd. Oppenheim and Schafer. John Wiley and Sons . Emmanuel C.Proakis and Dimitris G.Prentice Hall of India.

Half adder and Full adder 3. Digital to analog converter 12MT216 ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS II Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The aim of this course is to familiarize the student with the analysis and design of feedback amplifiers. List of Experiments: 1. Radio Edit 5. Multiplexer and De-multiplexer 4. wave shaping circuits. Logic gates 2. multivibrators and blocking oscillators. Multi-track recording 12. Music and Effects 10. Flip-flops 7. Analog to digital converter 12. Shift registers 9. oscillators. IC timer 10. Counters 8. Code converter 5. Foley 8. MIDI 11. ADR 9. On-location sound 6. Mixing 12MT215 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To impart the concepts of digital electronics practically and train students with all the equipments which will help in improving the basic knowledge. Course Outcome: • The students will have good knowledge about the concepts of digital electronics and they will be able to apply all these concepts practically. Special effects 7. Course Outcome:   . Encoder and Decoder 6. Parity generation and checking 11. tuned amplifiers.  4.

Third Edition. Miller and Pierce oscillators. Analysis of Oscillator using Cascade connection of one RC and one CR filters. Method of identifying feedback topology. and Taub H. Unit IV WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS: RL & RC Integrator and Differentiator circuits. multivibrators. Efficiency of Class C tuned Amplifier. Analysis of single tuned and synchronously tuned amplifiers. Speed up capacitors. RC phase shift Oscillator. “Integrated Electronics”. Millman and Halkias. C. Pulse transformers. 2000 Reference Books   . UJT sawtooth generators. Narrow band neutralization using coil. "Electronic Circuits". clampers and slicers. Frequency range of RC and LC Oscillators. TMH. feedback factor and basic amplifier configuration with loading effect of feedback network taken into account. Text Books: 1. Input and Output resistances with feedback.  On completion of this course the student will understand the • Advantages and method of analysis of feedback amplifiers • Analysis and design of RC and LC oscillators. The four basic feedback topologies and the type of gain stabilized by each type of feedback.e. Triggering methods. Loop gain. Stabilization techniques. Distortion and cut off frequencies with feedback. Instability of tuned amplifiers. "Pulse Digital and Switching waveform". inverters. 2002 3. tuned amplifiers. wave shaping circuits. Linearization using constant current circuit. Nyquist criterion for stability of feedback amplifiers. Analysis of LC Oscillators. Analysis of feedback amplifiers. McGraw-Hill. Unit III TUNED AMPLIFIERS: Coil losses. Mechanism for start of oscillation and stabilization of amplitude. Schilling and Belove. Wienbridge Oscillator and twin-T Oscillators. Electrical equivalent circuit of Crystal. Unit V BLOCKING OSCILLATORS AND TIMEBASE GENERATORS: Monostable and Astable Blocking Oscillators using Emitter and base timing. Crystal Oscillator circuits. Storage delay and calculation of switching times. Schmitt trigger circuit. Diode clippers. Class C tuned amplifiers and their applications. Collector coupled and Emitter coupled Astable multivibrator. Broad banding using Hazeltine neutralization. Hartley. Tata McGraw-Hill 2001 2. Pushpull operation of Astable blocking oscillator i. blocking oscillators and time based generators. Bistable multivibrators. unloaded and loaded Q of tank circuits. Unit 1 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS: Block diagram. Unit II OSCILLATORS: Barkhausen Criterion... Clapp. Monostable multivibrator. Quartz Crystal Construction. Bootstrap and Miller saw-tooth generators. Desensitivity of gain. Millman J. Frequency control using core saturation. Gain with feedback.. Colpitts.

3.External Memory .ARM registers .sequence control . Sedra Smith. Unit IV 8051 BASIC ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS: The Assembly Language Programming Process .parallel I/O (8255) – Keyboard and Display controller (8279) -ADC/DAC interfacing – Inter Integrated Circuits interfacing (I2C Standard).Further Details on Interrupts.The ARM built . David A. Unit V ARM PROCESSOR AND ARCHITECTURE: The ARM processors . Robert L. Unit I 8085 CPU: 8085 Architecture – Instruction set – Addressing modes – Timing diagrams – Assembly language programming – Counters – Time Delays – Interrupts – Memory interfacing – Interfacing I/O devices. Bell.Jump and Call Instructions .Bus: RS232CRS485.Programming Tools and Techniques .  1. Course Outcome: • The students will gain adept knowledge in Microprocessor and Microcontroller terminologies.ARM instructions . Text Books   .Decimal Arithmetic .Arithmetic Operations . programming and interfacing of microprocessors and Microcontrollers.Serial data Input/Output Interrupts. PHI.Data Transfer and Logical Instructions .Input/Output Ports and Circuits .Counter and Timers . " Solid State Pulse Circuits ". 2.. Boylestead and Louis Nasheresky. 1992. Unit II PERIPHERALS INTERFACING: Interfacing Serial I/O (8251). 12MT217 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce and learn the architecture.ARM branch instructions . Prentice Hall of India.Data movement and memory reference instructions.in shift mechanism . 2002. 2004. “Micro Electronic Circuits” Oxford university Press.Programming the 8051 .8051 Micro controller Hardware .GPIB Unit III THE 8051 ARCHITECTURE: Introduction . 8th edn.

Third Edition. 3rd Edition. AERP. Microprocessors Theory and Applications: Intel and Motorola prentice Hall of India. Kenneth J Ayala. Microprocessor Architecture. “The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3". 4. 2000 2. composite video signal. Programming and application with 8085. Ray and K.. New Delhi. Transmitting antennas for digital television: patterns. Joseph Yiu. 2. Mohammed Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie Mazidi. New Delhi. Programming and Interfacing.  1. Pearson Education Asia. Ramesh S Gaonkar. 2007. Digital video fundamentals: spectrum of video signals. 4th Edition. Newnes Edition. 2000. 2003. 3rd Edition. Penram International Publishers (India). black box. the 80x86 Family. New Delhi. the 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application. 12MT218 DIGITAL TELEVISION & DIGITAL VIDEO ENGINEERING Credits: 4:0:0 Course objectives: • To Overview of current and emerging trends in digital television. A.K. 2002. Alan Clements. • To know and monitor basics and principles of digital television systems. Unit II DIGITAL TELEVISION TRANSMISSION: Transmission lines for digital television: fundamental parameters. types of digital television antennas. composite digital standards. 2003. Unit III   . M. VSWR. Design. 2. scanning standards. waveguide attenuation. Reference Books 1. New Delhi. Course Outcome: • To identify the techniques involved in digital television broadcasting and transmission. McGraw Hill International Edition. 2003 4. • Comparing the different standards of digital television standards. 2004. Unit 1 BASICS OF TELEVISION: eye brain mechanism. 3. Intel Microprocessors Architecture Programming and Interfacing. Oxford University Press. the 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems. Penram International Publishing. Ltd. Pearson Education.Burchandi.M. resolution concept. John Uffenbeck. "The principles of computer Hardware". Rafi Quazzaman. 3. Pvt. efficiency.

scrambling. Gerald W. modeling 3D objects. DVB coding and modulation. Interpolators for continuous changes. MPEG-2 systems layer. Unit IV CHANNEL CODING AND MODULATION FOR DTV: data synchronization. 2. Text Books 1. Michael Poulin “Digital Television Fundamentals”. texts and colours Unit II PRINCIPLES OF 3D GRAPHICS: Geometric transformations. Projections in Java 3D. interleaving. Alencar.Lines and pixel graphics. “ Digital Video And Audio Broadcasting Technology”. DTV standard converters. ginga middleware. transmission protocols. 8 VSB.  DTV NETWORKING AND TRANSPORT TECHNOLOGIES: networking and transmission protocols: reference architecture and components. forward error correction. Surface modeling. 12MT219 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the animation techniques. WiMAX. Picture quality analysis. Animational moving objects. interactivity channel. To make the students understand about the 2D animation production. Course Outcome: • To do the types of animation compositing techniques and post production in 2D animation Unit I PRINCIPLES OF 2D GRAPHICS: Basic geometric objects. Normal vectors for Java 3D   . Springer 2nd Edition 2008. reference model for DTV system. McGraw Hill 2nd Edition 2000.Areas.. transport layer. Applications of transformations. Transport technologies. IEEE1394. Digital television transmission standards. “Digital Television Transmission”. Cambridge University Press 2009. Antialiasing with Java 2D. Drawing arbitrary curve. 2. source coding. randomization. Michael Robin. implementations in Java 2D. Walter Fisher. middleware. Unit V INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM FOR DIGITAL TELEVISION: Introduction. Marcelo S. Structural algorithms.Collins. Geometric transformations. Animation and movements based on transformations. John Wiley & Sons 2001 Reference Books 1. data streaming. BST-OMFD. “Digital television Systems”. COFDM.

Computer Graphics for Java Programmers. Collision detection. Collision detention in Java 3D. Text Book: • Frank Klawonn. Reflections. Priority algorithms. Introduction to Computer Graphics Using Java 2D and 3D. steroscopic viewing. textures. Description of transformation in the display pipeline. shadings. Interaction in Java 3D. • The important component of this programme is to impart the aesthetics of film direction so that the student become capable of producing a show effectively.Doug Gehringer . Illumination and shading: Light sources.  Unit III VISIBLE SURFACE DETERMINATION: Clipping volumes. 2001 • Leen Ammeraal . Unit V INTRODUCTION TO ANIMATION:Homogeneous coordinates and transformation. Springer. Interpolation of rotations. Interpolation-Controlling the motion along a curve. Java 3D API Jump-Start. Algorithms for visible surface determination. textures in Java 3D Unit IV SPECIAL EFFECTS AND VIRTUAL REALITY: Fog and particle systems. Prentice Hall. 2007 12MT220 ELEMENTS OF VIDEO PRODUCTION Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the aesthetics of video production • To identify the elements of shot. • To understand the continuity of shots • To learn the editing principles Course Outcome: • Students should be equipped with the video production skills so that they may be able to direct the production. 2008 Reference Books: • Aaron E.Kang Zhang. ISBN-13: 9780470031605. Sound effects in Java 3D. Fog in Java 3D. Sound effects. Walsh . Image precision techniques. • To learn the camera options and production techniques. Dynamic surfaces Interaction. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO EQUIPMENTS: Digital Video Camera – Types Of Video Cameras – Format – Major Accessories – Camera Formats – Camera Operations And Functions   .

UNIT IV TYPES OF PRODUCTION: single camera production: the shot.continuity editing.documentary production – short film production – electronic field production – talk shows interviews.the realism of mise-en-scene – the power of mise-en-scene – time and space in mise-en-scene Unit III THE PRODUCTION: cinematography properties – basic types of shot . sequence.. production assistant. location scouting . lighting director. Dimensions of film sound – voice over – dubbing – re-recording – titling – adding special effects. art director.Focal Length – Depth Of Field – Video Signal – Video Format.  – Aperture – Shutter – White Balance –Focusing Methods . mise-en-scene: aspects of mise-enscene – lighting in a shot – setting aspect in a shot – character expression and movement – costume and makeup of the character . Digital Cinematography – Paul Wheeler.the crew – director. story board types of script. cameraman. Unit II THE SHOT:Elements of the shot: the shot – definition. Video Production techniques – zettl . etc.camera movement – camera framing – camera angle – duration of the shot – long take. script writer. lighting for a scene – colour temperature – dolly – trolley – grips and camera accessories – tripod – montage – lighting equipments. gaffer.the production phase. Text Books: 1.2002 12MT221 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To introduce to students the basics of microprocessor and microcontroller Programming and their applications. Course Outcome:   . Multi camera production – rehearsal – Floor manager . Unit IV UNDERSTANDING THE POST PRODUCTION: online production – offline production – the edl – dimensions of editing – spatial – rhythmic – graphic – temporal editing . Focal Press – 2001 2. music director. scene. Film Art – David Boardwell – Thirteenth Edition 2001 Reference Book 1..

Introduction to Action Script 11. Key frame. Data Transfer operation using 8085 3. Working with Layers 2. Programs on finding largest/smallest number using 8051 10. Code conversions using 8085 4. Animating rough blue and planning red d. Converting to symbols 8. RS232 Interfacing using 8051 12MT222 GRAPHICS AND ANIMATION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To train the students in the area of 2D Animation and its software applications. List of Experiments: 1. Compositing and camera movements for animation 6. Programs on ascending/descending order using 8051 11.  • The students will be equipped with the basic knowledge of microprocessor and microcontroller interfacing and their applications. Parallel port Interfacing using 8255 6. Course Outcome: • Students will gain the knowledge in computer graphics and animation. List of Experiments 1. Inbetweens & Secondary actions 4. Setup and Marking menus e. ADC Interfacing using 8085 7. Programs on finding largest/smallest number using 8085 5. The students will be trained in the area of basic character designing and concept designing in 2D animation. Motion guide 7. Embedding video 10. Frame by frame animation 3. Basic drawing tools c. Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8051 9. Software interface a. Creating basic movements using Action Script   . Creating effects using filters 9. Screen layout b. Stepper motor interfacing using 8051 12. Arithmetic and Logical operations using 8085 2. DAC Interfacing using 8085 8. To make the students understand the process of 2d animation production in studios. Tweening 5.

Single camera production 7.tables – using color and images . develop and manage web applications in media. Interview with a two. Using the Dolly. Unit II   .  12. DHTML & XML Course Outcome: • The students would learn to design. Keyboard and mouse interfacing using Action script 12MT223 VIDEO PRODUCTION LAB Credits : 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn practically pre production techniques in film production.XHTML.working with images – multimedia objects – working with frames – forms . Talk show with multi-camera setup 12. To learn the art of script preparation. The vision mixer 9.camera setup 11. Different lighting techniques for indoor production 4. Course Outcome: • To create the concept for avideo production. . The Camera interface 2. Dance show/cultural event with multi-camera setup 12MT224 WEB DESIGNING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • Enabling the student to build and manage web applications and have working knowledge in HTML . Basic shots and angles 3. Unit 1 HTML: Introduction to internet and world wide web –Basic html document body -working with text-Hyperlinks-formatting – list . Different lighting techniques for Outdoor production 5. trolley and tracking 6. On-location sound 8. Patching the studio for multi-camera setup 10. Knowing the process of video production techniques and the various script formats List of Experiments: 1..

Text Books 1. Shroff publishers.perl and CGI – CGI scripting – using RDBMS – creating and manipulating images – CGI environment variables – CGI.pm module – Debugging CGI applications and programs. “Web Technology” . year of publications 2007. spectrum. Noise factor. Beginning Perl. Thermal noise. “Internet and world wide web – How to Program”. Unit I WAVEFORM SPECTRA AND NOISE: Waveforms. Unit IV WEB TECHNOLOGY: Internet protocols – Internet Applications and application protocols – web browsers – web servers – web server scripting. “XML Bible”.  DHTML: Cascading style sheet – using styles – properties and values in styles – style sheets Data Binding – Simple Data Binding – Moving with a record set – Sorting table data – Binding of an Image and table. Pearson Education Asia. shot noise. demodulation and radio receivers. Chris Bates . Noise temperature. Apress reprint 2005 3. 2001. Sources of noise. Goldberg. digital multiplexing and modulation. year of publications 2003. second edition reprint 2003. Noise. • To understand the various noises in communication systems. Gopalan N. “Web Programming” . 2.Presenting xml . Energy signals. • To understand source digitization. Power signals. UNIT V CGI: Introduction – Building web application with perl . Signal to noise ratio. Unit III XML: Basic Xml – Defining data for web applications – Document type definition – Xml schema – Document object model .2003.XSL – xml applications – Xml with perl. Simon Cozens and Peter Wainwright. their operation and performance evaluation. Reference Books 1.   .P . Second Edition . IDG Books India (P) Ltd. First edition . 2. Deitel & Deitel. Course Outcome: • This course will provide a clear understanding of various communication system Techniques. 12MT225 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objectives: • To understand basic signals. HTML . analog modulation. low frequency noise. Steven Holzner .Dreamtech press . Elliotte Rusty Harold. Reprint Edition 2008 4. partition noise.

Preemphasis and De-emphasis. Delta modulation. Baud. Angle modulator. AGC. Taub and Schilling.  Unit II AMPLITUDE MODULATION: Amplitude modulation – Modulation Index. Basic digital communication systems. 2003. Sampling. DSBSC. FM broadcast and stereo receivers. FSK. Time division multiplexing. Principles of Communication Systems. balanced modulator. Line codes and waveforms. Text Book: 1. ASK. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NETWORKS: Introduction To Networks – Network Architecture – Network Performance – Direct Link Networks – Encoding – Framing – Error Detection – Transmission – Ethernet –Rings – FDDI – Wireless Networks – Switched Networks – Bridges Unit II   . Pulse Position Modulation. Course Outcome: • Students will be able to manage networks and the applications behind it. AM transmitters. Noise in FM. Pulse code modulation – Compression. Unit III FREQUENCY AND PHASE MODULATION: Frequency modulation – Frequency spectrum. “Electronic Communication Systems”. Differential PCM. QPSK. McGraw Hill. Single-sideband principles. Image rejection. AFC. Unit-V DIGITAL COMMUNICATION: Symbol. probability of error. 2000. Super heterodyne receiver. Frequency spectrum. McGraw Hill. power. Amplitude limiters. PSK. FM transmitter. Electronic Communications. Power. Phase modulation. Reference Books 1. Bit. Pulse Width Modulation. Modulator demodulator circuits. digital carrier systems. SSB generation. tuning range. Dennis John Roddy and Coolen. Deviation ratio.Kennedy. SSB reception. Equivalence between FM and PM. 12MT226 COMPUTER NETWORKS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce key trends on network principles and practices. 2. Angle modulation Detectors . G. • To provide a top down approach which focus on the internet and its accessible styles. 2003. Adjacent channel selectivity. PHI. Unit IV PULSE MODULATION: Pulse amplitude modulation. double –conversion receivers.

”computer and communication networks”. elsevier publishers inc. Unit IV DATA COMPRESSION: Data Compression – Introduction To JPEG.Multimedia Applications – Overlay Networks Text Book 1. Ross. 3. Pearson Education. Course Outcome: • To teach the students why advertising is part of Marketing Management and how it helps the industry. 2000. Andrew s. sixth edition. Tanenbaum. 2. 12MT227 ADVERTISING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the students to the advertising world and brief them on various stages involved in the process of producing & launching digital media advertisements. third edition.. 2003. 2004. Also. James f. “computer networks”.ARP – Reverse Address Resolution Protocol – Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol – Internet Control Message Protocol – Routing – Routing Algorithms – Addressing – Subnetting – CIDR – Inter Domain Routing – IPV6 Unit III TRANSPORT LAYER: Transport Layer – User Datagram Protocol (UDP) – Transmission Control Protocol – Congestion Control – Flow Control – Queuing Disciplines – Congestion Avoidance Mechanisms. Mir. “computer networking: a top-down approach featuring the internet”. 2007. Unit I   . davie. Pearson Education. fourth edition. MPEG. “Data and Computer Communication”. the offshoot of advertising in to Public Relations has also been deliberated to give an insight to this area. Iarry l. • Students will come to know the stages through which manufacturers have to travel for promoting their products by deploying various advertising techniques. consumers & the society to progress. Peterson and Bruce s. Kuross and Keith w. Reference Books 1. 2007. Nader f. William Stallings. “computer networks: a systems approach”. Addision Wesley. fourth edition. MP3 – Cryptography – Symmetric-Key – Public-Key – Authentication – Key Distribution – Key Agreement PGP – SSH – Transport Layer Security – IP Security – Wireless Security – Firewalls Unit V NETWORK APPLICATIONS: Domain Name System (DNS) – E-Mail – World Wide Web (HTTP) – Simple Network Management Protocol – File Transfer Protocol (FTP)– Web Services . 4. PHI.  INTER-NETWORKING: Internetworking – IP .

Text Book 1. Publications.Advertisement vs.Audience and Buyer Behaviour analysis. The Challenges of Public Relations by C.Role of Out Door Media & New Media in Advertising .Ethics and Regulations for Advertising & Public Relations. Consumer & to the Society Advertising Communication . Unit IV CHANNELS OF MASS MEDIA – Merits & demerits of each Media .Rural Advertising in India. New Delhi 2004 12MT228 DIGITAL COMPOSITING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To teach students about different concepts involved in digital compositing which will help them to apply these entire concepts practically. 2001 Reference Books 1. Har Anand Publications.Responsibility of the Advertising Manager – Client Servicing – Advertisement Campaign & Sales Promotion – Advertising Audiences . Advertising & Media Management by Meena Devi.K. Unit I   .Role of Advertising in Public Relations – Public Relations in Government. Propaganda.Evaluation of Advertisement effectiveness. Publicity vs.Media Planning – Creative thinking & Strategy – Producing Electronic Media Advertisings . Strategy & Plans for launching Advertisement Campaigns . Public and Private Sectors. Unit III SEGMENTATION OF THE MARKET. Bovee . New Delhi 2009 2. Public Relation and Corporate Communications .  OVER VIEW OF ADVERTISING – Advertising in Marketing – Marketing & Promotion Mix – Importance of advertising to the Manufacturing Industry. Advertising Excellence : McGraw –Hill Inc. Course Outcome: • The students will have good knowledge about the latest trends and technologies involved in digital compositing and they will be able to apply all these concepts practically. Sardana. Targeting Audience and Positioning the Product Advertising Research – Conducting & Using Research – Developing Objectives. Courtland L. Unit II ROLE OF ADVERTISING AGENCY – Structure & Types of Agencies – National & International Agencies . Unit V WHAT & WHY OF PUBLIC RELATIONS . Alpha Publications.Types & Functions of Advertising – Merits & Demerits of Advertising .

Normalized Values. Compression. Methods of representing the compositing process. Nonlinear Color encoding. Compositing With Pre multiplied Images. scale and perspective. Image Viewing and Analysis Tools. Choosing a Format. second edition. Lighting and Shooting with Blue screens. Film Stock. Temporal Resolution. Matched Cameras. digital color matching. Format Conversion Pipeline . Motion Blur. Timelines. Choosing the Feature to Track. Reference Stand-in. Additional Channels. Camera Movements. Digital Compositing for Film and Video. Limiting the Search Area. Morphing. lens flares. Specialized Film Formats. Time and Temporal Manipulations: Apparent Motion. Coriolis. Atmosphere.  DIGITAL REPRESENTATION OF VISUAL INFORMATION: Image Generation. converting and combining formats Unit V CREATING ELEMENTS AND INTEGRATION TECHNIQUES: Lighting. Digital Composting in-Depth. Focus. Other Formats. The Integrated Matte Channel. Film Formats: 35mm Formats . Shooting Order. Interactive Lighting. Blue screen versus Green screen. Choosing a File Format. Spatial filters. Filters. Image Input Devices. The Art and Science of Digital Compositing. Morgan Kaufmann. camera characteristics: Camera Mismatches.Vendor –specific File Format Implementations. Film Grain and sensor noise. spill suppression. Unit II BASIC IMAGE MANIPULATION AND COMPOSITING: Terminology. Common video formats. Components. Interface Interactions: Workflow. Curve Editors. 2006 2. Working With Proxy Images. Deciding on a Resolution for an Aspect Ratio. Masks. Expression Language. File Format Features . Digital Image File Formats. 12MT229 IP TV   . Working with non square pixels. 2000. motion blur. Matte Image. Bit Depth. matte manipulations. Channels. Pixels. the evolution of Interactivity. Tracking Multiple Points. Integration Techniques: Scene Continuity. Temporal Artifacts. Shadows. Reference Books 1. Unit III IMAGE TRACKING AND STABILIZATION: Tracking an Element into a Plate. Format Conversion Example. Changing the Length or Timing of a Sequence. Filtering Algorithms. Procedural matte extraction. Focal Press. Spatial Resolution. Text Book 1. Lighting. Color Manipulations. geometric transformations. Unit IV FILM FORMATS: Aspect Ratio: Non square Pixels. Multi source Operators. Dough Kelly. Using Tracking Curves Manually. HSV and YUV Color Representation. Gamma. Ron Brinkmann. Stabilizing a Plate. Color Resolution. light wrapping. Color and lighting. Steve Wright.16mm Formats. Clean Plates. Key Framing. Human Intervention. Matte creation and manipulation: Rotoscoping. 2008. Video Formats: Fields. Camera tracking.

Wes &Howard Greenfield. 2007. Intl. ISBN: 978-0240812458 2. Operation and Services . software. Howard J. ISBN193281356X Reference Books 1. Text Books 1. Wiley  . 2007. IPTV and Internet Video. Gerard O'Driscoll. their bandwidths etc Unit I INTRODUCTION: Introduction: Internet Protocol-Market for IP Video-Characteristics of IPTV-Internet video-IPTV versus internet video-constructing an IPTV network-constructing an internet video System Unit II INTERNET PROTOCOL: Internet Protocol & video compression: Packet – types of IP Networks-IP Addresses-key parts of an IP network-Transport protocols-Multicasting-video compression-groups of pictures-MPEGMicrosoft Windows Media and VC-1-Other compression techniques Unit III VIDEO QUALITY & SERVERS: Video Quality& servers: Maintaining video quality and security-video servers-video on demand servers-advertising servers-live streaming serversencryption and right management. Unit IV DSL TECHNOLOGIES: Bandwidth: DSL technologies-DSLAM-Home gateway-multiple televisions-Calculate Bandwidth. The Basics of IPTV. Focal press. Technology. • To introduce key trends and drivers transforming the world of broadcast television and the Web. Next Generation IPTV Services and Technologies. Lawrence Harte. Engineering Consortium. Unit V SET TOP BOX: Set top boxes & Internet video technologies: Basic functions-middleware-STB selection issues internet video technologies-types of internet streaming-commercial playerscontent creation workflows. and Internet technologies. Gunn.  Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide an overview of hardware. ISBN 9781931695589 2. Course Outcome: • Students will know the working of internet protocol and other characteristics like video compression.IPTV Basics. Second Edition: Expanding the Reach of Television Broadcasting.

ISBN :0470163720 3. Developing E-Commerce Sites – An Integrated Approach. Vivek Sharma. Addison Wesley. Usage of Application and session objects 4. XML 8.  Interscience. Usage of databases in XML 11. 2000. 2. Brian Francis. Usage of Cookies in ASP. To understand the usage of data bases.0 Programmer’s Reference. Elliot Rusty Harold. Usage of databases in ASP 6. References 1. Applying animations and multimedia effects through XML 10. The students will be trained to programme ASP and XML. 2. ISBN: 0849374154 12MT230 WEB DESIGNING LAB Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn creation of web pages. 2000. Gilbert Held. 2007. IDG books India (P) Ltd. IDG Books India (P) Ltd. Creating simple web pages using XML 9. Rajiv Sharma. 3. Web pages using XSL. Richard Anderson. ASP 3. Adding data entry features 5. Course Outcome:   . 2000. Usage of scripting objects 3.. Creation of Simple Web pages. XML Bible”. application and special objects. 2006. List of Experiments: ASP 1. First Edition. CRC Press. Understanding IPTV. scripting objects. 12MT231 COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS LAB Credits 0:0:2 Course Objective • To learn circuit design and understand the theoretical concepts by hands on with circuit connections in breadboard for communication and Audio application. Usage of components in ASP 7. Dan Denault. Course Outcome: • To develop a webpage for commercials requirements. Simple web page using XML 12.

Radiation Pattern of Antennas 12MT232 VIDEO POST PRODUCTION LAB Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • The students will be practically taught to apply post production techniques. Active Filters Design 3. Titling 9. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis Circuits Design 7. Software interface 2. Basic edit-Importing files and arranging of shots. List of Experiments: 1. Signal analyzers and Function Generators to test electronics Circuits • Correctly analyze a circuit and compare its theoretical performance to actual performance. List of Experiments: 1. Adding Effects 5. Editing for a Cultural/Dance show   . Multivibrator Circuits Design 9. DSO. Frequency Modulation & Demodulator 5. Adding transitions 4. trim 3. Chroma keying 8. Study of Sampling Theorem 10. PLL applications 12. Time Division Multiplexing 11. Time warp 7. Editing for a Music Video 12. cut. Mixer 8. Editing for an Interview 10. Amplitude Modulation & Diode Detector 4. Editing for a talk-show 11. IF amplifier. Classes of Amplifiers Design 6. Color correction 6. • Correctly operate standard electronics test equipment such as CRO. Course Outcome: • Students will be creatively and technically work in TV and Film Industry.  On Completion of this lab the Student will be able to: • Implement properly any constructed circuits. Equalizer 2.

Rafael C.Texture Text Book 1. Indian Reprint. sharpening filters – Laplacian filters – Frequency domain filters . 9th edition. Unit II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES: Spatial Domain methods: Basic grey level transformation – Histogram equalization – Image subtraction – Image averaging –Spatial filtering: Smoothing.  12MT233 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the fundamental concepts of Image processing techniques. Woods. Unit V IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND REPRESENTATION: Edge detection – Thresholding Region Based segmentation – Boundary representation: chair codes.smoothing –Sharpening-filters-Homomorphic-filtering. PHI 2nd edition. 2002   . “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”.Polygonal approximation – Boundary segments – boundary descriptors: Simple descriptors-Fourier descriptors . Unit IV IMAGE COMPRESSION: Lossless compression: Variable length coding – LZW coding – Bit plane coding.Jain. “Digital Image Processing”. 2002 Reference Books 1. Course Outcome: • Can develop simple algorithms for image processing. Anil K. Lossy Compression: Transform coding – Wavelet coding – Basics of Image compression standards: JPEG. Unit III IMAGE RESTORATION: Model of Image Degradation/restoration process – Noise models – Inverse filtering -Least mean square filtering – Constrained least mean square filtering – Blind image restoration – Pseudo inverse – Singular value decomposition. MPEG.Regional descriptors –Simple descriptors. Unit I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS AND TRANSFORMS : Elements of visual perception – Image sampling and quantization Basic relationship between pixels – Basic geometric transformations-Introduction to Fourier Transform and DFT – Properties of 2D Fourier Transform – FFT – Separable Image Transforms -Walsh – Hadamard – Discrete Cosine Transform-Haar-Slant–Karhunen–Loeve-transforms.Basics of Vector quantization.predictive coding-DPCM. Prentice Hall of India.Gonzalez and Richard E.

Laying down MIDI tracks .Cables .normalizing audio tracks .Audio file preparation .Effect Processors .Driver installation basics . MASTERING AND ARCHIVING: The Stereo field .Virtual MIDI instruments . Unit II AUDIO/MIDI HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SETUP: PCI cards .Headphones and Monitors – Surface controller . Unit III MUSIC PRODUCTION – MIDI: What is MIDI .Punch-in recording Common MIDI Recording Problems and their Solutions .side sequencing – Setting the index and gap .Additional instruments .Desktop.Mixer .Trimming digital audio tracks .   .Basic track recording .Quantization options .Software .Test run.MIDI connections .Overdubing .Computer options. William. Unit V MIXING. Unit IV MUSIC PRODUCTION . bass. Course Outcome: • This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically aware of the technologies and production tools in the music production industry.USB . volume and overtones .Unlisted MIDI devices .  2.Patch setup .Archiving the project.DIGITAL AUDIO: Recording fundamentals .MIDI modes .2002 12MT234 COMPUTER BASED MUSIC PRODUCTION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The students who are musically inclined will be taught the fundamentals involved in choosing the right components to make a digital audio workstation and to use MIDI and digital audio tools in music production.Mastering .Preparing tracks for audio editing .monitoring the mix frequency.Burning and packaging the audio CD .PCMCIA Cards .Audio interface considerations .Dynamic Processors .Sample rates and resolutions -Recording in the computer room .Audio interface features .Pratt.Basic MIDI editing.Template setup .A short mixing primer: Drums. K.MIDI interface types and features . John Wiley and Sons.The Final mixdown .Mac Vs PC debate . Unit I THE DAW AND IT’S PERIPHERALS: The Computer .volume .MIDI channels .MAC and PC driver/software setup . 3rd edition.EQ types .FireWire/ iLink .Microphones Miscellaneous equipment .Step recording .Creating a new song file Setting up song parameters .Surface controller setup .Analog and Digital audio recording . “Digital Image Processing”.Status bytes and Data bytes – MIDI implementation charts . guitars and vocals .The need for speed .Audio and MIDI Interfaces . Laptop and Tabletop computers and specific users .Creating comp takes.Wet Vs Dry recording – Mix and individual track MIDI to digital audio conversion .

International trade in audio visual contents. Reference Books: 1. Andrea Pejrolo. entertainment programs. Decision making. Martin Russ. Unit II MEDIA AND PR: Introduction to media: Overview of media/ the media industry in India/ Types of Media/ role of each medium/ advantages and disadvantages of each medium. Market structure. Third Edition. understanding value added services. 2006 2. Tim McCormick. 3. Francis Rumsey. Unit IV NEW MEDIA: Internet and E-commerce. Media Economics and Public Policy. Focal Press. 2005. “Sound and Recording: An Introduction”. Television programme production-Economics of programme supply. leveraging new media. Key economics characteristics of the media.   . Unit III PRINT AND TELEVISION MEDIA: Economic characters of news paper and broadcasting. etc Course Outcome: • The students will be well versed with all the economic policies and practices of media companies. using SMS. internet and mobile communication and possibilities. economics of scale. 12MT235 MEDIA ECONOMICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the economic policies and practices of media companies and disciples including journalism and the news industry. 5rd edition. Focal Press. 2009. Economics of Advertising. demand and supply. increasing economics of scale and scope interactivity. The relationship between marketing and Advertising and PR/ The relationship between sales and PR/ how sales benefits from PR. Digitalized media contents. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA ECONOMICS: Macroeconomics and microeconomics. print. “Beginner’s guide to computer based music production”. film production. Cherry lane music company. Publicly funded broadcasting.  Text Book: 1. “Creative sequencing techniques for Music Production”. vertical supply chain for television. Focal Press. economics of scope. 2004. economic methodologies. Ownership Structure. understanding streaming video net and mobile. Impact of new distribution technologies. Role of PR in the success of a product /service. “Sound Synthesis and Sampling”. Zack Price.

C. Digital filters. Understanding of common terminology and jargon in media. Reference Books: 1. • Develop and realize computationally efficient algorithms on the DSP platform • Optimize DSP code (e. 2007. D/A Conversion Errors. concentrated media ownerships. Decimation and interpolation. structuring sponsorship deals. Gillian Doyle. Unit III   . 2. • Perform worst-case timing analysis on real-time DSP systems. Prentice Hall. Unit I INTORODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESING : Introduction. Sage. Discrete time sequences. Philip Kotler. Marketing Management. Understanding Media Economics. Media Economics-Applying Economics New and Traditional Media. DSP using MATLAB. • Understand how digital to analog (D/A) and analog to digital (A/D) converters operate on a signal and be able to model these operations mathematically. • Use Z transforms and discrete time Fourier transforms to analyze a digital Signals Course Outcome: • Describe the architecture and basic operation of fixed-point and floating-point DSPs.ColinHoskins. Sage Publications. 12MT236 Credits: 3:0:0 DSP PROCESORS Course Objective: • Program a DSP chip to filter signals using either assembly language or a C compiler for the chip. Monopolies and technological change: Events and sponsorships.g. Analysis and Design tool for DSP Systems MATLAB. Linear time-invariant systems. Dynamic Range and Precision. Unit II COMPUTATIONAL ACCURACY IN DSP IMPLEMENTATIONS : Number formats for signals and coefficients in DSP systems. overview of how events are marketed. Text Books 1.  Unit V MEDIA ECONOMICS AND PUBLIC POLICY: Free market Vs interventions. A Digital signalprocessing system. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). certain sponsorship proposals. 2003. Compensating filter. Sources of error in DSP implementations. A/D Conversion errors.R. software pipelining). support measures for media contents. The sampling process. DSP Computational errors. 2003.

DSP Processor Fundamentals. Program Control. Features for External interfacing. 2000. TMH. Pipeline Programming models. telecom research. Unit V PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS : Commercial Digital signalprocessing Devices. Experimental versus Popular music. 12MT237 Credits: 3:0:0 AUDIO SAMPLING AND SYNTHESIS Course Objective: • To impart basic knowledge of sound sampling and synthesis techniques with applications. Programming and Applications – B. Interrupts. Digital Signal Processing – Avtar Singh and S. 2005. Bus Architecture and Memory. Pipeline Operation of TMS320C54XX Processors. Data Addressing Capabilities. Memory space of TMS320C54XX Processors. 2004. On-Chip Peripherals. Address Generation Unit. Pipeline Depth. MIDI. Venkata Ramani and M. Relative Branch support. Bhaskar. Thomson Publications. 2. synthesis classics. Chand & Co. Reference Books 1. Interrupt effects. 2. electro acoustic music. Branching effects.  ARCHITECTURES FOR PROGRAMMABLE DSP DEVICES : Basic Architectural features. fundamental principles of electronics and acoustics. Interrupts of TMS320C54XX processors. Unit IV EXECUTION CONTROL AND PIPELINING : Hardware looping. John Wiley. Interlocking. Course Outcome: • Develop understanding on sound synthesis techniques Unit I SOUND SYNTHESIS: Digital signal and sampling. Synthesis. tape techniques. Data Addressing modes of TMS320C54XX DSPs. Architectures & Features – Lapsley et al. DSP Computational Building Blocks. Srinivasan. Data Addressing modes of TMS320C54XX Processors. Architecture. Digital Signal Processors. TMS320C54XX instructions and Programming. Text Books 1. Programmability and Program Execution. Unit II   . 2004. Pipelining and Performance. Stacks. Digital Signal Processing – Jonatham Stein. Speed Issues. S.

FM.wave table. hocketing. subtractive synthesis. Design Examples. ployphony. Example instruments. additive synthesis. Focal Press. Hybrid synthesis. Unit I EMBEDDED COMPUTING: Embedded Computing: Introduction. waveshaping. Unit III DIGITAL SYNTHESIS TECHNIQUES: Digital signals. closing the circles. Multiple Interrupts. Ist Edition. Serial Data Communication. drum machines. 3rd edition. Controllers. DCO. Example instruments. D/A and A/D Conversions. Early versus modern implementations. GM. Toplogy. groove boxes. role of electronics. commercial imperatives. 2009 Reference Book 1. guitar controls. Displays. Unit II MICROCONTROLLER APPLICATIONS: Microcontroller 8051 Applications: Interfacing with Keyboards. Martin Russ-Sound synthesis and sampling-Focal Press. layering. stacking.analog and digital. Audio Sampling . Text Book 1.  ANALOG SYNTHESIS TECHNIQUES: Analog sampling. Formalisms for System Design. multi-timbrality. Complex Systems and Microprocessor. sequences. Analogue synthesis. foot controls. accompaniment. Unit III   . control. studios on computers.controller and expander. Sam McGuire. keyboard controls. editing.arranging.digital techniques. sample and synthesis. other methods of analog synthesis. FOF and other techniques. granular synthesis. 2008 12MT238 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce and learn the concepts of embedded computing with microcontroller and Real time Operating Systems. Unit IV SYNTHESIS APPLICATIONS: Using synthesis. Roy Pritts. on-board effects.A Practical Guide. Analysis-Synthesis. Unit V PERFOMANCE AND ANALYSIS: Synthesis live. Analysis. MIDI control. Course Outcome: • The students will gain adept knowledge in embedded system technologies. hybrid techniques.future of synthesis. The Embedded System Design Process. workstations. ribbon controls. modelling.

Oxford University Press. Unit IV DESIGN USING RTOS: Basic Design Using a Real . Embedded Software Development Tools: Host and Target machines. “Embedded Systems” McGraw Hill. Message Queues. Timer Functions. 2.Time Operating System : Principles. Computers as Components-principles of Embedded computer system design. Mailboxes and Pipes. An example RTOS like uC OS (Open Source). Unit V RISC: The RISC revolution . Unit I   . 3rd Edition. Debugging Techniques: Testing on Host Machine. 12MT239 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL AUDIO Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce and learn the concepts of digital audio production. and Shared Data. 2003. “Embedded Systems Design”. The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture Programming and Application. 8051 and 8096.Pipeline bubbles .  REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS: Introduction to Real – Time Operating Systems: Tasks and Task States. S Chand Publishers. Reference Books 1. Kenneth J Ayala.Reducing the branchpenalties-branchprediction Text Books 1. New Delhi. “The principles of computer Hardware”. Tony Givargis. Memory Management. New Delhi.Window overflow . 2004. Wayne Wolf.The Berkeley RISC – Register Windows . Getting Embedded Software into the Target System. Raj Kamal. Hard Real-Time Scheduling Considerations. 2. 2006 3. Semaphores and Queues.Windows and parameter passing . Interrupt Routines in an RTOS-Environment. Frank Vahid. New Delhi.Accessing external memory in RISC systems . Simon. Addision Wesley. Rajkamal. Using LaboratoryTools. 2008. perceptual coding and PC audio buses. 2005 4. Elseveir. Penram International Publishers (India). The concepts and feature of micro controllers 68HC11. “An Embedded Software Primer”.RISC architecture and pipelining . Tasks and Data. 3. Semaphores.Characteristics of RISC Architecture . David E. Alan Clements. Saving Memory and Power. 3rd Edition. 2nd Edition. Events. Wiley India. Course Outcome: • Students can work in applied audio technology. Linker/Locators for Embedded Software.

Reference Books 1. Analog-to-Digital Converter-Successive Approximation-Oversampling A/D Converter. Alternate Coding Methods-µ-Law and A-Law Companding-DPCM-Adaptive Delta modulationCompanded Predictive Delta Modulation-ADPCM-Timebase Correction-Error Correction Unit III MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE: Recording Bandwidth-Digital Magnetic Tape-Inter Symbol Interference Longitudinal Magnetic Recording-vertical magnetic Recording-Stationary Head Tape Recorders-Rotary Head Tape recorders. Principles of Digital Audio. Record Processing-Channel Codes. 2006 2. Peter Kirn. Unit IV PERCEPTUAL CODING: Psychoacoustics-Physiology of Human Ear-Data Reduction Coding-MPEG1 Audio Satandard-MPEG2 Audio Standard-AC-3(Dolby Digital) Coder-DVDPhysical Specifications-UDF-DVD Audio-Video-Meridian Lossless packing-The Mini DiscInterconnection. Real World Digital Audio. Fourth Edition. 2002 12MT240 DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective:   . Peachpitt Press. Internet Audio-Computer Networks and File Transfer-MP3-SDMI-Streaming audio-MPEG4-Satellite Operation-Digital Audio Radio-Inband Digital Radio-Direct satellite Radio Text Book 1. Ken Pohlmann.  SOUND AND NUMBERS: Fundamentals of Digital Audio-Sampling Theorem-AliasingQuantization-Dither-Digital Audio Recording-Pulse Code Modulation-Dither Generator-Input Low Pass Filter-Sample and Hold Circuit. Introduction to Digital Audio. Focal Press. Unit V PC AUDIO-PC Buses and Interfaces-Sound Cards-Digital Audio Extraction-PC Audio Software Applications. Digital Audio Tape(DAT)-Cassette-Modeshardware Design-Track Format-Eight to ten Modulation-DAT Error Correction-Prerecorded DAT-Professional DAT-Optical Disc Storage-Compact Disc. Mc Graw Hill. Unit II DIGITAL AUDIO REPRODUCTION: Reproduction Processing-DAC Converter-Output Sample and Hold Circuit-Output Low pass filter-Impulse Response-Digital Filter. Second Edition . Ist Edition. 2000. John Watkinson.

. Video Sampling Rate ConversionConversion of Signals Sampled on Different Lattices-Sampling Rate Conversion of Video Signals. Digital Video-Notation-ITU-R. • Students will have some knowledge about mathematical modeling of video. Frequency Response of the Human Visual System-Temporal Frequency Response and Flicker Perception-Spatial Frequency ResponseSpatiotemporal Frequency Response-Smooth Pursuit Eye Movement. Coding of Audiovisual Objects with PMEG-4   . PERCEPTION AND REPRESENTATION: Video Capture and Display. Unit I VIDEO FORMATION. • Students will gain a comprehensive understanding of various video processing tasks including Denoising. Deinterlacing and post-processing.601 Digital Video Forma Unit II FOURIER ANALYSIS AND HUMAN VISUAL SYSTEM RESPONSE: Multidimensional Continuous-Space Signals and Systems.-Video Display-Composite versus Component Models-Gamma Correction. Object Model. Two-Dimensional Motion Estimation-Optical Flow-General Methodologies-Pixel-Based Motion Estimation-Block-Matching AlgorithmMultiresolution Motion Estimation-Application of Motion Estimation in Video Coding. • Students will grasp the most important classes of motion estimation techniques including optical flow estimation. restoration. Course Outcome: • Students will understand the acquisition and format of digital video signals.261 and H. Sampling of Video Signals Over Lattices. Chrominance-and Audio.Digital TV with MPEG-2-Systems-Audio-Video-Profiles.BT.263-H. biometrics and biomedical engineering. Analog Video Raster-Progressive Vs Interlaced scansCharacterization of Video Raster-Spatial and Temporal resolution.Principles of Color Video-Video Cameras.261 Overview-H. Two-Dimensional Motion Models. super-resolution. Video Compression Standards-Video Telephony with H.  • This course covers algorithmic aspects of digital video processing and important industrial applications such as video communication. block matching algorithm and Bayesian estimation. Scene Model. Multidimensional discrete-Space Signals and Systems. Signal BandwidthMultiplexing of Luminance.MOTION ESTIMATION: Camera Model. Frequency Domain Characterization of Video Signals-Spatial and Temporal FrequenciesTemporal Frequencies Caused by Linear Motion.263 Highlights-Comparison. human-computer interaction. Unit V WAVEFORM BASED CODING AND VIDEO COMPRESSION STANDARDS: Waveform-Based Video Coding-Block-Based Transform Coding-Predictive Coding-Video Coding Using Temporal Prediction and Transform Coding. Filtering Operations in Cameras and Display Devices. Unit IV VIDEO MODELING AND 2D . video surveillance. Unit III VIDEO SAMPLING: Basics of the Lattice Theory.

RMS. Springer Publication. 2004 Reference Books 1. • To introduce various techniques in maintaining and repairing of audio-visual equipments.Computer and Processor.Soldering.Multitrack Recorders. • Basic repair and services of equipments will be learned.Patch Bay WiringCable Routing.Basic Electronics. 2002 2.Metering-VU.Rotary Head Tape Recorders -.Speakers and Microphones. A. Current. Unit I EXPLANATIONS AND CALCULATIONS: Electricity .R. Cable Repair. Course Outcome: • After the course the students will be able to have an in-depth knowledge in maintaining Equipments in the studio. PPm and Correlation-RF Transmissions – AM and FM. Academic Press.Compressors and Limiters. Prentice Hall. Tekalp Digital Video.Advanced Formulas for Calculations.Amplifier Diagnostics.I.Processors and Outboard Gear ServiceText Book   .Wire Sizes and Maximum Current for Each Wire. Academic Press.Tools-Test Equipment.  Text Book 1. 2004 12MT241 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE & SERVICING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide a thorough understanding of the working of studio equipments. .Technical Power and Current RequirementsUnit II SIGNALS AND EQUIPMENT: Balanced and Unbalanced Signals.Bovik. Pot and Fader Cleaning-Lighting Equipment Cleaning Unit V SERVICE AND REPAIRS: Speaker Damage and Repairs. David R Bull et al Video Coding for Mobile Communications. Multimedia Communication Technology. and Reactance. and RF Interference Cures.Amplifier Cleaning. J.Basic Formulas for Calculations-Decibels. Cleaning.Analog Tape Recorder Calibration.Mixing Console. and Resistance Basic Electronics: AC Voltage. 2005 3.Wireless – Microphones Unit III AUDIO LINES: Cables and Connectors-Equipment and Rack Grounding.Digital. Current.A 48-Volt Phantom Power Supply Project Unit IV MAINTENANCE: Cleaning Chemicals and Applications.Fixed Head Tape Recorders -Analog. Handbook on Image and Video Processing.DC Voltage.Ohm.

Noise temperature. John Markus. Compression-Encryption and Decryption techniques Unit IV EARTH STATION PARAMETERS: Earth station location. Attitude and orientation control. Propagation actors. Frequency Selection. Analog and Digital transmission systems. E-mail. “Electronic Servicing and Repairs”. Reference Books 1. Geo stationary orbits. Mobile satellite service: GSM. multiple acess techniques:FDMA. Spread spectrum communication. McGrawHill/TAB Electronics – 2004. INMARSAT. G/T. Rain and ice effects. Measurements on G/T and Eb/No Unit V SATELITE APPLICATIONS: INTELSAT Series. Remote sensing. C/No. Low. System noise. Payload and supporting subsystems. SPADE. Video conferencing and Internet Connectivity Text Book   . Direct to Home service(DTH).TDMA. Video. Polarization Calculations Unit III ACCESS TECHNIQUES: Modulation and Multiplexing: Voice. GPS. Limits of visibility. Satellite Navigation System. Cassegrania feeds. Assignment Methods. Frequency co-ordination and regulatory services. Course Outcome: • To enable the student to become familiar with satellites and satellite services. “Recording Studio Technology. • To study earth segment and space segment components. Trevor Linsley. Data. VSAT. • To know satellite orbits and launching. 12MT242 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand satellite systems in relation to other terrestrial systems. Mc Graw Hill –2002. study of satellite access by various users and DTH and compression standards. Spin stabilization techniques. Sun transit outages. Maintenance.CDMA. Unit 1 ORBITAL PARAMETERS: Orbital parameters. Earth and Medium orbits. Tom McCartney.  1.T1-T2 carrier systems. propagation effects of ground. Gimbal platform Unit II LINK CALCULATIONS: Space craft configuration. Orbital perturbations. Newnes – Second Edition 2000 2. Satelite uplink -down link power budget.SS-TDMA. “Television and Radio Repairing”. and Repairs”. INSAT. Special services. High power transmitters-Klystron Crossed field devices.

1993 3. New Jersey. Billboards.1983 4.1997 2. Creating an OGRE Application Using a Wizard. Documentation. Unit IV EXPLORING OGRE 3D: 3D Scenes. OGRE Log. Open Media Formats Text Book   . Resources.Elbert.2nd Edition.New Jersey. Sound and Music. Unit I GAME PROGRAMMING & 2D GAMES AND CLANLIBGAME DEVELOPMENT: Software Abstraction. Games and the Message Loop. Running the OGRE 3D Samples. Materials and Scripts.Pritchard. Graphics Rendering Unit II CLANLIB: Core Classes & ClanLib-Scene Management.Eaglewood Cliff. McGraw-Hill Publication Third edition 2001 Reference Books 1.Ha. 2D Games and Images. GraphicsSound and Music. Bruce R."Digital staelite communiocation". Sprites. XML.New york.images .Hendri G. Scenes and Design. Unit V OTHER GAMING LIBRARIES: Install and Sound. Course Outcome: • At the end of this course students will be able to develop their own games using C++ programming language. development of surfaces. Downloading ClanLibBuilding ClanLib.  1.making scenes are all learnt.Nelson. Transformation.New Jersey.Suyderhood. Drawing. "The Satelite Communication Applications Hand Book. Installing OGRE 3D. Tri T. Input. Satellite Communications."Staelite Communication Systems Engineering". First ClanLib Application. FMOD. OGRE. Particle Systems Frame Listeners. More Middleware.Digital communication satelite / Earth Station Engineering. Open-Source Software.1990 5. Cameras.1983 12MT243 GAME PROGRAMMING WITH C++ Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To learn 2D and 3D game programming using C++ programming language in detail. K. prentice Hall Inc. ClanLib. Scripting.Robert A. sound . Regents/Prentice Hall. Scene Implementation. Dennis Rody.McGraw Hill. Painting a Layer. Drawing Surfaces. Surfaces. Dennis Roddy. Creating 3D Scenes. Scene Node Properties and Methods. NSISWindows Installer. Wilbur L. Lights.IIEdition. Scenes. BASS. Downloading OGRE 3D. Overview -Using Scene Manager Unit III 3D GAMES: OGRE 3D." Satelite Communication".Prentice Hall. Artech House Boston. Compiling the OGRE 3D Samples. painting.Feher. Layers. Creating an OGRE Application Manually.

LearningRules. Pattern Mathematics. Alan Thorn. Continuous and Multi-Category. McCulloch-Pitts Model. Unsupervised. Wordware Publishing Inc. Charles River Media . Introduction to Game Programming with C++.C++ for Game Programmers. Stability Analysis. Course Outcome: • Students will be able to develop artificial intelligence systems. Operations of Artificial Neuron. Storage and Recall Algorithm. Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) Architecture. Unit IV MULTILAYER FEED FORWARD NEURAL NETWORKS: Credit Assignment Problem. Biological Neuron. Reinforcement).2006. The Neural Network to Systems Engineering is also presented. Historical Developments. Derivation of Backpropagation (BP) Training. Reference Books 1.  1. David Conger and Ron Little . Characteristics of ANN. Perceptron Models: Discrete. Also deals with Associate Memories and introduces Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic system components. ANN Architectures. Architecture of Hopfield Network: Discrete and Continuous versions. Training Algorithms: Discrete and Continuous Perceptron Networks. Learning Difficulties and Improvements. Classification Taxonomy of ANN – Connectivity. 12MT244 NEURAL NETWORKS Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • This course introduces the basics of Neural Networks and essentials of Artificial Neural Networks with Single Layer and Multilayer Feed Forward Networks. Potential Applications-of-ANN. Summary of Backpropagation Algorithm. BAM Energy Function. BAM Training Algorithms: Storage and Recall Algorithm. First Impression. Text Book   . Limitations of the Perceptron Model. General Concepts of Associative Memory. Creating Games In C++. Unit V ASSOCIATIVE MEMORIES: Paradigms of Associative Memory. 2. Types of Neuron Activation Function. KolmogorovTheorem. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction. Humans and Computers. Organization of the Brain. 2007. Learning Strategy (Supervised. Unit II ESSENTIALS OF ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS: Artificial Neuron Model. Noel Llopis. Generalized Delta Rule. Unit III SINGLE LAYER FEED FORWARD NEURAL NETWORKS : Introduction.2003. Hebbian Learning. Biological and Artificial Neuron Models.

2. Timothy J. 3.Sumathi. Pearson Education.  1. Reference Books 1. James A Freeman and Davis Skapura. A. 1997 12MT245 3D ANIMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To present concepts required to understand the steps and procedures that lead to the completion of a fully rendered 3 Dimensional computer animation. S.Sivanandam. Course Outcome: • In order to assess the student’s progress towards achieving the learning outcomes. Vijayalakshmi pai. Ross. 2004. 2001. Simon Haykin. N. TMH.S. 4. Unit IV ANIMATION BASICS: Introduction –Key framing –interpolations –parameter curve editing – dope sheet editing –forward kinematics –inverse kinematics –motion plans –shape deformations –camera animation –animating lights and surface properties –pose based animation. a number of assignments may be assigned periodically. Unit II MODELING BASICS: Introduction –polygonal modeling –splines and patches –coordinate systems –viewing windows – Geometric primitives –transformations –common modeling techniques –hierarchies –booleans and trims. Neural Networks Pearson Education. Unit I PREPRODUCTION: Introduction – Storyboarding – character and model design .   . S. Fuzzy logic. PHI Publication.A comprehensive foundation”.0”. The students will be able to do basic 3D animation and gain basic knowledge about advanced modeling and rendering techniques. Genetic algorithms: synthesis and applications”. 2006. McGraw-Hill Inc. Rajasekharan and G. Unit III RENDERING BASICS: The camera –Lights –Surface characteristics –shading algorithms – rendering algorithms –background images –Surface texture mapping –solid texture mapping – final rendering. S. Unit V RE -TOUCHING AND POSTPRODUCTION TECHNIQUES: Virtual sculpting –hair and fur –texturing polygons –more rendering algorithms –cloth dynamics – facial animationcompositing –Editing. “Neural Networks.sound design –technical tests –Production scheduling. “ Fuzzy Logic With Engineering Applications”. 2002. “Neural Networks. Deepa “Introduction to Neural Networks using MATLAB 6.N.

“Essential Computer Animation”. Norton & company. 2002. Unit I OVERVIEW OF INDIAN CONSTITUTION: Overview of the Indian Constitution. FirstEdition 2000. Legislative. “Understanding 3D animation using Maya”. Provision for amending the Constitution. 2003.Cinematographic Act 1952.W. Focal press . 12MT246 MEDIA LAWS AND ETHICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • This will give an overall idea about the Indian constitution . Self regulation and code of ethics. Digital signature. Course Outcome: • Students when studies the laws and ethics to be followed in media they will start applying it in their media works and this will make them a successful media professionals in the society. Functions of Executive. journals. Right to information and Official Secrets Act. Cyber Laws. The Press (Objectionable matters) Act 1957. John Vince. Springer UK . Springer Science & business Media. Autonomy and Prasar Bharati Act. Delivery of Books and News paper (Public Libraries) Act. Inc. Trade Mark Act and patents Act.  Text Books 1. Domain name registration issues Unit IV CODE AND ETHICS: Recommendations of Press Commission I and II. Judiciary. Defense of India Act. Press Council Act. “Principles of Three – Dimensional Computer animation”. 3rd edition.The media laws and ethics followed in newspapers. Powers and Privileges of parliament. Contempt of courts Act 1971 and contempt of Legislative. press ownership and monopolies. BRAI. Fundamental rights. Broadcasting policies. Copy right Act and IPR. Provisions for declaring Emergency. The News paper (Prices and Pages) Act 1956. Mac Bridge Report. John Edgar Park. Unit V   . 2. 2005. Unit III CIVIL AND CRIMINAL LAWS: Laws of Libel and defamation. 2. Duties of citizens. Michael O’Rourke. Reference Books 1. Martin W. piracy. Drugs and magic remedies Act. Marcia Kuperberg. W. censorship and control of the press. Broadcasts are highlighted. Act regarding to working journalists. Broadcasting Bill. “Guide To Computer Animation”. Directive principles of state policy. TRAI. Press council guide to Journalistic ethics. various committees of broadcasting. Right o information Act. Bowman. Cable TV Networks (Regulations) Act. Centre-State relations Unit II MEDIA LAWS IN INDIA: PRB Act 1867. Freedom of the Press and restrictions these upon.

2. 2003. Unaligned Transfers. Reference Books 1. Mass Communication Ethics. Operation Modes . Instruction Set Development. Case Studies in Ethical Dilemmas Text Books 1. Media Ethics. Technology. Background of ARM and ARM Architecture. 4. Law of the Press in India. 3. Basu. 2001. Vector Tables . Juveniles as News Sources. Default Memory Access Permissions. The Thumb-2 Instruction Set Architecture (ISA). Clifford G. Practice Hall of India. Media Ethics. Indian Press Laws. Instruction Descriptions. Issues Capes. 2. The Memory Map. Pearson. Indian Publishers. Course Outcome: • Students will be able to blends the best features from the 32-bit ARM architecture with the highly successful Thumb-2 instruction set design whilst adding several new capabilities. Memory System Features Overview. Exclusive   . 2004. Registers. Thomson Learning. Reset Sequence. Cortex-M3 Processor Applications Fundamentals. Stack Memory Operations. McGraw Hill. Operation Mode. Exceptions and Interrupts. Radha Krishna Murthi. Unit II: ASSEMBLY: Basics. Leslie. Invasion of privacy. Distributors. Cases and Moral Reasoning. Libel. Effects of Competition Situational Ethics . 2006.Christians. Several Useful Instructions in the Cortex-M3. Bit-Band Operations. Practice Hall of India. The Built-In Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller. Basu. Introduction to Indian constitution. The Instruction Set Interrupts and Exceptions Debugging Support. • To give students understanding of application development using 32 bit microprocessor. Definition of Ethics. Special Registers. The Bus Interface. Access Laws. Instruction List. Lee Wilking. 2003. Telephone recordings. 12MT247 ARM CORTEX ARCHITECTURE AND PROGRAMMING Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To give very good understanding of the 32 bit embedded processor and their requirements. Characteristics Summary.  JOURNALISTIC ETHICS: Gathering the news. Memory Access Attributes. Philip Patterson. Unit I: WHAT IS THE ARM CORTEX-M3 Processor. Memory Maps. Use of the word alleged Apparent authority. Defamation. 2004. Subpoenas and Shield Laws. Registers.

Interrupt Inputs and Pending Behavior.   . Using Interrupts. Invalid Returns Unit IV: CORTEX-M3 PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW: The Interface Between Assembly and C . Stacking. Double-Word Stack Alignment. The Pipeline. Debugging Components introduction. SVC Example: Use for Output Functions . Interrupt Enable and Clear Enable. Oxford University Press. Other Core Debugging Features. Interrupt/Exception Sequences. Typical Setup. Andrew N. Fault Exceptions. Newnes Edition. A Typical Development Flow . Producing Outputs. Dominic Symes. 2004. Chris Wright. "The principles of computer Hardware". Debugging Events. The First Step . Endian Mode. CoreSight Overview. Joseph Yiu. Working with Bit Field Extract and Table Branch. Trace Components: Instrumentation Trace Macrocell. Lockup Situations Unit V: THE MEMORY PROTECTION UNIT OVERVIEW:MPU Registers. A Detailed Block Diagram. Interrupt Latency. 3rd Edition. Definitions of Priority. 3rd Edition. Breakpoint in the Cortex-M3. Vector Fetches. Setting Up the MPU. Nested Interrupts. Reset Signals Unit III: EXCEPTION TYPES. Other Interfaces on the Cortex-M3. 12MT248 3D VIDEO & GRAPHICS Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the concepts of 3D Video development and streaming applications. Software Interrupts . Accessing Register Content in Debug . Elsevier. “The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex-M3". 2003. Debugging Features Overview. “ARM system developer's guide: designing and optimizing system software “. Nonbase Thread Enable. Using SVC. Trace Components: Data Watchpoint and Trace. 2. Using Data Memory. Trace Components: Trace Port Interface Unit. Tail-Chaining Interrupts. Faults Related to Interrupts. Vector Tables. NVIC Overview .  Accesses. Using Exclusive Access for Semaphores. Trace Components: Embedded Trace Macrocell. The SYSTICK Timer. Multiprocessor Communication. Example Procedures of Setting Up an Interrupt. Bus Interfaces on the CortexM3. More on the Exception Return Value. The Basic Interrupt Configuration. 2007. Debug Modes. Interrupt Pending and Clear Pending. Typical Connections. Software Interrupts. Reference Books 1. Using SVC with C. Sloss. Alan Clements. Running a System with Two Separate Stacks . Using Bit Band for Semaphores. Example with Exception Handlers. Unstacking. SVC and PendSV. Performance Considerations. Exception Exits. The Flash Patch and Breakpoint Unit. The SYSTICK Timer Power Management. Exception/Interrupt Handlers. Late Arrivals. The AHB Access Port. ROM Table Text Book 1. SelfReset Control. The External Private Peripheral Bus.

  Course Outcome: • To develop a 3D Video streaming applications. Autostereoscopic viewing. virtual view generation and 3D display. cyclopean image. binocular depth perception convergence. commercial displays based on LCD and PDP technologies.2D in conjunction with Metadata (2D+M). other longer term systems-multi viewing 3D systems. polarization. 3D Television (3DTV) Technology. Unit-I FUNDAMENTALS OF VISUAL SCIENCE: Stereo vision concepts-stereoscopy. mastering and distribution process. projections methods for presenting stereopairs. 3D4YOU.spatial compression.parallax. 3D media cluster.2010. Encoding and Transmission: Building the Transport Infrastructure for Commercial Services by Daniel Minoli. mastering and distribution process. 3D mastering. 3DTV display Technology. polarization. temporal multiplexing. Integral imaging/ holoscopic imaging.Audio Visual content search and retrieval in a Distributed P2P repository Text Book: 1. 3DTV Content Capture. transmission. Network Transport approaches. Parallax Concepts. 3D capture. Viewer physiological issues with 3D content Unit III BASIC 3DTV APPROACHES FOR CONTENT CAPTURE AND MASTERING: General capture. analytics. Reference Book: 1. Real3D. 2010. ISBN-9781439840665. holographic approaches. and Deployment: Rolling Out the Infrastructure for Next-Generation Entertainment by Daniel Minoli. color encoding.4 TECHNOLOGIES FOR IN-HOME DISPLAY OF CONTENT: Connecting the In-Home source to the display.lenticular lenses. occlusion and scene reconstruction. content acquisition. accommodation.commercial displays based on projection. 3D imaging. Systems. synchronization and colorimetrics. Multiuser 3D Television Display. Unit-2 APPLICATION OF VISUAL SCIENCE FUNDAMENTALS TO 3DTV:Common video treatment approaches. challenges and players in the 3TV Universe. MPEG standardization effects Unit. 3D video coding. other display technologies Unit-5 3DTV ADVOCACY: 3DC. HELIUM3D. parallax barriers. parallax barrier and lenticular lenses. mobile 3DTV.3D content creation. chromostereopsis.3DTV.ISBN: 0470649739 12MT249 DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY   . Theory of stereo reproduction. LCD 3DTV polarized display. volumetric displays/ hybrid hollgraphic.

Mastering Digital Photography and Imaging –– Publisher Sybex.File Formats – Converters.Working with Digital Camera – Picture Resolution .Types of artificial Lights used in photography .Photo Printers .  Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • The syllabus is focussed to orient the students on the basic photographic techniques and the professional equipments used in the media industry.Exposure Triangle Aperture. Unit II PHOTO COMPOSITION : Grammar of shooting a Good Picture . Unit III INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY : Constructing of DSLR camera Digital Image Sensing CCD & CMOS – Controls on the camera & on the lens . Course Outcome: • The students will understand various stages in the growth of photographic technology from analogue to digital and how to use today’s expertise for capturing images and manipulate them using editing software for different applications.Focal Length of different lenses . Equipments and Budget .Digital Storage Medium .Photo Documentary .Photo Quality Printing Paper & Types.Optical & gelatine Filters & the Usage – Different photographic Films used – Other accessories in photography. First edition.Types of Lenses & Usage .Creating Photography Website . Unit V PHOTOGRAPHY PROJECTS : Press Assignments .Social function – Environmental – Action – Aerial – Under water – Macro – Panoramic – Sports Wild Life . The students will also appreciate the ways to use photography for gainful employment & as a rewarding hobby.White Balance .Framing & Composition Rule of Third.Angle of View .Indoor/Outdoor. 2001   .Setup for Digital Imaging Editing for Windows and Macintosh platform .Connecting Images to website – Photo Scanners Scanning Techniques . Unit IV AREAS OF PHOTOGRAPHY : Portrait – Architecture – Product .Photo Essay – Building small & Corporate Studios . Shutter & film Speed (ISO). Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY: History and Development of Photography – Different types of Digital Cameras and their application .Fashion – Travel .Popular Photography Websites . Peter K Burian.Software used for processes of images and their merit . Depth of Field .Indoor & outdoor Lighting Techniques . Text Book 1.Design.How Printer works .USA.

Sidney F Ray. John H Edgecoe. Ninth Edition. Tom Grimm and Michele Grimm. Fourth Edition 3. Unit III MEDIA MARKETING: Media marketing . Knopf Publisher. The Basic Book of Photography.  Reference Books 1. The Manual of Photography (2000) by Focal Press. Understanding Digital Photo. UNIT IV RADIO & TV HOUSES: Structure of radio and television houses . and the forces shaping the communications revolution in media. production and broadcasting .Pay channels vs. free to air channels – Technology in use: Terrestrial. function and economic of electronic media .Major Indian Media Houses – Major heads of income and expenditure in media .Advertising in Media Industry Unit II TV & RADIO PROGRAMME MANAGEMENT: TV & Radio Programme management: Planning. 4. Satellite.Service conditions and General administration .R. its regulation. 12MT250 ELECTRONIC MEDIA MANAGEMENT Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • The course imparts knowledge on the structure of electronic media industry. economics & business. Alfred A. Unit I ELECTRONIC MEDIA: Structure. 2.Agencies of rating. product and audience profile –TRP/TAM . growth and regulations .. Text Books   . Thomson Delmar Learning 2003. Students will learn to apply the Audience Research findings to analyse the media and recommend strategic use of resources for effective product & brand promotion.Channel management: training and deployment of personnel. process and method of rating – Marketing a sponsored programme. Net & satellite radio. Course Outcome: • The students will be able to understand the multidisciplinary field of electronic media management and how media planning helps in efficient buying and selling air time.Market & Audience Survey: media. Ralph E Jacob. DTH & IPTV.Recruitment and contractual engagement of H. Joseph A Iippolito .Costing and budgeting of programme Commissioned and sponsored programmes. FM & AM Radio. Mobile casting & Webcasting.USA. The Photographer’s Handbook. Geo G Attridge. scheduling. its impact on the audience. 1999 by.Process of distribution of signals . UNIT V CABLE INDUSTRY: Cable Industry: Evolution.

channel differences .Technical monitoring . Prentice Hall India Reference Books 1.Cassette quality .Auto punch .The basic channel .Timbre . Promotion & Marketing for Broadcasting Cable of the web by Eastman.Noise reduction .Loudness .Tape speeds .Musical pitch .Phantom power .Reflection .Analog Recording devices and systems . Consumer Behavior by Leon G.TL .Full Range sound Reinforcement systems .  1.Output stage .Sensitivities of microphones .Basic PA systems .Choice of Equipment .Decibels .Multi track systems .Loudspeaker resonators Loudspeaker cables .STC .Balanced wiring .Important features of a mixer . Mac Graw Hills.Storage medium – Digital mixers – Digital audio workstation –Editing – Mixing . Course Outcome: • This course will enable the students to be creatively and technically aware of the Technologies and Production systems in the Audio Industry.Polar responses -Types of Microphones Production of the different polar responses .FOH .Reference voltages in audio signals-Metering .Inputs and connections.Electronic level control .MOH -   .Specific applications of microphones .Mastering – Audio Post production for Video.CD.Absorption – Refraction .Acoustic materials .Tape standards .ATR .Stereo listening-Stereo loudspeaker matching .Recording .The brain’s perception of sound .Professional and domestic standards .Aural monitoring .Dynamic processors .Signal processors .Methods of producing inter . Essentials of Management by Harold Koonz and Heinz Weihrich.Effect of Boundaries – The response of the ear .Microphone techniques for stereo Headphones for stereo monitoring.The velocity of sound waves Sound waves and obstacles . 2001 12MT251 AUDIO ENGINEERING AND PRODUCTION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • The students will be taught about Sound and Audio Engineering fundamentals and the techniques involved in Audio production. Unit III AUDIO ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS: Sound mixers .Editing .Punching .formats .Head and tape cleanliness . Unit I SOUND THEORY: Sound waves-Frequency .Basic Acoustics .Effect processors .Fletcher and Munson Curves .Output Transducers-Loudspeaker .Diffraction -Units used in sound .Transport controls – Head alignment . Unit IV DIGITAL AUDIO: Basic Principles – Analog vs Digital – Analog to Digital Converter – Digital to Analog Converter – Application of Digital Audio – Digital audio hardware . Unit II ANALOG AUDIO: Input Transducers .Stereo .Audio lines and Patch bays .RT-60 .Equalizers .Filters .Inverse Square Law .The fundamentals of magnetic recording .Talkback-Manual control of levels . Schiffman and Leslie Lazar Kanuk.Signal flow .Technology .Frequency ranges in music .Phase . Unit V BASICS OF LIVE SOUND ENGINEERING: Need for Sound Reinforcement .Amplitude .Routing .Wavelength .Basic Analog Mixing. Susantylen 2.Microphones .Diffraction .

“Master Handbook of Acoustics”. “Sound Engineering Explained”. Paul White.Ear safety . Sanctuary Publications.Safety . 2002. Focal Press. Michael Talbot-Smith. 2003. McGraw-Hill. F. 4. Text Book 1. 2nd Edition. “Analog Recording”.Outdoor Systems -Applications . David Simons. 2006.  Indoor systems .Mechanical safety .Electrical safety . 3rd Edition. Backbeat Books. 1995 2. Ken Pohlmann. 4th Edition. Frederick N Martin. 2003   . John Greer N Clark. 3.2001 5. “Principles of Digital Audio”. Reference Books 1.Alton Everest. “Basic Live Sound”. 9th Edition. Pai and Sons. 3rd edition. McGraw Hill Publishing.Fire safety. “Introduction to Audiology”.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.